Me-18 Marine Radar Equipment

..
-~
~
Z....J
~ .......,
.:.~
0« ~
~~~ -:J 1M
d
iO>
t-Z I I \..U
:
- U« l! ~
~
@§V§V W~ :J:E
zO
@~~ W 0::
t- ~
... ~
~c#v~
I en
-z
~C5'tIC5'tI
@@@
[~I
c:vc:vc:v
/
\ .
JMA-9933-SA/9932-SA
~," JMA-9923-7XA/9XA JMA-9922-6XA/9XA MARINE RADAR EQUIPMENT INSTRU9~ION MANUAL
.;..~;. ., ..
.J; ,L
, '\" - - 2
! Cautions for high volta9i]

High voltages from hundreds volts to tens of thousands volts are to be applied to the electronic
equipment such radio and radar devices. You do not face any danger during normal operation,
but sufficient cares are required for maintenance, inspection and adjustment of their internal
components. (Maintenance, check-up and adjustment of the inside of the equipment are
prohibited except by maintenance specialists.)
High voltages of tens of thousands volts are so dangerous as to bring an instantaneous death
from electric shock, but even voltages of hundred volts may sometimes lead to a death from
~ electric shock. To prevent such an accident, make it a rule to turn off the power switch, discharge
capacitors with a wire surely earthed on an end and make sure that internal parts are no longer
charged before you touch any parts inside these devices. At the time, wearing dry cotton gloves
ensures you further to prevent such danger. It is also a necessary caution to put one of your
hands in the pocket and not to use your both hands at the same time.
It is also important to select a stable foothold always to prevent additional injuries once you were
shocked by electricity. If you were injured from electric shock, disinfect the burn sufficiently and
get it taken care of promptly.
When finding a victim of electric shock, turn off the power source and earth the circuit
immediately. If it is impossible to turn off the circuit, move the victim away promptly using
insulators such as dry wood plate and cloth without touching the victim directly..
In case of electric shock, breathing may stop suddenly if current flows to the respiration center in
the brain. If the shock is not so strong, artificial respiration may recover breathing. When shocked
by electricity, the victim will come to look very bad with weak pulse or without beating, resulting in
unconsciousness and rigidity.
-i-
·~
I· First~id·;freatments I
"* First-aid treatments
As far as the victim of electric shock is not in dangerous condition, do not move him and practice
artificial respiration on him immediately. Once started, it should be continued rhythmically.
(1) Do not touch the victim confusedly as result of the accident, but rescuer may also get an
electric shock.
(2) Turn off the power source calmly and move the victim away quietly from the electric line.
(3) Call a physician or ambulance immediately or ask someone to call a doctor.
(4) Lay the victim on his back and loosen his necktie, clothes, belt, etc.
(5) a .Examine the victim's pulse ~

b .Examine his heartbeat bringing your ear close to his heart.
c .Examine his breathing bringing the back of your hand or your face close to his face.
d .Check the size of the pupils of his eyes.
(6) Open the victim's mouth and take out artificial teeth, cigarette or chewing gum if any. Keep
his mouth open, stretch his tongue and insert a towel or the like in his mouth to prevent the
tongue from suffocating. (If it is hard to open his mouth due to set teeth, open it with a
screwdriver and insert a towel in this mouth.)
(7) Then, wipe his mouth so that foaming mucus does not accumulate inside.
-ii-
' .. --0.. __ -
....
... _ J>,
f
...
4
'* When pulse is beating but breathing has stopped

* Mouth-to-mouth respiration
(1) Tilt the victim's head back as fat as this face looks back. (A pillow may be inserted his neck.)
(2) Push his jaw upward to open his throat wide (to spread his airway).
(3) Pinch the victim's nostrils and take a deep breath, block his mouth completely with yours and
blow into his mouth strongly. Take a deep breath again and blow into his mouth. Continue
this 10 to 15 times a minute (blocking his nostrils).
(4) Carefully watch that he has recovered his natural breathing and practicing artificial
respiration.
(5) If it is difficult to open the victim's mouth, insert a rubber or vinyl tube into one of his nostrils
and blow into it blocking the other nostril and his mouth completely.
(6) When the victim recovers consciousness, he may try to stand up suddenly, but let him lie
calmly and serve him with a cup of hot coffee or tea and keep him warm and quiet. (Never
give him alcoholic drinks.)
Method of mouth-to-mouth respiration by raising head

(1) Raise the victim's head. Support
his forehead with one of your
hand and his neck with the other
CD ~
hand.-<D
When you tilt his head backward,
~
the victim, in most cases, opens
his mouth to the air. This makes
mouth-to-mouth respiration easy.
® (2) Cover his mouth as widely as

possible with yours and press
your cheek against his nose--+®
Or, pinch his nostrils with your
fingers to prevent air from
leaking. --+Q)
®(,
(3) Blow into hi.
Blowing into mouth until his
---"'" breast swells. Blow into his mouth
Fig.1 Mouth-to-mouth respiration as quickly as possible for the first
10 times.
-iii-
Cj
,. ..
*When both pulse and breathing have stopped

* Cardiac massage
When no pulse has come not to be felt, his pupils are open and no heartbeat is heard,
cardiac arrest is supposed to have occurred and artificial respiration must be performed.
( 1 ) Place your both hands, one hand on the other, on the lower one third area of his
breastbone and compress his breast with your elbows applying your weight on his
breast so that it is dented about 2 cm (Repeat compressing his beast 50 times or so a
minute). (Cardiac massage)
( 2 ) In case of one rescuer,
Repeat cardiac massages about 15 times and blow into his mouth 2 times quickly, and
repeat his combination.
In case of two rescuers,
One person repeats cardiac massages 15 times while the other person blow into his
mouth once, and they shall repeat his combination. (Perform the cardiac massage and
mouth-to-mouth respiration)
( 3 ) Examine his pupils and his pulse sometimes. When the both have returned to normal,
stop the artificial respiration, serve him with a cup of hot coffee or tea and keep him
warm and calm while watching him carefully. Commit the victim to a medical specialist
depending on his condition. (Never give him alcoholic drinks.) To let him recover from
the mental shock, it is necessary for persons concerned to understand his situations
and the necessary treatments.
<Y \ ®
~-J~
@ ®
<e:':
Fig.2 Cardiac massage
~. --------
---
-iv-
~,. - -.- -- --
l
.'. 6-'
-. .
<PREFACE>
Thank you very much for purchasing the JRC marine radar equipment, JMA-9900 ARPA series,
This equipment is marine radar equipment designed to obtain safe operation of marine ship.
• Before operating the equipment, be sure to read this instruction manual

carefully for correct operation,
• Maintain this instruction manual so that operators can refer to it at anytime,
• Refer to this manual when any inconvenience or defects occur.
-v-
1
. ~
<Before Operation>
Pictorial Indication
Various pictorial indications are include in this manual and are shown on these equipment so that
you can operate them safely and correctly and prevent any danger to you and/or other persons
and any damage to your property during operation. Such indications and their meanings are as
follows.
Please understand them before you read this manual:
This indication is shown where any person is possibility to be in

danger of being killed or seriously injured, if this indication is
&DANGER
neglected and these equipment are not operated correctly.
This indication is shown where any person is supposed to be in
&WARNING danger of being killed or seriously injured of this indication is
This indication is shown where any person is supposed to be injured
or any property damage is supposed to occur if this indication is
&CAUTION
Examples of Pictorial Indication
~
The 1:J. make represents CAUTION (inclUding DANGER and
WARNING).
Electric
Shock Detailed contents of CAUTION ("Electric Shock" in the example
on the left.) is shown in the mark.
The 0 make represents prohibition.
_(\1.. G
Prohibited Prohibition
Detailed contents of the prohibited action ("Disassembling
Prohibited" in the example on the left.) is shown in the mark.
C
Disconnect
The power
o
Instruction
The • make represents instruction.
Detailed contents of the instruction ("Disconnect the power
plug" in the example on the left.) is shown in the mark.
plug
Warning Label
This is a warning label on the top cover of the equipment.
Do not try to remove, break or modify the label
-vi-
.. - -'.... - 8
{
<Cautions to be Used during Operation>
~DANGER
(S) Do not remove the conservation cover of a high voltage terminal
part.
There is danger you touch the high voltage part. and to get shocked by.
(S) Since the scanner radiator rotates, do not approach it.

The scanner may start rotating suddenly, and consequently any person may be
struck and be injured. We recommend you to install the scanner radiator on the
roof of the wheel house, flying bridge, trest/e, radar mast or any other high position
so that no person can approach it. When servicing the scanner, set the scanner
safety switch to the "OFF" position.
~
-vii-
9
·..
~ WARNING
@ Do not touch the insides of the scanner, transmitter-receiver and
display unit.
Touching any high voltage area, you will get an electric shock. For maintenance,
inspection and adjustment of internal parts of these equipment, consult with our
sales office or distributor in your district.
~
SCANNER RADIATION HAZARD
Never look up the antenna from which radiation is being output from a distance
less than the following
Injury may result from exposure to radiation produced by the antenna (particularly
effects to the eyes) at a distance from the central front face of the antenna less
than:
0.6 meter for NKE-1087/1089 (Radiation power density of 10W/m2 )
1.1 meter for NKE-1 079/1 075A (Radiation power density of 10W/m 2 )
21 centimeter for NKE-1 079/1 075A (Radiation power density of 100W/m 2 )
o Install the scanner at any place higher than any person.

If being exposed directly to electric wave at close range, you may suffer adverse
influence.
o When approaching the scanner for maintenance or inspection, set

the power switch of the display unit to the "OFF" or "STBY" position.
If being exposed directly to electric wave to close range, you may suffer adverse
influence.
c.
-viii-
.. - - -10
~ CAUTION
o Use these radar only as assisting devices for navigation. Also, the
officer should make the final decision for maneuvering by himself.
o Use ARPA only as assisting devices for navigation. Also, the officer
should make the final decision for maneuvering by himself.
ARPA's information such as vector, target value data, alarm, etc. May contain
some errors. Also, targets which cannot be detected with these radar cannot be
tracked at their acquisition points.
o
In the case that either mark shown in following figure is on the
expired TR-tube, Radioisotopes are in the TR-tube.
Disposal of TR-tube with these marks must be done in accordance with the laws
and regulations of the pertaining country.
Radiation from TR-tube has no effect on the human body.
Don't take apart TR-tube.
6 •• 6••
6 a
-ix-
. ~~
...
EQUIPMENT APPEARANCE
Scanner Unit Type NKE·1079 (12 Feet)
Transmitter-receiver Unit Type NTG·3037A
-x-
I
'(
~
Q)
Q)
LL
-
N
"r'"
<C
'",...0
"r'"
W
•
~
Z ·x
I
I
Q)
C.
..
~
·c
::J
...
Q)
r::::
r::::
CO
u
en
~,. .. ., .
13
Scanner Unit Type NKE-1089-7 (7 Feet)
Scanner Unit Type NKE-1089-9 (9 Feet)
Transmitter-receiver Unit Type NTG-3028
-xii-
-Q)
Q) -Q)
Q)
- -
LL LL
CD en
CD en
.....• .....•
CO CO
Q Q
..... .....
W
• W
I
~ ~ ..!.
Z Z 'x
Q) Q) I
Q. Q.
~ ~
~ ~
C C
...
:;)
Q)
:;)
...
Q)
C C
C c
m ca
0 0
tn tn
t
•
•
.<
'a
CD
Z
o
c
b
en
w
eCDn
-
1:
&r
:::J
Do
5'
cc
.<
'a
CD
-
... - ... . 16
Monitor Unit Type NWZ·158T (Desktop Type) (Option)
Control Unit Type NDC·1279T (Desktop Type) (Option)
Keyboard Unit Type NCE·7721T (Desktop Type) (Option)

Display Unit Type NCE-4263 (Desktop Type) (Option)
-xv-
....
17
CONTENTS
PREFACE v
1:SE!1f()rE! C:>~E!rClti()r1 vi
Cautions to be Used during Operation vii
EQUIPMENT APPEARA.NCE x
~L.<:)~~AR'W' ~
1. GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION

1.1 FUNCTIONS .......•..............................................................•................ 1·1
1.2FEA.TURES 1-3
1.3CONFIGURATION 1-5
1.4 EXTERIOR ORA.WlNG .............................................•....•................... 1-7
1.5GENERA.L SYSTEM DIAGRA.M 1-20
1.6 COLLISION AVOIDANCE ....................................................•.......... 1-27
2. NAME AND FUNCTION OF CONTROL PANEL

SWITCHES AND FUNCTION OF
SOFTWARE BUTTONS
• NAME AND FUNCTION OF CONTROL PANEL SWITCHES 2-1
• FUNCTION OF SOFTWARE BUTTONS 2-6
- xvii -
1~
":' .. -.
3. BASIC OPERAliON
3.1 FLOW OF OPERA.TION 3-1
• Power ON and Start the System 3-2
• Observe and Adjust Video 34
• Tuning Operations 3·7
• Acquire and Measurement Data 3-8
• End the Operation and Stop the System 3-8
3.2 MENU COPOSITION 3-9
3.3 PREPARA.TION 3·12
• Tuning[TUNE] 3·12
• Sensitivity Control [GAIN] 3-12
• Display Brilliance Control 3-13
• Contrast Control [BRILL VIDEO] 3-13
• Sea Clutter Suppression [RAIN] 3-14
• Brilliance Control ........................................................•................3-14
• Day/Night Mode Selection [DAYINIGHT] 3-22
• Color Setting [COLOR] 3-22
3.4 BASIC OPERA.TIONS 3-34
• Move Cross Cursor Mark [+] by Trackball 3-34
• Methods for Setting Menu Items with the Trackball 3-35
• Use EBLs(Electronic Bearing Lines) 341
• Set Floating EBl .............................••.......•...................................343
• Set Floating EBl 345
• Select Range [RA.NGE] 347
• Set Maximum Range 347
• Select Pulse length ..................................................................•.348
• Select Bearing Display Mode [AZI MODE] 348
• Cancel Ship's Heading Line [HL OFF] 3-49
• Cancel All Display Items Except Radar Echo, VRM, EBL, HL,
RR, and Cross Cursor Mark [+] [DATAOFF] 349
• Display PI (Parallel Index Lines) [PI] 3-50
• Move Own Ship's Display Position [OFF CENTER] 3-53
• Display Other Ship's Trails [TRAILS] 3-54
• Display Own Ship's Tracks and Own Symbols [OWN SHIP] .3-55
• Marking [MARK] 3-58
• Display Range Rings [RA.NGE RINGS] 3-59
- xviii -
19"
• Display Variable Range Markers [VRM1NRM2] 3-59

• Set Guard Zone [GUARD ZONE] 3-61
• Reset Alarm Buzzer [ALARM ACK] 3-63
• Set Alarm Sound Level 3-63
• FUNCTION 3-65
• Expa.nd Targe'ls 3-66
• Display Processed Videos 3-67
• Reduce Radar Interference 3-68
• Personal Information 3-69
• Display of Navigational Information 3-72
• Function of USER Switch I OPTION Switch 3-88
• Operation of Performance Monitor 3-89
• EBl Maneuvering 3-95
4. MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING

• Measurement by Trackball 4-1
• Measurement by Range Rings 4-2
• Measurement by EBLs and VRMs 4-2
• Measurement by between Two Optional Poin'ls 4-4
- xix-
'l.U
5. OPERATION OF ARPA
Using ARPA ~ 5-1
5.1 INITIAL SEITING ................................................................•.............. 5-2
• Setting Collision Decision Criteria : SAFE LIMIT 5-2
• Automatic Setting Mode (System Start) 5-4
• Setting Range Scale : RANGE SCALE 5-4
• Setting Own Ship's Speed 5-5
5.2 DISPLAY MODE SEITING 5-7
11• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• Setting Motion Display Mode [TM/RM] 5-7

• Setting Bearing Display Mode [AZI MODE] 5-7
5.3 TARGET ID No. DISPLAY ......................................................•.......... 5-8
5.4 TARGET ACQUISITION 5·9
• Automatic Acquisition [AUTO] 5-11
• Manual Acquisition [MANUAL] 5-12
• Use of Automatic and Manual
Acquisition Modes [ACQ AUTO] [ACQ MANUAL] 5-12
5.5 ARPA DATA DISPLAY ...................•.......•.........................................5-13
• Display of Vectors 5-13
• Display of Past Positions [PAST POSN] 5-16
5.6 DATA DISPLAY 5-18
• Types of Data Display 5-18
• Method of Displaying Target Data [TGT DATA] ..~ 5-19
• Cancellation of Displaying Target Data [TGT DATA] 5-19
5.7 ALARM DISPLAY 5-20
• Dangerous Target Alann: CPAlTCPA 5-20
• Guard Zone Alann [GUARD ZONE] 5-21
• Lost Target Alann [LOST TARGET] 5-22
• System Function Alann [ARPA (DATA)] 5-23
• Gyro Set Alann [SET GYRO] 5-23
5.8 TRIAL MANEUVERING 5-24
• Trial Maneuvering in the True Vector Mode 5-24
• Trial Maneuvering in the Relative Vector Mode 5-25
• Using the TRIAL Function 5-26
5.9 DELETING UNWANTED TARGETS 5-27
• Deleting Targe'ts 5-27
5.10 ARPA SEITING 5-29
• Simulation 5-30
- xx-
'~21
• Gate Size 5-32

• Test Video 5-34
6. TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES ON DISPLAY

• Radar Wave with the Horizon 6-1
• Strength of Reflection from the Target 6-3
• Sea Clutters 6-3
• False Echoes 6-3
• Display of Radar Transponder (SART) 6-6
7. MAINTENANCE
7.1 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE 7-1
7.2 MAINTENANCE ON EACH UNIT 7-2
• Scanner NKE-1079/1 075A11 089/1 087 7-2
• Transmitter-receiver Unit NTG-3037Al3028 7-4
• Display Unit NCD-4263 7-5
• Coaxial Cable (JMA-9933-5A) 7-5
• Wave Guide (JMA-9923-7XA19XA) 7-6
8. COUNTERMEASURES FOR
TORUBLE AND ADJUSTMENT
8.1 FUNCTION CHECK 8-1
• Function Check on Test Menu 8-2
• List of Alarms and other Indications 8-14
8.2 TROUBLESHOOTING 8-17

8.3 COUNTERMEASURES TO TROUBLE 8-18
8.4 REPLACEMNT OF MAJOR PARTS 8-24
• Replacement of PARTS Periodically 8-26
• Replacement of Magnetron (V1N201 ) 8·26
• Replacement of the Liquid-Crystal Monitor 8-32
- xxi -
...~ ..... 22
8.5 ADJ USTMENT 8-33
• Tuning Adjustment 8-34
• Bearing Adjustment 8-35
• Range Adjustment 8-36
• Antenna Height Adjustment 8-37
• Vector Consmnt 8-38
• Using Sector Blank function 8-39
• Quantization Level 8-42
• Adjustment of NSK Unit to Gyro Compass and Log 8-44
• Main Bang Suppression Adjustment 8-46
8.6 SEITING 8-48

• True Bearing Setting ..................................................•................8-48
• Ship Speed Setting 8-49
• Navigation Equipment Setting 8-51
• Current Correction (SETJDRlFT) Setting 8-52
• TimeJDay Display Setting ......•..................................•.................8-54.
• Adjustment of Perfonnance Monitor (NJU-63/64) 8-56
• Adjustment of Inter switch 8-58
9. AFTER-8ALES SERVICE
• When you Request for Repair 9·1
• Recommended Maintenance 9-1
• Radar Failure Check List .......................•...................................... 9-2
10. DISPOSAL
10.1 DISPOSAL OF THE UNIT 10·1
10.2 DISPOSAL OF USED BAITERIES 10·1
10.3 DISPOSAL OF USED MAGNETRON 10·1
10.4 DISPOSAL OF TR-TUBE 10-2
- xxii-
. ~ ~./, ..
23
"
~
11. SPECIFICATION
11.1 JMA-9933-8A TYPE RADAR 11-1
11.2 JMA-9932-8A TYPE RADAR 11-2
11.3 JMA-9923-7XA19XA TYPE RADAR 11-3
11.4 JMA-9922-6XA19XA TYPE RADAR 11-4
11.5 SCANNER (NKE-1 079) 11·5
11.6 SCANNER (NKE.1075A) 11-6
11.7 SCANNER (NKE-1089-7/9) 11-7
11.8 SCANNER (NKE-1087-6/9) 11-8
11.9 TRANSMITIER·RECEIVER UNIT(NTG-3037A) 11-9
11.10 TRANSMITIER·RECEIVER UNIT (NTG-3028) 11-10
11.11 DISPLAY UNIT (NCD-4263) 11-11
11.12ARPA 11-13
11.13 PERFORMANCE MONITOR (NJU-63) 11-14
11.10 PERFORMANCE MONITOR (NJU-64) 11-14
APPENDIX
Radar System Composition A-1
Radar System Circuit Block A-3
INTERSWITCH (NQE-3141) OPERATION MANUAL A-8
JMA-9900 series Radar AIS OPERATION MANUAL A-22
Fig.101 Block Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9933-5A andJMA-9923-7XN9XA

Fig.102 BlockDiagram of Radar, Type JMA-9932-5Aand JMA-9922-6XA19XA
Fig.103 Terminal Board Connection Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9933-5A
(Self standing typeAC 2201230V 3<p)
(Self standing typeAC 220/230VAC 100/11OV 1q»
(Desk toptypeAC 220/230V 3<p)
(Desk toptypeAC 220/230VAC1 00111 OV 1q»
(Self standing typeAC 2201230V AC 100/110V 1q»
(Desk toptype AC 220/230V 3<p)
(Desk toptypeAC 2201230V AC 100111 OV 1q»
Fig.111 Terminal Board Connection Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9923-7/9XA
- xxiii-
. -- .. 2~
Fig.112 Terminal Board Connection Diagram of Radar, TypeJMA-9923-7/9XA
(Self standing typeAC 22012'YJVAC 1OO/110V 1<p)
(Desk top typeAC 2201230V 3<p)
(Desk top typeAC 220/2301 V AC1 00/11 OV 1<p)
Fig.115 Terminal Board Connection Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9922-619XA
(Self standing typeAC 22012'YJV 3<p)
Fig.116 Terminal Board Connection Diagram of Radar, Type, Type JMA-9922-6/9XA
(Self standing typeAC 220/2'YJV AC 100/110V 1<p)
Fig.117 Terminal Board Connection Diagram of Radar, TypeJMA-9922-619XA
(Desk top typeAC 2201230V 3<p)
Fig.118 Terminal BoardConnection Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9922-619XA
(Desk toptype AC 2201230V AC 100/11 OV 1<p)
Fig.119 Primary PowerSupply Block Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9933-SA
Fig.120 Primary PowerSupply Block Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9932-sA
Fig.121 Primary PowerSupply Block Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9923-7XAI9XA
Fig.122 Primary PowerSupply Block Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9922-6XA19XA
Fig.123 Internal Connection Diagram of Scanner Unit, Type NKE-1079
Fig.124 Internal Connection Diagram of Scanner Unit, TypeNKE-1 07~
Fig.125 Internal Connection Diagram of Scanner Unit, Type NKE-1075A(1 00/11 OV AC,1-phase)
Fig.126 Internal Connection Diagram of Scanner Unit, TypeNKE-107SA(2201230VAC,3-phase)
Fig.127 Internal Connection Diagram of Scanner Unit, Type NKE-107SA (2201230V AC,1-phase)
Fig.128 Internal Connection Diagram of Scanner Unit, TypeNKE-1089-7/9 (1-phase)
Fig.129 Internal Connection Diagram of Scanner Unit, Type NKE-1089-7/9 (3-phase)
Fig.130 Internal Connection Diagram of Scanner Unit, TypeNKE-1087-619 (1-phase)
Fig.131 Internal Connection Diagram of Scanner Unit, TypeNKE-1087-619 (3-phase)
Fig.132 Internal Connection Diagram of Transmitter-receiver Unit, Type NTG-3037A
Fig.133 Intemal Connection Diagram of Transmitter-receiver Unit, Type NTG-3028
FIg.134 Internal Connection Diagram of Display Unit, Type NCD4263
Fig.135 Internal Connection Diagram of LCD Monitor of Display Unit, Type NCD4263
Fig.136 Block Diagram of Display Unit, Type NCD-4263
Fig.137 List of NSKand LOGSelect Switches of Display Unit, Type NCD-4263
Fig.138 Setting Table of Speed LOG Select Switches of Display Unit, Type NCD4263
Fig.139 Setting Table Gyro compass and Gyro Switches of Display Unit, Type NCD4263
FIg.140 Terminal Board Connection Diagram of2-unit Interswitch system, Type NQE-3141-2
Fig.141 Terminal Board Connection Diagram of3-unit Interswitch system, Type NQE-3141-4
Fig.142 Internal Connection Diagram of Interswitch, Type NQE-3141-2
Fig.143 Internal Connection Diagram of Interswitch, Type NQE-3141-4
- xxiv-
1,5
GLOSSARY
This section describes the main terms used for this equipment and general related maritime terms.
ARPA: HOG(Heading):
Automatic Radar Plotting Aid. Own ship's heading bearing.
AZI MODE (Azimuth Stabilization MODE): The display ranges from 000.0 to 359.9 degrees
Bering display mode as scanned clockwise.
BCR (Bow Cross Range): HL (Heading Line):

Bow cross range Ship's heading line.
BCT (Bow Cross Time): H UP (Head-Up):

Bow cross time Own ship's heading line is always pointed to the
BRG (Bearing): top center of the radar display.
Bearing IMO:
CPA (Closest Point of Approach): International Maritime Organization
The closest point of approach from own ship, Inter Switch(ISW):

which can be set by the observer. Inter-switch function
COG (Course Over The Ground): Equipment that switches connection of two or
Course relative to the ground. more Display unit and two or more Scanner.
C UP (Course-Up): IR:
Own ship's course is pointed to the top center Interference Rejector
of he radar display. MMSI:

DRIFT: Maritime Mobile Service Identity
Distance covered solely due to current, tidal MARK:

stream and surface drift. Use as a temporary marker ( "0" mark)
EBL (Electronic Bearing Line): NM (Nautical Mile):

An electronic bearing line originated from 1NM =1852m
own ship's position. MSK (North Stabilization Kit):
Floating EBL: True bearing unit
Arbitrary point is EBL at the center. N UP (North-Up)

GND STAB (Ground Stabilization): The north is always pointed to the top center of
Stabilization relative to the ground. the radar display.
GPS (Global Positioning System): OWN TRACK:

The position of a GPS receiver can be Display function of own ship's track
determined by the signals from GPS satellites
Guard Zone:
Alarm ring against intrusion
-xxv-
cz. ~\
.-
. . --
Performance Monitor (PM): TCPA (Time to Closest of Approach):
An additional unit to monitor the transmitted power The time to approach the closest point from
and the receiving sensitivity of radar equipment. own ship.
PI: TM (True Motion):
Parallel Index Line True motion presentation
PIN (Personal Identification Code): A presentation in which own ship and any
Information set by the user (personal code) other target move depending on their
PROC (Process): individual movements.
Target processing function TRAILS:
RAIN (Anti-clutter rain): Function of displaying tracks of other ships.
Rain/Snow clutter suppression. TRIAL (Trial Maneuver):
Relative vector: Trial maneuvering
A target's movement predicted relative to own ship. True Vector:
RR (Range Rings): A target's true movement predicted as the
Fixed range ring result of entering own ship's direction and
RM (Relative Motion): speed.
Relative motion presentation VRM (Variable Range Marker):
Own ship's position is fixed and other targets move Variable range marker
relative to own ship. WATER (Water Stabilization):
SIX. Band: Stabilization relative to the water
Radio frequency bands
S: 3GHz band, X: 9GHz band
SCANNER:
Antenna
SEA (Anti-clutter sea):
Sea clutter suppression
SET:
The resultant direction towards which current, tidal
stream and surface drift flow.
SOG (Speed Over Ground):
Speed relative to the ground.
STAB (Stabilization):
Stabilization
-xxvi-
~1.
.. ~
SECTION1
GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT
COMPOITION
111111111111
11111111
1.1 FUNCTION 1·1

1.2 FEATURES 1-3
1.3 CONFIGURATION 1-5
1.4 EXTERIORDRAWING 1·7
1.5 GENERAL SYSTEM DIAGRAM 1·20
1.6 COLLISION AVOIDANCE 1·27
Problems of Collision Avoidance In Navigation••..••••..••••... 1-27
MarlneAccldents and Collisions 1·27
Basic Concept of Collision Avoidance.••....••....•..•........••..... 1·28
Relative Vector and True Vector 1·28
Radar and Collision Avoidance...............••.•.......••......•......... 1·29
.:_t?> .
-~
1. 1 FUNCTION
This equipment is high-performance radar equipment consisting of a scanner unit, a
transmitter-recover unit and a 23.1-inch color raster-scan LCD display unit
This radar complies with the current performance standards of the IMO.
• Functions of This System
The JMA-9900 ARPA series is a color radar system designed to comply with the
international standards of the IMO. The main functions include; sea clutter and
rein/snow clutter suppression, sensitivity adjustment, interference reflector, bearing and
range measurement using a trackball, fixed/variable range makers, and electronic
bearing line, and ARPA functions (automatic/manual target acquisition and tracking,
vector and trail displays, alarm displays and trial maneuvering).
In addition, the equipment has the functions of color display setting (4 views), own track
display, NAV line and marker displays, TM (True Motion) presentation, Self-diagnostic
facilities, and radar.
In addition, a radar switching function (InterSwitch) can be added to switch between two,
four or eight radar units. However, in order to this function for four or eight units, an
external switching box is necessary.
• ARPA Functions
The ARPA functions that the JMA-9900 series incorporates will be outlined below.
[ I ] First Stage : Target Detection from Radar Information

This work corresponds to plotting targets by band on the radar display. Assume that a
ship is approaching the own ship. You can catch the ship on the radar. Signals from the
ship are processed with the data processor and are transferred to the computer as
signals of bearing and arrange related to the own ship. In this stage, the system has the
functions to quantization of radar information, to reject noises, to eliminate any
information other than ship information and to transfer necessary position data of ships
to the computer.
[ n] Second Stage : Target Tracking

Targets are plotted at intervals of 3 to 6 minutes with the radar, but tracking on this
system is to plot them electrically at intervals of fixed times. This means to compare
target position data to be detected every moment with those detected previously
changes of position data of the target.
[m] Third Stage: Judgment of Existence of Ship in Danger of Collision

In this stage, the system calculates speed and courses of a target ship from
ever-changing position data of the target ship obtained in the previous stage so as to
judge existence of any danger of collision. After the calculation, the system can easily
calculate the Closest Point of Approach (CPA) to the own ship and the time required to
reach the CPA (TCPA = Time to CPA). Both the CPA and the TCPA are compared with
the preset values previously set previously set according to the situations of the own
ship so as to judge existence of any danger of collision.
1-1
....................................'.-..
[IV] Fourth Stage: Indication
-29
"
The above information must be informed to the officer maneuvering the own ship. A
variety of indicating methods are available including LCD display and numerical
indicator, and various data are available.
This system indicates unprocessed video, vectors (to be selected from true vector and
relative vector) of other ships and identification makes of danger ship or safe ship for
these ships on the usual radarscope. When the target ship is danger one, the system
will sound an alarm and turns on the alarm lamp to alert the officer.
•
1-2
~\)
f!' •
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
1. 2 FEATURES
Target Detection by Latest Signal Processing Technology
The system employs the latest adaptive clutter suppression technology to eliminate
undesired clutter from the radar video signals that are obtained form the receiver with a wide
dynamic range, thus improving the target detection.
Key Arrangement for Higher Operability
The basic and main functions of the radar can be operated with the minimum necessary
keys, ensuring quick action even in case of emergency. Other various useful functions are
also available by the use of the soft button on and screen menu.
In the case that two or more operators operate the radar equipment, each operator can
register the operating conditions that are most favorable to him/her and can be recalled and
set momentarily (Personal code function is built-in).
Advanced Technology Based ARPA Functions Provided as Standard
The ARPA target acquisition and tracking performance is enhanced by the use of the most
advanced radar processing and tracking technologies. ensuring stable operation in target
tracking under clutter.
• Acquisition and tracking of 50 targets
• Hazardous conditions are represented by shapes and colors of symbols as well as sounds
• Trial maneuvering functions provided
• Simultaneous indication of other ships' data
Improved Day/Night Mode
Two types of background colors are available in each Day/Night mode (total 4 background
colors). Each background color can be reproduced to be suited for the user's operating
environment by simple key operation. The radar echoes and a variety of graphics can also
be represented in different colors, ensuring easy-to-see displays.
Various Functions
• TRAILS (Other ship's track display)

• NAVlines
• TM (True Motion display)
• Head-up/North-up/Course-up display
• Own ship's track display
• Guard Zone function
1-3
.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
. 31 . ' .
Low Power Consumption
The radiator structure making the most of wind power contributes to the substantial
reduction in power consumption of the S band scanner unit
Self-diagnostic Program Incorporated
The Self-diagnostic program always monitors all the functions of the system. If any function
deteriorates, an alarm message will appear on the radar display and an alarm sounds at the
same time.
Even when the system is operating, the functionality test can be carried out. (except on
some functions)
Performance Monitor
The radar performance (transmitted output power and receiving sensitivity) can appear on
the radar display.
Easy InterSwitch Operation (Option)
By additionally installing an InterSwitch PC board, up to 3-units of the JMA-9900 series

radar equipment can be combined and switched over by simple operation.
1-4
32
A~· •••••• • •• ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
1. 3 CONFIGURATION
Scanners and Transmitted Output Powers
Radar Model Transmitted Output Power Band
JMA-9933-SA 12ft slot antenna 30kW S
JMA-9932-SA 12ft slot antenna 30kW S
JMA-9923-7XA 7ft slot antenna 25kW X
Radar Configuration and Ship's Mains

Radar Model Scanner Unit Performance Transmitter- Display Ship's Mains
Monitor Receiver Unit Unit
JMA-9933-SA NKE-1079 (*) NTG·3037A

NJU~3
220/230V AC. 50/60Hz. 3 ¢
JMA-9932-SA NKE-1075A (*)
100/110/220/230V AC
JMA-9923-7XA NKE-1089-7 (*) NCD-4263
NTG-3028 SO/60Hz. 1 ¢
JMA-9923-9XA NKE-1089-9 (*)
NJU-64 (*1)
JMA-9922~XA NKE-1 087-6 (*)
JMA-9922-9XA NKE-1087-9 (*)
(*1) JMA-9933-SA AC220/230V. 50/60Hz. 1 ¢ • • . MED only
1-5
· ~ 33
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
2. The scanner unit can be equipped with a deicing heater as an option marked with (*),
instead of which "-0" shall be suffixed to the type name.
3. When using the ship's mains of 440V AC as the radar power source, a step-down
transformer shall be used.
4. The name plates for the radar components indicate as follows:
Scanner Unit: SCANNER UNIT

Transmitter-receiver Unit: TRANSMITIER-RECEIVER UNIT
Display Unit: DISPLAY UNIT
1-6
~~
.. -
~
.
1. 4 EXTERIOR DRAWING
Fig.1.1 EXTRIOR DRAWING OF SCANNER UNIT, TYPE NKE-1079
Fig.1.2 EXTRIOR DRAWING OF SCANNER UNIT, TYPE NKE-1075A
Fig.1.3 EXTRIOR DRAWING OF SCANNER UNIT, TYPE NKE-1089-7
Fig.1.7 EXTRIOR DRAWING OF TRANSMITTER-RECEIVER UNIT, TYPE NTG-3037A
Fig.1.8 EXTRIOR DRAWING OF TRANSMITTER-RECEIVER UNIT, TYPE NTG-3028
Fig.1.9 EXTRIOR DRAWING OF DISPLAY UNIT, TYPE NCD-4263

(SELF-8ANDING TYPE)
Fig.1.10 EXTRIOR DRAWING OF MONITOR UNIT, TYPE NWZ-158T

(DESKTOP TYPE) (OPTION)
Fig.1.11 EXTRIOR DRAWING OF CONTROL UNIT, TYPE NDC-1279T

Fig.1.12 EXTRIOR DRAWING OF KEYBOARD UNIT, TYPE NCE-7721T

1-7
30
8-;14 MOUNTING BOLTS M12
lftlli7KM· M12
EARTH SOLT : M12 POS I T ION/(50)

]J- J.i1~M-· (M man
FORWAR~
ili (~ U H~ I':. U
MOUNTING DIMENSIONS
(0
M-lt
JlHt'.t lill\l
......
&
3916 (SWI/(lCIRClH4000)
--~-----='-'-"-- (Jd~-'JJG400o)
J1
~.
~I
L-=-tl~ ----
:-"
..... ~
<;t
~~
~ ~ gOa CABLE INLET
~
11-4w-1 I IN..E$ nnml~ 'JII'rIFIRl
~ 0
30 a '1 7JlI15:;1t-:
DllENSllXI iftClFIBl 1Q.ERAI(E
o 10 30 zl
WUNTI~
Dlt.£NSIQNS
; 0.5 ~~
~~
COAX I AL CABLE [NLET (MIl 30 TO 120 z 1.5
".IiMO (MIl 120 10 ~8 z 2.5 ; I
§~
<MIl 400 TO 10011 Z 4 ; 2
(MIl 10110 TO 2000 z 6 MASS APPROX. 142kg
; 3
<MIl 2000 10 3000 '" 8 COLOR ARRAY ~ill_
-~
.:-t~ " 1Il 8f !Hl
~--,---,PE=D~EST AL GRAY
~~ Ill: 9 l'I-lIlvlli lIIII<J"I'lIl':' Un i L mm

301l(""f ±,
"tic;') 30M:t. 120UT ±1.5 ±0.5
120y-;r ±2.5 ±1 U MJ 142kg
'"0 400IJT
400m:t 10001tf'F ±4 ±2 te IDJ/Il B
~" 'ooomA 2oaO~T ±6 ±3 PIll B<te
~•
2000", 3000btT i8
!Illl'l mm
.....
C)
~ CJ,:)
O'f
,
,
,
FORWAR~
ili
MOUNTING DIMENSIONS
IIHt"it lUll
3916 (SWIMJ CIOCIH4000)
....,
I
co -I I
~- r-,
!------..---
~
~ P-- --- :
(T)
00
~
(\/
j i (!J
L ~ ! ~ __ j '<t
~
30a CABLE INLET

30a 'l-111.15~t-:
'II'" nT1RlII'' ' .....,.,'"
DIIIJ6HIl Sl'ECIFIED TllBWI:E
om :JO ,. 1
~NTING
DI"-ENSIOtIS I~ Il'~~~'ll
320
ll'IER 3D m 120 ,. 1.5 t 0.5
(666)
ll'IER 120 m 400 ,. 2.5 t 1
(1086)
ll'IER 4110 m 1000 ,. 4 t 2
ll'IER 1000 m 2000 ,. 6
t 3 MASS APPROX. 165kg
ll'IER2000 m:JOOo ,.0
COLOR ARRAY WHITE
PEDESTAL GRAY
I!t ~.v. IIlIil~tiI.'11li Unit mm
30~lU
'"
30tl1'
120~T
±1
±1.5 ±0.5
120~t 400l;,l"F ±2.5 "1 U ill 165kg
±4 ±2
400~lU 1000011'
10QOMU 2000011' ±6 ±3
~ &I!I8l e
2000NU 3000011' ±8 Hill B(~
tl!li'l mm
- - - - -I - - . -
0(\J~
[ I II '"
II
- Ij i ,0
W.
MOUNTING DIMENSIONS
IlNltlilll
:n
~.
...... .....
t5 ~
CI)~ -
'<t
~~ -.
::t~ ~/
~o i
i
)
i
i
::0::0 i,._.. _
~~
..... :b ± 1 I l~- :~ ~I
.."""I ~ ±
±
1,5
2.5
1
,
a5
, ~ 458
(65' ... 1
"""I~ ± • , 2
~G)
± I
± 8 ' 3
rno .*~g. MASS APPROX. 51 kg

::t" It II II.Y
301lfF *1
OIll~IlI.1'lli
COLOR WHITE
~•
%0.5
30fail 1201lfF .1.5 Un It mm
120Ut 400Q!f .2.5 .1
.4 .2
..... 400Ut
1000al
10001lfF
2000Q!f *6 U f! 51k1
()
Q) (il)"'-1A1.15/r.1I~~imlu.
2000"~ 3000Q!f ±8
*3
I.e e
.;;.
,
,
mm
ep NOTE:Dillfllu If c.~I. ,h.d is Rot .~I. lD ch..... til t
SCANNER UN IT OUTL I NE DRAW I NG NKE-1 089-~

SCNKE5248
..
'1>1
t
t
w..
MOUNTING DIMENSIONS
DN\tlill
(~{'.J?'!t-?JI, .2825)
., -.~
! !
i i
i"- .. )
1 l5
:~
4 8
:1
1 I
• 3
MASS APPROX. 53 ks
II &
301l(f
30eu: 1201llF
It.'"
.1
.1.5
Illlll'UiI.'Tlf
.0.5
COLOR WHITE
Un It ml!!
t20f&t 4001llF .2. 5 .1
400f&t 10001llF .4 .2
10001&{ 2QOOIllF *6
·3 U II 53k.
20001&{ 30001lll' .8
(~)~-7~/~~~~
NOTE: Ola.fer If ubi, ,hili Is 1.1 Ibl' lD chll." til! mm
SCNKE5246
SCANNER UN IT OUTL I NE DRAW I NG NKE-1089-9
{ij
'-' • III 1 ... ,
~
FOrw-
•
MOUNTING DIMENSIONS
1l1ll"tl~.
~
I
~.......
~
N
t-
CJ't
(I)~ ~I
~~
~=:5!
~O
::tJ::tJ
o
~;o
_:b • 11.5
.:-I~ :I: ~5
4
~se
:I:
:I: 0 • 9
1jCi) MASS APPROX. 55kg
11'10
~'11 B
•• IF". It lilt". lItIllRf1l.;i!
COLOR WHITE
Un! t mm
~•
30llfF ~1
~O.5
30u.t 1201ll1'~1.5
~2.!> tl
120H.t 400lll1'
.. _ fJ~5kl.
...... 400HZ 1QOOl»"F ~4 ~2
Q
Q)
( ii) .,.-:1A1.15)ft.:wI<tHt"~~N. 1000. .z 20001ll1' ~ll
*3
He e
2000H.t 30001ll1' ~8
NOTE:Dlt.fer Df cabl. ,laid Is lot able ID cblu" " rom
~
0)
SCANNER UN IT OUTL I NE DRAW I NG NKE-1087~

SCNKE5242
s,· .
l
•
• ,p-
TS Ml0
O
- - - - -I - - - -
I
MOUNTING DIMENSIONS
nff'Jji_
.....
.....
I
VJ
IU
j 9
MASS APpROX. eo kg
COLOR WHITE
• II lit.... IIlIllRllIln
gOIlCF ~I
~o. 5
Un I t rom
gOfU 12011"1' ~I. 5
120RL 4001llF ~2.5 il
4DDaz 10001... *4 ~2
U II eOkc
(iE) ?"-7.v.t7;Ji-=tIlil:dt't!rttlu. 10DDaz 2000lllF ±&
*3
20DDfU 3000lllF ±8
NOTE: DI.ler 01 clbll Ilud 1& nDI,bll h c"n... ~ mm
SCNKE5244
SCANNER UN IT OUTL I NE DRAW I NG NKE-1087-9
n
-[,.'l~D
ll·'··
l!'l
/
~ OIlfRllSl' !H[IFlm
DlIEItSfOt Sl'ECIFfED fllfllN«I ~TlNO
OlilENStQ<lS
0 ro !l 2: 1
250 MIN 250 MIN OlER :II ro 120 2: 1.5
I 0,5
O\ER 120 ro «10 % 25 I I
0lER «10 ro 1000 2: ~ I 2
OIER 1000 fO. 2: 6 I 3
OIER 2000 fO . . 2: 8
[I" ""-"
lIllJAf8fl
4-~
--.....
15 MOUNTING BOLTS M12
.. ~.- IK :It l!-Ilv
30J;rFlt 1
lIiMrI'II'l."U
~\
30M:t 120U,I *,1.5
to.5
..... 120M:t 400J;l'lt2. 5 *'1
.....
I
,
400M:t 10001;1".4
*,6
*'2
~ 0 ; 0 1000~:t 2000~,
~3
2000M:t 3000J;l, ~8
, 0
i
i
OJ
WA VE GU (DE OUTLET
no
-
o
l"- ~,,",,<
I I i .»:e6NO
"'1 iii
r
;"'fL~
f I •.
~~
_._-._.~
l!'l
«:l
..: ·'l·t,·
~
--t':i':'~ :
0 , I , ' 0
CABLE INLET [Use E it her Side I
[~
'T
l!'l
(\j
203T: (791 'T-7JIJMli\D (c~5:tr-JJm)
I"-
15 585 15
615
MASS APPROX. 36ks
~~~ ' / /~//
':' . . . :e Un i t mm
~~G) •• J.I 36ka

W:::tJ
~
!l!fiI mm
;::!
~§
W .....
~ ....
:b
-'},
~.
......
WAVE GU I DE OUTLET
"naND
250 MIN
""""'NO
OI-..eNSICNS
250 MIN
t 0.S
z
t t
::s t 2
o
4-415 MOUNTING BOLTS M12 ~ 2 7 t 3
~j\
B'it;r"" I'-M12
-lo.
I
"
-lo.
~ ca"
0'1 ! IS ~ ~.'t 1lf<J i'i:f!l.'.l;J
301:ff tl
~~
/
0 , (S) r-'\ 30~~ 120m, tl. 5 ~o. 5
b i
;
;
0 120~~ 400tn &2.5 t1
~co i 4ao~~
1000~~
1aoom,
2ooom,
t4
~6
t2
~~ CD 2000~~ 3000m, &8

i
..... ::a !
,
~O
i
,i
0 ,
i
::tI::tJ
1
«l
"'f
<XI
m
::0 0
..... ~ ~
~rn ~
rn~ ~ ~
~::o Ci) J "o{Et:~t~ e
0
~c::
1<: ~ L{) " T
w_ ei
'<;J"
L{)
ei
'<;J"
95 i MASS APPROX. 21 kg
C) .....
N 15 430 15
.
z Unit mm
co 460 ::s
a
L{)
(\l
II 21 kg
'IiI mm
Keyboard Color:N4 Semi-gloss Texture
~40 ~,ao,
n
Other Color:Not Accept~ble
~, 4~~~~_ 700 - iK- I' @' : N41\) :'/iRN O' 1 IIH~---

400 >
- _ok:-:: 8-;15.5 (FIXING BOLTS M12l Table Color:N4. Semi-gloss Texture
., .....- ..
(DlililiJIA...M12) Other Color:Not Acceptable
,
'-_ jML!:N4/\-:&iNo.l iliiHM--
i'-l I ~ I
I
~
L._.. 'I
~ . ~. "
,
.~'
~ THE HOLE Fffi
"""" "" .lR989'~ -: ~~~ Monitor Fixing Plate Color:N4 Semi-gloss
Other Color:Not Acceptable
,~~
~~~ ~
LD, CABLE IttH
'J-7.u.AO
f='9 INfiI~ @O:N41\)'YtJ mN!J
204 _1_ 185

l.tj\~~u Monitor color:N4 Semi-gloss Texture
Other Color:Not Acceptable
Ga f_'9- @.:N4/\::r.JiKNo. 1 !i'~
THE HOLE FOR I.tOUNT ING Y«lRK
ItiIWIJll~
tFRQNT ~U "'. 2-~15. 5(FOR SHORT FAUNDATlON)
~L\7j1)7-Y3)W~~:m
( ) m f'l-"
---.......------_~ Monitor Stand Color:N4 Semi-gloss Texture
'~Olher Color:Nol Acceptable
L9-J!t:t @: N4/1):;)l(No. 2 1U!!l'i'f
~OUNTING DIMENSIONS
W (\t \j )! I1?J (327.8)
'1lJ lJUO '10
....., -co .
.....
Ol LD
N
(YJ
STAY(LRl Color:Si Iver Metallic

n If ~<:'<? Dther Color:Not Acceptable
. r<:
. a
a
AT-Ufo) !::JMT-)l'9IJ':I?-liiHM
N
gl ~
e"p'
IU
O=-"
- - Moal(LR) Color:Silver Metallic
-CD LD Other Color:Nol Acceptable
C/)m r-, f-A,{{o) ~:yLH-)l'9IJ':I? UJ/!I!M
r-,
_"tJ)( Il1
cnr--I r-,
m~:u
r- -
LD
~I Processor Unit Color:N4 Semi-gloss Texture
2-~'6:5/1L~ [.1'/
"t Mal @:N41\::r.JiKNo. 2
-;ncO
cnZ:U
-1-
»~-IO
-j-- For Link
um .------
~~~
Zm-
- I 700 - CABLE I NLET
'7-711.-."0
I
MASS: APPROX, 130Ks
~~===:j
335
Un it: mm
Qz~ J!~1JJf-(H)
~lar:N4 Sel
@.:N4/1-:&iKNo.2---
ass Texture ~. 850
~OO
0 ita : ~ 13.",--,-OK=--g_
mJ.. "
"tJ
-N
UNLESS OTHERWlSE SPECIFIED
DIMENSION RANGE, IN
TOLERANCE
lI!ll\iB'F§!!t
;r$Jg~ IH!i;r$ lIl/itrlm.
~m: : mm
en OUTL),N,..[,c> 1"\~~~!~elC> ~.u ~l" 8UJlI ;rli;8f1t1l ••
W 010 30 ± , - 30 + 1
± O. 5 ± O. 5
OVER 3010 120 ± 1,5 30 120 ± 1. 5
OVER 120 10 400 + 2. 5 1 120 400 ± 2.5 ± 1
OVER 400 10 1000 :!:4 2 400 1000 :!:4 ±2 .,p.
OVER1000 102000 ±6 3 1000 2000 +6 ±2 ~
,4
- ~ ~
"'!c:::::I !IS
.) :)
;1 I~
. i'"cJ"
.~
·'0 o
" II@>
• •
4
6
MESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED

DIIENSIOO
OVER
30
120
0
RNa. III
TO
30
120
400
TOlER.W::E
ClJn...uE
DEMfNBI(Ni
t1
t 1.5
:1:2.5
llCUlTINl
DlfS$ICl«l:
± O. 5
:I: 1
uJt
-
30
120
30
120
400
.. ....
• • 1If8Jl
••••Dll' M1rtl
:1:1
:I: I. 5
:1:2. 5
~
:t 0.5
tl
MASS: APPROX. 25 Kg
Unit: I.
l.: J.l25Kg
400
1000
1000
2000
:t4
:l:ll
:1:2 400
1000
1000
2000
:1:4
:1:6
:1:2 'frr: III
±3 :1:3
2000 3000 tS 2000 3000 :te
23 inch monitor With a stand.

231../7L9- ~
Fig. 1.10 EXTRIOR DRA WING OF MONITOR UNIT

TYPE NWZ-158 (DESKTOP TYPE)
1-17
IIMIRTEIWa 1I0ml
oM[N IEim
250QI.t
;l.nt/~~t\-~
FRONT LO
' ' '< 's -":<'<-~

~~<:<::;;;''0,'0»<::<:'0>0>, ~
I'l'1
(Yl/ lCl
If)
(Yl (Yl
00
Ol
o i '
- ~ :-'>:\."'''''''- -, '," 0>:;<:' -, -.' '" -. .

", ~'''''''-''''''''''':>.:,,""-:"':;">«:\:\>\<:<::-:->~~"
\I!
lCl h
IlL
o : d..'
~
,~o.- ...-~ = l:'3~ ~J 1·d....,

CABLE INLET DIMENSION
7 - 1 )1- j), 0 "1 ~ -
1 '
......
......
I
ce
§zl
i~[~'<
';ZLt'l
_C\J
572
Ole.
552
Iiiil~ ~ /
rPLOce~JOr
9[\jljJfl
cQJor: N4S~lIj~gJgstJ~~tMLe
fS: N4/\::JSriKNo. 2
525
~ ~E.
"I .... ,
\1
e e ~
; <il @
/
! <il I0 I MESS OTlfRWI~ SffCIFIED
DIt.ENSlcri SPECIFIED lOlER.OCE ~~Vl~~I;J'>~~",
?" t]\.
• , e 0 10 30 1
::I:
t:0.5
\ OYl'R 30 ill 120 ± 1.5
I oi
8-,10<FIXING BOLTS MtllJ ..i OVER 120 ill 400 ± 2.5 t: 1
(iWiRt-FMSY <r-l
O~ 400 TO 1000 ± 4 t:2
1 0 o O\{R 1000 TO 2000 ± 6
:!! V t: 3
oee 0 0
~ • E) OVER 2000 TO 3000 ± 8
O:....a.
_Z:....a. 1 D
o
..
0
0
(Yl
0 o
~.~§a;
1& }\-B;tll Eij\T 7\I;)i!I
C-t .....
m;::tJm
~, l!l io
"
:30illl' t1
to. 5
cnO><
"r--t ° 0 .. * i
• e
o
30St
120Rt
400St
120illl'
4001:fF
10001:fF
t1.5
t2.5
!4
t: 1
t:2
-tc:;::tJ
OZO
"'tI=i;::tJ
c C
..
oi
-;
i 1000Rt
2000ut
20001:fF
30001:fF
t6
ta
t:3
~~ C • MASS:APPRQ)('AOK~
J
E)
"'tI-t;:a DO Un it: mm
o
m~»
°1
e 9 , <il iii <il
-m< i'i..:.~AQJSEI
"....... < s;2 r-< in
. ~.... HI:JllJt
Oz-
Z ; ; Z~f':"
- r-<
ICABLE
"'tIC
-tOG)
i~ ~o~
()~~ ,
7-1)1- •
.... tI>
~
O~O ~ ........ --.- ...... .., ....-\._ .."'...v ...,,:...'( ...., ...,,:...•.....,.:...,:...'1:...-,.:.., ...""'- •..., ..." ...,':..-., ...• .......••,.:...-, "',"',:"',,\:"','" v-:..:...•,:...•.:'..,.:..-c..."'...."--.-"...-:..., ...,.
~: ~:
U1
ZN"
-~
CD
-t
325
t
lOUNT J NO
t
OIt.lNSICll Sl{ClfiED NS10NS
o TO :II ±0.5 p-
OVER :II TO 120
OVER 120 TO 400 ±1
t:P
OVER 400 TO 1000 ±2
OYER 1000 ro 2000
t3
OV£R 2000 TO 3000
NAME PLATE CABLE OUTLET
Color;K4 Se.i-gloss Texture
Other Color;Nol Acceptable ~ (51.9) r-,
.,; co
(\J
aJ@ [ (PIIRFAIL) .......

]
-'
o
r
......
I
::tI
~.
.....
@
SfBv
~ACK
0 0 0 0 ~
OK) c::mD ~ CE!D
0
~
(\J
Cl
«;f
~
~
r-,
«;f
Ol
~
0
N
...... ~
to ..... ~
~
88 (~)
vECT @ ~@
DATA
88
~~ ~ (~) @ @
0 0
NIOHT ARPA OfF OfF
;R~
~o
o::tl
I'11tJ
8 8 EE) m
.:..~
.~. . i
400
.;:!<:
OG)
rno
~."
d~
,,~
MASS APPROX. 3. 1kg
~~
-!!l~
oc:
,,~
::1-.,
0
~
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••- - - 47
1. 5 GENERAL SYSTEM DIAGRAM •

Fig.1.13 GENERAL SYSTEM DIAGRAM OF RADAR, TYPE JMA-9933-SA
Fig.1.14 GENERAL SYSTEM DIAGRAM OF RADAR, TYPE JMA-9932-SA
Fig.1.15 GENERAL SYSTEM DIAGRAM OF RADAR, TYPE JMA-9923-7XA
1-20
'~~ .
A~
--
NKE-l079 SCANNER UNIT
0.8/1 kV-DPVCY-l.5
SHIP'S MAIN COAXIAL CABLE

CIRCUIT BREAKER
ACloo/ll0V HF-2OD (JRC SUPPLY)
50/80Hz, 1 q" 200w
14 CORES COMPOSITE CABLE

H-289511OO58 NTG-3037 TRANSMITTER-RECEIVER UNIT
MAX 30MT q, 23 (JRC SUPPLY)
14 CORES COMPOSIT CABLE

H-289511OO58
MAX35MT q, 23 (JRC SUPPLY)
D NCD-4283 DISPLAY UNIT
SHIP'S MAIN
ACl 00/11OV
5O/60Hz, 1 q,
AC220/23OV
5O/8OHz,3 q,
aotNA
GYRO L;ryy-mr:""'-' - J \ UPtIK¥-WU;-P AC220/23OV

50/8OHz, 1 q, MED only
LOG/DLOG 25OV-IDCS-l/250V=MYCYS-7 J
GPS 25OY-UYCS-l )
AIS 2soy-rrycH J
\ zpuy- I I Uip-' CONNING
ECHO SOUNDER 250Y-UYCS=1 )
ALARM MONITORING 0 8/1 kV:DPYQ'($-l !5 J
SYSTEM
Note: Eliminating the interference on frequencies used for marine communications and navigation
due to operation of the radar.
All cables of the radar are to be run away from the cables of radio equipment.
(Ex. Radiotelephone. Communications receiver and direction finder. etc)
Especially inter-wiring cables between scanner unit and display unit of the radar should not run
parallel with the cables of radio equipment.
Fig.1.13 GENERAL SYSTEM DIAGRAM OF RADAR, TYPE JMA-9933-5A
1-21
.....................................• _ ..
49
NKE-l075 SCANNER UNIT

I
O.8/1kV-OPYCY-l.5
SHIP'S MAIN CIRCUIT BREAKER

AC100/11OV
50/80Hz,l t/l,I00W
(OPTION)
14 CORES COMPOSIET CABLE
D
H-2895110058
MAX 85MT t/l23(JRC SUPPLY)
NCO-4283 DISPLAY UNIT
SHIP'S MAIN
AC100/110/220/230V
SO/80Hz, 1 t/l
AC220/230V
GYRO 'i'uy-mC""-' - J , U Ul u,y-' n 'cu 50/80Hz, 3 t/l
SOOVA
LOG/DLOG 25ov-mCS-l/25OV-MYCVS-Z J
GPS 25QV-rrycS-1 J
' - -_ _.....<L-..............:...:L- ECIDS
AlS 25oy-mCS=4 J
ECHO SOUNDER 250y-mcs-l J
l 25oy-mCS=4 CONNING
ALARM MONITORING Q6/1kV-PPYCVS-15 J

SYSTEM
Fig.1.14 GENERAL SYSTEM DIAGRAM OF RADAR, TYPE JMA-9932-8A
1-22
sO •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
••
NNKE-l08ll-7 SCANNER UNIT
0.8/1 kV-DPYCY-l.5
14 CORESCOMPOSIETCABLE
SHIP'S MAIN
AC100/ll0V H-2895110058
50/8OHz, 1 tP, l00w MAX 30MT tP23 (JRC SUPPLY)
NTG-3028 TRANSMITTER-RECEIVER UNIT
14 CORES COMPOSIETCABLE
H-2895110058
MAX 35MT tP23 (JRC SUPPLY)
SHIP'S MAIN
AC100/ll0/220/230V
50/80Hz, 1tP
AC220/230V
GYRO 250Y=MPVC-Z -- J \. - ua"n- It· ! ....... 50/8OHz, 3tP
800VA
LOG/DLOG 25OV-mCS-1I25OV-MYC'fS-Z J
GPS 2SOV-mcS-l
AlS 25ov-mcS-4
J
J
ll 2~~~ECmS
I 25OV-mcS-4 CONNING
ECHO SOUNDER 250Y-mcS-l J
ALARM MONITORING 08/lkV-DPYC'lS-15 J
SYSTEM
1-23
51
.....................................• ~-
NKE-1089-9 SCANNERUNIT
0.6/1kV-DPYCY-1.5
14 CORESCOMPOSET CABLE
AC100/110V H-2695110056
!;n!Am.h 1~. 100W MAX 30MT ~23 (JRC SUPPLY)
NTG-3028 TRANSMmER-RECElVER UNIT
14 CORES COMPOSIET CABLE

H-2695110056 ~
MAX 35MT ~ 23 (JRC SUPPLY)
SHIP'S MAIN
AC100/110/220/230V
50/80Hz. 1 ~
AC2201230V
\" ~. Y'¥' 'AY-' r J y-y SO/80Hz, 3 t/J
GYRO Lilyy-mC'y-' J
600VA
LOG/DLOG 25oy-mCS-t/250Y-MYCYS-Z J
GPS 25oy-rrycS-1 J
A1S 250y-mcs-4 J
ECHO SOUNDER 25oy-mCS-1 J
ALARM MONITORING 06/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5 J
SYSTEM
1-24
",. --
•52••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
~.
NKE-l087-6 SCANNER UNIT
O.8/1kV-DPYCY-l.5

AC100/110V
---,
SO/80Hz.1cj .100w
14 CORES COMPOSIT CABLE
D
H-28911110058
MAX 811MT cj23(JRC SUPPLY)
NCD-4283 DISPLAY UNIT
SHIP'S MAIN
AC100/IIO/220/230V
SO/80Hz. I cj
AC220/23OV
\ -, u gllKV- ",Xp-tI SO/80Hz. 3 cj
GYRO "WI-mC I y-' J
800VA
LOG/DLOG zsov-mCS-lIZ50Y-MYCYS-7 J
GPS ZSOV-TJYQS-I J
AlS Z5QY-IDQS" )
\ 4'0'1-' "yg-, CONNING
ECHO SOUNDER zsov-mCS-l J
ALARM MONITORING 0 BllkY-PPYCYS-IS J
SYSTEM
1-25
• •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 53
.....
NKE-l087-9 SCANNER UNIT

1
0.8/1 kV-OPVCY-1.5

I
AC100/l10V
~nf..nu-l/1l.100W
(OPTION)
14 CORES COMPOSITE CABLE

H-289511oo58
MAX 85MT III 23(JRC SUPPLY)
D NCO-4283 DISPLAY UNIT
SHIP'S MAIN
ACloo/ll0/220/230V
50/80Hz.ll1l
\ m Uan KY- ""Hi-a AC220/230V
GYRO 4"y v-mc I ",-, J 50/80Hz.311l
800VA
LOG/DLOG 2SOV-mCS-l/2S0Y-MYCYS-7 J
GPS 2soy-mcs-l J
ECIDS
AlS 2S0Y-mCS-4 J
l 'i'yy-' I '\t..-" CONNING
ECHO SOUNDER 2sov-mCS-l J
ALARM MONITORING 0611!sV-PPVCYS-l S J
SYSTEM
1-26
54 •••••••••••••••• • ••• ••• •••••••••• •••••
•., --
1. 6 COLLISION AVOIDANCE
Problems of Collision Avoidance in Navigation· · · · · · ·
Marine collision avoidance is one of the problems that have been recognized from of
old. Now, it will be described briefly who the collision avoidance is positioned among the
navigational aid problems.
The navigation pattern of all mobile craft constitutes a system with some closed loops
regardless of the media through which the mobile craft travels, whether air, water, the
boundary between air and with another mobile craft and the other is a loop of funding a
right and safe way to reach a predestinate destination.
Fig.1.19 shows the conceptual diagram of navigation pattern by MR.E.W.Anderson.
The closed loop of collision avoidance is shown on the left side and closed loop of
finding a right course on the right side.
Destination
~ _... ~ ........,...
--
Vessel's spacing loop ... Flcing byf"'''
'" WIMI. YiaU81
Traffic rule , Course ncelsllal
~
.
Calculation
r-
'" .
~
Dead reckoning
Collision avoidance loop
Visual and Compass

radio watch ,. Course and speed ~
~
..... and log
, .. 'r-
~'"
I Conlrolloop
Instrument
Judgment
-+ Maneuver ~ or
judgment
i ~ i
Shiptraveling in controlled condition
Fig.1.19 Navigation Pattern
Marine Accidents and Collisions· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ·

Among marine accidents, collision accidents have been highlighted as the tonnages
and speed of ships become higher along with the increase in traffic at sea. If a tanker
carrying dangerous articles such as crude oil collides with any other vessel, then not
only the vessels involved with the accident but other vessels in the vicinity, port facilities,
inhabitants in the coastal area as well as marine resources may also suffer
immeasurable damages and troubles. Collision accidents have a high percentage of the
marine accidents that have occurred in recent years. To cope with these problems, any
effective measures are needed and some equipment to achieve collision avoidance
requirements have been developed at rapid strides.
1-27
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• ~, 55
Basic Concept of Collision Avoidance· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ·
There are two aspects in collision avoidance: collision prediction and avoidance.
Collision prediction is to predict that two or more vessels will happen to occupy the
same point at the same time, while collision avoidance is to maneuver vessels not to
occupy the same point at the same time.
In practical operation of vessels, a spot of collision has to be deemed to be a single
point but a closed zone. The closed zone is conceptually defined as CPA (Closest Point
of Approach). In collision prediction, the time to be taken until a ship reaches the CPA is
defined as a TCPA (Time of CPA).
Fig.1.20 shows a diagram called "Collision Triangle".
CPA TCPA (Time of CPA)
/ ,...""
..... --- ----------- ..............
...... .:target vessel
./
,... ,...-
./
/
/
/
/
/
I
I Relative vector
I
I
I
\
\
\\ ~ // CPA RING
\ /
\
, /
/
"" " /
................. _-_..- ..... ,... ./
Fig.1.20 Collision Triangle
Relative Vector and True Vector· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ·

Form two points of view, collision prediction and avoidance, it is necessary to obtain the
relative vector of other ship for prediction and the true vector of other ship for collision
avoidance in order to grasp other ship's aspect. The relationship between the relative
vector and true vector is shown in Fig.1.21.
Both rough CPA and TCPA can be obtained easily from the relative speed vector of
other ship. This method has an advantage that the risks of collision with all other ship
can easily be obtained from its true speed vector, enabling other ship's aspect to be
seen at a glance. Thus, the aspects of other ships (transverse, out sail, parallel run,
reverse run, etc.) as described in the Act of Prevention of Collision at Sea can be readily
grasped. If there is a risk of collision with other ship, the operator can determine which
rule to be applied and how to operate own ship.
1-28
~ .
....~ -. N N
True vector
v 0 : Own ship's speed

eo: Own ship's course
VT:Other ship's true speed
VT:Other ship's reative speed
e T:Other ship's true couse
Relative vector e R: Other ship's reative couse
e A: Asped
o
Fig.1.21 Relative Vector and True Vector
Radar and Collision Avoidance· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ·

Radar is still playing an important roll for collision prevention and positioning. A plotter is
used to further enhance the radar functionality. The plotter is capable of plotting other
positions of other ships in 3 to 6 minute intervals to monitor their movements. The plots
of other ships represent their tracks relative to own ship, and it is shown whether there
is a there is a risk of collision, namely CPA and TCPA can be obtained. This method
using a plotter is fairly effective, but the number of target ships, which are manually
plotted, is limited and it takes several minutes to measure those
1-29
~ - -;- 57
SECTION 2
NAME AND FUNCTION OF
CONTROL PANEL SWITCHES
AND FUNCTION OF
SOFTWARE BUTTONS
111111111111
11111111
NAME AND FUNCTION OF CONTROL PANEL SWITCHES ••••...•••••...•.••....2-1

FUNCTION OF SOFTWARE BUTTONS 2-6
,c.n
00
tAz
~»
••
13: •
c m •
:::1
iir » •
'2.Z •
~C •
m"'T1 ••
=c:
3Z •
'2.n •
~
Currant I!rjft
-o ••
p_jncket,j_
~-I
Z •
o." ••
Voptprtimo
~-----+-~
;=::.:..,.-../
TCfIA altyg
o ••
Own ,bip', Re1ition ---1f---~H----+---+---+- .........
N Ttrgt. abjp m
I
...... Trut herin' Cdarl oz •
Iaau..!om}
rn..
Try,
(d.,)
ooyratt
.p"d Ckngtl
-I •
•
SIfaty Ihip eymbgl -f--..,j---+----'<l'MoJ
m!A1nml
ICPA.!miol.
IW.IUom1
.IHlI.1minl
;U
o ••
Ship', budin, minor
.111.
No 1 I I
••
~
.
~ •
(diaplooy*! to incl.... the
true bearin, of OM! ahip'a · ~m
hudi.. marl<.r with llYrO
Z •
oampe•• connected)
· kta Tarpt lbip datil 2
· nm
Red.r intorferw>ce
rofIMtor · min
nm
m •
en ••
min I
Se. clutter euppreNion
(sEA) AUTO LA niaplav infpnnctign
R8inlan_ olutter NAY"", D.mo

:e- •
o ••
auppreaaion (RAIN) PtrMNI cod. U N
MANUAL
Own ahip'a track
-I
::J: •
memoryinterval
en ••
R8cler video track
indicetion intatwl m
VRM1 ,.... y" True Uejrw incugetiM
(Ope.... lI!!Ml Mlactte!)
••
•
,
., •
.'
•••
••
• t/)
• s:
IV
~
~
·:
• G)
oov
GONV' GnNVJ
OOV C1VV
101 ~/l
(ns3)
:; 0w~~ 0w~0 8030 B
• l:L
·
• "2 {D ~@C£ ([J) e
• 'E =
~ C£ NI
• 0 N
• 0 818
30NVl::l
W~VlV
@ Xl )
0
• '0
• o
c 0:} a a a a @ ©
•
~
c
LI-
~ (11V.:I ~Md)
··
•
•
•
't:I
c
IV
CO
o 0
00000
000000
0
o 0 0 0 0
0 0
000000 ~Md
o 0 0 0 0 @
000 0
• E 0
• CO
•
•• Z @
a
CD
••
••
••
'. ... .. ..
w£
r-i\.,
'~
.~~ .
CD [POWER] (Power Supply) Switch
This switch is used to tum the power on and off. The lamp lights when this switch is on.
When the power is on and it cannot be turned off for some reason, depressing this switch for five
seconds will force the power off.
® [PWR ACt<] (Power Alarm Acknowledgment) Switch

When this switch is set to ON, the lamp lights to start the system.
In order for this key to work, an external battery is required (normally a power supply separate
from the AC unit).
@ [TXlSTBY] (Operation) Switch

The [STANDBY] will appear at the upper left of the radar display about 3 minutes after
the [PWR] switch is set to ON. Then, press this switch, and transmission will be started.
Pressing the switch during transmission sets the equipment to the standby state.
@ [ALARM ACK] (Alarm Acknowledgment) Switch

Press this switch to acknowledge a failure, approach of a target, or collision alarm.
@ [TUNE] (Turning) Control

Tunes the target signals to display the targets most clearly on the radar display.
Switching between AUTO and MANUAL can be done by pressing the knob.
@ [RAIN] (Rain/Snow Clutter Suppression) Control

Reduces the clutter echo caused by rain and snow.
Be careful not to set this adjustment too high. Setting this adjustment too high may cause the
target to be erased. Switching between AUTO and MANUAL can be done by pressing the knob.
(J) [SEA] (Sea Clutter Suppression) Control

Reduces the clutter echo caused by the surface of the sea.
Be careful not to set this adjustment too high. Setting this adjustment too high may cause the
target to be erased. Switching between AUTO and MANUAL can be done by pressing the knob.
@ [GAIN] (Receiving Sensitivity) Control

Controls the radar receiving sensitivity.
Adjust the GAIN to a point where the background static does not interfere with operation.
@ [RANGE +/-] (Range Scale Select) Switch

Selects a range scale from 0.125 to 96 (or 120) nautical miles.
@ [EBL 1] (Electric Bearing Line 1) Switch

Selects and displays EBL1. Switches between ON and OFF, and the function for which this
switch if valid. When depressed for two seconds or longer, this switch selects ON/OFF for the
floating setting.
® [EBL2] (Electric Bearing Line 2) Switch

Selects and displays EBL2. Switches between ON and OFF, and the function for which this
switch if valid. When depressed for two seconds or longer, this switch selects ON/OFF for the
floating setting.
@ [EBL) (Electric Bearing Line) Control

Rotates the bearing of the EBL that is selected by EBL 1 and 2.
@ [VRM1] (Variable Range Marker 1) Switch

Selects and displays VRM1.
Switches between ON and OFF, and the function for which this switch if valid.
2-3
,. a'A,
-61
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
@ [VRM2] (Variable Range Marker 2) Switch
Selects and displays VRM2.
Switches between ON and OFF, and the function for which this switch if valid .
@ [VRM] (Variable Range Marker) Control

Changes the range of the VRM that is selected by VRM 1 and 2.
@
[T/R VECT] (TM/RM Mode Select) Switch
Selects the ARPA vector display in the TM or RM mode.
[TGT DATA] (Target Data Setup) Switch

•
This switch is used to display numeric data of ARPA being tracked and AIS being displayed.
When this switch is depressed for two seconds, the numeric display next to symbols will be
turned on and off.
@ [ACQ MANUAL] (Manual Acquisition) Switch

This switch turns on and off manual acquisition of ARPA targets.
When this key is pressed, the cursor mode is changed to the manual acquisition setting mode.
@ [ACQ CANCEL] (Acquisition Cancel) Switch

This switch cancels the symbol and vector of an ARPA target being tracked, and stops tracking
the target.
If depressed for two seconds or longer, that tracking of all targets will be cancelled. (ARPA
display)
When using with AIS, pressing this for two seconds, all targets will be paused and displayed.
@ [DAY/NIGHT] (Day/Night Mode Select) Switch

Switches the screen color and brilliance according to the DAY, DAY2, NIGHT1 and NIGHT2
setting.
e [AIS/ARPA]
Selects whether to use the ACO MANUAL and ACO CANCEL keys with ARPA or AIS.
@ [Hl OFF] (Heading line Off) Switch

The ship's heading line (HL) can be cancelled as long as this switch is depressed.
@ [DATA OFF]
While this switch is depressed, graphics other HL, the range ring, EBL and VRM will be deleted
temporarily.
@ [PANEL] (Operation Panel Brightness) Switch

Controls the brightness of the controls and switches on the operation panel.
@ [USER]
The registered function is called. Also, if an option is connected, then this is used to operate that
option.
At the time of factory shipments, it is set as ON of the function, which switches the vector length
of "ARPA" in 60 minutes, and OFF.
@ [OPTION1]
option.
The call of a MENU is assigned at the time of factory shipments.
2-4
·" - .- 2
....
~ . -- .\
@ [OPTION2]
.
option.
The call of a TEST is assigned at the time of factory shipments.
@ [Trackball]
The trackball is used to move the cursor to arbitrary locations on the screen. It is used to make
settings in the various modes.
It is used to specify the center position of floating EBls and specify the off center position.
@ [Left Trackball Button]

This button is used to select various modes and confirm numeric input.
In the MARK mode, it is used to confirm the screen mark. During manual acquisition of ARPA,
it is used to confirm acquisition.
~ [Right Trackball Button]

In the MARK mode, this button is used to delete screen marks.
During manual acquisition of ARPA, it is used to release acquisition.
® [BRILL] Control
Controls the brilliance of the entire display panel.
Brilliance knob is located right hard if a screen.
2-5
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 63
FUNCTION OF SOFTWARE BUTTONS
This radar provides software buttons on the screen which can be used to set important functions
directly and swiftly without opening a menu.
CURSOR ( . . ·'tI"I;'" )
! t~
CJlli]'
330 TRUEc=:!illJ nm , r MAN t
l
JZO ,\.' " ,
-~-
'v-' '
, .."
310 ,,"
-,-,'
,,'
-:
300 ..~ ..... 060
~- '/
290.....:~ ....
_070
080
280-.:
270-: ;-'090
260-:'
""
250"';"-:.. "- 110
..::
,,,,
",
, ,'\
'" '/~ '" I 1 ..',\..,

190 I r I, 'I;~ '" 'I'\
".111" ,'\
17
By positioning the arrow cursor on the buttons indicated by CD to ® in the figure above and then
pressing the left trackball button, the settings can be changed in the ways described below.
2-6
6~
.-.~
<D Range selection

.
Changes the radar range.
"+": Increases the range by one step. (The maximum range is 96 or 120 nautical miles.)
"-": Decreases the range by one step. (The minimum range is 0.125 nautical miles.)
<2> RINGS indicator selection

Turns on and off the fixed distance scale display. When this is turned on, the intervals of the
range rings will be displayed. When this is turned off, then "OFF" will be displayed.
(3) Pulse width selection

Select the pulse width. There is three pulse widths: Short pulse (SP), middle pulse (MP) and
long pulse (LP). The pulse widths that can be used depend on the range being used. If a
change cannot be made, then nothing will be displayed. This setting is stored for each range.
@ Tuning indicator mode

Sets the tuning mode to MANUAL or AUTO.
I MANUAL I -+ I AUTO I
(Manual tuning) -+ (Automatic tuning)
@ Bearing mode selection

This has the same function as the [AZI MODE] switch. It switches between North-up (true
bearing), Head-up (relative bearing) and Course-up. Each time.this button is clicked it will step
through the settings in the following order: "N UP" ~ "C UP" ~ "H UP"
@ Motion mode selection

The screen display is changed between the True Motion (TM) and Relative Motion (RM)
displays. Clicking this button will switch between "TM" and "RM." (R) indicates a relative trail.
(T) indicates a true trail.
(J) Transmission/Standby selection

About three minutes after the [PWR] switch is turned on, the "PREHEAT" indication on the upper
left of the screen will change to "STANDBY."
STANDBY: Indicates that the unit is in the standby state. Clicking the switch at this time will
change the unit to the transmission state.
TRANSMIT: Indicates that the unit is in the transmission state. Clicking the switch at this time
will change the unit to the standby state.
@ Change InterSwitch connection

This is displayed if InterSwitch is connected. The indicator shows the connected scanner and
the connection status of the indicator. When this switch is pressed, a menu to change the
connection status of the scanner and indicator will be displayed. The scanner and indicator
connection status cannot be changed. unless the master indicator is in the standby state.
@ AIS target refreshed (ACT)

When this switch is pressed, the AIS target will be activated.
@ AIS target deactivated (DACT)

When this switch is pressed, the activated AIS target is paused.
® ARPA symbol indicator selection

Turns the ARPA symbol indicator on or off. The setting is changed each time this button is
clicked.
@ AIS symbol indicator selection

Turns the AIS symbol indicator on or off. The setting is changed each time this button is
clicked. .
2-7
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 65
@ Radar interference reflector function selection . - - •
Turns on and off the radar interference reflector (IR). The IR is turned on or off each time this
switch is clicked.
@ Radar reception scale (GAIN)

This indicates the degree the knob has been turned.
@ Sea clutter suppression function (SEA) selection

Selects either manual or automatic sea clutter suppression. The bar on the right indicates the
position in the manual mode.
@ Sea scale
This indicates the amount the knob has been turned in manual mode. When in auto mode,
"AUTO" will be displayed.
@ Rain/snow clutter suppression function (RAIN) selection

Selects either manual or automatic rain/snow clutter suppression. The bar on the right
indicates the position in the manual mode.
@ Rain scale
This indicates the amount the knob has been turned in manual mode. When in auto mode,
"AUTO" will be displayed.
@ Own ship's trail indication interval function (TRACK) selection

Turns on and off the own ship's trail indication interval.
@ Radar trail indicator function (TRAILS) selection

Sets the time intervals for radar trails. OFF, O.5MIN, 1MIN, 3MIN, or 6MIN can be selected.
® Image processing function (PROC) selection

Sets the image-processing mode. OFF, PROC1, PROC2 or PROC3 can be selected.
@ Radar trail mode selection

Sets true trail or relative trail when operating the radar trail function.
"T" is displayed when true trails are used and "R" is displayed for relative trails.
This setting is also limited by the radar-bearing mode.
When the North-up (N UP) mode is used, switching between 'T' and "R" is possible.
When the Course-up (C UP) mode is used, only "T" is set.
When the Head-up (H UP) mode is used, only "R" is set.
® Radar image enhance (ENH) function selection

Turns on and off the radar image enhance function. It is turned on or off each time this switch is
clicked.
® Cursor mode selection

Sets the cursor mode. Clicking this button will display a pull-down menu. After setting the
mode, the cursor can be moved and the left trackball button used to make various settings.
Because all the modes are to be used during radar transmission, a mode may not operate
properly if it is selected in the standby state.
@ Off center mode selection

This has the same function as the [OFF CENT] switch, Shifts the own ship position within the
screen (within 66% of the scope's radius) to display a wider range in an arbitrary direction.
When this button is pressed when the system is already in the off center mode, then the off
center function will be turned off.
2-8
•• £i •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
~--
® Heading line off setting
Has the same function as the [Hl OFF] key. While this switch is clicked, the heading lines (Hl)
display will be tumed off.
@ CPA RING indicator selection

Tum on and off the CPA RING display.
When the vector mode is TRUE, the CPA RING cannot be tumed on.
@ MAP SHIFT
This is used to mode maps made by users.
® DEPTH
This tsp\ays the depth received from extemal devices.
The 0 button can be used to tum on and off the depth graph display.
(3'0) DAY/NIGHT setting

This button selects the day or night mode. The mode changes each time this button is clicked.
There are four settings: DAY1~ DAY2 ~ NIGHT1 ~ NIGHT2.
® PANEUBRlll VIDEO/BRill ARPA setting

The modes PANEL, VIDEO, and ARPA, which adjust luminosity, are switched.
The mode changes each time this button is clicked.
There are three settings: PANEl~VIDEO~ARPA.
<W Brilliance adjustment

Each time this switch is clicked, it will go to the next of four (BRill VIDEO) or five (PANEL,
BRill ARPA) brilliance settings.
®) Process setting function (FUNC) selection

Sets the process setting mode. OFF, FUNC1, FUNC2, FUNC3, FUNC4, or FUNC5 can be
selected.
®, @ , (3g) ,® : EBl and VRM settings

The EBl1, EBl2, VRM1, and VRM2 switches are used to acquire operation rights.
They function in the same way as the EBl1 and 2 and VRM1 and 2 switches on the control
panel.
The numeric indicator switches are used to tum on and off the various EBls and VRMs.
When a numeric indicator displays "OFF," that means the corresponding indicator in the PPI is
off.
The switches on the control panel are used to move the EBls and VRMs.
-051.0 0
135.0 0
.30 nm
o~ .60 nm
rL
When ON: The numeric display is off.
' - - - - When OFF: The numeric display is on.
This is used to turn ON and OFF either EBl or VRM operation, and turn ON and OFF the display.
The function that is valid is indicated by the inverted display.
EBl and VRM intersection identification marks
2-9
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• ~ -••
--
67 ...
@ EBl1 starting point mode

Sets whether the EBL1 starting point is placed at the center of the own ship or at an arbitrary
position on the radar screen. This has the same function as depressing the EBL 1 switch on the
control panel for a long period.
CENTER Indicates that the EBL1 starting point is at the own ship position.
OFFSET Indicates that the EBL 1 starting point is not at the own ship position.
In this state, the starting point may be at the cursor position or it may be fixed at an arbitrary
position on the screen. When the button is clicked, the starting point will move with the
cursor position, then when the left button is clicked the starting point will be fixed at the
cursor location.
I!!l: After moving" the UL FIX EBL1 starting point, the starting point is fixed by the latitude and
longitude values.
If the starting point moves out of the screen, then it will be reset automatically so that the
starting point is at the own ship position.
Note: When the EBL1 starting point moves, the mode 0 or L is indicated by the position
selected among the EBL OFFSET ORIGIN menu.
@ EBl2 starting point mode

Sets whether the EBL2 starting point is placed at the center of the own ship or at an arbitrary
position on the radar screen.
Everything else is the same as that for the EBL2 starting point mode.
@) Speed unit setting

Sets the speed unit.
Clicking this button will open a pull-down menu. A unit can be selected from one of the
following. An alarm is activated if the selected speed unit is not connected to the radar.
Options: MANUAL, LOG (1-axis log), 2AXW (2-axis over water), 2AXG (2-axis over ground),
GPS
If the speed unit setting is "MANUAL," then placing the cursor over the numeric section and left
clicking will allow numeric input.
® SET/DRIFT
Turns on and off SET/DRIFT correction.
If CORRECTION is on for this setting, then "CORR" will be displayed next to the button. The
number displayed next to "CORR" at this time will be valid. Also, correction can only be set
when the speed unit is in the MANUAL or LOG (1-axis log) modes.
SET setting
Placing the cursor over the numeric section and left clicking will allow numeric input. This
setting is only valid if CORRECTION is ON.
DRIFT setting
Placing the cursor over the numeric section and left clicking will allow numeric input. This
setting is only valid if CORRECTION is ON.
® Date display mode

Sets the date mode to be displayed on the screen.
~
: Turns off the time display.
U : Global time display (UCT).
L : Local time display (LOCAL).
@ ARPA, PAST POSN vector mode setting

These set the vector display mode.
T: True vector
R: Relative vector
These settings work concurrently.
2-10
~\
@ ,Guard zone 1 ON/OFF function setting
.
Turns the guard zone 1 function on or off.
@ Guard zone 2 ON/OFF function setting

Turns the guard zone 2 function on or off.
@ MAIN MENU setting

This button has the same functions as the MENU switch on the control panel.
Clicking this button will display the "MAIN MENU."
@ PI menu setting
Clicking this button will open the "PI" menu.
This menu is used to set and display parallel index lines (PI).
@) GZ menu setting
Clicking this button will open the "GZ" menu.
This menu will turn on and off the range settings for guard zone 1 and 2.
@ TEST menu setting

Clicking this button will open the "TESr menu.
Checks the operational status of the radar equipment.
~ Navigation information readout (NAV)

Opens a list of navigation information files stored in the NAVIMAP INFO Menu.
® Personal code name (PIN)

Opens a list of personal code files in the PIN Menu.
2-11
--~".:. --
SECTION 3- -69
BASIC OPERATION
IIIIII1IIIII11111111
3.1 FLOW OF OPERATION 3-1 Select Pulse Length 3-48

Select Bearing Display Mode [AZI MODE] 3-48
Power ON and Start the System 3-2
Cancel Ship's Heading Line [HL OFF]. 3-49
Observe and Adjust Video 3-4
Cancel All Display Items Excepl Radar Echo, VRM,EBL, HL,RR, and
Tuning Operations 3-7
Cross Cursor Mark [+] [DATA OFF] 3-49
Acquire and Measurement Data 3-8
Display PI (Parallel Index Lines) [PI]. 3-5o
End the Operation and Stop the System 3-8 Move Own Ship's Display Position [OFF CENTER]. 3.53
3.2 MENU COMPOSITION 3-9 Display Other Ship's Trails [TRAILS]. 3-54
Display Own Ship's Tracks and Own Symbols [OWN TRACK] 3-55
3.3 PREPARATION 3-12 Marking [MARK]. 3-58
Tuning [rUNE]. 3-12 Display Range Rings [RANGE RINGS]. 3.59
Sensitivity Control [GAIN] 3-12 Display Variable Range Markers [VRM1NRM2]. 3-59
Display Brilliance Control 3-12 Set Guard Zones [GUARD ZONEj.. 3-61
Contrast Control [BRILL ViDEO]. 3-13 Reset Alarm Buzzer [ALARM ACKj 3-63
Sea Clutter Suppression [SEA]. 3-13 Set Alarm Sound Level 3-63
Rain/Snow Clutter Suppression [RAIN].. 3-14 FUNCTION 3-65
Bn1/iance Control 3-14 Expand Targets 3-66
Day/Night Mode Selection [DA YINIGHT] 3-22 Display Processed Videos 3-67
Color Setting [COLOR]. 3-22 Reduce Radar Interference 3-68
3.4 BASIC OPERATIONS 3-34 Personal Information 3-69
Display of Navigational Information 3-72
Move Cross Cursor Mark [+] by Trackball 3-34
Funclion of USER Swilch / OPTION Swilch 3-88
Methods for Setting Menu Items with the Trackball 3-34
Operation of Performance monitor 3-89
Use EBLs (Electronic Bearing Lines) 3-41
EBL Maneuvering 3-95
Set Floating EBL 3-43
Set Floating EBL 3-45
Select Range [RANGE]. 3-47 .
Set Maximum Range 3-47
,0
.,~ .... ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
3.1 FLOW OF OPERATION

Attention I I
• Do not put anything on the operation panel. If you put anything hot on it, it
may be deformed .
• Do not apply sudden force to the operation panel, trackball and controls.
Otherwise, some failure or damage may result.
POWER ONAND START

THE SYSTEM
,r
OBSERVE AND ADJUST

VIDEO
,IP
TUNING OPERATIONS
,IP
ACQUIRE AND
MEASUREMENT DATA
'F
END THE OPERATION AND
STOP THE SYSTEM
Each operation will be described in detail below.
3-1
...................................... ...' - ~ . 71
Power ON and Start the System· .. · . · · · · .
I I Attention I I
• Wait approximately 10 seconds before turning on the power again.
• A malfunction may occur if the power in the ship is suddenly interrupted during
operation of the radar. In this case, the power should be turned on again.
• Immediately after the radar is installed, if the system is not used for a long time,
•
or after the magnetron is replaced, warm-up the equipment in the standby mode
for 20 to 30 minutes before setting it to the transmit mode.
• If the warm-up time is short, the magnetron may cause sparks, resulting in an
unstable oscillation.
Start transmission on a short-pulse range and then send long pulses
sequentially. If the transmission is unstable in the meantime, reset the system
to the standby mode immediately and maintain it in the standby mode for 5 to 10
minutes before restarting the operation. Repeat these steps until the operation
is stabilized.
3-2
--.J~ •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
Procedures 1 Check that the ship's mains are turned on.
2 Press ~§j~ .
Orange lamp on ~ a'------'"
The warm-up time will appear.
3 Wait for completion of warm-up

When the warm-up time expires, the warm-up time screen disappears and
therSIJIIIW'; display on the upper-left corner of the radar display is
changed to .11;!iS"~:!
4 Press G+;y) .
The radar transmission and the scanner start rotating.
The iiAt~ on the upper-left corner on the radar display is changed
to_til:!.
Attention: Even if Cs':;y) is pressed before ,$T'ANOBV: is displayed, radar
transmission is not performed.
The method of transmission in case of emergency.
Procedures 1 Check that the ship's mains are turned on.
2 Press. ~H~
Orange lamp on ~ ~tE&~
The warm-up time will appear.
~
3 A push of the ~ 5 seconds or more vanishes the display
of warm-up time.
The radar transmission and the scanner start rotating.
The on the upper-left corner on the radar display is changed
to~~&1B'.
Note:
In the moment sag of a power supply, and the case of an unusual
operation outbreak, it can transmit, immediately after rebooting the power
supply.
Please do not use emergent transmitting operation except the above.
The life of a magnetron will be shortened if the warm-up is not completed.
3-3
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
73
Observe and Adjust Video· · • .-. -. ;
Procedures 1 Press
target
[.:-~
0==
to set the range to the scale required for
observation.
2 Turn the 0 or monitor brilliance knob.
Adjust to obtain the clearest targets.
Attention I I
• In the AUTO SEA mode, there are cases in which the targets are not displayed
because the sea clutter returns are suppressed in a simple way.
Use the normal [SEA] control during sailing under normal conditions.
• In the AUTO RAIN mode. there are cases in which the targets are not displayed
because the rain/snow clutter returns are suppressed in a simple way.
Use the manual [RAIN] control during sailing under normal conditions.
• The AUTO SEA and AUTO RAIN mode cannot be used concurrently. If one is
set to AUTO mode. the other will be set to MANUAL mode.
3-4
· -.... 1~·····································
In case of Using AUTO SEA/SEMI AUTO:
GAIN 1:::::::::1
AUTO 1 presO . Or, when the ~ button on SEAII:::::::::I
CSg:)
~~
the screen is pressed, AUTO is set. TRAC~
The AUTO Menu will appear.
TRAILS IO.5min I IT]
SEA~ is displayed at the lower left of the radar PROC IpRoc11
screen.
GAIN 1:::::::::1
SEMI AUTO 1 Press 0. Or, when the ~
ISEAII AUTO I
button on IRAINII::::I::::1
TRACK I 3min I
( SE!J
the screen is pressed,SEMI AUTO is set. TRAILS IO.5min I IT]
The SEMI AUTO Menu will appear. PROC IPROC11
SEA~ is displayed at the lower left of the radar
screen.
n
GAIN 1:::::::::1
ISEAII:::::::::10
IRAINI~
Cancellation 1 Press O. Or, press the IsEAI button TRACK~
( SEA:J PROC jPROC11
on the screen .
AUTO is released.
Note: When setting AUTO SEA I SEMI AUTO, the AUTO RAIN is set to the MANUAL
mode. Both AUTO SEA and AUTO RAIN cannot be set at the same time.
3-5
...................................... ~-.
75
In case of Using AUTO RAIN:
GAIN I::::: I
:s ::
ISEAII:::::::::I
Procedures
1 Press O. Or, press the ~ IRAINI~
TRACK 3f11iI{ I
( SEA )
button on the screen . PROC IPROC11
RAIN lAuTol is displayed on the radar
screen.
3
GAIN I::::13 ::I
Cancellation
[SEAl1:::::::::1
1 AUTO is released using the same IRAINII AUTO I
procedure that was used to set it. TRACK I 3min I
PROC IPROC11
3-6
~ ..,
16 .
Tuning Operations· .. · · · · · ..
Attention I I
• When the receiver is detuned, the best video may not be obtained even if the
maximum bar graph is displayed on the AUTO TUNE tuning indicator. In this
case, adjust the [TUNE] controlmanually so that the best video is presented.
~
Procedures 1 Press and select any range scale from 0.125 to 96
. (or 120) NM. (The current range scale is
displayed at the upper left of the radar
display.)
The range scale becomes shorter by c:=:::z pressing and longer by

pressing ~.
2 ROTATE O'
( TUJl£ )
Adjust the video to present the clearest targets.

If there is no adequate target, adjust [TUNE] control to indicate the maximum
bar graph on the turning indicator at the upper left of the radar display.
In case of Using AUTO TUNE: I AUTO I

1.SEAlRAIN
Procedures 1 Press O.
button.(:;:.'="fU....
NE......)
Or, press ~ANUAQ 2.TUNE
1~1.~MA'-N-U-A-L--~I
DMANUAL ~ AUTO
"AUTO' in "2.TUNE" will be set and '~' will

appear at the upper left of the radar display.
Cancellation 1 Repeat the procedures up to step 2

in case of using AUTO TUNE.
"MANUAL"in"2.TUNE"will be set and "~' at
the upper left of the radar display will change to
'1MANUAq" and AUTO TUNE mode will be
cancelled.
0.1 EXIT~
3-7
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 77
Acquire and Measurement Data· · · · .. · ..
For detailed operations for data acquisition and measurement, refer to Section 3.4 "BASIC
OPERATIONS" and Section 4 "MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING".
End the Operation and Stop the System· .
Exit 1 Press (s~J .

The radar transmission will end and the scanner will stop rotating.
The indication;J;.MSMI;J will be changed to$T-ls,l40elj.
Maintain the "STANDBY" mode if radar observation is restarted in a ]

relatively short time. Observation can be restarted simply by pressing
[ the [fXlSTBY] switch.
2 Press ~§j~.
The POWER will be turned off. Orange lamp off ~ ~~~
Note: When "PWR" is lit, data is being written to internal memory, so do not
open the shipboard breaker.
Also, when turning on the power supply again, be sure that the green
PWR switch lamp is off before pressing "PWR".
3-8
~ -~ .1.\ •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
. -.
3.2 MENU COMPOSITION

The Menu system of this radar equipment consists of the Main menu, Sub1 menu, Sub2
menu and Test menu.
Click !MENUI button on the screen.
~ I MAIN MENU ] .. I SUB1 MENU ]
l.IR
[i]ON 1. I SEmNG1 1
DOFF
2.TGTENH 2.1 LEVEL I
~OFF DON
3. NAV/MAPINFO 1
3.PROCESS
!2.PROC1 [jjl 4. TRACK I
4.FUNCTION 5. ARPA I
[fFUNCOFF ~ ]
8. PIN
5.EBLl
~CENTER D OFFSET 7. ISW =:J
8.EBL2 8. EBL MANEUVER I
[i]CENTER D OFFSET
7.e DATA OFF 1
.--- 9. SUB2 MENU I
8·1 SUB1 MENU I
9.1 CODE INPUT 1
0.1 EXIT ~ 0·1 EXIT I
I TEST MENU ] I SUB2 MENU ]

1.1 SELF CHECK I 1·1 COLOR ~
2·1 PANEL TEST 1
3.1 ARPATEST I
4.MAG CURRENT
~OFF DON
5.PM
[i]OFF DON
6·1 ERROR LOGGING I

7·1 SYSTEMIN~
0.1 EXIT I 0.1 EXIT I
The Main menu consists of the items of signal processing functions and EBl control, and
other functions are included in the Sub1 menu. The video color setting is included in the Sub2
menu. The Test menu consists of the items of input monitoring and Self-diagnostic functions.
Note: When the unit is shipped from the factory, this is set in "OPTION2" or the "MENU" key.
3-9
....................................... - ---
- - - 79
A. Main menu
~ MAINMENU~
l.lR I
DOFF ~ON
1 Displaying the Main menu. 2.TGTENH
~OFF DON
, 3.PROCESS
Click the !MENUI button on the 1-2-.P-RO-C-1----=~1
I
screen. 4.FUNCTION
The main menu will appear. I
!5.EBLl
[j.~.F--=-U·=N-=-C,,----:;;;:_O~FF~==r=1IiJ=1 3
I ~ CENTER D OFFSET
i 6.EBL2
'I ~ CENTER D OFFSET
7.C DATA OFF I
2. Ending the Main menu.
la. L
I
SUB1 MENU]
,
I 9. i CODE INPUT: i
~L
Click the IEXITj button on the
screen.
The MAIN Menu will be closed.
Em II
B. Sub1 menu I SUB1 MENU I
1 Displaying the Sub1 menu. · 1. I SETIING1 I

I 2. [ lEVEL I
13.( NAV/MAP INFO]
Click the !SUB1 MENUI button on
the screen. \ 4.1 TRACK I
The SUB1 Menu will appear. 15.L ARPA I
6.1 PIN I
1
7. [ ISW I
I a·r EBl MANEUVER [
I 9. C:==SUB2 MENU I
2 Ending the Sub1 menu.
Click the IEXIT! button on the I

screen.
The SUB1 Menu will be closed. 10.[
I
EXIT I
Note: When the unit is shipped from the factory, this is set in "OPTION2" or the
"MENU" key.
3-10
·. 0
,
.
A •
,~ .
C. Sub2 Menu
II SUB2 MENU ~I
1 Displaying the Sub2 men u. 1.1 COLOR! I
Press IMENUI, then ~UB1 MENUI and
ISUB2 MENUI or press \MENUI, then
IMENUI and IMENUI.

The Sub2 Menu will appear.
2. Ending the Sub2 menu.
0.1 . EXIT I
Press IEXI] or IMENUI.
The Sub2 Menu will be closed.
D. Test menu
1 Displaying the Test menu. TEST MENU ~
1. 1 SELF CHECK ~
2·1 PANEL TEST]
ClickOO·
3.1 ARPATEST I
The TEST Menu will appear. 4.MAG CURRENT
00
OFF 0 ON
5.PM
001
OFF 0 ON
6.1 ERROR LOGGING I
2 Ending the Sub1 menu. 7. [ SYSTEM INFO I
Click IEXI] or IMENUI.

The TEST Menu will be closed.
0.1 EXIT j
3-11
· ~-
- - 81
3.3 PREPARATION
Tuning [TUNE]· · ·.·· · · .. · · .
This control is used to tune the receiver.

c
~
If the receiver is detuned from the best level, the receiving sensitivity falls, and the targets on a long
range or the small targets on a short range may be overlooked.
In manual tuning, rotate the [TUNE] control clockwise or anticlockwise and adjust so that the target
echoes are the clearest. If no suitable target is present, adjust the control so that the tuning
indicator bar graph at the upper left of the radar display is maximized.
After setting the radar to the TRANSMIT mode, it take about 10 minutes until the oscillation
frequency of the magnetron is stabilized. Therefore, tune the receiver once again after about 10
minutes.
For automatic tuning, set "TUNE" to "ON" in the AUTO Menu. (Refer to page 3-8).
Sensitivity Control [GAIN]· · .
o( GAIN )
This control is used to control the radar receiving sensitivity.

Clockwise rotation of the [GAIN] control increases receiving sensitivity and extends the radar
observation range. If the sensitivity is too high, the receiver noise will increase to reduce the
contrast of the targets with the background video and make the targets obscure on the display. To
observe densely crowded targets or the targets on a short range, rotate the [GAIN] control
anticlockwise to reduce the sensitivity so that the targets are easy to observe. Be careful not to
overlook small and important targets.
Display Brilliance Control .................................
o
This control is used to adjust the brilliance of the entire display.
Clockwise rotation of the [BRILL] control increases the brilliance of the entire display. Adjust the
[BRILL] control to obtain the best-to-see display with optimum brilliance.
3-12
, ~. 82
. •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
Contrast Control [BRILL VIDEO]· · · · ·
The contrast of the radar video display can be adjusted in four levels. Press the PANEL button on
to VIDEO ~ - () - ~ -+. .
the screen, then select IVIDEOI. Each time the brilliance button ~ is clicked, the screen will switch
The current mode is displayed on the lower right of the radar
screen. (The VIDEO indication will change to the PANEL indicated in several second.) Adjust the
[BRILL VIDEO] switch to obtain the best-to-see video with optimum contrast.
Attention I I
• In the AUTO SEA mode, there are cases in which the targets are not displayed
because the sea clutter returns are suppressed in a simple way.
Use the manual [SEA] control during sailing under normal conditions.
• In the AUTO RAIN mode, there are cases in which the targets are not displayed
because the rain/snow clutter returns are suppressed in a simple way.
Use the manual [SEA] control during sailing under normal conditions.
Sea Clutter Suppression [SEA]· .... · · · ... · .. · ... · · · · · · · .. ·
o
( SEA )
This control is used to reduce the receiving sensitivity on a short range to suppress the sea clutter
returns.
Clockwise rotation of the [SEA] control can suppress sea clutter returns more effectively. Be
careful not to suppress sea clutter excessively. Otherwise, small buoys and boats may disappear
from the radar display.
When setting "SEA" to "SEA ~' , sea clutter returns can be suppressed depending on their
intensity levels. This setting is used for the case in which the sea clutter returns are different in
their directions.
Switching between manual and auto is done by clicking the "SEA AUTO" / "SEMI AUTO" button on
the lower left of the screen, or pressing the "SEA" knob.
Note: It is not allowed to use both the AUTO / SEMI AUTO SEA mode and the AUTO
RAIN mode at the same time.
3-13
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 83
Rain/Snow Clutter Suppression [RAIN]' · .
o~
This control is used to suppress rain or snow clutter returns. Clockwise rotation of the [RAIN]
control makes clearer those targets that may be hidden among rain/snow clutter returns. Be
careful not to overlook small targets in the clutter. This control also has the effect of reducing sea
clutter, so that it is more effective to use this control together with the [SEA] control.
Rotate the control anticlockwise to the maximum in the normal condition.
When setting ISEA/RAINI to !AUTO RAINI in the AUTO Menu, rain/snow clutter can be suppressed
depending upon the intensity level. When setting !SEA/RAINI to !MANUAq in the AUTO Menu, the
mode is changed into the MANUAL mode.
SWitching between manual and auto is done by clicking the "RAIN IAUTOr' button on the lower left of
the screen, or pressing the "RAIN" knob.
Note: It is not allowed to use both the AUTO RAIN mode and AUTO SEA mode at the
same time.
Brilliance Control' · · · .
press~ANE0 . Or press the ~ right side of "PANEL" on the screen.
The BRILLIANCE switches [PANEL], [BRILL VIDEO], and [BRILL ARPA] are used to adjust the
brilliance of the panel, video and ARPA markers. Each time a switch is pressed, the brilliance is
increased by one level up to 4 or 5 levels. When the maximum level is reached, the brilliance is
reset to the original panel.
[PANEL] AdjUSts the lighting for the characters on the controls and switches on the
operational panel.
When IPANEq on the screen is pressed, the adjustment status of "BRILL
VIDEO" and "BRILL ARPA" are changed.
Then, each of the levels can be set if the brilliance level button on the right is
pressed.
[BRILL VIDEO] Adjusts the brilliance of radar display.

[BRILL ARPA] Adjusts the brilliance of ARPA information
Brilliance Control by Menu Operation

[RANGE RINGA] Adjusts the brilliance of the fixed range scale.
[VRM] Adjusts the brilliance of the variable range scale (VRM1 and VRM2).
[EBL] Adjusts the brilliance of electronic bearing cursor (EBL 1 and EBL2).
[CHARACTER] Adjusts the brilliance of characters.
3-14
84
~
,
• • A
.
Procedures 1 Click the !MENUI on the screen. Or press the IOPTION~ button.
The Main Menu will appear.
2 Click !SUB1 MENU I.
3 Click ILEVEq.
The LEVEL Menu will appear.
4 Click the level setting section of IRANGE RINGS!.

11.RANGE RINGS! will be selected and the following pull-down menu will
appear.
I SUB1 MENU I
I LEVEL 1
11.RANGE RINGS I
4.LEVEL4 ~
1.LEVEL1
2.LEVEL2
3.LEVEL3
3.EBL
4 LEVEL4
4.CHARACTER
1.c.;: .4.....:..LEV=-=--E-L4-,---------=-~I
5.VIDEO(ECHO)
1"'-:-4.7-:LE=-V~E~L4=-------=~1
6ARPA
1'-"5--'LE=V=E;O-;L5;;------=~
--. I
7.BUZZER
1r=7--,---.LEV=E~L7=-------=~1
1 0. 1 EXIT
3-15
....................................... _- 85
5 Select any level from 1 to 4 for RANGE RINGS brilliance in
the pull-down menu and press it.
The default value is set to @.LEVEL4I.
6 Click the level setting section of IVRMI.
~.VRMI will be selected and the following pull-down menu will appear.
3
c I
I L SUBl MENU I
II LEVEL I
i 1.RANGE RINGS
(4.LE;:-CV=EL'---;;4--!"'!"'I~~
[YRM
4.LEVEL4 IYJ
3.EBL l'l.LEVE=L'--'--l------==1
2.LEVEL2
4.CHARJ 3.LEVEL3
E'.ili"'$
5.vIDEO(E=-=C~Hc=,O~)~ ~
[!I..EVEL4 ~
6ARPA
~LEVEL5 ~l
7.BUZZER
i 7.LEVEL-7 -B
O. C EXIT I
7 Select any level from 1 to 4 for VRM (VRM1 and VRM2)

brilliance in the pull-down menu and press it.
The default value is set to @.LEVEL4I.
3-16
..-
- .
~~ .
8 Click the level setting section of IEBq .
~ will be selected and the following pull-down menu will appear.
SUB1 MENU ~
LEVEL ===j I
t.RANGE RINGS
1=74.~LE~V=Ec-L4°---~=1
2.VRM
14.LEVEL4 ~I
~ I
,4.LEVEL4 ~'
4.CHARJ 1.LEVEL1
2.LEVEL2
5.VIDEd 3.LEVEL3
4.LEVEL4
6ARPA 15.LEVEL5 ~
7.BUZZ@VEL7 ~
0.1 EXIT
9 Select the brightness of the electronic cursor (EBl1, EBl2)

from the pull-down menu, select 1 through 4 with the
trackball, then click.
The default value is set to @.LEVEL4\.
3-17
....................................•., ~.
87
10 Click the level setting section of ICHARACTER!.
@.CHARACTERj will be selected and the following pull-down menu will appear.
i SUBl MENU II
I LEVEL I
1.RANGE RINGS
[ 4.LEV=E=--L4-~~=1
2.VRM
c-c~.L-=EV:-:-:E=L---:-4---;c~=1
lj
3
3.EBL
[4I.EVEL4 ~I
14.CHARACTER I
! 4.LEVEL4 ~,
5.VIDEQ 1.LEVEL1 !
!2.LEVEL2
6.ARPA I 3.LEVEL3
7.BUZZER
1~7'-:--c.LE=V=E-;-:;;L7;----;~=1
0.1 EXIT
11 Select the character brightness from the pull-down menu,

and set 1 through 4.
The default value is set to 14.LEVEL41.
r
r - 3-18
~
. - ..... aa •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
12 Click the level setting section of IVIDEO!.
~.VIDEO (ECHO~ will be selected and the following pull-down menu will
appear.
SUBl MENU I
LEVEL I
1.RANGE RINGS
!4.LEVE·L4 8
2.VRM
!4.LEVEL4 ~J
3.EBL
14.LEVEL4 ~I
4.CHARACTER
1c-'-'4:....:..LE=V=E~L4~---=~1
.VIDEO(ECHO)
4.LEVEL4~
6ARPA 1.LEVEL1
2.LEVEL2
7.BUZZE 3.LEVEL3
4.LEVEL4
O. I EXIT . ==:dJ
3-19
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -#_ 89
13 Select the echo brightness from the pull-down menu, and set
1 through 4.
The default value is set to [4TEVEL41.
14 Click the level setting section ofIARPAj.
~.ARP~ will be selected and the following pull-down menu will appear.
15 Select the ARPA brightness from the pull-down menu, and

set 1 through 5.
.The default value is set to I 5.LEVEL41.
3-20
gO
- .•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
.
After the brilliance levels are adjusted, the following menu will appear.
II SUBl MENU
I LEVEL
1.RANGE RINGS
!4.LEVEL4 ~I
2.VRM
!4.LEVEL4 ~I
3.EBL
14.LEVEL4 ~I
4.CHARACTER
1---:-4.-:-:LE=-V=E-=-L4:-----,~=1
5.VlDEO
1---:-4.-:-:LE=-V=E-=-L4~---'~=1
a.ARPA
1-=-5.-:-:LE=-V=E.,.....L4:-----,~=1
7.BUZZER
I-=-7.::-::LE=-=VE==-L-=-7-=~I
0.1 EXIT I
The menu display after adjustment shows the level values set for the individual
brilliance items.
Exit 1 Click IEXIT I.

The Sub1 Menu will reappear.
2 Click \EXIT I.
These set brilliance levels are saved depending upon the Day/Night mode.
3-21
· -- 91
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
Day/Night Mode Selection [DAY/NIGHT]· ·.
Whenever the [DAY/NIGHT] switch is pressed, the mode is changed over from IDAY11 ~ IDAY~ ~
INIGHT11 ~ INIGHT2j and the current mode is indicated at the lower right of the radar display. The
brilliance levels selected for each mode are saved. For brilliance adjustment, refer to page 3 -12.
For selection of DAY/NIGHT mode by menu operation, refer to "Color Setting" on the next page.
3
Color Setting [COLOR]· .
The colors of the Day/Night mode [Day1, 2/NIGHT1, 2], system, background color outside the
bearing scale, background color inside the bearing scale, echoes, characters, dials, own ship's track,
and radar trails are set up.
Color Adjustment by Menu Operation

[DAY/NIGHT] Register of DAY/NIGHT mode
[SYSTEM] System color adjustment
[OUTER PPI] Adjustment of the background color outside the bearing scale
[INNER PPI] Adjustment of the background color inside the bearing scale
[CHARACTER] Adjustment of character colors
[DIAL] Adjustment of dial color
[ECHO] Adjustment of echo colors
[TRAILS] Adjustment of the color of radar trails
[OWN TRACK] Adjustment of the color of own ship's track
Procedures 1 Click the IMENUI on the screen.
2 Click lSuB1 MENU I.

3 Click /SUB2 MENUI.
4 Click ICOLOR] .
The COLOR Menu will appear.
3-22
... -
9: .
5 Left-click the selection section (combo box) of \DAY/NIGlj.
11.DAY/NIGHl1 will be selected and the following pull-down menu will appear.
2.SYST
2.DAY2
3.0UTEI 3.NIGHT1
4.NIGHT2
4.INNER PPI
-=t:!'il
l--:;-l--;;;;.B-;-LA;-C;C=K'----·
5.CHARACTER
1--71'-:-:-.W==:'H=JT=-E-----=~I
6.D1AL 11.WHJTE ~I
7.ECHOI1.YELLOW ~I
8.TRAILS~~ _ _=
11.SKY ~I
9.0WN TRACK
1--7'1.~SKY'=7-------~=1
0.1 EXIT I
6 Select the Day/Night mode from the pull-down menu, select 1

through 4 with the trackball, then left-click.
3-23
1.93
..................................... ~~~~
7 Left-click the selection section (combo box) of !SYSTEMI.
~.SYSTEMI will be selected and the following pull-down menu will appear.
Il
I
SUB2 MENU
COLOR
II
II
3
1.0AY/NIGHT
1--=:-'1.'=-OA':-::Y..,-------;OS
~.SYSTEM
11.BLUE1
3.0UTE ----
2.BLUE2
4.1NNE 3.GRAY
4.BLACK
5.CHARACTER
[1.WHIT=E----=~1
6.DlAL [[WHITE ~I
7.ECHOI1.YELLOW ~I
8.TRAlLS'7-==-:-_-------;=
I1.SKY ~I·
9.0WN TRACK I
11.SKY e
1
0.1 EXIT II
8 Select the System color from the pull-down menu, select 1

3-24
--
,. . . 9~······································
9 Left-click the selection section (combo box) of !OUTER PPII.
l3.oUTER ppij will be selected and the following pull-down menu will appear.
I SUB2 MENU ~
I COLOR I
1.DAY/Nr7IG~H7:T:-:--_---=
11.DAY ~I
2.SYSTEM
Ir-o-~-=.B"""""LU=E:-:-l----,~=l
.OUTER PPI
1.BLACK
2.BLUE
3.D-BLUE
1 1.WHITE ~I
1
6.DIAL 1.WHITE ~I
7.ECHO!1.YELLOW ~I
8.TRAlLS=---- ~
11.SKY ~I
9.0WN TRACK
l....:.,.:l.:..,,:,SKY::,,:...:....--~~
0.1 EXIT ~
10 Select the background color outside the bearing scale from

the pull-down menu, select 1 through 3 with the trackball,
then left-click.
3-25
·······································~95
--. ...
11 Left-click the selection section (combo box) of IINNER ppj.

~.INNER PPJI will be selected and the following pull-down menu will appear.
I SUB2 MENU I
I COLOR I
l.DAY/N=:IG==-H-=-:::T,.-:--_ _
11.DAY S
2.SYSTEM
1~1=.B-:-:LU=E~l--$J
i 3.0UTER PPI
i I---:-l-=.B,..-LA:-::C:-::K-----;~=
... j
.INNER PPI
1.BLACK
5.CHA
6.DIAL I 7:;;, ;;1..- ~
7.ECHO[1.YELLOW ~
·rS.TRAILS
11.SKY ~
9 OWN
1 • TRACK I
['.SKY ~I I
0.1 EXIT I
12 Select the background color inside the bearing scale from

the pull-down menu, select 1 through 3 with the trackball,
then left-click.
3-26
• .-
,
~~
.
13 Left-elick the selection section (combo box) ofICHARAcTERj.
~.CHARACTERj will be selected and the following pull-down menu will appear.
I SUB2MENU ~
I COLOR I
1.DAYIN=IG=='H:..,:.,T-:--_----=
!l.DAY ~I
2.SYSTEM
1"""O"""1.=BL:-:"U=E:7"l----..,~
3.0UTER PPI
1"7""1.==-BLA~CK-O---~;==;1
4.1NNER PPI
1--:-1.B==-LA~CK-"-------"'~=1
15.CHARACTER
1.WHITE
~I
~I
0.1 I
14 Select the character color from the pull-down menu, select 1

through 3 with the trackball, then left-elick.
3-27
97
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
15 Left-elick the selection section (combo box) of IOIAW.

~ will be selected and the following pull-down menu will appear.
'[ SUB2 MENU II

I
I
L
1.DAY/NIGHT
COLOR I!
I
3
! [1.DAY ~I
2.SYSTEM
[IBLUEl ~I
3.OUTERr-.-:-::PP=-:-:I~:-::--------;=
i 1.BLACK ~I
4.INNER PPI
;....:...L!-'---.B'-----LA-C-K-~~=I
5.CHARACTER
1=1.:":-:W~HIT=E=-------;~=1
6.DIAL I 1.WHITE ~
7.ECH0 2.AMBER
1
8.TRAIU 3.GREEN
I.Un.
9.0WN TRACK I
Il·SKY ~I
O. L EXIT II
16 Select the dial color from the pull-down menu, select 1

through 3 with the trackball, then left-cllck.
3-28
·9~····································
- .. ..
17 Left-elick the selection section (combo box) of IECHO!.
It.ECHO/will be selected and the following pull-down menu will appear.
I SUB2 MENU I
I COLOR I
1.DAY/NF:'IG=:=-H"-;':T,..-;--_---=
11.DAY ~I
2.SYSTEM
/;-:;-1=.B:-;LU=E~l ----=~I
3.0UTER PPI
1rc-1-=.B~LA,...--,C~K,------------=~1
4.INNER PPI
1--:-1-=.B:-LA;--:;C=K,--------~=1
5.CHARACTER
l~l.~WH;:;::;IT~E,-------;~=1
6.DIAL 11.WHITE ~I
7.ECH~
8.TRAI~
2.GREEN
9.0WN 13.AMBER
11.SKY ~I
0·1 EXIT =:J
18 Select the echo color from the pull-down menu, select 1

3-29
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••. - - 99
19 Left-click the selection section (combo box) ofITRAILSj.
~.TRAILSI will be selected and the following pull-down menu will appear.
C SUB2 MENU I
! COLOR I
1.DAY/NIGHT
Lir'=-l==-.D'7-:Ay~-----;O~=1
2.SYSTEM
[fBC-CLU--=Eo-,.-l--~=1
3.0UTER PPI
r:l1---=.B::-:-LA--=-C=K,..,,----------;~=!
4.1NNER PPI
[MLACK ~I
5.CHARACTER
I--c.:l':-:-.W~HIT===-E --=~I
6.DIAL [l.WHITE ~I
7.ECHOll.YELLOW ~I
IS.TRAILS
O. LI _
20 Select the radar trails colors from the pull-down menu, select
1 through 3 with the trackball, then left-click.
3-30
tQO
- ~ ... •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
21 Left-click the selection section (combo box) of

\OWN TRACK!.
~.OWN TRAcKl will be selected and the following pull-down menu will appear.
I SUB2 MENU ~
I COLOR ~
1.DAY/NIGHT
r.ll"=-.D:":'AY"""---:=S---C~=
2.SYSTEM
1--,-1.=B:-:LU-=E~l-----=~1
3.0UTER PPI
l:-:;-l.=BLA~C=-K-~
4.INNER PPI
1--:-1.='=BLA----=-=-CK--:-~
5.CHARACTER
~=IT=E----;~=I
6.DIAL 11.WHITE ~I
7.ECHOll.YELLOW ~I
a.TRAILS
1r-:-1.-=SKY-=-=------=~1
I 12.GREEN
3.WHITE
4.YELLOW
5.PINK
6.BLUE
22 Select the own track colors from the pull-down menu, select
1 through 6 with the trackball, then left-click.
3-31
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••. 101
After the colors are adjusted, the following menu will appear.
l SUS2MENU I
I COLOR I
1.DAY/NIGHT
1;;:,-;1.'=:-DA':'-::Y-:----~=1
2.SYSTEM
1-""'-1."="S"""'LU-=E""""l--~=I
a.OUTER PPI
Ie-:l--=.S:-:-LA-=-C=Kc:----;O~=1
4.1NNER PPI
1....:....1.....:....S-LA,--,:C-K--~
5.CHARA~C~TE=:,::R==-_---=
il.WHITE ~I
; 6.DIAL iT.wHITE ~I
7.ECHOll.YELLOW ~!
a.TRAILS
1-=:-1.=-cSKY-=-=---------;~=1
9.0WN T-=,..:RA:.,:-C==-K-=----_-=
I1.SKY ~l
0.1 EXIT I
The menu display after adjustment shows the colors set for
individual items.
Exit 1 Click IEXIT I.

2 Click !EXIT I.
3-32
...... \;.~~~
., ~
.
Radar Interference Rejection [IR] ·· ··· .
Procedures Left-click the I® IRI. This switch selects ON/OFF.

o When setting from the menu
1 Click IMENUI.
2 Click "ON" radio button of [J[J.

"ON"in"1.IR"will be set.
Then. the mark I® IRI at the lower left of the radar display will be shown and
the radar interference in turned on.
I MAIN MENU
l.IR
oOFF !!JON
2.TGT ENH
[j] OFF DON
3.PROCESS
~-.P-R-OC-l-=:S
4.FUNcnON
11.FUNC OFF ~I
5.EBLl
[j] CENTER D OFFSET
6.EBL2
[j] CENTER D OFFSET
7.1 DATA OFF I
8.1 SUBl MENU I
9.1 CODE INPUT I
0.1 EXIT I
Cancellation 1 Click "OFF" radio button of [J[J .

"OFF"in"1.1R"is set and the radar interference rejecter turned off.
Exit 1 Click IEXI] .

The Main Menu will be closed.
Attention I I
• When watching a radar beacon or a SART signal, set the following parameter to
suppress the video.
IR OFF (Interference Rejecter OFF).
3-33
~ ~ - .~
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• ~ 103
3.4 BASIC OPERATIONS

Move Cross Cursor Mark [+] by Trackball· · · .
Trackball
Trackball section Trackball section

left button right button
Scroll button
No used
The cross cursor mark [+] is used for position designation and other purposes in various operating
procedures. The cross cursor mark [+] moves in conjunction with the trackball. If the trackball is
rotated up and down or left and right, the cross cursor mark follows the movements of the trackball.
The distance and bearing between own ship and the cross cursor mark [+] are indicated on the
upper right of the radar display. Before operating other controls and switches, the operator must be
familiar with manipulation of the trackball and the movements of the cross cursor mark. When
rotating the trackball, the cross cursor mark [+] will not move if the palm is apart from the hand
sensor section. Approach the palm to the hand sensor section and operate the trackball.
When making a menu or button selection, the "+" cursor will change to arrow ~ .
Click: In this manual, "clicking" refers to pressing the trackball button.

Left-button = This is called "left-clicking".
Methods for Setting Menu Items with the Trackball' .. · ... · ..
In addition to the method for setting menu items with the switches, the trackball can also be used to
set menu items in almost the same manner as with the control panel.
There are several methods for setting an item in a menu with the trackball.
3-34
-.
iQ~
.-." .
[ I] Change the Setting of RaCiio Button Type
When an item has alternative selections, for example, ON and OFF, radio buttons are
provided to set the item in many menu items.
CD D ON 1_' OFF
When the current item is set in the OFF position as shown in Figure CD,
® ~ON 1_' OFF
Move the arrow cursor to the ON position with the trackball.
@ ~ON I-I OFF
With the arrow cursor on the ON position, press the left button of the trackball.
@
~ON DOFF
The Setting will change from OFF to ON.
When changing from ON to OFF, operate in the same manner.
3-35
'•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••- - 105 ,
[Il ] Changing the Setting of Pull-down Menu

This method is used when there are three or more selections:
CD When PROC1 is set as shown below:
12. PROC1 [y]

® Move the arrow cursor to the position that is shown below (downward triangle).
12.PRoc1 ~
3
@ Set the arrow cursor on the position in Figure as shown below and press the left button on
the trackball.
12. PROC1 ~
@ The pull-down menu will appear and selection items are displayed in the menu.
@ Move the cursor with the trackball.
@ Set the cursor on the item to be selected and press the left-button on the trackball.
3. PROC2 ~
1. OFF
2.'PROC1
(f) The pull-down menu will be closed and the setting is established.
13. PROC2 ~
3-36
-\e w•••••• • ••••••••••••••••••• • ••••• • ••••
- .. [m] Changing the Setting of Pull-down Menu
This method can be used in most of boxes where a numeric value is to be entered.
® O.O-100.0kts I 10.0 I~ I
When the value is set as shown in the figure CD:
The minimum and maximum (min-max) are displayed on the left side and the unit is also
displayed if present.
~ O.O-100.0kts I 10.0 I~
To increase the value, move the arrow cursor to the position in the figure ~ (upward
triangle) with the trackball.
@ O.O-100.0kts I 10.0 I ~§,

With the arrow cursor on the position in the figure ~, click the trackball section left button
once.
@ O.O-100.0kts I 10.1 I ~~
The value will be increase in the minimum step.
@ To increase the value continuously:

Hold down the trackball section left button in the figure @.
@ To decrease the value:

Move the arrow cursor to the downward triangle in the figure @.
The following procedures are the same as for increasing.
3-37
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• -'j)~O 7
- - -
[W] Changing the Setting of Pull-down Menu

This method is used when a number of items have alternative selections of ON and OFF in
one menu. (In this case, only one item is presented.)
CD D NAV LINE
The status in the figure CD means that the item is OFF.

3
<Zl ~ NAV LINE
Move the arrow cursor to the position in the figure (2) with the trackball.
@ [;l NAV LINE
With the arrow cursor on the position in the figure ~. press the trackball section left
button.
® ~NAV LINE
A check mark will appear in the checkbox and the function will be turned on.
® To turn off the function:
With the checkbox and arrow cursor position as shown in the figure @, press the
trackball section left button.
3-38
1Qi~ ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
--
[V] Switch Type
This method is used, for example, in switching the current menu to the next.
CD I SUBl MENU I
A menu has an item as presented in the figure CD.
(2) I SUBl MENW
Move the arrow cursor to the position in the figure ® with the trackball.
@ I SUBl MENQ
With the arrowcursor over Ir--S-U-B-l-M-E-N-U--I, press the trackball section left
button.
@ The Sub1 Menu will appear.
* In some selections of this type, the key color will change in the step ® entering a
certain mode.
To reset the setting, select the same item again.
Example: Select NAV/MAP INFO Menu "SHIFT".
NAV SHIFT mode
3-39
> ,> •
••••••• • • ••••••• ••••• ••••••••• •• ••••• ,~"g'

[VI] Vertical Scroll Type
The display is scrolled vertically.
This method is mainly used for functions such as display of a stored file.
CD
****
* ** ~
•
f--
**
~
The vertical scrollbar is provided in a menu as shown in the figure CD.

®
**** I•
***
**
...
When scrolling the display, move the arrow cursor to the position in the figure (upward
triangle) with the trackball.
~@
****
***
**
...
With the arrow cursor on the position in the figure ~. click the trackball section left
button.
***
**
I Scroll to the Upper item. I
******
...
@ To scroll continuously the display upward:
Hold down the trackball section left button on the trackball in the figure @.
@ To scroll the display downward:

Move the arrow cursor to the downward triangle in the figure ~.
The following procedures are the same as for the upward scroll.
3-40
. .. -l1Q •••••••••••••••••••••• ~ •••••••••••••••
Use EBls (Electronic Bearing lines)· .
The EBls (Electronic Bearing Lines) are indispensable to measure distances and bearings of
targets.
Before operation. the operator must become familiar with the operation of EBls.
8 8
EBl1 Operation
If EBL2 is selected. press 8 to select EBl1 before operation. (The currently selected EBl is
indicated by selected characters in the lower right of the radar display.)
Procedures 1 Press
C( I EBl1 will be displayed

in reverse video.
Press
8 EBl1 will disappear.
3-41
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• i.~
,111
EBL2 Operation
If EBl1 is selected, press J

(EBL2 to select EBl2 before operation. (The currently selected EBl is
indicated by characters in the lower right of the radar display.)
Procedures 1 Press (EBL2)

EBl2 will b~ displayed
~ I in reverse video.
Press (EBL2) ,
EBL2 will disappear.
EBL Bearing Display

The bearing values of EBl1 and EBl2 currently displayed within the PPI video
are indicated at the lower right of the radar display. For the currently operable
EBl, the characters EBl1 or EBl2 are displayed in reverse video.
Starting Point of EBL

The starting point of the currently operating EBl can be changed over to the
center of the radar display (CENTER) or to any offset position (OFFSET).
Note: For OFFSET of the ESL's starting point, it is possible to determine whether the
starting point is fixed at the specific latitude and longitude.
3-42
.
_~
\\
~
.
Set Floating EBl· · · . · · .. · · .. · · . · ·.
To offset the starting point of EBl1 during its operation:
I
EBl1 I
T0370° [Cl
Click the right figure C. ~
• Use the trackball to move the starting point of "EBl1".
• The starting point can be fixed by clicking the left trackball button.
When adjusting from the menu,

I MAIN MENU I
[ I] Click IMENUI. l.IR
DOFF ~ON
The Main Menu will appear. 2.TUNE
I!J OFF DON
3.PROCESS
1r-2-.P-RO-C-l--~=1
Click "5.EBl 1".
4.FUNCTION
"OFFSET" in "5.EBl1" will be set. !l.FUNC OFF ~
5.EBLl
I!J CENTER D OFFSET
6.EBL2
Move the starting point of EBl1 with the trackball. I!J CENTER D OFFSET
Click the trackball section left button to fix the starting point
7.1 DATA OFF I
of EBl1.
8.1 SUBl MENU I
9.1 CODE INPUT I
To reset the starting point of EBl1 to the center of the radar 0.1 EXIT 1
display.
Click "5.EBl1".
"CENTER" in "5.EBl1" will be set.
Click~.
[n] Continue to press 8 also allow you to set the starting point of EBl1.
Continue to press ~., ·OFFSET" in "5.EBL1" will be set.
Continue to press 8. I "CENTER" in "5.EBl1" will be set.
Note: For OFFSET of the EBL's starting point, it is possible to determine whether the
starting point is fixed at specific latitude and longitude.
3-43
--~:. ..... "'- ...
·······································113
-- -
To offset the starting point of EBL2 during its operation:
[ I] Click IMENUI. C MAIN MENU I

l.IR
The Main Menu will appear. DOFF !!JON
2.TGT ENH
00 OFF DON
3.PROCESS
Click "S.EBL2". liffi('---2-.P-RO-C-1--~=1
"OFFSET" in "S.EBL2" will be set. 4.FUNCTION
11.FUNC OFF ~I
5.EBL1
OOCENTER D OFFSET
Move the starting point of EBL2 with the trackball. 6.EBL2
OOCENTER DOFFSET
Click the trackball section left button to fix the starting point
of EBL2.
7. L DATA OFF 'I
8. L SUB1 MENU] !
9. C CODE INPUT I
To reset the starting point of EBL2 to the center of the radar
display. 0.1 EXIT I
Click "S.EBL2".
"CENTER" in "S.EBL2" will be set.
Click~.
[ IT ] Continue to press 8 also allow you to set the starting point of EBL2.
Continue to press (EBL2)., "OFFSET" in "S.EBL2" will be set.
~
Continue to press (EBL2). I "CENTER" in "S.EBL2" will be set.
3-44
..-. -'1-1' .
Set Floating EBl· · · .. · ·· · .. · .
When this function is turned on and the starting point of EBl is moved to a position, the starting
point can be fixed at the latitude and longitude of that position. This function is effective when the
bearing from a certain point is repeatedly measured.
With this function OFF, the starting point of EBl is pasted on the radar display. When own ship is
moved, the starting point will remain at the same point on the display.
Procedures 1 Select in the follo.wing order: "MENU", "MENU", "SETTING1",

and "SETTING2".
The SETIING2 Menu will appear.
2 Click IEBl OFFSET ORIGINI.

The EBl OFFSET ORIGIN menu will appear.
[I] Setting the Mode .when the EBl1 Starting Point is Moved
1 Perform the operating procedure 1 . I SUBl MENU~
The EBl OFFSET ORIGIN Menu will appear. I SETTING2 I

"EBl1 Ul FIX" is set to the initial mode "OFF". I EBl OFFSET ORlGlt[]
When the EBl1 starting point is moved, the 1.EBLl Lll FIX
starting point of EBl1 will remain at the set
~OFF DON
2.EBL2 Lll FIX
position on the radar display. ~OFF DON
2 Select the "ON" radio button.

"EBl1 Ul FIX" will switch from "OFF" to "ON".
When the EBl1 starting point is moved to
another position, the starting point of EBl1 will
be fixed at the latitude and longitude on that
position.
3 Select "OFF".
Place the cursor over the "OFF" radio button, 0.1 EXIT I
and left-click.
3-45
,
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• ~lt5
[II] Setting the Mode when the EBL2 Starting Point is Moved
1 Perform the operating procedure 1

c= SUBl MENU I
and 2. [ SETIlNG2 I
The EBl OFFSET ORIGIN Menu will appear. I EBl OFFSET ORIGIN:J
1.EBL1 Ul FIX
"EBl2 Ul FIX" is set to the initial mode "OFF".
~OFF DON
When the EBl2 starting point is moved, the 2.EBl2 Ul FIX
starting point of EBl2 will remain at the set ~OFF DON
position on the radar display.
•
I
2 Select the "ON" radio button.
"EBl2 L/L FIX" will switchfrom "OFF" to "ON". I
When the EBl2 starting point is movedto another
position, the starting point of EBL2 will be fixed at Ii
the latitudeand longitudeon that position.
I
I
3 Left-elick the "OFF" radio button.

The setting will switch from "ON" to "OFF". looc EXIT
Exit 1 Click IEXI1j .

The SETTING2 Menu will reappear.
2 Click IEXI] .
The SETTING2 Menu will be closed.
Notes • The course data and the own ship's latitude and longitude data are required
to activate this function.
• With this function ON, the starting point will be returned to the center if the
starting point of EBl is moved to outside the radar display.
3-46
.-\1~
: .
Select Range [RANGE]· · ··· ··.·.
Range scale (NM)
~ t
2
+
Range marker (NM)
Any range scale is selectable from 0.125, 0.25, 0.5, 0.75, 1.5,3,6, 12,24,48, and 96 (or 120)
nautical miles.
Pressing l=.J decreases the range and pressing (+l increases the range in each step.
The selected range scale is indicated at the upper left of the display together with the range ring
interval with it.
Set Maximum Range· · · · · ... · · · · · · · · · · · .... · · · .. · · · · · · · · · ·
The maximum range available may be set to 96nm or 120nm.
Procedures 1 Select in the following order:

"MENU","MENU··,and "1.SETTING1". I SUBl MENU I
I SEmNGl I
1.SET GYRO
The SETTINGl menu will appear. 0.0-359.9" Ir--..."..o.-oI!lJ
2.SELECT SPEED
2 Select radio button of ·'S.RANGE I
2.1 AXIS =m
SELECT". 3. I SET MANUAL SPEED I
Each time this switch is pressed, the 4.1 SELECT NAV I
maximum range is changed between 96 nm or . 5. I SET/DRIFT ]
120 nm. 6. 1 TIME/DAY ~
7.PRF
Note: When the maximum range is set to 120nm, the next 12.HIGH ~
range of 48nm is 120nm and so the range of 96nm a.RANGE SELECT
cannot be selected. ~ 96nm o 120nm
9.1 SEmNG2 ~
Exit 1 Click IExrTj . 0.1 EXIT I

The Subl Menu will reappear.
2 Click~.
The Subl Menu will be closed.
3-47
.
_
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 117
Select Pulse Length· ·····.·· ·.·· .
Place the cursor over the [IISPI, and left-click.
The transmission pulse length can be changed over in three levels ( wJlSP~, wfiMP ~ , and
Wn LP~ ) every time the [PL] switch is pressed. The selected pulse length is indicated at the 3
upper left of the radar display. The pulse length can be changed only when the range is set to one
of 0.75, 1.5,3, and 6 and 12NM. If wJlSP~ is selected, the range resolution increases, making
small targets clearer. If Wn LP~ is selected, the range resolution decreases, but the sensitivity
increases, making small targets larger with higher definition.
Select Bearing Display Mode [AZI MODE]· .
The bearing presentation mode is changed over in the order of [NORTH UP] (true bearing), [HEAD
UP] (relative bearing), and [COURSE UP] (course-up bearing) mode every time the [AZI MODE]
switch is pressed. When the currently selected mode is North-up or Course-up, it will be changed
over to Head-up by pressing this switch, and to another mode by pressing this switch once again.
(Example) RM H UP-PM N UP---+RM C UP-RM H UP
The Bearing Mode [NORTH UP]

The video is displayed so that the zenith of the PPI (0° on range rings) points to the
due north. Fixed targets do not flicker and are easily identified on a chart, and the
true bearing of a target can readily be read out.
Relative Bearing Mode [HEAD UP]

The video is displayed so that the ship's heading line points to the zenith of the PPI
(0° on range rings). Since targets are displayed in their directions relative to the
ship's heading line, the operator can watch the video in the same field of view as in
operating the ship at sea.
This mode is suitable for ocean sailing and for watching over other ships.
3-48
,. .t1~ •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
Course-Up Mode [COURSE UP]
By pressing this switch, the ship's heading line is fixed pointing to the zenith of the
PPI (0° on range rings). In the same way as in the North-up mode, fixed targets do
not flicker, but are stabilized even if the ship is yawing. The bearing of the heading
line varies by the same shift of own ship's course. If the course is changed, the
heading line can be reset to the Course-up mode by pressing the switch several
times.
North HL HL
North-up Mode Head-up Mode Course-up Mode
Cancel Ship's Heading Line [HL OFF]· · · · ·········.·
IHL OFF)
(HL"\
~
The ship's heading line (Hl) that presents the course of own ship is always displayed on the radar
display. The heading line is canceled while this switch is being pressed, so that the targets on the
heading lines can be seen easily.
Cancel All Display Items Except Radar Echo, VRM, EBL, HL,
RR, and Cross Cursor Mark [+] [DATAOFF]· ····
All display information such ARPA vectors, symbols and navigation data may be cancelled
temporarily by the following operations, except Radar echo, VRMs, EBls, Hl, and cross cursor mark
[+] and range rings.
Procedures 1 Click IMENUI on the screen.
The MAIN Menu will appear.
3-49
.........................................
' .. 'l19
2 Click IDATA OFF!. I MAIN MENU

1.IR
All the display items except radar display,
DOFF [!JON
VRMs, EBLs, HL, cross cursor mark [+] and 2.TUNE
range rings will disappear from the radar ~OFF DON
display. 3.PROCESS
1-2-.P-RO-C-l-----,~=1
4.FUNCTION
[IFUNc-=-C---cO-=FF=------,~=1
Cancellation 1 . Click IDATA OFFj .
5.EBLl
17.DATA OFFI will be reset and, the
•
~CENTER D OFFSET
information temporarily cancelled will 6.EBL2
~CENTER D OFFSET
reappear.
7. DATA lj
t-tt.jOFF
Exit 1 Click IExrTj . 8.1 SUBl MENU
The Main Menu will be closed. 9. i CODE INPUT i i
0.1 Em II
Display PI (Parallel Index Lines) [PI]· .
Parallel index lines can be displayed in a semicircular area.
Procedures
Cancellation
Exit
3-50
120
.-- .
Note: The bearing of the parallel index lines that are displayed in the PI menu
represents the true value when the bearing display of the radar reads N UP or C
UP and the relative value when it reads H UP.
Operation of Parallel Index Lines

@ Rotate the Pl (Parallel Index Lines) in the same direction of rotating the [EBl] control
(CD and ®). -
@ The interval of the PI can be decreased as The [VRM] control is rotated anticlockwise
(@ and increased as the [VRM] control is rotated anticlockwise (@).
@ The rotation and interval of the PI are controlled effectively only from the PI Menu.
When the PI Menu is closed, the parallel index lines are fixed.
@ Repeat the above procedures from the first step to move the PI again.
Display of Parallel Index Lines
@ Click LED ,and the PI Menu will be closed and the PI will be fixed.
Press any of 8, GSL2J' G RM0, and GRM~'

The PI will be fixed and the PI Menu will be closed.
3-51
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• ~121
Change Relative Motion (RM) Mode to True Motion (TM) Mode
Procedures 1 Click the IRMI button on the upper left of the screen.
The Relative Motion mode is changed to the True Motion mode. In the True
Motion mode, the position of own ship on the display moves depending upon
its course and speed and the influence of the current. Land and other fixed
ranges are fixed on the display and only actually moving targets move on the
3
radar display. When the True Motion mode is selected, own ship's position
will be set to about 66% of the display radius in the opposite direction to its
course allowing for the influence of the current. Own ship will start moving
depending upon its course and speed and the influence of the tide.
Subsequently, when own ship arrives at the position of about 66% of the
display radius, the ship will be automatically reset to its initial position at about
65% of the display radius in the opposite direction to its course allowing for the
influence of the current.
Fixed on the radar display
Moving depending on own ship's speed
True Motion Display
Change True Motion (TM) Mode to Relative Motion (RM) Mode.
Procedures 1 Click the I!M button on the upper left of the screen.
The True Motion mode is change to the Relative Motion mode.
One ship will be reset to center position.
3-52
. .. .. 1~~ •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
Move Own Ship's Display Position [OFF CENTER] · · ..... · · .
Own ship's position at the display center can be moved to an off-centered position within 66% of the
display radius. This function is convenient to observe a wide coverage in any direction.
When the range is 96 (or 120) NM. this function cannot be used.
OFF
_, CENTER
Procedures 1
The bold cross cursor mark [+] will appear at the position of own ship on the
radar display.
2 Move the cross cursor mark [+] (own ship's position) to

another position with the trackball.
3 Press the left button of the trackball.

The own ship's position will move to the position of the cross cursor mark [+],
where it will be fixed.
HL HL
-
Press the left button of the
trackball .
Return Own Ship's Position to the Center

OFF
Procedures 1 Click the I CENTER Ion the upper right of the screen.
3-53
......................................-. • -
- - 123
,.
p
Display Other Ship's Trails [TRAILS]· · · · ··.
Other ship's movement and speed can be monitored from the length and direction of its trail, serving
for collision avoidance. The trail length can be changed over 4 levels of 0.5 min, 1 min, 3 min, and
6min.
Procedures
Click __ FFI
~'--------r---' The level ~ will be selected and "TRAIL ~" 3
will appear at the lower left of the radar display.
The trails (of 0.5 min long) will appear after other ship's symbols.
Click The level 11 mid will be selected and "TRAIL 11 mint' will appear at
the lower left of the radar display.
The trails (of 1 min long) will appear after other ship's symbols.
Click The level ~ will be selected and "TRAIL ~ will appear at

Click The level ~minl will be selected and "TRAIL~' will appear at
Click "TRAIL QEB' will appear at the lower left of the radar display and
the trails of other ships will disappear.
HL
Trail
Other ship
3-54
- '
\~) .
Display Own Ship's Tracks and Own Symbols [OWN TRACK]
In the case that Any Navigation Equipment is Connected to This System

When navigation equipment is connected, the own ship's track data of up to 1024 points that is
sent from the equipment can be stored and displayed. The data storage interval can be set
over 4 levels, 3 minutes (distance that the own ship moves within 3 minutes), 10 minutes, 15
minutes, and 30 minutes.
Procedures The setting can be changed by GAINI::::I::::I

left-clicking the button on the lower left SEA~
RAIN 1
of the screen (right figure(j).
TRACK 3min
TRAILSIO.5min I rr
PROC IPROCll
o When setting from the menu:
1 Click the IMENUI button on the screen. r-------------"

The Main Menu will appear. ,I SUB1 MENU I
1 TRACK 1
2 Click ~UB1 MENUI. 1.TRACK

~OFF DON
2.1NTERVA=-L--=-,:Tlc:. :. :M=-E_---=
11.
3min ~I
3 Click [RACK!.
3.1 CLR ALL I
The TRACK Menu will appear.
4 Select "ON" radio button of "1.1R".

"ON" in "1.TRACK" will be set and own ship's
past track originated its current position will
appear. The current storage time interval will
appear at lower left on the radar display.
0.1 EXIT
Cancellation 1 Select "OFF" radio button of "1.1R".
"OFF" in "1.TRACK" will be set and own ship's track and the storage time
interval will disappear.
3-55
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••. 125
In Case of Changing Storage Time Interval
Procedures 1 Repeat the above procedure up to

Step 3.
2 Click IINTERVAQ .
12.INTERVALTIME! will be selected and the
pull-down menu will appear.
3 Select the interval time in the

pull-down menu, select 1 through
4 with the trackball, then left-click.
l
I

The Sub1 Menu will reappear. 0.[ EXIT !
2 Click IEXI] .
HL
Own ship's
Track
3-56
11.6
.. - .
Clear Own Ship's Track Storage
Procedures 1 Repeat the procedures of changing storage time interval of

own ship up to step 1.
I SUB1 MENU ~
I TRACK I
2 Click ~LR ALU . 1.TRACK
~ OFF DON
ICLR ALq will be selected. When clearing all
the past track, click 11.YESI to the question E----=
2.1NTERVAL=:-TI-=-==M7.-
"CLR ALL OK?". If ~.Nol is clicked, all the
11. 3min ~I
3.
track will be cleared.
CLRALLOK?
1.l ves l 2. ~
Exit 1 Click IEXll1.

2 Click IEXll1.
0.1 EXIT ]
j
.~
j
3-57
······································~27
Marking [MARK]· ·· ··· ·· ···· .
A maximum of 20 marks can be displayed at arbitrary positions on the radar video.

A mark created on the display holds the latitude and longitude.
CD
/
[I] Plotting Marks. CURSOR( ~)
Procedures 1 Place the cursor over the upper right section of the screen
3
(right figure), then right-click. Next, select "MARK".
MAR-HI will appear in the CURSOR ( ) at the upper left of the radar display.
2 Put the cross cursor mark [ + ] on the position where the [0]
mark is inserted.
3 Press trackball section left button.

The cross cursor mark [ + ] will be changed into the [0] mark and fixed on the
radar display. When entering more [0] marks, repeat the procedures from step
2. Up to 20 marks can be entered.
Note: If more than 20 marks are created, the oldest mark is cleared and the newly
created mark is displayed.
CD
/
[II] Clearing Marks CURSOR( ~)
Procedures 1 Place the cursor over the upper right section of the screen
(right figure), then right-click. Next, select "MARK".
··.··tt.I~~fl!l' is displayed on CURSOR ( ) at the upper right of the radar display.
2 Put the cross cursor mark [ + ] on the position where the [0]
mark is inserted.
3 Press trackball section right button.

The [0] mark will disappear. When clearing another [0] mark, repeat the
procedure from step 2.
3-58
·-~12~ •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
. .
Display Range Rings [RANGE RINGS]· ····· .
The range rings will appear.
Procedures 1 Press the switch section (section ElTI

indicated by the arrow in the right figure)
of the fixed distance scale on the upper
I 1+
left of the screen. IRM!IHUA
The range rings will appear and the interval of
the range rings will be digitally indicated at the
upper left of the radar display.
Cancellation 1 When the fixed distance scale is displayed, press the switch
on the right figure.
The range rings will disappear.
Display Variable Range Markers [VRM1NRM2]· ... · · · .... · ·
This function is to display and set up variable range marks (VRMs). Two VRMs are available.
VRM1 is represented as a broken line and VRM2 as a dotted line. When EBL1 is displayed, VRM1
marker appears on the EBL1. When EBL2 is displayed, VRM2 marker appears on the EBL2.
If the starting point of an EBL is offset, the center of a VRM marker is positioned at the starting point
of the EBL.
VRMl
VRM markers presented on EBL
.Mark: VRM1
\
OMark: VRM2
......-
- \
_._-~-.-.
\
\
\
.....<, <,
-,
\
\
"\ \\
/ \ \
1 \\
-....---.LJ)\:
' \ I
'\I7 ----------___ I
I \ i
i \ J VRM2
\ \ /
\\ a\ '/
\ .-'IllIII'-A.
EBLl,VRM1: -,
\ --- 1
- ....~
/ \ 17/
I /,.... .. EBL2
"-'-'
---------- t
\
EBL2,VRM2: ...... -
3-59
······································~~~129
VRM 1 Operation
If VRM2 is selected, press (VRMoto select VRM1 before operation.
(The currently selected VRM is displayed in reverse video at the lower right of the radar
display.)
Procedures 1 Press
VRM1 will be selected.
Press
VRM1 will disappear.
VRM2 Operation
If VRM1 is selected, press 0RM0 to select VRM2 before operation.
(The currently selected VRM is displayed in reverse video at the lower right of the radar
display.)
Procedures 1 Press GRM2J

~
I VRM2wI'11 be selected.
Press GRM0
I VRM2wI'II disappear.
VRM Range Display

The values of the VRM1 and VRM2 that are currently displayed on the PPI will be
indicated on the lower left of the radar display.
The VRM1 or VRM2 that is currently operable will be selected close to its range value.
VRM Operation
The variable range markers are displayed centering on the own ship. When rotating the
[VRM] control clockwise, the VRM will be larger. When rotating the [VRM] control
counterclockwise, the VRM will be smaller.
3-60
i~~
, .
Set Guard Zones [GUARD ZONE]· · .
A fan-shape guard zone can be set up to keep a watch over the intrusion of other ships or targets, or
to automatically acquire other ships that have intruded into the zone.
By left clicking the "GZ1, 2" section on the screen, it is possible to set on or off.
In this case, the zone that was set the previous time will be turned on.
[I] Creation of Fan-shaped Guard zone
Procedures 1 Click I GZ I . I
I GUARD ZONE I
The GUARD ZONE Menu will appear. 11.GUARD ZONEl(GZ1)
~OFF DON
2.GUARD ZONE2(GZ2)
2 Select "ON" of "GUARD ZONE1" to ~OFF DON
create a guard zone 1 and "GUARD
ZONE2" to create a guard zone 2.
3·1 MAKE GZl I
(O.5NM-32NM)
When Guard Zone 1 and 2 are set, "ON" will 4·1 MAKE GZ2 I
(O.5NM-32NM)
set.
5.SET ACQ AUTO KEY
I1.GZl ~I
3 Click IMAKE GZ11 to create GUARD
ZONE1.
4 Click IMAKE GZ~ to create GUARD

ZONE2.
The cursor will move to the echo display
section.
10·1 EXIT I
Note: Guard Zones 1 or 2 can be set in any area within a range of 0.5 to 32
NM.
5 Use the [VRM] and [EBl] knobs to place VRM and EBl over
the starting point of the guard zone, then left click the cursor.
The starting point of the guard zone will be set.
6 Move the EBl to make fan-shaped zone enclosed by the

current cross cursor position.
left-click when a desired guard zone is made.

The shape of the guard zone will be set up.
(The width of a guard zone is fixed to O.5NM).
3-61
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 131
Exit 1 Click IEXI] or ~ .
The Guard Zone Menu will be closed.
HL
Check with the first [ENT] key.
3
Check with the second [ENT] key.
Operation of Guard Zones
When a target appears within a fan-shaped guard zone, an alarm will sound and a mark
V will appear on the target. The track mode becomes effective after about 1 min.
In creating a guard zone, a circular guard ring may be created if the start and end points
of the guard zone are set to the same point by omitting step 5 above.
The guard zone is displayed only during radar transmission, but also not appear during
the standby operation.
[II] Clearing Guard Zones from Radar Display
Procedures Left-click the switch "GZ1, 2" on the screen and the guard zone.
OTo turn this off from the menu,

c= GUARD ZONE
1 Execute the procedures for [ I ] 1.GUARD ZONE1(GZ1)

Creation of Fan-shaped Guard ~OFF DON
2.GUARD ZONE2(GZ2)
Zone up to step 2. ~OFF DON
3. C MAKE GZl
The GUARD ZONE Menu will appear. (O.5NM-32NM)
4.1 MAKE GZ2
(O.5NM-32NM)
2 Press 1 to clear Guard Zone 1
from radar display, and press 2 to
clear Guard Zone 2.
"OFF" will be set for Guard Zone 1 or 2,
which will be cleared from radar display.
Exit 1 Execute the Exit step in the same

procedures for [ I ] Creation of 0.1 EXIT
Fan-shaped Guard Zone.
3-62
,. - ~
itt·····································
Reset Alarm Buzzer [ALARM ACK] .
ALARM ACK is the function of acknowledging the alarm item when an alarm sounds and stopping
an alarm sound as well as canceling flickering display. (If there are two or more alarms, it is
necessary to operate the switch for each alarm indication.) The alarm sound can be stopped, but
the alarm indication is not cancelled.
Stopping Alarm Sound
Procedures 1 Press rujACK •
Or left-click the alarm display area on the screen.
The alarm sound will be stopped.
Set Alarm Sound Level· · · · · · · • · · · · • · · • · .. · • · · · · • · . · .
This function sets the sound and volume level of the alarm (alarm sound) to be delivered from the
keyboard.
Setting Alarm Sound level
Procedures 1 Click the IMENUI on the scr~en.

The Main Menu will appear. IL SUBl MENU
LEVEL
I
I I
2 Click ~UB1 MENUI. 1.RANGE RINGS
The Sub1 Menu will appear. 14.LEVEL4 ~I
2.VRM
!4.LEVEL4 ~I
3 Click ILEVELJ. 3 EBL
1 . 14.LEVEL4 ~I
The LEVEL Menu will be selected. 4.CHARACTER
14.LEVEL4 ~I
4 Click IBUZZER!. 5.vIDEO(ECHO)
1 4.LEVEL4 ~I
5.BUZZER will be selected and the pull-down 6.ARPA
menu will appear. 15.LEVEL4 ~I
7.BUZZER
7.LEVEL7
5 Select any level from 1 to 7 for 1.LEVELl
BUZZER volume level in the 2.LEVEL2
3.LEVEL3
pull-down and click it.
0.1 4.LEVEL4
5.LEVEL5
6.LEVEL6
3-63
to.. •
-
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
, .. 133
2 Click IEXI] .
Note: Changing the "LEVEL" of the buzzer will cause the levels of all the
alarms to be changed as well as the key touch sound.
II
The level of any alarm cannot be set to 0 as well as the key touch
sound.
3-64
'13~
•• •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
FUNCTION· · . · . .' .
FUNCTION is a function of setting the process suited for each condition during navigation to
enhance the target detection performance.
Setting items: The following nodes can be switched over.

FUNC1: Effective in observing the echoes on short ranges.
FUNC2: Effective in observing the echoes on long ranges.
FUNC3: Effective in observing the echoes in rough weather.
FUNC4: Set by service personnel. The initial setting is the same as FUNC1.
FUNC5: Set by service personnel. The initial setting is the same as FUNC1.
Procedures 1 Click the !MENUI on the screen.

MAIN MENU I
The Main Menu will appear. II
1.IR
DOFF ~ON
2 Click fUNCTIONI. 2.TGT ENH
@.FUNCTIONI will be selected and the ~OFF DON
pull-down menu will appear. 3.PROCESS
12.PROCl S
.FUNCTION
3 Select a desired process-setting ~.FUNCOFF
item from the click. 5.EB,iYiiSflil.
The process-setting item will be changed and
[!]
6.EB
the current setting state will appear at the ~
lower right of the radar display. 7.
etl.t-UII
8. SUBl MENU
4 For changing the setting item, open I 9.1 DEGAUSS
the pull-down menu in step 2 above
again and select a desired process
setting item. 10.1 EXIT
Exit 1 Click lexl].

Cancellation 1 Execute the procedures to function up to step 2.

@.FUNCTIONI will be selected and the pull-down menu will appear.
2 Click~.
11.FUNC OFF! will be set and "FUNC 1QEEt' will appear the lower right of the
radar display.
3-65
-~ 135
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
Service personnel can change the process setting items of FUNC4 and FUNCS.
• Setting gain of input target signal (sensitivity preset)
• Setting standard value of input target signal (noise level)
• Setting radar interference rejection (IR):IR1 to IR4 (Effective when IR is ON)
• Setting target enhancement (TGT ENH):EXP1 to EXP4 (Effective when TGT ENH is
ON)
• Setting target processing (PROCESS):MODE1 to MODE8 (Effective when PROCESS
isON)
• Setting sensitivity range (Maximum and minimum values)
•
•
Setting sea clutter suppression range (Maximum and minimum values)
Setting rain/snow clutter suppression range (Maximum and minimum values) 3
Note: Do not use FUNC2 and FUNC3 on short ranges. Otherwise, detection of ship targets
moving high speeds may become poor.
For FUNC1 to FUNC3, the recommended parameters have been preset by the
manufacturer, but the preset parameters could no be changed after delivery. In using
FUNC1 to FUNC3, IR, TGT ENH and PROCESS shall be set to ON (PROC1 to PROC3).
Expand Targets· · ·.·· ·
Targets displayed on the radar display can be expanded, regardless of the pulse length selected.
Procedures The "ENH" section at the button left

of the screen can be clicked to
MAIN MENU J
1.IR
change the ON/OFF setting. DOFF ~ON
2.TGT ENH
~OFF DON
1 Click IMENUI. 3.PROCESS
The Main Menu will appear. 1-2-.P-RO-C-l--~=1
4.FUNCTION
2 Select "ON" radio button of 11.FUNC OFF ~I
5.EBLl
[GT ENH I. ~ CENTER D OFFSET
"ON"in"2TGT ENH"will be set and"ENH 6.EBL2
~ CENTER D OFFSET
ION t'will appear at the lower left of the radar
7., DATA OFF I
display.
Then, the targets on the radar display will be 8.1 SUBl MENU I
expanded for higher definition. 9.1 CODE INPUT I
Cancellation 1 Click IMENUI. 0.1 EXIT
2 Select "ON" radio button of ITGT ENHj.

"OFF" in "2.TGT ENH" will be set and "ENH IQffi' will appear at the lower left
of the radar display.
The expanded targets on the radar display will be reset to their original sizes.
Exit 1 Click IEXll1.

3-66
--
\~~
.
;.~ .
Display Processed Videos· · · ··· .
Unnecessary noise will be reduced to highlight targets.
Attention I I
• In watching a radar beacon mark, SART signal or a fast moving target on the
radar display, set the system to : PROCESS OFF (Processed Video OFF).
• It is most suitable to use this function in the TM mode.

In using this function in the RM mode, use it in the NORTH UP or COURSE UP
mode. In using the function in the HEAD UP mode, the video may be blurred.
Procedures Clicking "PROC" on the screen will change the setting.
o When setting from the menu:
1 Click IMENUI.
I MAIN MENU
1.IR
DOFF [!JON
2 Click the setting section of 2.TGT ENH
"3.PROCESS". ~OFF DON
I3.PROCESSj will be selected and the 3.PROCEr-:S,,"=S~--=-=-_---=
2.PROCl
3 Click a setting from 1 to 4.
3-1 When "2.PROC1" is selected.

I2.PRoc11 will be set and the targets moving
at high speeds will be selected. SUBl MENU
The targets moving at low speeds will be DEGAUSS
darkened.
This function is recommendable on the radar I 0.1 EXIT~
ranges of 1.5 NM or less.
3-2 When "3.PROC2" is selected.

13.PROC2I will be set.
This processing speed is in a range between PROC1 and PROC3.
3-3 When"4.PROC3" is selected.

~.PROC~ will be set and the targets moving at low speeds will be selected.
The targets moving at high speeds will be darkened.
This function is recommendable on the radar ranges of 3 NM
or more.
3-67
• ••••••••••••·••••••••••••••••••••••• ~.·,137.
Cancellation 1 Execute the procedures to display processed videos up to

step 2.
2 Click IQffi .
11.0F~ will be set.
II
Exit 1 Click IEXI'Tj .
Reduce Radar Interference· · ·
Attention I i
• In watching a radar mark or SART signal on the radar display, set the system to:
IR OFF (Radar Interference Rejection OFF)
This function is used when the interference from other ship's radar is strong.
By left-clicking t h e . button on the lower right of the screen,

it is possible to set on or off.
Procedures 1 Click IMENUI.

2 Click "ON" radio button of [][] .

"ON" in "1.1R" will be set and the radar interference rejection will be set to ON to
reduce radar interference.
Cancellation 1 Click IMENUI.
2 Click "OFF" radio button of [][] .

"OFF' in "1.IR" will be set and the radar interference rejection will be set to
OFF.

3-68
. -- \'3-~ ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
..
-.
Personal Information· · · · · · .. · · ·
The operating status of the radar equipment is recorded. If there are two or more operators to
operate the radar, each operator can register and recall the operating status that is suitable for the
operator. The operating status for up to 5 operators and each status can be named (using a
maximum of 10 alphanumeric characters).
* Personal Data to be Stored:

• Bearing mode
• DAY/NIGHT mode setting
• Brilliance
• Alarm level
• Vector length/mode
• Various video processing methods (JR, ENH, PROC, and FUNC)
Recalling Operating Status
Procedures Click the "PINI r' on the lower right of the screen.
Open the LOAD menu. Execute the procedure from step 5.
1 Click IMENU/. I SUB1 MENU'

1 PIN ~
1.1 LOAD I
2 Click ~UBi MENUI.
2.1 SAVE I
3.1 ERASE 1
3 Click~.
The PIN Menu will appear.
4 Click ILOAD! .
The PIN Menu will appear.
5 Select any number on the LOAD

Menu and click any of 1 to 5.
The registered operating status will be
recalled. 0·1 EXIT J
6 Click li.YES! to the question "FILE ERASE OK?" to recall the

registered operating status.
Click ~ to stop the recall.
3-69
·······································139
- ~
I SUBl MENU I
Exit 1 Click !EXll1. I PIN I
The PIN Menu will reappear. [ LOAD I
1.1 TOKYO I
2 Click !EXllj .
2. I ***** * ** ** I
The Sub1 Menu will reappear. 3.1
II.
I
2 Click !EXllj . 4·1

The Sub1 Menu will be closed. 5.C::= I •
. I
Registering Operating Status lor EXIT
Procedures 1 Execute the procedures to recalling operating status up to

step 3.
2 Click ~AvEj . I SUBl MENU I
The SAVE Menu will appear. I PIN I
[ SAVE I
3 Click any of 1 to 5 to save the 1.1 TOKYO I
operating status item assigned by 2.[ I
any number 1 to 5. 3. INPUT NAME
The INPUT NME Menu will appear and the
selected number to save will be set up.
4.
5.
--------------------1
**********
COJwOOr3lf4lCU61l7lrilf9l
- -------
4 Use the trackball to select an

alphabet character from A to Z that USE TB&NUM
is displayed in the menu, press the
left trackball button, and input one EXIT :
PRESS~OR [CLR]
character or one number of the
name used for saving.
A maximum of 10 characters can be entered. 0.1 EXIT
5 ,epeatJtep 4 until the name to save is made up, and select

..ENTE " in INPUT NAME Menu by using the trackball and
click the trackball section left button.
The operating status will be saved .
. 3-70
i~U
.-
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
Exit 1 Click IEX.T!.

The PIN will reappear.
2 Click~.
2 Click lEX'].
Canceling Registered Operating Status
Procedures 1 Execute the procedures to recalling operating status up to

step 3.
I SUB1MENU I
2 Click IERASE!. I PIN I
The ERASE Menu will appear. I ERASE ~
1.1 TOKYO =:J
3 Click any of 1 to 5.
2. I *** ** ** * ** I
The register number of the operating status to 3.1 I
erase will be selected.
4. I ]
4 Click rn to the question "F.LE

ERASE OK?" to erase the
5.1· J
FILE ERASE OK?
registered number.
1.jVESI 2.~
Click ~ to stop the erasing.
Exit 1 Click lEX']. 0·1 EXIT ]

The PIN Menu will reappear.
2 Click lEX'] .
3 Click IEXI] .
3-71 .
······································~41
Display of Navigational Information · · .
Navigational information such as waypoint marks, and a maximum of 256 point of NAV lines,
coastlines, depth contours and NAV marks can be created, displayed, read out, saved, edited
and cancelled. (This function is effective only when navigation equipment is connected to this
system.)
[I] Displaying Waypoint Marks
•
If waypoint information is sent from navigation equipment, a waypoint mark will appear on the
radar display. If the waypoint appears within the radar display, it is displayed as "oWP".
Procedures 1 Click the IMENUI on the screen.

The Main Menu will appear. SUBl MENU ~
l NAY/MAP INFO ~
2 Click ~UB1 MENUI. 1.WPT
~OFF DON
2.1 NAY DlSP 1
3.1 NAY/MAP I
3 Click INAV/MAP INFO!.
4.GEODETIC
The NAV/MAP INFO Menu will appear. l,--------c
o~
4 Click "ON" radio button of ~ . IWG~84
I
"ON" in 11.WPlj will be set and the selected
waypoint mark will appear.
Exit 1 Click lEXI] . 0.1 EXIT \ I

Geodetic system name display
2 Click IEXI] . area: The display changes
The Sub1 Menu will be closed. according to the geodetic

system No. in the right input
area.
3-72
-\~ .
[II] Setting NAV INFO to ON/OFF
The following navigational information can be displayed or cancelled by pressing the
corresponding switch.
eD Own ship mark [OS MARK]
~ NAV lines [NAV LINE]
@ Coast lines [COAST] --------
@ Depth contour [CONTOUR] _._._.-
Z
@ Mark 1 [MARK1]
@ Mark 2 [MARK2]
rJ) Mark 3 [MARK3] A
"*
@ Mark 4 [MARK4] ~

II SUB1 MENU I
I NAVIMAP INFO I
2 Click lSuB1 MENUI.
I NAV D1SP I
D 1.0S MARK
3 Click INAV/MAP INFOI. D 2.NAV UNE
The NAV/MAP INFO Menu will appear.

D 3.COAST
D 4.CONTOUR
4 Click INAV DISPj. D 5.MARKl X
D
*
The NAV DISP Menu will appear. 6.MARK2
D 7.MARK3 A
5 Click the check box next to the ID 8.MARK4 ~
numbers 1 though 8 that are to be
turned ON or OFF.
The menu item set to ON will be marked with
a check mark in the "0". 0 .1
1 EXIT I

The NAV/MAP INFO Menu will reappear.
1 Click IEXI] .
1 Click IEXI] .
3-73
...................................... ,~3
- < -
[III] Making and Editing Navigation Information

2 Click ~UB1 MENUI.

4
Click INAV/MAP INFOI.
Click !NAV/MAe .
The NAV/MAP Menu will appear.
•
S Click IEDI] .
The EDIT Menu will appear.
Note: Latitude and longitude data from the GPS and bearing data
from the GYRO are required.
I SUB1 MENU I
I NAY/MAP INFO I
I NAY/MAP I
I EDIT I Clear all NAV INFO or each NAV item on display
1.1 CLEAR 1
2.1 MAKE Make up navigational information
3.1 CORRECT
4.,-,_ _ DELETE Correct one point in navigational information
5. I INSERT J~
Delete one point navigational information
Insert one element of NAV line, Coastline or Depth

Contour
Remain points of navigational information that can be

0.1 EXIT created
3-74
. - -1~1 •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
1 CLEAR (Clear all NAV INFO or each NAV item on display)
Procedures 1 Click ICLEAR!.

The CLEAR Menu will appear.
2 Press any of 1 to 8 to clear any item navigation information.
1 : Clear all navigational information on display.
2 : Clear NAV LINE. I SUB1 MENU I

I NAY/MAP INFO ]
3 : Clear COAST Line. I NAY/MAP ~

I EDIT ]
I CLEAR I
4 : Clear CONTOUR.
1.1 ALL I
2.1 NAY UNE J
5 : Clear MARK1.
3. I COAST =:=J
4.1 CONTOUR I
6 : Clear MARK2. 5.1 MARK1 I
6.1 MARK2 I
7 : Clear MARK3. 7.1 MARK3 ~
s·1 MARK4 I
8 : Clear MARK4.
0.1 EXIT ]
The NAV INFO to be cleared will be selected.
3-75
• _ _~~ iY-
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 145
2 MAKE (Make up navigational information)
Procedures 1 Click IMAKE].

The MAKE Menu will appear.
2 Press any of 1 to 8 to clear any item navigation information.
1 : Make NAV LINE.
2 : Make COAST Line.
3 : Make CONTOUR.
I
c=
I
I
SUBl MENU
NAY/MAP INFO
NAY/MAP
EDIT
------
I,
I
I
I
•
i MAKE i
4 : Make MARK1.
1. C NAY UNE I
2.1 COAST I
3. I CONTOUR I
5 : Make MARK2. 4.1 MARKl I
5. L MARK2 I
6.1 MARK3 I
6 : Make MARK3. 7.1 MARK4 I
8.1 ENT I
7 : Make MARK4. REMAIN POINT

I 256
0.1 EXIT
When one of 1 to 7 is selected, NlIIII~§ will appear in the CURSOR ( ) at

the upper right of the radar display.
3 Move the cross cursor mark to the starting point of a line or

any element of a mark using the trackball, and click the
trackball section left button.
The starting point of a line or the element of a mark to mark will be set up.
4 Repeat step 3 above. If a line or mark is completed, click the

lEN] .
Then, a line or a mark will be made.
5 Repeat the steps 2 to 4 to make another line or mark.
6 Click lexll1 when all NAV INFO item is made.

The EDIT Menu will reappear.
3-76
-
•..
\~Q
~ •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
Note: Navigation information can have a maximum of 256 points
plotted. Note that the value of REMAIN POINTS (the number
of points that can be still plotted) is decreased whenever
lines and marks are plotted.
3 CORRECT (Correct one position of navigational information)
I SUB1 MENU =:J

I NAY/MAP INFO ~
Procedures 1 Click ICORRECl1.
, I NAY/MAP I
ICORRECl1 will be selected. will
I EDIT I
3._
appear in the CURSOR( ) at the upper right of
the radar display. 1.1 CLEAR]
2.1 MAKE ~
2 Move the cross cursor mark to any i
line element or mark to correct using 4.1 DELETE I
the trackball, and click the trackball 5.1 INSERT ~
section left button.
A dotted line starting from the line or mark will be
REMAIN POINT
drawn as the cross cursor moves. C256~
3 Move the cross cursor to the point to

correct using the trackball, and click
the trackball section left button. 0.1 EXIT~
One element of the line or the mark will be
moved.
4 DELETE (Delete one point in navigational information)
I SUBl MENU =:J

I NAY/MAP INFO I
Procedures 1 Click PELETE!.
I NAY/MAP I
IOELET§ will be selected. •Ji~ will appear
I EDIT ~
in the CURSOR( ) at the upper right of the radar
display. 1.1 CLEAR I
2.1 MAKE I
2 Move the cross cursor mark to any 3. I CORRECT I
line element or mark to delete using 4. DELETE
the trackball, and click the trackball 5.1 INSERT~
section left button.
One element of the line or the mark will be
REMAIN POINT
deleted. I 256 I
0.1 EXIT I
3-77
·······································147
-- ,
(Example)
.....
,...
5 INSERT (Insert one element of NAV line, Coast line or Depth Contour)
Procedures 1 Click IINSERlj . I ,-----

,, SUB1 MENU
I
' ,
•
I I
!1~I;R1 will be selected. t-iAIIINS will appear I NAY/MAP INFO I
in the CURSOR ( ) at the upper right of the
radar display.
c= NAY/MAP I
C EDIT I
2 Move the cross cursor mark to any 1.L CLEAR I
line element to which another 2.1 MAKE I

element is to add, using the 3. I CORRECT I
trackball, and click the trackball 4.C=== DELETE I
section left button. 5. INSERT
3 Move the cross cursor to the point REMAIN POINT

at which another line element is to I 256 I
be inserted, using the trackball, and
click the trackball section left
button.
0.1 EXIT
One line element will be inserted.
(Example)
I
/
i'
/
.
.
,,/
\/ ul
3-78
-\~~ .
--
6 EXIT (End making and editing navigational information)
Exit 1 Click IEXllj.

The NAV/MAP Menu will reappear.
2 Click IEXllj.
3 Click IEXI] .
The Sub1 Menu will reappear..
4 Click IEXllj .
[IV] Setting Navigational Information

2 Click lSuB1 MENUI.


4 Click !NAV/MAP!.
The NAV/MAP Menu will appear.
3-79
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
149
I SUB1 MENU I
I NAV/MAPINFO I
I NAV/MAP I
1.0S POSN ~ I Enter own ship's position manually
I N 00' 00. 000' I
2.
I WOO' 00. 000'
LOAD
I
Read out navigational information 3
3. SAVE Save navigational information
4. ERASE
5. EDIT~ Erase saved navigational information
6. SHIFT I
Make, cancel, add and move navigational information
7. SHIFT CLEAR
Shift navigational positions except own ship's mark
Clear shifted navigational positions

0.1 EXIT
1 OS POSN (Enter own ship's position manually)

Set this function to use the navigational information at any other position than
own ship's position.
Procedures 1 Click the latitude and longitude numeric section under

"OS POSN".
11.os pOSNI will be selected.
The numeric input dialogue box will be displayed.
2 Press c:::::::I or +.
N (north latitude) or S (south latitude) will be selected.
3 Enter a latitude value poe xxx.xx' ) using any of 0 to 9.
4 Pressm.
The latitude value entered manually will be set up.
5 Press c:::::::I or +.
E (east longitude) or W (west longitude) will be selected.
6 Enter a longitude value (XXO XXX.XX' ) using any of 0 to 9.

3-80
\~~ .
.. . 7 Pressm.
The longitude value entered manually will be set up.
Note: The own ship's position entered manually is effective only in the NAV/MAP
INFO Menu.
2 Select Equipment to Load the Read-out Navigational Information

In the case that any electronic positioning equipment such as GPS is
connected to the system, or that own ship's position is entered manually, the
data can be read out.
Procedures 1 Click ILOADj.

The LOAD Menu will appear. I SUBl MENU ~
I NAV/MAP INFO I
2 Click IOEVICEj. I NAV/MAP I
11.DEVlcE! will be selected and the pull-down I LOAD ~
menu will appear. 1.DEVICE ------.
l.1NTERNAL
0.1 EXIT I
3-81
....................................... ~._-
- 151
3 Readout Navigational Information Displav (Radar Internal Datal ~
Only when navigational equipment is connected to the system or when own

ship's position is entered manually, the readout files can be selected. The
selecting method is different depending upon the type of device to load the
readout data.
When Setting DEVICE to INTERNAL
•
Procedures 1 Click ILOAq. I SUB1 MENU II
The LOAD Menu will appear. I~=:::;;NA~V~/~M;;A::;P::;IN::;F;;O===I II
2 Place the cursor over the

navigation information file name
(0 through 9) to be read, then
=
I
i
NAV/MAP
LOAD
LOAD D A T A ! i
I
II
1.
double click. 2.
3.
3 Click rn
to the question "FILE
LOAD OK?" if the file name is right.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
The selected number of navigational 9.
information will be read out.
O.
To cancel file loading, click ~ . EXIT :

PRESS I EXIT I
4 The selected file name will appear at the lower right of the
radar display.
3-82
. ~~~~!
.- .
4 SAVE (Save navigational information}
In the case that any electronic navigation equipment is connected to the system,
or that own ship's position is entered manually, the data can be saved.
Procedures 1 Click ~AVEI.

I SUB1 MENU I
The SAVE Menu will appear.
I NAV/MAP INFO'
I NAV/MAP I
2 Place the cursor over one of the
I SAVE ~
numbers 1 through 0 (ten in all),
then click. 1.1 TOKYO ~
The INPUT NAME Menu will appear and the 2·1 ***** 1
selected number to save will be set up. 3. INPUT NAME
4. **********
--------------------j
3 Use the trackball to select an 5.

alphabet character from A to Z that 6.
is displayed in the menu, press the 7.
left trackball button, and input one USE TB&NUM
8.
character or one number of the EXIT :
9. PRESS~
name used for saving.
0.1-=E=X=IT:--:------
A maximum of 10 characters can be entered.
I PRESS IEXITI
4 ,epeat Uep 3 until the name to save is made up, and select
.. ENTE " in INPUT NAME Menu by using the trackball and
click the trackball section left button.
The currently displayed navigational information will be saved.
3-83
••.••..••••.•.••••.•••.••..•••.••....• ;1'3
5 ERASE (Erase saved navigational information)
Procedures 1 Click IERASEI. [ SUB1 MENU I
The ERASE Menu will appear. I NAV/MAPINFO I
I NAV/MAP I
2 Place the cursor over one of the c= ERASE [
numbers 1 through 0 (ten in all), 1.1 TOKYO)
then click. 2·1 ***** I
3 Click IYEsl to the question "FILE

3.1 I
3
4. ALE ERASE OK?
ERASE OK?" to erase the 'I'
5. 1.[Y[§J 2.[KQ] .
information.
6. ~ ---J
7·1 I
The elected number of navigational
8. [ I
information will be erased.
9.C== I
Click INol to stop erasing the O.C=
EXIT . II
information. PRES'S [EXITI
6 SHIFT (Shift navigational positions except own ship's mark)

The position of any navigational information I L SUB1 MENU II
such as NAV lines, coastlines, and depth I [ NAV/MAP INFO 1 1
contours, and other marks except own ship's I I

NAV/MAP .
mark can be corrected manually.
. 1.0S POSN
I--:-:Nc-O=OC;-'O=O:-c.0=0=0'-1
Procedures 1 Click ISHIF"Ij . [WllO'oo.OOO' 1
I§.8IE] will be selected. •I;S~'~ will 2.1 LOAD I

appear in the CURSOR ( ) at the upper right 3. [ SAVE I
of the radar display.
4.1 ERASE I
5.1 EDIT I
2 Move the cross cursor mark to an
6. SHIFT
element of a line such as NAV line,
7. [ SHIFT CLEAR
coastline, depth contour line, or a
mark using the trackball.
3 Click the trackball section left O. [ EXIT I

button.
A line or mark to correct will be set up.
4 Move the cross cursor mark to any point to which a line or

mark will be shifted, using the trackball.
5 Click the trackball section left button.

The point to which a line or mark is to be shifted will be set up, and all lines and
3-84
.. -1~\
.. •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
marks will be shifted.
7 SHIFT CLEAR (Clear the corrected positions of navigation information)
Procedures 1 Click ~HIFT CLEAR!.

!SHIFT CLEAR! will be selected.
The latest correction to navigation information (only one correction) will be
cleared.
Note: Only the latest correction is cleared and the previous

navigation information is restored.
The information cannot be further restored.
8 EXIT (Exit from setting of navigational informationl
Exit 1 Click IEXI].

2 Click IEXI].
3 Click IEXI] .
3-85
I
f ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• .~,..
1;);)
[V] Setup and Display of Geodetic System

In making up any navigational information, it is necessary to set up the geodetic
system used by the connected navigation equipment. When any saved
navigational information is loaded, the 'geodetic system used when the
navigational information was saved will also be displayed. Then, check that the
geodetic system on display is the same as that for the connected navigation
equipment. If both geodetic systems are different, the positions of the
navigational information on radar display may be deviated. Therefore, it is •
important to set the same geodetic system as the navigation equipment. •

[ SUBl MENU I
I NAV/MAPINFO I
The Main Menu will appear. l.wPT
~OFF DON
2. [ NAV DlSP I
2 Click \SUB1 MENUI.
The Sub1 Menu will appear. 3·1 NAV/MAP I
4.GEODETIC
I o~
IWG.84
The NAV/MAP INFO Menu will appear. I
4 Click IGEODETlcl.
@.GEODETICI will be selected.
5 Select by presrnr.I:1 in the menu.

This is set by ~ or the numeric
input dialogue-box. 0.1 EXit I
Geodetic system name display
Select the number of geodetic area: The display changes
system. according to the geodetic
(See Table of Geodetic Systems) system No. in the right input
When the number of geodetic system is area.
entered, its name is changed.
Exit 1 Click lEXI] .

2 Click IEXI] .
3-86
"
-\~i ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
... ".
TABLE OF GEODETIC SYSTEM

NO. NAME REPRESENTATION
0 WGS-84 WGS-84
1 WGS-72 WGS-72
2 Japan Japan
3 North American 1927 (U.S) 1927 North America
4 North American 1927 (Canada & Alaska) 1927 Canada, Alaska
5 European 1950 (Europe) European 1950
6 Australian geodetic 1966 (Australia) Australian geodetic 1966
7 Ordnance Survey of Great Britain (England) UK
8 NAD-83 NAD-83
9 No use
10 No use
11 ADINDAN (Ethiopia & Sudan) ADINDAN
12 ARC (Botswana) ARC 1950
13 AUSTRALIAN GEODETIC 1984 (Australia) AUSTRALIAN GEODETIC 1984
14 BERMUDA 1957 (the Bermudas) BERMUDA 1957
15 BOGOTA OBSERVATORY (Columbia) BOGOTA OBSERVATORY
16 CAMPO INCHAUSPE (Argentine) CAMPOINCHAUSPE
17 CHATHAM 1971 (Chatham Island) CHATHAM 1971
18 CHUA ASTRO (Paraguay) CHUA ASTRO
19 CORREGO ALEGRE (Brazil) CORREGO ALEGRE
20 DJAKARTA (VATAVIA)(Sumatra) DJAKARTA
21 EUROPEAN 1979 (Europe) EUROPEAN 1979
22 GEODETIC DATUM 1949 (New Zealand) GEODETIC DATUM 1949
23 GUAM 1963 (Guam) GUAM 1963
24 HAYFORD 1910 (Finland) HAYFORD 1910
25 HJORSEY 1955 (Iceland) HJORSEY 1955
26 INDIAN (India & Nepal) INDIAN
27 IRELAND 1965 (Ireland) IRELAND 1965
28 KERTAU 1948 (West Malaysia) KERTAU 1948
29 L.C.5 ASTRO (Cayman Black Island) L.C.5ASTRO
30 LIBERIA 1964 (Liberia) LIBERIA 1964
31 LUZON (Philippines) LUZON
32 MERCHICH (Morocco) MERCHICH
33 MINNA (Cameroon) MINNA
34 NAHRWAN (Oman) NAHRWAN
35 NAPARIMA, BWI (Trinidad and Tobago) NAPARIMA, BWI
36 OLD EGYPTIAN (Egypt) OLD EGYPTIAN
37 OLD HAWAIIAN (the Hawaii Islands) OLD HAWAIIAN
38 PICO DE LAS NIEVES (the Canary Islands) PICO DE LAS NIEVES
39 PROVISIONAL SOUTH AMERICAN 1956 (South America) PROVISIONAL S·AMERICAN 1956
40 PROVISIONAL SOUTH CHILEAN 1963 (South Chile) PROVISIONAL SoCHILEAN 1963
41 PUERTO RICO (Puerto Rico and Virgin Islands) PUERTO RICO
42 QORNOQ (South Greenland) QORNOQ
43 RT90 (Sweden) RT90
44 SANTA BRAZ (Sao Miguel, Santa Maria Islands) SANTABRAZ
45 SOUTH AMERICAN 1969 (South America) SOUTH AMERICAN 1969
46 SOUTHWEST BASE (Faial, Graciosa, Pico. Sao Jorge and Terceira Islands) SOUTHWEST BASE
47 TIMBALAI 1948 (Brunei and East Malaysia) TIMBALAI 1948
3-87
• ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• J57
Function of USER Switch I OPTION Switch .
USER Switch
In the initial setting, the vector length maximum ON/OFF is registered.
Only service personnel can change these functions.
Functions Register able in USER Switch:

CDVector Length Maximum: ON/OFF
•
ON: Vector length 60 min (max)
OFF: Vector length Time set on VECTOR TIME Menu.
(2)NAV/MAP INFO Menu: ON/OFF

ON: The NAV/MAP INFO Menu will appear.
OFF: The NAV/MAP INFO Menu will be closed.
@Parallel Index Line Display: ON/OFF

ON: The parallel index lines set on the PI Menu will appear on the radar
display.
OFF: The displayed parallel index lines will be cleared.
OPTON Switch
CDOPTON 1 Switch
The registered function is called. Also, if an option is connected, then this is used to
operate that option.
The call of a MENU is assigned at the time of factory shipments.
(2)OPTON2 Switch
The registered function is called. Also, if an option is connected, then this is used to
operate that option.
The call of a TEST is assigned at the time of factory shipments.
3-88
·--' \~cc
. • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
~
Operation of Performance monitor· · . · . · . · · .. · . · · · · · · . · · . · ·

This function can be used only when the radar equipment is equipped with the NJU-63/64
Performance Monitor.
1 Method of Operation
In the case that the equipment is provided with radar InterSwitch, the
InterSwitch shall be set to the Master Radar mode.
Procedures 1 Click [ill. I TEST MENU I

1. I SELF CHECK I
2 Click "ON" radio button of
2.1 PANEL TEST I
"S.PM". 3.1 ARPATEST I
4.MAG CURRENT
"ON" in "S.PM" will be set and the radar will !!JOFF DON
automatically be set to RM, OFF CENTER 5.PM
OFF, IR OFF, PROCESS OFF, TGT ENH DOFF ~ON
OFF, FUNCTION OFF and 24 NM range. 6. I ERROR LOGGING I
The PM pattern for checking the receiving 7.1 SYSTEM INFO I
system will appear and the [PM] indicator
bar graph will also be in the TEST Menu to
be used for checking the transmitted power. PM· c=:-;-;. 0:~ I
Exit 1 Click~. 0.1 EXIT I

Note: All target acquisitions by ARPA functions will be cancelled.

The target acquisition cancelled when PM is ON will not be
recovered.
The radar image is suppressed to make the PM image easy to
see.
So, the test menu should be always closed after the PM has
been checked.
3-89
• ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
12 to 18NM
159
PM Pattern
•
PM~:::I
2 Checking Transmitter System

The value of the TRANSMIT POWER indicator bar graph in the test menu indicates the
value corresponding to the transmission output power. If the indicated value becomes
extremely short against the bar length checked at the initial time, it is necessary to
request for checking of the transmitter system by a service engineer.
3-90
·-.-
~ ..
i~~········
Checking procedure
· .
<D Read a current value A on the bar indicator.
® Referring to the Calibration Curve I, obtain a relative attenuation d (B) for the initial bar
indicator length B that is specified in the INFORMATION LABEL.
@ Then, obtain a relative attenuation d (A) for the value A referring to the Calibration Curve I.
The value given by d (A) - d (B) represents the attenuation of the current transmission
output power compared with the value at the initial time.
@ If the attenuation value given by d (A) - d (B) is 10 dB or more (due to the life of the
magnetron), it is necessary to request for checking of the transmitter system by a service
engineer.
22 Calibration Curve I
1dB
20 PERF. MONITOR
INFORMATION lABEL
18
DAn; BARLEN~ I - Initial bar
16 '95 ,- length
~ l~o ~8 '"
'C
c
14 Date and time '" ~
0
:w of initial setting ~
(
CIS
~ Maximum range
C
Q) pattern
10
~
CD
>
~ 8
CIS
Q)
0:: 6
2 .: ~} Measurement precision
o
o
L . . '- - - - - - - - - - - - ' - - - - - - - - - - - ' - - -
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Length of Bar Indicator l
Figure 1
3-91
- 161
...................................... ,
_~
...
(Example)
=
Assuming that the initial bar indication is B 8 and the current bar indication A 6, the relative =
attenuation is d (B) = 3.5 dB, d (A) = 7 dB. Thus, d (A) - d (B) = 3.5dB.
This clearly indicates that the current transmission output power is attenuated by approximately 3.5
dB.
Example of Checking Transmitter System
~ Current bar indication A=6
PM~:::I
~ Initial bar indication B=8

•
22 Calibration Curve I
1dB
20 PERF. MONITOR
INFORMATION lABEL
18
DATE BARLENGfH
16 '95
. ~O
"C
e 8/18
0 14
III
~
eQ)
=
r
c(
Q)
>
:;;
10
III
~ 8
d (A)
~
6 , ,
, . " ' .
I ", .
3.5dB
~'- ~ '!.-' ~t;]';}

4
d (B)
,- - Measurement precision
2 -: I
I,. . ;: , . . 'I , .:
I :
: B
o A 7:
L . . '- - - - - ' - - - - - ' - - - - - - - - - ' - -
8 9 10
o 1 2 3 4 56
Length of Bar Indicator l
Figure 2
3-92
· ~~,-- \ GZ ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••.
3 Checking Receiver System
The maximum range of the PM pattern on display indicates a deterioration of the
sensitivity of the receiver system.
Checking Procedure
@ Measure the PM pattern displayed on the display using the VRM of the maximum range
'max' from the PPI sensor.
@ Obtain the degree of sensitivity deterioration R (rmax) corresponding to 'rmax' using the
calibration curve /I and indicate the degree of sensitivity deterioration of the current
receiver system.
161dB
-§ 14
-. Calibration curve II
PERF. MONITOR
I INFORMATION LABEL
~
>C
ftS
-
0::
c
12 I I DATE IBAR LENGTH
0
:;::l .~ 11'95 Y20 I ~18
t! 10 ..........
0
'C
I
"C + 8
1:
'>
:e
en I 6
cQ)
U) I • . • • • • • • • • •
0
0 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 (NM)
Maximum range of RM pattem (rmax)
Figure 3
3-93
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••·163
(Example)
Assuming that the maximum range of the initial PM pattern is rBmax = 18 NM according to the
INFORMATION LABEL, and if that of the current PM pattern is rAmax = 16 NM, the deterioration
=
value is flR (rmax) SdB, referring to Calibration Curve II.
This means that the receiver system has sensitivity deterioration of approximately SdB.
Example of Checking Receiver System
8-18NM 16-18NM
Initial PM Current PM
pattern pattern
q
•
-E><
co
161dB
-a...:
Q)
::;, 14
Calibration curve II
Ci
>
c: 12
0
i... I \.r')-.. I INFORMATION
PERF. MONITOR
lABEL
0
'C 10
~
N\
DATE REAR lENGTH
-[
"':;>.
:=
'iii
8
6
. I
'95
V20 I ~18
c:
Q)
rn
4
..6..R 2
0, ~ ~
o 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 (NM)
rAmax rBmax
PM pattern maximum range (rmax)
Figure 4
3-94
~;\~~
. ,.
.
EBl Maneuvering· .. · . · . · · · . · · · . · . · . · ·.· .
Menu Composition
I SUB1 MENU I
I EBl MANEUVER I
1.EBl MANEUVER
~OFF DON
2.REACH
I o~
3.TURNMODE
~ RADIUS 0 RATE
4.TURN SET
O.lo-2.00nm I *. * *~
0.1 EXIT I
HEADING
III *. **1
iiiI *.**1
WOl
I *. **1
[ I] Initial Setting
Procedures 1 Click IMENUI ; then lSuB1 MENUI and lEal MANEUVER].

The EBl MANEUBER Menu will appear.
2 Click the numeric section of IREACij

!REACH! will be selected.
The numeric input dialogue box is opened.
3 Set the numeric value in the dialogue box.
4 Press IENOI.
3-95
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 165
5 Click [URN MODE].
!TURN MODEl will be selected.
Select any turn mode.
RADIUS: Constant turn diameter (NM)
RATE: Constant turn speed (deg/min)
6 Click the numeric setting section of [URN SElj .

!TURN SE1jwill be selected.
7
Set the numeric value in the dialogue box.

II
8 Press IENol.
Note: If the initial setting is not correct, the maneuver curve will be
affected.
3-96
.:» \ 'if'i::. • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
[ n] Creating Maneuver Curve
Procedures 1 Click IMENUI , then ~UB1 MENUI and IEBl MANEUVER!.

The EBL MANEUBER Menu will appear.
2 Click "ON" radio button of IEBl MANEUVER!.

"ON" in "1.EBL MANEUBER" will be set and a supplemental line, a maneuver
curve and WOL will appear on the radar display.
3 Set the starting point of the supplemental line using the

trackball and click to fix it.
The position of WOL (steering point) will change depending upon the starting
point of the supplemental line. If the WOL is behind own ship's position, the line
color of the WOL sill change.
4 Set the bearing of the supplemental line using the [EBl]

control.
The bearing of the supplemental line will be the bearing in which own ship will
finally move. The position of WOL will change depending upon the bearing of
the supplemental line. If WOL is behind own ship's position, the line color of the
WOL will change.
5 Select by left-elicking the trackball.

The setting will be established. However, if the WOL is behind own ship's
position, the entry of Click will be rejected and the setting will not be
established.
Note: If the [EBl] is pressed during the EBl MANEUVER operation,

the Menu will be closed and the maneuver curve creating
operation will be stopped.
3-97
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• ·1~7
Procedures 1 Click "OFF" radio button of lEal MNEUVER].

"OFF" in "1.EBL MANEUVER" will be set and the EBL MANEUVER function will
set to OFF.

... ...
... ...
...
WOL
Own Ship's Position Scheduled Route - - -
WOL : Steering point

REACH : Distance between when the wheel is steered and when the ship begins to turn
R : Turning radius
3-98
168
SECTION 4
MEASUREMENT OF RANGE
AND BEARING
11111111111111111111
Measurement by Trackball 4-1

Measurement by Range Rings 4-2
Measurement by EBLs and VRMs 4-2
Measurement between Two Optional Points .•..•.4-4
~ -tG~······································
Measurement by Trackball· .. · · .. · .. · · ... · .. · . · . · ....
Procedures 1. Check the target echoes on the radar display.
2. Move the cross cursor mark to a target by the trackball.
The [CURSOR] on the radar display indicates the bearing and range of the
target.
The range is a distance from own ship's position.
CURSOR(
TRUE 45.0· True bearing of the cursor relative to own liihip
5.0nm Range between the cursor anda own ship
o REL 45.0· Relative bearing of the cursor relative to own ship
Cursor
270
/
Own Ship
180
Fig. 4.1
4-1
·······································176
Procedures
1. I n -,,,.- I Press
The Range Rings will appear on the radar display.
The range between the target and own ships can be determined by visually
measuring the target's position that lies between two range rings.
(The range ring interval is fixed and indicates at the upper left of the radar
display.)
Measurement by EBls and VRMs' .
Procedures 1. Press ~BL0 to select EBl1 display and operation.
The "EBL1" indication at the lower right of the radar display will be selected and
the EBL 1 will appear as a broken-line on the PPI display.
2. Turn the [EBl] control to put EBl1 on a target.
The bearing of the EBL1 will appear at the lower right of the radar display.
The EBL 1 bearing represents the target's bearing.
3. Press ~RM~ to select VRM1 display and operation.
The "VRM1" indication at the lower right of the radar display will be selected
and the VRM1 will appear as a broken-line circle on the PPI display.
4. Move the broken-line VRM1 to the target by using the

trackball.
The range of the VRM 1 from own ship will appear at the lower right of the radar
display. The range of VRM1 signifies a distance between the target and own
ship.
Refer to Fig. 4.2 in the next page.

In this figure, the range and bearing are;
Range: 5.0 nm
Bearing: 45.0°
4-2
111 •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
,. -
o
.---
EBL1
270 90
Own Ship
. . . 45.0"
0"
•
EBL2
VRM2
5.0nm
nm
180
-------.~ tR~
EBL Control
Fig. 4.2
4-3
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 172
Measurement between Two Optional Points· · · · ..
Procedures 1. Press ~BL.2) to select EBL2 display and operation.
The "EBL2" indication at the lower right of the radar display will be selected and
the EBL2 will appear as a dotted line on the PPI display.
2. Left-click thee switch at the lower right of the EBL2.
3. Using the trackball, move the starting point of EBL2 to one

(A) of the two points.
(See Fig. 4.3.) II

4. Turn the [EBL] control to move EBL2 to the other point (B).
(See Fig. 4.3.)
5. Press ~RM~ to select VRM2 display and operation.

(. VRM marker) will appear on a dotted line of the EBL2.
6. Using the trackball, move the VRM2 marker on a dotted line of

EBL2 to the point B.
The VRM2 marker. moves away from the center of the display by turning the
trackball clockwise, and closer to the center.
The bearing and range between the two points will appear in the "VRM2" and
"EBL2" area on the lower right of the radar display.
4-4
1T1····································· o
EBLl
VRM2 Marker
\1 A \\
\
M~
B'1
I EBL2
"
" _---\\t//
.....
1+\3
270 90
Own Ship
t
0
EBLl 340.0
0
. . 90.0
a VRMl nm
180
• P;JI".1 3.0nm
--.~~~
EBL Control
Fig. 4.3
It is also possible to use EBl1 instead of EBl2 in measuring the bearing and
range between two optional points. In the procedures above, change EBl2
into EBl1 and VRM2 into VRM1, and left-click \; of the EBl2 in step 2.
4-5
- --"' ~
SECTION- 74 5
OPERATION OF ARPA
1111
11111111 11111111
5.6 DATA DISPLAY 5-18

Using ARPA 5-1 Types of Data Display 5-18
Method of Displaying Target Data [TGT DATAj 5-19
5.1 INITIAL SETIING 5-2 Cancellation of Displaying Target Data [TGT DATAj 5-19
Setting Collision Decision Criteria: SAFE UMIT.. 5-2 5.7 ALARM DISPLAY 5-20
Automatic Setting Mode (System Start) 5-4 Dangerous TargetAlarm: CPAlTCPA 5-20
Setting Range Scale: RANGE SCALE 5-4 Guard Zone Alarm [GUARD ZONEj 5-21
Setting Own Ship's Speed 5-5 Lost Target Alarm [LOST TARGET] 5-22
5.2 DISPLAY MODE SETIING 5-7 System Function Alarm [ARPA (DATA)j 5-23
Setting Motion Display Mode [TM/RMj 5-7 Gyro Set Alarm [SET GYROj 5-23
Setting Bearing Display Mode [AZI MODEj 5-7 5.8 TRIAL MANEUVERING 5-24
5.3 TARGET ID No. DISPLAY 5-8 Trial Maneuvering in the True Vector Mode 5-24
Trial Maneuvering in the Relative Vector Mode 5-25
5.4 TARGET ACQUISITION 5-9 Using the TRIAL Function 5-26
Automatic Acquisition [AUTOj 5-9 5.9 DELETING UNWANTED TARGETS 5-27
Manual Acquisition [MANUALj 5-11
Use of Automatic and Manual Acquisition Modes [GZ1, GZ2j Deleting Targets 5-27
[ACQ MANUALj 5-12 5.10 ARPASETTING 5-29
5.5 ARPADATADISPLAY 5-13 Simulation 5-30
Display of Vectors 5-13 Gate Size 5-32
Display of Past Positions [PAST POSNj 5-16 Test Video 5-34
- \.,.e. .
,. ..
Using ARPA
Attention I I
There are the following limitations on use of the target acquisition and tracking
functions of ARPA:
[I] Resolution between adjacent targets and swapping during automatic

tracking
Depending on the particular distance and echo size, resolution between
adjacent targets during automatic tracking usually ranges somewhere
between 0.03 and 0.05 nm. If multiple targets approach each other,
resolution will become about 0.03 nm and this may cause the system to
regard them as one target and thus to swap between them or lose one or
more of them. Such swapping or loss of targets may also occur if the
target image is affected by rain or snow clutter, sea clutter or if the target
moves close to land.
[II] Intensity of echoes and the tracking function

The intensity of echoes and the tracking function are correlated, and thus
the target will be lost if no echoes are detected for six consecutive scans.
Therefore, if there is a lost target, radar gain must be increased to improve
target detection. If, however, radar gain is increased too much, sea clutter
or other noise may be mistakenly detected and tracked as a target, and a
false alarm may result. In such cases, do not apply strong impact to the
touch panel, trackball or gain, because doing so may cause a malfunction.
[III] Adverse effects of error sources on automatic tracking

To execute accurate tracking, it is necessary to accurately adjust the
[GAIN], [SEA] and [RAIN] controls of the radar so that the target to be
acquired and tracked is clearly displayed. Inappropriate settings for these
controls will reduce the reliability and accuracy of automatic tracking.
5-1
• •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• ~16;
5.1 INITIAL SETTING

The initial settings for using the ARPA functions are described in this section.
Setting Collision Decision Criteria: SAFE LIMIT· · .
See sections 3.4 "Basic Operations" and 4 "Measurement of Range and Bearing" for descriptions of
operation.
Attention I I
• Set the optimum values of collision decision conditions, depending on the vessel
type, water area, weather and oceanographic conditions. (For the relations
between those conditions and alarms, refer to section 5.7 "ALARM DISPLAY.")
Before starting, check the collision decision criteria settings.
I SUB1 MENU
•
I ARPAIAIS
Procedures 1 Press IMENUI or IOPTION~ key on the 1.CPAUMIT
screen. 0.o-9.9nm 1,-----1:-c:~::-F~"""
2.TCPA UMIT
1-99min 1--1-0~~I
3.CPA RING
2 Click lSuB1 MENUI, then !ARPA/AISI.
~OFF DON
The ARPA Menu will appear.
4.1 TRIAL
3 Set CPA LIMIT (Closest Point of 5.GATE
12.HIGH ~I
Approach).
6. I A1S SETTING
(1) Left-click the "CPA LIMIT" edit box.

The numeric input dialogue box will be
opened.
0.1 EXIT
(2) Set the number by pressing the "+" or "-" keys in dialogue box.
(3) Press lEN] to set up the value entry.

The input number will be fixed.
5-2
-" 1•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
: \.1 4 Display the CPA LIMIT ring. I SUBl MENU~
I ARPAIAIS J
1.CPA UMIT
0.0-9.9nm I 1.5 ~I
2.TCPA UMIT
(1) Click the "ON" of "3.CPA RING". 1-99min 1--1-0=~~I
"ON" in"3.CPA RING "will be set and
3.CPA RING
''/CPA RINC3t' will appear on the radar ~OFF DON
display.
4·1 TRIAL I
5.GATE
[?HIGH ~I
6. 1 A1S SEmNG I
(2) Should the CPA ring not appear, click
the "OFF" of "3.CPA RING".
·OFF" in "3.CPA RING" will be set.
0.1 EXIT I
Attention: The CPA RING is not appearing in the TRUE Vector mode.
5 Set TCPA LIMIT (Time to CPA)

(1) Click the numeric section of "2.TCPA LIMIT".
The numeric input dialogue box will be opened.
(2) Set the number by pressing the "+" or "_" keys in the dialogue box.
(3) Press lEN] to set up the value entry.
EXit 1 Click~.
2 Click IEXll1.
Attention: The set values of CPA LlMITITCPA LIMIT will appear on the
radar display.
5-3
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 178
Automatic Setting Mode (System Start)· · · .
See sections 3.4 "Basic Operations" and 4 "Measurement of Range and Bearing" for descriptions
of operation.
Fig. 5-1 Mode Setting at System Start
Mode Initial setting Refer to Section

DISPLAY MODE RM (relative motion) 3.4
ACQUIRE AUTO OFF 5.3
TRIAL OFF 5.7
GUARD ZONE OFF 3.4,5.6
Setting Range Scale: (RANGE SCALE)· · .

5
The ARPA functions can operate on all range scales. Usually, set the r::lnge hp.tw~~n 1.5 to 24 NM
depending on the area of operation.
Attention: The ARPA acquisition range is 0.1 to 32 NM.
5-4
· .. -
~ .
Setting Own Ship's Speed· ·.· · ..
[I] When the LOG is not in operation (Manual Setting)
If the LOG is not in operation. set the estimated ship's speed manually.
I SUBl MENU I
I SETTING1 I
1.SET GYRO
0.0-359.9° I 0.0 fill
Procedures 1 Press the IMENUI or IOPTION~key on 2.SELECT SPEED
1. MANUAL
the screen.
The Main Menu will appear. 3.~
4.~
2 Click ~UB1 MENUI , then ISETTING11· 1 5. ; I :,,~~~"' 10 t

7.P~R;;F---:''':::'::~~-~'1
6.,
I 2.HIGH 191
3 Left-click the "2.SELECT SPEED" edit a.RANGE SELECT
box. II96nm []120nm
The "2.SELECT SPEED" edit box will be 9.1 SETTING2 I

selected.
0.1 EXIT I
4 Click IMANUAQ.
11.MNUAU will be set.
5 Click ~ET MANUAL SPEEDj. I SUB1 MENU I

I SETIING 1 ~
"3.SET MANUAL SPEED" will be set. I SET MANUAL SPEED I
The numeric input dialogue box will be 1. MANUAL SPEED
opened. 0-60.0 kts I--o-.o----.rn=:I
6 Set the number by pressing the "+" or
" -" keys in the dialogue box.
7 Press IENlj to set up the value entry.

Own ship's speed will be set.
0./ EXIT I
5-5
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• '180
~ -
Exit 1 Click IEXI].
2 Click IEXI] .
[II] When the LOG is operating
When the system is set to the LOG mode, the speed signal will be entered automatically and the ship's
speed will appear on the radar display.
The speed devices, which are displayed on the screen, are as follows:
LOG 1-axis log
2AXW 2-axis log Speed against water
2AXG , 2-axis log Speed against ground
GPS Speed from GPS
5
5-6
--\S~ ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
5.2 DISPLAY MODE SETTING

Setting Motion Display Mode [TM/RM]· .. · · . · ... · · · · .. · .. · . ·
.
Press '11Jll,1/111IAfs button on the upper left of the screen, then select the true motion (TM) display
mode or the relative motion (RM) display mode.
In the initial state, the mode is set to RM.
Not'AoA---------------------
For further details on the TM/RM modes, refer to section 3.4 "Select True/Relative Motion
Display Mode."
Setting Bearing Display Mode [AZI MODE]· · .
Set the bearing display mode by pressing li';~.M!:li,\1R/cue on the upper left of the screen.
NotAo'e---------------------
For further details on the TM/RM modes, refer to section 3.4 "Select True/Relative Motion
Display Mode,"
5-7
• •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 182
5.3 TARGET 10 No. DISPLAY

The target ID number is a number displayed next to the symbol when a target ship is acquired.
This number is allocated to target ships from 1 to 50 in the order that they are acquired. This number
is used to identify each target ship until the target ship is lot.or released.
Attention: Whether the Target 10 No. display is turned ON or OFF can be checked only
with a target acquired. For a description of acquisition, refer to 5.4 "Target
Acquisition".
Depress (;:rTA) to turn Target ID No. Display ON or OFF.
With this display ON, the target ID No. is displayed next to the capture symbol.
With this display OFF, the entire target ID Numbers. are non-displayed.
However, the numbers remain displayed for captured targets of which numeric data
display is specified.
Note--------------------
•
For a description on how to specify the numeric data display, refer to 5.6 "Data Display."
5-8
1~1 •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
5.4 TARGET ACQUISITION

Attention I I
• It is important to adjust the controls [SEA] and [GAIN] properly in the automatic
target acquisition mode to minimize the effect of sea clutter.
Target acquisition can be performed in two modes, AUTO and MANUAL, and both
modes can be used at the same time.
Automatic Acquisition [AUTO]· · . · · ·.······ · .
Attention I I
• If untracked targets enter the guard zone when the maximum number of targets
(50 targets) is already being tracked, targets with lower levels of danger will be
cancelled and replaced.
Procedures 1 Click ~ or IGz21 on the screen.

Automatic target acquisition will start. The target acquired will be marked with
"0" and its target 10 No., which will move with the target. Its vector will appear
within one minute.
Attention: When the Target 10 No. display is set to OFF, any acquired target ship will not
be given a target 10 No.
0°
5-9
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • tr'<;.... -
18 ~
In the ACQ AUTO mode, the targets within a guard zone will be acquired
automatically. The guard zone can be set arbitrarily. If a guard zone is not set,
a guard zone of 3 NM and ±45 degrees in the direction of the own ship will be set.
(Guard Zone 1: Heading direction, Guard Zone 2: Sternward direction)
For the setting method, refer to section 3.4 "Set Guard Zones."
Guard zone 1 will come on when ~ is clicked. When ~ is pressed again,

automatic tracking will turn off and the guard zone will be erased from the radar
screen, but other ships that were being tracked shall continue to be tracked.
Guard Zone
• Target that has entered the guard zone.

The guard zone intruder symbol is displayed.
~
Target that has continued to intrude in the guard
zone for one minute.
The guard zone intruded symbol, acquired symbol
•
and vector are displayed.
~
Target that has moved outside the guard zone.
The capture symbol and vector are displayed.
The guard zone intruder symbol is cleared.
5-10
~ .
... -
Manual Acquisition [ACQ MANUAL]· .
Attention I I
• If the maximum number of targets (50) is already acquired, then new targets
cannot be acquired. To do so, cancel any current targets that are not required.
Procedures 1 Press
2 Move the cross cursor on to the target to be acquired, then
press the left trackball button .
The acquired target will be marked with" [~~] "and it's target 10 No. Its vector
will appear within one minute.
Attention: When the Target 10 No. display is set to OFF, any captured target ship will not
be given a target 10 No.
Number of Targets and Acquisition Area
Target to be acquired
To use the manual acquisition mode only without the automatic mode on concurrently,
press [ACa AUTO] to turn Automatic Acquisition OFF.
5·11
...................................... ~."-
. .'186
-
rrr»
Manually acquired target.
•~--:• ·.------
04 The initial acquisition symbol is displayed.
o ~~
Target that has intruded into the zone for one minute.
The acquisition symbol and vector are displayed.
Use of Automatic and Manual Acquisition Modes [GZ1 ~ GZ2]

[ACQ MANUAL]· · · · .
Method of Operation
Execute manual target acquisition in the automatic acquisition mode, that is, in the state In
which the Automatic Acquisition mode [GZ1, GZ2] is ON. 5
Use of Combined Auto/Manual Mode
When both automatic and manual acquisition modes are used concurrently, important
targets should be acquired manually, and the rest should be acquired automatically. If
new targets enter the zone and they exceed the maximum number of targets that can be
acquired, manual targets will continue to be displayed until they leave the guard zone, but
automatically acquired targets will be cancelled according to their degree of importance.
5-12
• ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
\~1
5.5 ARPA DATA DISPLAY

(Refer to the Display Example on page 2-1.)
Display of Vectors· · ···· · · .. · · · · · · · · .. · · · . · ·
Attention
• When a targeting or the own ship changes course or when a target is acquired,
the vector may not reach a given level of accuracy until three minutes or more has
passed after such a course change or target acquisition.
Even if three minutes or more have passed, the vector may include an error
depending upon the tracking conditions.
A vector representing a target's predicted position can be presented in the TRUE vector or RELATIVE
vector mode. In each mode, a vector length can be freely changed for a time interval of 1 to 60
minutes.
[I] Vector Mode Selection
True Vector Mode

In the true vector mode, the direction of a target vector indicates the true course of the
target and its vector length is proportional to its speed.
In this mode, the own ship's vector is displayed as shown below.
In this mode, the movements of other ships around own ship can be accurately and easily
monitored. However, no CPA RING can be displayed in this mode.
Own ship's vector

True vector
1
5-13 J
• ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
Relative Vector Mode
188
In order to display the relative vector of a target, press the I T/R VECT I switch to select
the Relative Vector mode.
The relative vector does not represent the true motion of a target, but its relative relation
with the own ship. This means that a target with its relative vector directed at the own ship
(passing through the CPA LIMIT ring) is a dangerous target.
In the Relative Vector mode, the CPA LIMIT of targets can be seen at a glance.
Relative vector
The true vector is not displayed.
•
Therefore, the TRUE/REL modes can be used in the following way: The TRUE vector can
be used to know the true aspect of a target, and the REL vector can be used to know the
closest point of approach (CPA) of a target.
5-14
_.\~, .
[II] Vector Length: VECTOR TIME
The vector length of a target is proportional to its speed. and the vector time can be
changed from 1 to 60 minutes.
The figure below illustrates a vector length of a target of six minutes. The tip of the vector
represents the target's expected position in six minutes.
Current position Future predicted position

(Six minutes later in this example)
Setting Vector Time

In order to display the relative vector, press the [TRUE/REL] key to select it.
Procedures 1 Click the numeric section

I ARPA STAB GND I
of "VECTOR". VECTOR
LIMIT
m din
The numeric input dialogue box is
opened.
I 1.51 nm lOin
PAST POSN [!] 1 min
GUARD ZONE OJ rn
2 When changing vector constants, left-elick the numbers 0 to 9
or the "+" or "-" keys to change the vectors.
3 Click lEN] .
The number input will be applied as the vector time.
5-15
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •--1f-' .
190
Display of Past Positions [PAST POSN]· . · · .
Press the [PAST POSN] switch to display the past position of targets.
A maximum of six past positions for each target can appear. Every time the [PAST POSN]
switch is pressed, the time interval is changed between 0.5, 1, 2 and 4 minutes. When the
interval is 4 and the switch is pressed again, the past positions on display will be turned
OFF.
The interval is displayed under PAST POSN in the
ARPA information screen. When OFF is
displayed, the past position display is turned off.
The trail mode is interlocked with the vector mode
to allow the past positions of a target to appear in
the True or Relative Vector mode. In the Relative
Vector mode, the target's relative past positions
are displayed. In the True Vector mode, the
target's true past positions are displayed after
calculating them from its relative bearing and
range, and the course and speed of the own ship.
Fig. 5-2 shows an example of a screen, and Table
5
5-1 shows the meanings of the symbols on the radar screen.
Guard zone
,Target intruding into the guard zone
Trackball
Dangerous target
(Cursor)
Past positions
(Changed course
Untracked target
NAV line
Safe target
Past Positions
(Straight course)
Fig. 5.2 Example of Display (In North Up and True Vector Mode)
In addition to the marks and symbols shown above, fixed/variable range markers, electronic
bearing lines and other symbols are shown in an actual image.
5-16
:-- \~.~
I>
Table 5.1 Definitions of Symbols

.
Vector/Symbol Definition Remarks
Tracked target
G
Dangerous target Alarm characters (CPAlTCPA) appear
~ (CPAlTCPA) and an alarm sounds. The vector and
symbol blink.
Initial acquisition Displayed after a target is acquired and

[=:J mark until its vector is displayed.
Target with its data When designating a target's data

indicated indication with the trackball, the target's
symbol is changed into D and the
D target's ID is indicated. However, in
case of a lost target or a dangerous
target, its corresponding symbol is
displayed instead of D.
Lost target Alarm characters (LOST) appear and an
(This symbol appears alarm sounds. No vector is displayed,
~ when a target cannot

be tracked for any
but the symbol blinks.
reason.)
Target that has Alarm characters (GZ) appear and an

V entered the guard alarm sounds.
zone The symbol blinks.
+
Trackball cross This cursor is used to select a target
cursor when acquiring manually, canceling
targets and for setting numerical data.
Post positions of The symbols and vectors are only
~.~
targets displayed when [PAST POSN] is ON.
The position interval can be set to 0.5, 1,
2 or 4 minutes.
~I
5-17
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• ,~192
5.6 DATA DISPLAY

Attention I i
• When a target or the own ship changes course or when a target is acquired, the
vector may not reach a given level of accuracy until three minutes or more has
passed after such a course change or target acquisition.
Even if three minutes or more have passed, the vector may include an error
depending upon the tracking conditions.
Types of Data Display· · · .
Target Data
Target identification (10)

True bearing: T BRG
Range: RNG
10 number of the target
0.1 degree units
0.01 NM units
•
True course: ICSE 0.1 degree units
True speed: 1'SPD 0.1 knot units
Closest point of approach (CPA) 0.1 NM units
Time to CPA (TCPA) 0.1 minute units
Bow crossing range (BCR) 0.1 NM units
Bow crossing time (BCT) 0.1 minute units
~ Targets that have their numeric data displayed are indicated with the symbol "0" to
distinguish them from other targets.
Note
r If a target's data is displayed, but without the symbol "0", such a target exists outside
l the currently shown radar display.
t
I
5-18
_.\~~ .
Method of Displaying Target Data [TGT DATA]· ..... · · .. · ....
Procedures
(TGTl
1 Press ~ .
TGT DATA will appear in the CURSOR ( ) at the upper right of the radar
screen.
2 Move the cross cursor to a target (being tracked) to indicate its

data using the trackball. Next, press the left trackball button
to select it. (Up to two targets can be selected.)
The data of the designated target will be displayed, and the symbol will change to
·0·. The target data will remain on the radar display until the target is lost and its
vector disappears, or until another target is designated.
If a target with the .. [~~] "symbol is designated, only its true bearing (BRG) and
range (RNG) will appear until its vector appears.
Cancellation of Displaying Target Data [TGT DATA]· · · · · · · · · ..

(TGTl
Procedures 1 Press ~ .
bSlli.?~nli"
screen.
will appear in the CURSOR ( )at the upper right of the radar 1
J
2 Move the cross cursor to a target (being target) to indicate its
data using the trackball. Next, press the right trackball button
to select it. j
The data of the designated target will be deleted, and the symbol will, change to
acquisition mark.
!
5-19
·······································:194
- ~ --~
5.7 ALARM DISPLAY

The ARPA system provides the following alarms:
Dangerous target alarm: CPAlTCPA
Guard zone intrusion alarm: GZ
Lost target alarm: LOST
System function alarm: ARPA (DATA)
Gyro set alarm: SET GYRO
Dangerous Target Alarm: (CPAlTCPA)· ·· · .
I
~ CAUTION
,Ell
O If either the CPA LIMIT or TCPA LIMIT is set to zero, then the
dangerous target alarm will not operate.
Since these alarms may include some errors depending on the
target tracking conditions, the navigation officer himself should
make the final decision for ship operations such as collision
avoidance.
In the ARPA system, targets are categorized into two types: tracked targets and
dangerous targets. The degree of danger can easily be recognized on the display at a
glance, so that an officer can easily decide to which target he should pay attention.
The types of targets and alarms are shown below.
I,
Dangerous TargetAlarm
Symbol on Alarm
I Status
CRT characters
Alarm sound Conditions
~
,
Tracking
target
0 (OFF) (OFF)
• CPA>CPA LIMIT
• O>TCPA
• TCPA>TCPA LIMIT
Beeping
Dangerous CPA!
(pee-poh) • CP~CPA LIMIT
0
target TCPA O~TCPA~TCPA LIMIT
,
,
Acknowledgeable
CPA LIMIT and TCPA LIMIT: The setting values
I 5-20
-
.\\
.
~
.
Guard Zone Alarm [GUARD ZONE]· ······ .
~ CAUTION
O In setting a guard zone, it is necessary to adjust radar tuning,

gain, sea clutter suppression and rain/snow clutter suppression
to ensure that target echoes are displayed in the optimum
conditions. The guard zone alarm is not generated for the
targets that are not detected by radar.
The guard zone function is used to set a zone at an arbitrary range and to sound an alarm if
a target intrudes into this zone.
Refer to section 3.4 "Set Guard Zones" on how to set guard zones.
Guard Zone Alarm
Status
Symbol on Alarm
t
CRT characters
Target Beeping (pipipi) An alarm sound is
entering the Acknowledgeable generated when a target
guard zone 0 GZ enters the 0.5 NM range
between the outer and inner
rings.
5-21
....................................... --
196
Lost Target Alarm [LOST TARGET]· ... · ... · . · · ..... · .. · .....
Attention I I
• If the radar tuning, gain, sea clutter suppression and rain/snow clutter suppression
are not appropriate, the lost target alarm may be generated frequently, so that
adjustments should be made carefully.
When it is impossible to continue tracking any acquired and tracked target, the LOST target
alarm will be generated. The typical causes for this alarm are shown below, but they are
not limited to these:
• The target echo is very weak;
• The target has entered the shadow of land or a large ship and its echo is not being
received;
• The target echo is hidden by sea clutter.
II
Lost target
Lost Target Alarm
Symbol on Alarm
Status Alarm sound Conditions
CRT characters
Lost target LOST Beep sound (pee) The alarm will sound once
~ Acknowledgeable when a lost target symbol is

displayed.
5-22
.-' -" \9 1
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
System Function Alarm [ARPA (DATA)]· · · .
When an abnormal state of an input signal or a problem in the processing circuitry occurs, a
character string or alarm is generated. When an alarm occurs for any ARPA function,
ARPA (DATA) will appear in the WARNING display area, but no indication is made in the
ARPA information display. The cause of the alarm may be an operational error in ARPA,
so please contact the service depot or manufacturer.
Gyro Set Alarm [SET GYRO] .. · .. · · .. · .. · · .. · · . · · .. · · · . · · . · ·
The North Stabilizing Kit (NSK) in this system receives signals from a gyro. Even if the
power is turned off, the system will track gyro motions. However, the system stops
tracking the gyro if the power of the master gyro is turned off or if there are any problems
with the line. When the power of the master gyro is turned back on, the SET GYRO alarm
will be generated.
If this alarm is sounded, set the gyro.
Gyro Set Alarm
Alarm
characters
The signals from the gyro are stopped, but the gyro is
SET GYRO Beep sound (pipi)
recovered.
5-23
· -
198
5.8 TRIAL MANEUVERING

Attention I i
• In trial maneuvering, a simulation is executed with the current course and speed
of the target ship. Since the situation is different from actual ship maneuvers, the
CPA LIMIT and TCPA LIMIT should be set with ample leeway.
Trial maneuvering is used to simulate the course and speed necessary to avoid a collision
when a dangerous target appears. When the ship's course and speed are manually
entered against the data of the acquired target, a check is made to determine whether there
is any danger.
The ranges of course and speed to be entered manually are as follows:
Course: 360 degrees (0.1 degree intervals)
Speed: 0 to 100 knots (0.1 knot steps)
Trial Maneuvering in the True Vector Mode· ... · ... · .. · .... · .

[EBL] control
[VRM] control
II
In the True Vector mode. calculations are made according to the values set by TRIAL
SPEED and TRIAL COURSE, and the result is displayed as a bold-line that represents the
change of the own ship's vector as shown in the figure below (an example of the course
changed to starboard).
In this figure, the dangerous target that is ahead to the port side becomes safe as a result of
the simulation.
The target data display field indicates the current CPA LIMIT and TCPA LIMIT values
regardless of the result of the simulation.
NORMAL TRIAL
Change of symbol as a
{ result of trial maneuver
c:::::>
Trial speed (vector time)
5-24
~~~ .
Trial Maneuvering in the Relative Vector Mode' .
The result of trial maneuvering in the Relative Vector mode is shown by a change in target
vector. In the figure below (with the same conditions as in the True Vector mode on the
previous page), it is seen that the acquired target is a dangerous one because its vector is
crossing the CPA RING.
NORMAL TRIAL
Change of symbol as a
result of trial maneuver
c:::> Change in course
The above figure shows that the relative vector of the target has changed as shown in the
figure as a result of simulation (course and speed), so that the target's symbol is changed to
"0"; Le., a safe target. As was the case in the True Vector mode, the data display field
indicates the current values of CPA LIMIT and TCPA LIMIT, not those as the result of the
simulation.
The course change of own ship is displayed as a dotted line.
5-25
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 200
Using the TRIAL Function· · · · ..
Procedures 1 Press the IMENUI or IOPTION~ key on the screen.

The ARPA menu will be opened.
2 Click !SUB1 MENUI, then ~RPAJAISI and fTRIAq .

The ARPA TRIAL menu will be opened.
3 left-click "ON" under "1.TRIAl".

"1.TRIAL" will be turned "ON" and the character "T" will blink below the own ship
display in the radar screen, indicating that the system is conducting a trial.
4 Make the settings with the course [EBl] control and speed
[VRM] control.
Cancellation
5
1
The plot data symbols are "~" for dangerous targets and "0"
for safe targets.
Select OFF under TRIAL in the ARPA TRIAL menu.

II
"OFF" will be set for "TRIAL" and the system will return to the normal display.
Exit 1 Click IEXIT! .

The ARPA TRIAL menu will be closed.
2 Click IEXIT! .
The ARPA menu will be closed.
5-26
- -~2.~1. •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
5.9 DELETING UNWANTED TARGETS

When it is no longer necessary to continue tracking acquired and tracked targets with their
symbols and vectors displayed, or when it necessary to reduce the number of vectors to
make the screen easier to observe. unnecessary targets can be cancelled one by one.
When all targets are reacquired from the beginning, all the targets on display can be
cancelled at once.
Deleting Targets· . · · · ·· ··· · · · · · · ..
Deleting one target

~
Procedures 1 Press ~
The ARPA menu is opened.
2 Place the cross cursor over the target to be deleted.
3 Press the left trackball button.

The symbol and vector of the target will be deleted, and only the target echo will
remain.
Or,
Procedures ~
1 Press ~.
The ARPA menu is opened.
2 Place the cross cursor over the target to be deleted.
5-27
~
.··.·.······························~~~202
3 Press the left trackball button.
The symbol and vector of the target will be deleted, and only the target echo will
remain.
Attention I i
• When all targets are deleted, the system stops tracking all the targets and they
must be acquired again, either automatically or manually. Therefore, do not use
this method except when it is necessary to delete all targets.
Deleting all targets
Procedures 1 Press G~c~J continuously for 2 seconds or more.
All the symbols and vectors of all targets will be deleted.
5-28
· -' '3
.t.~\ ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
5.10 ARPA SETTING
Lh CAUTION
(9 This simulation is a function to check whether the ARPA system
is operating normally. Do not use this function except to check
ARPA operation.
Especially, avoid using this mode during actual navigation
because it will display pseudo targets on the radar screen, which
may be confused, with actual targets. Using this function during
actual navigation can lead to accidents.
The following constants used for ARPA can be referred to and modified:
[IJ SIMULATOR: Pseudo targets are generated on the radar display to check
whether the ARPAfunctions are operating normally.
[II] VD LEVEL: Quartering level for the video to be input to the target
detection circuit.
[IIIJ VECTOR CONSTANT: Constant to calculate the ARPAvectors.
[IVJ GATE: Gate size to acquire and track targets.
M TEST VIDEO: Test video for use in checking the operation of the target
detection circuit.
5-29
·······································K
, ~04
Simulation· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ·
~ CAUTION
(9 Do not change the VO LEVEL and VECTOR CONSTANT,

because they are already set to the optimum values. Making
any changes to these may cause deterioration in the ARPA
performance.
Pseudo targets are generated in certain known positions to check whether the ARPA
processing circuits are operating normally. Since the pseudo targets move according to
known parameters, the values for these pseudo targets can be compared with the known
values by acquiring, tracking and displaying them, and thereby checking whether the ARPA
system is operating normally.
This function should be used only in the standby
mode.
I
I
TEST MENU
ARPA TEST
I
I
•
I 1.s1MULATOR i
Procedures 1 Press (s~Y) to set 1.0FF
2.TEsT VI
the standby mode.
2 Click 00 on the screen.

Or press IOPTION11 key.
The TEST Menu will appear.
3 Click \AiWA TESl1.

The ARPA TEST menu will appear.
4 Click the "1.SIMULATOR" edit

box.
SIMULATOR is selected, and the pull down
menu is displayed.
IO. I EXIT
I
5-30
'--'~\)tj
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
5 When moving the pseudo target:
[ I ] SCENARI01
Click ISCENARlo11, then (s~Y) to set the transmission mode.

I2.SCENARI011 will be set to generate a pseudo target at the true bearing
of 18°and the relative range of 3.2NM. The target will then approach true
bearing of 90°and the relative range of 1NM at a relative speed of
20kts .Characters "XX" appear blinking at the lower of the radar display,
showing that the system is executing the simulation mode.
[n] SCENARI02
Click IScENARIO~ I then (s~,D to set the transmission mode.
I3.SCENARI021 will be set to generate a pseudo target at the true bearing of

O'and the relative range of 6NM. The target will then approach own ship at
a relative speed of 10 kts in a relative course of 180~ Characters "XX"
appear blinking at the lower of the radar display, showing that the system is
executing the simulation mode.
Note: When the range between own ship and the pseudo target is 0,
the target will disappear.
6 When finishing the simulation, press G~J to set the standby

mode, then click 1QffI.
11.0FF! will be set.
Exit 1 Click IEXI] or 00 .

Pseudo Target Parameters
SCENARIO Start point End point Target

NUMBER Distance Direction Distance Direction speed
1 3.2NM 18° 1NM 90° 20kts
2 6NM 0° ONM 0° 10kts
3 6NM 18° 1NM 18° 10kts
4 6NM 45° 1NM 45° 105kts
5 6NM 45° 6NM 150° 20kts
6 6NM 45° 6NM 150° 20kts
5-31
·······································206
-- ,
Gate Size· .
~ CAUTION
(9 Do not change the preset gate size carelessly. If the gate

value is improper, the ARPA acquisition and tracking functions
may deteriorate.
Otherwise, this may cause accidents to occur.
The Gate Size is defined as an "Area Within which targets are watched by the ARPA" processing
circuit.
If the gate size is too large, targets are not lost but may be swapped with other close targets.
If the gate size is too small, targets are not easily swapped, but may be lost.
The ARPA processing circuit is designed to detect target sizes and set an accurate gate size
depending on the ranges and sizes of those targets (NARROW is the standard size). However,
•
change the setting parameters to select the best size in the following conditions:
Set ~.NARROWI in normal operation .
• When acquiring and tracking targets that spread widely in the angular direction
(The angular direction of the gate aperture is important)··················· .. ·11.WIOE!
. When many targets are densely congested and swapped within 3NM in a port
(The gate size should be reduced)········································· ·13.sMALLI
5-32
~Q1
~~ .
Procedures 1 Press the !MENUI or IOPTION~ key on the screen.
I SUB1 MENU I
2 I ARPA I AIS I
1.CPALIMIT
The ARPA Menu will appear.

0.1-9.9nm I 1.511
2.TCPA LIMIT
1-99min I 10~
3 Click the "S.GATE" edit box.
The "2.SELECT SPEED" edit box will
be selected.
4 Press any of 1 to 3. 6·1 J 2.NARROW 1:11

Enter the number of gate type to
change.
Exit 1 Click IEXI]. 0.1 EXIT ,

2 Click~.
5-33
·······································208
..
Test Video· · · · · · · ·.
Attention I I
• TEST VIDEO may not appear for targets that are not acquired or tracked, or if the
controls [GAIN] and [SEA] are not adjusted appropriately.
Test Video is used to check whether the video signals under target acquisition and tracking
are inputted to and processed in the target processing circuit normally.
However, it is sufficient to check that I3.VDHI in TEST VIDEO is displayed.
The start of the Test video mode is available only in the Standby mode.
I I
Cs~J
TEST MENU
Procedures 1 Press to set I ARPA TEST I
1.SIMULATOR
the standby mode. 1....1-.0F--F--....,s=1
2.TEST VIDEO
00 on the screen.
•
3.VDIN
2 Click
1.0FF
Or press IOPTION11 key. 3·1 12.VDG
3 Click ~RPA TESlj .

The ARPA TEST Menu will appear.
4 Click the "2.TEST VIDEO" edit box.

"2.TEST VIDEO" is selected and the pull down
menu is displayed.
5 Click "3.VDH" to select it. I 0·1 EXIT I

[YQ8I will be set.
Test video for 3.vDH (video input in quartering HIGH level) will appear on the
radar display.
6 Press Cs~,D to set
the transmission state.
7 In order to change the test video type, press (s~0 to enter

the standby mode, then select the test video type from the pull
down menu.
Attention: If I OFF I is set, test video will not be displayed.
5-34
--~\t~···································
-
....
Exit 1 Click IEXI] or ~.

Execute TEST VIDEO in l3.vDHI normally.
Attention: If any target displayed clearly in the radar display is not displayed in the
Test Video mode, the target detection circuit of the ARPA system may
have a trouble.
5-35
i. 210 i' ~.
--
SECTION 6
TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES ON
DISPLAY
111111
11111111 111111
Radar Wave with the Horizon 6-1

Strength of Reflection from the Targets 6-3
Sea Clutters 6-3
False Echoes 6-3
Display of Radar Transponder (SART) 6-6
_. ~
9
. -••
- • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
The radar operator has a role of interpreting the radar displays to provide his best aid in
maneuvering the ship. For this purpose, the operator has to observe the radar displays after fully
understanding the advantages and disadvantages that the radar has. For better interpretation of
radar displays, it is important to gain more experiences by operating the radar equipment in fair
weathers and comparing the target ships watched with the naked eyes and their echoes on the
radar display.
The radar is mainly used to monitor the courses of own ship and other ships in open seas, to
check buoys and other nautical marks when entering a port, to measure own ship's position in the
coastal waters relative to the bearings and ranges of the shore or islands using a chart. and to
monitor the position and movement of a heavy rain if it appears on the radar display.
Various types of radar display will be explained below.
Radar Wave with the Horizon· ···········.
Radar beam radiation has the nature of propagating nearly along the curved surface of the earth.
The propagation varies with the property of the air layer through which the radar beam
propagates.
In the normal propagation, the distance (0) of the radar wave to the horizon is approximately 10%
longer than the distance to the optical horizon. The distance (0) is given by the following
formula:
D =2.23(& + Jh2)(ntn)
h1: Height (m) of radar scanner above sea level

h2: Height (m) of a target above sea level
Fig. 6.1 is a diagram for determining the maximum detection range of a target that is limited by the
curve of the earth surface in the normal propagation.
,... 0 .,
6-1
• •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• __ 212
h2(m)
700
660
/ " "" 600

.-"
""
500
" "
" "" 400
hI tm) .-"
D(nm) "
/" "" 300
70/"
"" 200
" 60
/ " ""
"" so
" 100.
/ " ""
40
"
/ " 50
.- /
/ 30
30 / "" 25
20 /
"
.,- 20
10 " -----------_ ..... -- ---- 10
5 10
•
o o o
Height of Scanner Detective Range Height of Target
Fig. 6.1
When the height of own ship's scanner is 10m for instance,

(a) A target that can be detected at the radar range of 64 nm on the radar display is required to
have a height of 660 m or more.
(b) If the height of a target is 10 m, the radar range has to be approx. 15 nm. However, the
maximum radar range at which a target can be detected on the radar display depends upon
the size of the target and the weather conditions, that is, the radar range may increase or
decrease depending upon those conditions.
6-2
_.-
. . '!1~·····································
Strength of Reflection from the Targets· .
The signal intensity reflected from a target depends not only on the height and size of the target
but also on its material and shape. The echo intensity from a higher and larger target is not
always higher in general.
In particular, the echo from a coastline is affected by the geographic conditions of the coast.
If the coast has a very gentle slope, the echo from a mountain on the inland appears on the radar
display.
Therefore, the distance to the coastline should be measured carefully.
Mountain displayed on the radar display

HL
Sea shore line not displayed on the radar display
Fig. 6.2
Sea CIutters· · ·.·.·.·.· ··.··· ·· ···.·.· · .
When the sea surface ruffles, bright echo returns spread around the center of the radar display.
The higher the waves are, the echo returns are larger.
Swirling currents may appear as a smooth line like a coastal line.
False Echoes· · · · · · · · · · .... · . · · · . · . · .. · · . · · . · . · . · . · · . · ... ·
The radar observer may be embarrassed with some echoes that do not exist actually. These
false echoes appear by the following caused that are well known:
[I] Shadow
When the radar scanner is installed near a funnel or mast, the echo of a target that exists in the
direction of the funnel or mast cannot appear on the radar display because the radar beam is
reflected on the funnel or mast. Whether there is monitoring the sea clutter returns can check
some false echoes due to shadows, in which there may be a part of weak or no returns.
Such shadows appear always in the same directions, which the operator should have in mind in
radar operation.
6-3
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • ~1
214
[II] Side Lobe Effect
A broken-line circular arc may appear at the same range as the main lobe of the radar beam on
the radar display. This type of false echo can easily be discriminated when a target echo.
appears independent. (See Fig. 6.3)
Fig. 6.3
[III] False Echo by Secondary Reflection

When a target exists near own ship, two echoes from the single target may appear on the radar
display. One of those echoes is the direct echo return from the target and the other is the
secondary reflection return from a mast or funnel that stands in the same direction as shown in Fig.
6.4.
Direct micro wave
';
/
ctual target IIIlIIIIII
';
/"
';
i ,
False echo from
Secondary reflection n..; funnel
of micro wave
Fig. 6.4
[IV] False Echo by Multiple Reflection

When there is a large structure or ship with a high vertical surface near own ship as shown in Fig.
6.5, multiple reflection returns may appear on the radar display. These echoes appear in the
same intervals, of which the nearest echo is the true echo of the target.
HL
;,4 .A
Fig. 6.5
6-4
ti~
~ .
M Abnormal Propagation
The maximum radar detection range depends upon the height of the scanner and the height of a
target as described in the section of "The Horizon for Radar Beam Radiation". If a so-called
"duct" occurs on the sea surface due to a certain weather condition, however, the radar beam may
propagate to an abnormally long distance, at which a target may be detected by the radar.
For instance, assuming that the radar range is 6 NM (on the repetition frequency of 1100 Hz), the
first pulse is reflected from a target at about 76 NM or more and received during the next pulse
repetition time. In this case, a false echo appears at a position that is about 76 NM shorter than
the actual distance. If the false echo appears at 5 NM on the radar display, the true distance of
=
the target is 5 + 76 81 NM. On the radar range scale of 1.5 NM (on the repetition frequency of
1900 Hz), a false echo may appear at a position that is about 43 NM shorter than the actual
distance.
This type of false echo can be discriminated by changing over the range scale (the repetition
frequency), because the distance of the target changes accordingly.
[VI] Radar Interface

When another radar equipment using the same frequency band as that on own ship is near own
ship, a radar interference pattern may appear on the radar display. This interference pattern
consists of a number of spots, which appear, in various forms. These spots do not always
appear at the same places, so that they can be discriminated from the target echoes. (See Fig.
6.6)
Fig. 6.6
6-5
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• _216
Display of Radar Transponder (SART)· . · · .
The SART (Search and rescue Radar Transponder) is a survival device authorized by the GMDSS
(Global Maritime Distress and Safety System), which is used for locating survivors in case that a
distress accident occurs at sea. The SART is designed to operate in the 9 GHz frequency band.
When receiving the 9 GHz radar signal (interrogating signal) transmitted from the radar equipment
on a rescue ship or search aircraft, the SART transmit a series of response signals to inform the
distress position to the rescue and search party.
The SART position can be displayed on the radar video by setting the radar as follows:
CDRadar range scale: 6 NM or 12 NM
® Sea clutter control: Minimum (Most counterclockwise)
@ AUTO SEA function: OFF
@ TUNE control: No tuning (to weaken clutter echoes)
@ Interference rejecter (IR): OFF
@ PROCESS: OFF
Position of SART
Land
Position of the rescue craft
•
[Example of Display]
Attention I I
• When the radar is set as in CD to @ above to detect the SART signal, the targets
around own ship will disappear from the radar display. So it is necessary to
exercise full surveillance over the conditions around own ship by visual watch in
order to avoid any collision or stranding.
If two or more sets of radar equipment are installed on own ship, use one set of 9
GHz band radar for detection of the SART signal and operate others as normal
radars for monitoring targets around own ship, checking on own ship's position
and avoidance of stranding.
After end of detecting the SART signal, it is necessary to readjust the radar for
normal navigation.
6-6
:.217
SECTION 7
MAINTENANCE
11111111111111111111
7.1 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE 7·1

7.2 MAINTENANCEON EACH UNIT 7·2
Scanner NKE·107911075A1108911087 7·2
Transmitter-receiver Unit NTG-3037Al3028 74
Display Unit NCD-4263 7-5
Coaxial Cable (JMA-9933·SA) 7-5
Wave Guide (JMA-9923·7XA19XA) 7-6
· --~'1.8. •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
7.1 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE
~ WARNING
Never carry out internal inspection or repair work of the
(9 equipment by a user.
Inspection or repair work by unauthorized person may cause a
fire or an electric shock.
Ask you're nearest branch, business office or a dealer for
inspection and repair.
A Turn off the main power source before starting maintenance.

V Otherwise, an electric shock may result.
For operating the radar equipment in the good conditions, it is necessary to make the
maintenance work as described below. If maintenance is made properly, troubles will
reduce. It is recommended to make regular maintenance work as often as possible.
Common points of maintenance for each unit are as follows:
Clean the equipment
Remove the dust, dirt and seawater rest on the equipment cabinet with a piece of dry
cloth.
Especially, clean the air vents with a brush for good ventilation.
7-1
·······································219
7.2 MAINTENANCE ON EACH UNIT
Scanner NKE-1 079/1 075AJ1 089/1 087· · · · .. · .. · · .. · · .
~ WARNING
A Turn off the main power source before starting maintenance.

V Otherwise, an electric shock or injury may result.
Set the Safety Switch for Stopping the Scanner to cents [OFF].
A Otherwise, an accidental contact with the rotating scanner may
V result in injury.
Otherwise, an electric shock may result.
After finishing the maintenance work, set the safety switch for stopping the scanner to
"ON".
Precautions on Mounting the Cover

When the cover is removed for regular checkup and replacement of parts and refitted
after such work, the procedures of fastening bolts shall be taken with th~ f'.:'!!'.:'~·!!~g
•
precautions:
(a) The properfastening torque of the fitting bolts (M8) is 1176 to 1470 N-cm (120 to 150
kgf-cm) (which makes the inside watertight and protects the packing against
permanent compressive strain).
The packing start producing from the cover at the torque of approximately 1470
N-cm (150 kgf-cm) or more.
Do not fasten the bolts with a torque exceeding the specified value. Otherwise, the
screws may be broken.
(b) Use an offset wrench of 11 mm x 13 mm or a double-ended wrench of 13 mm x 17
mm (not longer than 200 mm).
(c) Screw all the bolts by hand first to prevent them playing, then fasten them evenly in
order not to cause one-sided fastening. (Fasten the bolts with 25% of the required
torque at the first step.)
*: Fasten the bolts in the diagonal order.
7-2
.- .. ~~\)
.~ .
Bolt (stainless steel)4-M8 Bolt (stainless steel)8-M8
J
Proer 1ightening Torque : 120 to l50kgf I err
o @
Cover of NKE-1089 Cover of NKE-1079

Bolt Tightening Procedure Bolt Tightening Procedure
(1) Radiator
Attention
• If the radiator front face (radiation plane) is soiled with smoke, salt, dust, paint or
birds' droppings, wipe it with a piece of soft cloth wetted with alcohol or water and
try to keep it clean at all times. Otherwise, radar beam radiation may attenuate
or reflect on it, resulting in deterioration of radar performance.
• Never use solvents of gasoline, benzine, trichlorethylene and ketone for cleaning.
Otherwise, the radiation plane may deteriorate.
Check up and clean the radiator.
7-3
• •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 221
-.-
(2) Scanner Mechanism
(a) Supply Oil Seal

When there is not a grease nipple, the replenishment of grease oil is
unnecessary.
Remove the cap of the grease nipple on the front of the S band radiator support
and supply it with a grease gun. Make the oiling every six months. The oil
quantity shall be approximately 100 g that is as much as the grease comes out
of the oil seal. Use the grease of Mobilux 2 or EP2 of Mobil Oil.
(b) Oiling gears

Apply grease evenly to the tooth surfaces of the main shaft drive gear and the
encoder drive gear with a spreader or brush. Greasing in short intervals is
more effective to prevent the gears from wear and tear and extend their service
life, but grease those at least every six months. Use Mobilux2 or EP2 of
Mobile Oil.
(c) Mounting legs

Check the mounting legs and mounting bolts of the scanner unit case on
corrosion sometimes and keep them in order not to cause any danger. Apply
paint to them once a half-year: because painting is the best measure against
corrosion.
Transmitter-receiver Unit NTG-3037Al3028· · .
Wipe dust on the transmitter and receiver sections with a piece of dry clothe or
feather. •
7-4
~-- cz.~~
._ •.....................................
Display Unit NCD-4263· · .. · . · · · .
~ WARNING
o Do not wipe the radar display surface strongly with a piece of dry
cloth or do not use gasoline or thinner for cleaning. Otherwise,
the display surface may be damaged.
Dust accumulated on the radar display will reduce clarity and darken the video. For
cleaning it, wipe it with a piece of soft cloth (flannel or cotton). Do not wipe it strongly
with a piece of dry cloth nor use gasoline or thinner.
Coaxial Cable (JMA-9933-SA)· · · · · · · . · . · .. · · · · · · · · . · . · · . · . ·
(1) The coaxial pipe gland of the coaxial cable will be provided with perfect watertight
treatment at the time of installation. Check it and ensure that not water leak occurs
from the connection parts. In particular it is recommended to apply paint to the
coaxial pipe gland every six months.
~ WARNING
o Do not give strong impact to the coaxial cable by hitting it with

any tool or hammer.
Otherwise, it may be broken.
o Do not put any heavy article on the coaxial cable.

may be broken.
Otherwise, it
o Do not twist or pull the coaxial cable.

broken.
Otherwise, it may be
(2) For further details, refer to the Coaxial Cable Connection Procedures for the S band
Radar.
7-5
"
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
. -- 223
Wave Guide (JMA-9923-7XAJ9XA)· · · · · · .. · · · ·.
Attention I I
• Connect the wave-guide properly with no gaps. Otherwise, such gaps may
cause water leaks or corrosion later.
II
7-6
· . - 224
SECTION 8
COUNTERMEASURES FOR
TROUBLE AND ADJUSTMENT
11 11
1111111111 111111111
8.1 FUNCTION CHECK 8·1 Vector Constant 8·38

Function Check on Test Menu 8·2 Using Sector Blank function 8·39
List ofAlarms and other Indications 8·14 Quantization Level ...................•.•••.••........•..•.........•......... 8-42
8.2 TROUBLESHOOTING 8·17 Adjustment of NSK Unit to Gyro Compass and Log .•.8-44
8.3 COUNTERMEASURES TO TROUBLE 8·18 Main Bang Suppression Adjustment 8-46
8.4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS 8·24 8.6 SETTING 8-48
Replacement of PARTS Periodlcally 8·26 True Bearing Setting 8-48
Replacement of Magnetron (V1N201) 8.26 Ship Speed Setting .; 8-49
Replacement of the Liquid-Crystal Monitor 8-32 Navigation Equipment Setting 8-51
8.5 ADJUSTMENTS 8·33 Current Correction (SET/DRIFT) Setting.....•••..•.•.....•.... 8·52
Tuning Adjustment 8·34 TimeIDay Display Setting 8-54
Bearing Adjustment 8·35 Adjustment of Performance Monitor (NJU-63/64)...•....8·56
Range Adjustment 8-36 Adjustment of Inter switch .....••••••.....•....•...••.•........•..... 8·58
Antenna Height Adjustment 8-37
.. ~,5
~ .
8.1 FUNCTION CHECK
Make operational check on the radar equipment regularly and if any problem is found, investigate it
immediately. Pay special attention to the high voltage sections in checking and take full care that no
trouble is caused by any error or carelessness in measurement. Take note of the results of checking,
which can be used effectively in the next check work.
Operational check shall be made in accordance with Table 8.1 Function Check list in the order as
specified in it.
Table 8.1 Function Check list
Equipment Check Item Criteria Remarks

Transmitter- Tuning LED of Receiver The LED is lighting during operation 48 NM range
receiver Unit
Video and echoes on the screen Can be correctly controlled
Sensitivity
CRT brilliance can be controlled
correctly
Various markers
Various numerical indications
Lighting
Safety switch and various (1) Refer to Check of Safety Switch,
currents and voltages Various Currents and Voltages,
and Signals.
Display Unit Communication Jines (2) Refer to Check of Peripheral

Units.
Panel (3) Refer to Check of Panel.
ARPA (4) Refer to Check of ARPA.
Magnetron current (5) Refer to Check of Magnetron
Current.
Performance Monitor (6) Refer to Check of Performance
Monitor.
Error Logging Display (7) Refer to Check of Error Logging
Display.
System Information Display (8) Refer to System Information
Display.
8-1
. ..,
~.,
·······································226
Function Check on Test Menu· ···· · ··· · .
The function status of this radar equipment can be checked on the TEST Menu.
Procedures
1 Click 00 on the screen. Or click IOPTION1! key.
2 Left-click at any test item.
A click of the left mouse button at any test item displays detailed information on
the selected test item.
~ TEST MENU ..........- (1) Check of Memory, Safety Switch,

I
Various Currents and Voltages, and
I~
1.1 SELF CHECK Communication Lines
2·1 PANEL TEST I (2) Check of Panel
3.1 ARPATEST I (3) Check of ARPA
4.MAG CURRENT (4) Check of Magnetron Current
~OFF DON
5.PM
.....
...... (5) Check with Performance Monitor
~OFF DON
6·1 ERROR LOGGING I ........ (6) Error Logging Display

7·1 SYSTEM INFO I ~ (7) System Information Display
0.1 EXIT I
•
EXIT 1 Click I EXIT I .
8-2
~~1
-- .
1 SELF CHECK
1·1 SENSOR
Procedures 1 Click 00 on the screen. Or click IOPTION11 key.

2 Click I SELF CHECK I.

The SELF CHECK Menu will appear.
3 Click 1SENSOR I.
The SENSOR Menu will appear.
4 Check OK on each item.

If any item is no good. m;. will be selected.
In the standby mode, will be selected for VIDEO.
If the safety switch on the scanner is OFF, QI:::::F' will be selected.
I TESTMENU ~
I SELF CHECK I
I SENSOR I
* SAFETY SWITCH ........ Scanner Rotation Signal
BI ....
* AZI PULSE BI ..... Safety Switch on the Scanner
........
* HL PULSE BI Ship's Heading Line Signal
* MH CURRENT ........ Load Current of High Voltage in Modulator

BI
* TRIGGER
* VIDEO
BI
BI
•~
Radar Trigger Signal
Radar Video
* FAN1 BI ... Fan 1
* FAN2 BI ... Fan 2
0·1 EXIT I
EXIT 1 Click I EXIT I .

The SELF CHECK Menu will reappear.
2 Click I EXIT I .
The TEST Menu will reappear.
2 Click 1 EXIT I .
8-3
........................................... 228
1-2 LINE CHECK
Procedures 1 Click 00 on the screen. Or click IOPTION1! key.

The TEST Menu will appear,
2 Click I SELF CHECK I.

The SELF CHECK Menu will appear.
3 Click I LINE CHECK [.

The LINE CHECK Menu will appear.
4 Check whether each communication line is connected.

• When the device is connected:
• When the device is not connected: ~1~'~C>N~£E(~J;;.
• When the not recognition:
I
I TEST MENU'
[ SELF CHECK I
I UNE CHECK I
*MTR ~
....
-S'W£I!'· ..... Transmitter-receiver Unit
*SIG.PROC.
....
..... Signal Processing Circuit
~
* ARPA CONNECT
....
..... ARPA Processing Circuit
* SERII/F CONNECT ~ - Serial Interface Circuit
NSKUnit
* NSK CONNECT
*ISW CONNECT
Inter.Switch (Option)
* NAV1 .,nl~I:oJ.
Navigation Equipment 1
*NAV2 ~I~ Navigation Equipment 2
* 2AXIS ~ ...4.. . - - 2-axis Log
0.1 EXIT I
EXIT 1 Click I EXIT I.

The SELF CHECK Menu will reappear.
2 Click I EXIT I.
3 Click I EXIT I.
8-4
229
· --•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
1-3 MONITOR CHECK
Keep off condition.
This function is useful for monitor adjustment with service man.
NOTE: Keep off condition.

If the test pattern of the monitor is displayed. it can be returned to the
previous screen with IOPTION2" or by left-elicking the mouse.
2 PANEL TEST
2-1 KEY
Refer to (2) Checking panel in Section 8.1.1 Function Check on Test Menu.
Procedures 1 Click the 00 on the screen.

The TEST menu will appear. ,I TEST MENU I
I PANEL TEST I
2 Click pANEL TESTj . 1.1 KEY I
The PANEL TEST Menu will appear. 2·1 BUZZER I
I 3.1 LAMP I
3 Click IKEYj.
"1 .~" is set and the control panel
diagram will appear on the display.
When a key on the control panel of the
actual equipment is pressed. the portion
corresponding to the pressed key in the
panel diagram will tum the color.
EXit 1 Click IExllj.

The TEST Menu will be finished.
10 . 1
EXIT =::J
2 Click IExllj.
8-5
-~
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 230 , ~ ~
2-2 BUZZER
Refer to (2) Checking Panel in Section 8.1.1 Function Check on Test Menu.
r.== I
[ TEST MENU I
I PANEL TEST 1
Procedures 1 Click the [ill on the screen.
The TEST menu will appear.
1.1 KEY I
2·1 BUZZER I
2 Click IPAN EL TESTj . 3.~~ LAMP I
The PANEL TEST Menu will appear.
3 Click ISUZZER] .
The BUZZER Menu will appear. A beep of
the buzzer indicates that the operation is
normal.
\
Exit 1 Click IExIlj .

lOT ~ II
2-3 LAMP
Refer to (2) Checking Panel in Section 8.1.1 Function Check on Test Menu.
Procedures 1 Click the [ill on the screen.

~ TEST MENU I
I PANEL TEST I
2 Click IPAN EL TESTj. 1.L KEY I
c=
•
The PANEL TEST Menu will appear. I 2. BUZZER I
3.1 LAMP I
3 Click ILAMe .
The LAMP Menu will appear. The key
backlight is turned on, the operation is
normal.
Exit 1 Click [ill.

l c·C
I
EXIT I
Note: When performing a LAMP test, the operation cannot be checked if the
brilliance level of the key backlight is at maximum. (The brilliance will not
change)
8-6
231
, --
~ .
3 ARPA TEST
3-1 SIMULATOR
Refer to (3) Checking ARPA in Section 8.1.1 Function Check on Test Menu.
Procedures 1 Press G~0 to set the standby

mode.
2 Click the 00 on the screen.

3 Click /ARPA TESl).

3. I 1
4 Click ISIMULATOR; .
"1.SIMULATOR"will be selected and the
5 Select any setting item of ARPA

Simulator in the pull-down menu
and press any of 1 to 7.
0.1 EXIT
6 Press (s~J to set the transmission ~ode.
EXit 1 Clic~ TESE I.

Note: In normal operation, it is necessary to turn off the "SIMULATOR".
8-7
·······································232
3-2 TEST VIDEO
Refer to (3) Checking ARPA in Section 8.1.1 Function Check on Test Menu.
Procedures 1 Press (ST-r;y) to set the standby

mode. I TEST MENU
I ARPA TEST
2 Click the ~ on the screen. 1.SIMULATOR
The TEST menu will appear. r::ll---=.O=F=F-------;c~=1
2.TEST VIDEO
3 Click ~RPA TESl1. 1.0FF
The ARPA TEST Menu will appear. 3. '-----------1
4 Click [EST VIDEq .

~.TEST VIDEOI will be selected and the
5 Select any setting item in the

pull-down menu and press any of 0
to 5 numbers.
0.1 EXIT
6 Press (s,;;·D to set the transmission mode.

Exit 1 Click~.
II
8-8
,. •......................................
- 9"'3
...,"
,- ,
3-3 STATUS
Procedures 1 Click ~ on the screen. Or click IOPTION11 key.

2 Click I ARPA TEST I.

3 Click 1 STATUS I.
The STATUS Menu will appear to indicate the ARPA setting values and
conditions.
Vector Constant
I TEST MENU I (Refer to Vector Constant in Section 8.5
I ARPA TEST ~
ADJUSTMENTS)
I STATUS I Quantization Level in Automatic Acquisition
* CONSTANT • (Refer to Quantization Level in Section 8.5
* VID LEVEL TO III ADJUSTMENTS)
* VID LEVEL HI III Quantization Level on medium and Short
* VID LEVEL LOW ED Ranges (Refer to Quantization Level in
Section8.S ADJUSTMENTS)
* GATE SIZE BiJBI Quantization Level on Long Range
* TRACKING •
(Refer to Quantization Level in Section 8.5
ADJUSTMENTS)
Gate Size
(Refer to Gate Size in Section 5.10 ARPA
SETIING)
Current Numbers of Targets Under Tracking
0.1 EXIT I

The ARPA TEST Menu will reappear.
2 Click I EXIT I.
The TEST Menu will be reappear.
3 Click I EXIT I.
8-9
•••••••••••••••••••••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • ••,._._ 234
4 MAG CURRENT
Procedures 1 Click ~ on the screen. Or click !OPTION1! key.

2 Select "ON" radio button of IMAG CURRENTj .

"ON" in "4.MAG CURRENT' will be set. The magnetron current is displayed
at the bar-graph on the TEST Menu.
TEST MENU ·n
1. I' - - - -SELF CHECK! I
------------' I
2. I PANEL TEST I
3.1 ARPATEST I
4.MAG CURRENT
DOFF l!]ON
5.PM
l!IoFF DON
6.' ERROR LOGGING
7. I SYSTEM INFO
MAG [1'--1 I j: r---.: I Magnetron current
o. t EXIT I
Check "5-9.5" in the 24 NM range.
EXIT 1 Click 1 EXIT I.

8-10
•
...
<
.
.-
2~5
~
•
5 PM (Performance Monitor)
.
Refer to (5) Checking Performance Monitor in Section 8.1.1 Function Check
on Test Menu.
Procedures 1 Click the 00 on the screen. I TEST MENU I

1. I SELF CHECK I
2 Select "ON" radio button of IPMI. 2. [ PANEL TEST I
If the Performance Monitor is installed, "ON" 3.1 ARPATEST I
in "5.PM" will be set and the status of 4.MAG CURRENT
performance monitor will appear by the [PM] 1iJ0FF DON
5.PM
bar-graph in the TEST Menu.
DOFF l!JON
Press 5 again. "5.PM" will be set to "on" and
the [PM] indicator in the menu will disappear.
6. I ERROR LOGGING I
7. I SYSTEM INFO I
Exit 1 Click IEXllj or 00 . PM r-;-; ~ r;-;~ :-J

The TEST Menu will be closed. If "5.PM" is
set to "ON". the status will be set to "OFF"
automatically.
0.1 EXIT I
8-11
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• ~!~Z36
6 ERROR LOGGING
If any system error occurs, the selected characters will indicate the communication
line in which the error is caused. The errors that are released will also be indicated in
time sequence.
Procedures
1 Click [ill on the screen. Or click IOPTION11 key.
2 Click [ERROR LOGGING I.

The ERROR LOGGING Menu will appear and the location in which an error
has occurred will appear by selected characters..
I [ TEST MENU I I
I ERRO R LOGGING I
1.1 ALL CLEAR I
0.1 EXIT I

The ERROR LOGGING Menu will be closed.
2 Press I EXIT I.
8-12
..
.. ..
",..,
?J ;)
.
7 SYSTEN INFO
The current system information will be indicated.
Procedures 1 Click ~ on the screen. Or click IOPTION11 key.

2 Click I SYSTEM INFO I.

The SYSTEM INFORMATION Menu will appear to display the current
system information.
I TEST MENU I
I SYSTEM INFO ~
* INDICATORI.:....=-Y=--=-e-r.-=-01:--:.0=O-,
* MTR I Yer.02.1J[j
* SYSTEM
I Yer.01.00 I
* TX TIME
I 1 hours I
* TOTAL TIME
1~2--:-h-ou-rs-'1
0.1 EXIT I

2 Click I EXIT I·
8-13
..................................... ~.~
·238
List of Alarms and other Indications· .
Table 8.2 list of Gyro Alarms
Message Description
SET GYRO Requires initialization of NSK or setting of initial values for gyro.
TM RESET Own ship's position has reached at approx. 60% of the radar PPI
radius in the TM mode.
POSN RST Change the latitude and longitude sentence.
Table 8.3 list of ARPA Alarms
Message Description
CPAlTCPA CPA/TCPA of a target (ARPA)
GZ A target approaching own ship exists in a guard zone.
LOST A target under acquisition can not be tracked.
Table 8.4 list of Operational Error Messages and Warnings
Error Message Description

OUT OF RANGE Tried to create a guard zone outside the specified range.
CHANGE RANGE The range is set outside the specified in creating a guard zone.
MAX POINT Tried to enter navigation information beyond the specified.
CAN'T TRANSMIT Tried to transmit within 1 second after standby or when the
transmitter-receiver has any trouble.
MAX MARK Tried to enter more than 20 plot marks.
CAN'T CHANGE Key in with the [+] or [-] at any place where only a numerical value
•
can be entered.
NO GYRO DATA Any operation requiring Gyro data was made without it.
INVALID DATA Tried to enter any data beyond its range.
NO POSITION DATA Any operation requiring position data was made without it.
CHG REL VECTOR Tried to display a CPA ring in TRUE mode.
MAX TARGET The maximum number of targets (50 targets) is under acquisition.
SELECT STRAIGHT The operator set PM to ON without selecting straight.
NOT ALLOWED Improper operation
8-14
239
.. A ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
Table 8.5 List of InterSwitch Alarms and Messages
Error Message Description

MASTER RANGE CHG Tried to change the master range.
ALREADY SELECTED Selected the already selected pattern.
ISWENDI The switchover of the InterSwitch ended normally.
ISWBUSYI Access to the ISW menu was made during inters witching.
MTRST-BY! The master MTR is in the standby mode.
ISW STRAIGHT Failed in straight connection when the InterSwitch system stops
operating.
ISW STAND-BY! The InterSwitch recovered normally.
ISWTIME OUT Communication error occurred between InterSwitch and display.
ISWERROR! The InterSwitch is disabled.
Note:----------------------
An error message and a warning are displayed at lower right (shown below) in radar
display mode.
IPANELI ~ I DISPLAY INFO I

I FUNC3 I NAV I TOKYO I
0_ . . T 037.0 1°
EBL2 1 T 135.01° [Q]I L
• VRM21
1.70ln
2.201n
~I-;:P~IN~·~~3E;~JD~rJ·
CK
Display position
8-15
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• ~240
Table 8.6 List of System Alarms
Message Description
MTR(AZI) Bearing signal error
MTR(HL) Ship's heading line signal error
MTR(MHV) Modulator's high voltage error
MTR(DATA) Communications error with the transmitter-receiver unit
MTR(HEATER) Magnetron heater voltage is abnormal
MTR(REVERSE) Antennal rotation is reversed
MTR STATUS Transceiver status error
SSW OFF The safety switch is OFF during switchover of the scanners
NSK(GYRO) Gyro signal OFF
ISW(DATA) Communications error with the InterSwitch
LOG Log signal OFF
NAV(DATA) Date from navigation equipment OFF
DLOG 2-axis log signal OFF
ARPA(DATA) Communications error with the ARPA unit
NSK(DATA) Communications error with NSK unit
VIDEO Radar video OFF
TRIGGER Trigger signal OFF
FAN1 Fan alarm 1
FAN2 Fan alarm 2
PROC(DATA) Signal processing circuit error
SERI(DATA) Serial interface circuit error
LAN(DATA) LAN IIF circuit error
232C(DATA) RS-232C communications error
MTR(VIB)
MTR(TMP)
MAG(HDG)
PROC(AZI)
Abnormal scanner vibrations
Abnormal scanner temperature
Data from Mag compass have been cut off
Bearing pulse is abnormal
II
8-16
~ . ~\~ ~.
8.2 TROUBLESHOOTING
In case of semiconductor circuits, it is deemed that there are few cases in which the used
semiconductor devices have inferior quality or performance deterioration except due to insufficient
design or inspection or by other external and artificial causes. In general, the relatively many causes
are disconnection in a high-value resistor due to moisture, a defective variable resistor and poor
contact of a switch or relay.
Some troubles are caused by defective parts, imperfect adjustment (such as tuning adjustment) or
insufficient service (such as poor cable contact). It will also be effective to check and readjust these
points.
Melted fuses are caused by any clear cause. When a fuse is replaced, it is necessary to check the
related. circuits even if there is no trouble. In this case, note that there is some dispersion in the
fusing characteristics. Table 8.7 shows a list of fuses used in the equipment.
Table 8.7 Fuse List
Location Parts No. Nominal Current Protection Circuit Type

Display Unit (NSK) F1 to F4 O.5A LOG.NSK circuit PC4201 MF60NR-O.5A
8-17
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 242
8.3 COUNTERMEASURES TO TROUBLE

As this radar equipment includes complicated circuits, it is necessary to request a specialist engineer
for repair or instructions for countermeasure if any circuit is defective.
There are also troubles by the following causes, which should be referred to in checking or repair
work.
1 Poor Contact in Terminal Board of Inter-Unit Cables

a) Poor contact in terminal board
b) The cable end is not fully treated, so that it is earthed or contacts with another
terminal.
c) Disconnected cable wire
2 Poor Contact of Connector within Unit
Reference:----------------------
This radar equipment is provided with the standard spares as shown in
Table 8.8.
Table 8.8 Spares (6ZXRD00198)
Name Type/Code Shape (mm) In use Spare Parts No. Location

Fuse MF60NR-0.5A -i. 4 12 F1 to F4 Display
o.1 -T
0
II
(5ZFADOO013) 6 NSK Circuit
.4
30
1..-
8-18
~~~
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
Table 8.9 Special Parts
[I] JMA-9933-SA
Parts No. Name Type Manufacturer location Code
V201 Magnetron M1302 NJRC Transmitler- 5VMAAOOO32
receiver
A201 Circulator NJC3310 NJRC Transmitler- 5AJBVOOOO2
receiver
A203 TRHPl Tl378A NJRC Transmitler- 5VlAAOOO32
receiver
[II] JMA-9932·SA
V201 Magnetron M1302 NJRC Scanner 5VMAAOOO32
A101 Circulator NJC3320 NJRC Scanner 5AJBVOOOO4
A303 TRHPl Tl378A NJRC Scanner 5VlAAOOO32
[III] JMA·9923·7XA19XA
V1 Magnetron M1568B(J) NJRC Transmitler- 5VMAAOOO82
receiver
A2011A202 Circulator FCX68 TOSHIBA Transmitler- 6AJRDOOOO1
CORPORATION receiver
A203 Diode limiter NJS6930 NJRC Transmitter- 5EZAAOOO24
receiver
A302 Pin Atlenuator NJS6926 NJRC Transmitter- 5ENACOOO19
receiver
[IV] JMA·9922-6XA19XA
V1 Magnetron M1568B(J) NJRC Scanner 5VMAAOOO82
A1011 A102 Circulator FCX68 TOSHIBA Scanner 6AJRDOOOO1
CORPORATION
A303 Diode limiter NJS6930 NJRC Scanner 5EZAAOOO19
8-19
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
Table 8.10 Repair Circuit Block (JMA-9933-SA)
- 244
Location Circuit Block Type Remarks
Scanner Motor with gear MPEM30030 AC220/230V 3<1>
Scanner Motor with gear MPEM30110 AC220/230V 3<1> (MED Only)
Transmitter- Modulator NMA-1253-1 Including PC210 (CPA-209)
receiver Excluding Magnetron
Transmitter- Receiver NRG-88 CEA-334-1
receiver Including MIC
Transmitter- Power supply circuit CBD-1682
receiver
Transmitter- T/R control circuit CMC-1205
receiver
Display Power supply circuit CBD-1661
Display Terminal board circuit CQD-1949
Display NSKILOG I/F circuit CMJ-462A1B
Display Mother board CQC-1094
Display Panel circuit-1 CCK-900
Display Display control circuit CMC-1218
Display Signal processing circuit CDC-1209
Display AIS I/F circuit NQA-4172
Display InterSwitch circuit NQE-3141 (Option)
Display LCD display 7WSRDOO02
Display LCD control unit CCK-906
II
8-20
~~Cj
-
- -"
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
Table 8.11 Repair Circuit Block (JMA-9932-SA)

Scanner Motor with gear MPEM30110 AC220/230V 1 (MED only)
Transmitter- Modulator NMA-534-1 Including PC210 (CPA-209)
Transmitter- Receiver NRG-222 CEA-334-4
receiver
Transmitter- TIR control circuit CMC-1205
receiver
Display LCD display 7WSRDOOO2
8-21
246
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
Table 8.12 Repair Circuit Block (JMA-9923-7XA19XA)
Scanner Motor with gear MDBW10645 AC220/230V 3<1>
Scanner Motor with gear MPEM30177 AC220/230V1<1>
Scanner Motor with gear MPEM30176 AC100/110V1<1>
Transmitter- Modulator NMA-1252-1 Including PC210 (CPA-209-1)
Transmitter- Receiver NRG-98 CEA-334
receiver
receiver
Display AIS ifF circuit NQA-4172
II
8-22
·~~'~Js~ •••••• ~ •• • • ••••••••• • ••••••••••••• •
Table 8.13 Repair Circuit Block (JMA-9922-6XA19XA)

Transmitter- Modulator NMA-499-1 Including PC210 (CPA-209-1)
Transmitter- Receiver NRG-154 CEA-334
receiver
receiver
Display NSKILOG ifF circuit CMJ-462A/B
8-23
- --
·······································248
8.4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS
~ DANGER
A In this INTER-SWITCH system, even if it turns OFF

V a n Indicator power supply, the power supply may
be supplied to the scanner.
I
r
~
Turn off the main power source of the radar before
I
open the scanner unit.
8-24
' ..
---. 9
- . \~
.
.
& CAUTION
A Turn off the main power source before replacing parts. Otherwise, an
V electric shock or injury may result.
A Before replacing the magnetron, turn off the main power source and wait for
V 5 minutes or more until the high voltage circuits are discharged.
Otherwise, an electric shock may result.
A Take off your wrist watch when bringing your hands close to the magnetron.
V Since the magnetron is a strong magnet, your wrist watch may be damaged
if not taken off.
A Replacement of the LCD unit requires two persons.

V If one person attempts replacing the LCD unit, he/she may drop it and get
injured.
t<:\ High voltage will temporarily remain inside, even after the main power has
\.y been turned off. Do not touch the inverter circuit of the LCD unit with wet
hands.
Failure to observe this precaution may result in electrical shock.
8-25
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 250
Replacement of PARTS Periodically· · ... · · .... · ... · . · · · .
The parts shown below, it is need to exchange periodically.
Parts Exchange Standard

1. Magnetron 4,000 hours
2. Motor 10,000 hours
3. LCD 50,000 hours
4. Fan Motor 20,000 hours
5. Lithium battery 3 years
Replacement of Magnetron (Vi N20i) .
Remove the shield cover of the modulator and check that no charge remains in the
high-voltage modulator circuit. Then, remove the socket of the magnetron.
Removing the screws fixing it can demount the magnetron. When mounting a new
magnetron, do not touch the magnet with a screwdriver or put it on an iron place.
After replacement, connect the lead wire correctly.
Handling of Magnetron under Long-Time Storage

The magnetron that has been kept in storage for a long time may cause sparks and
operate unstably when its operation is started. Perform the aging in the following
procedures:
(1) Warm up the cathode for a longer time than usually. (20 to 30 minutes in the
STBY state.)
(2) Start the operation from the short pulse range and shift is gradually to the longer •
pulse ranges. If the operation becomes unstable during this process, return it to :
the standby mode immediately. Keep the state for 5 to 10 minutes until the
operation is restarted.
(3) After transmission is made for about 15 minutes, conduct the tuning adjustment.
(4) Adjust RV1 within the receiver so that the bar graph of the tuning indicator on the
display reaches the reading 10 without saturation.
8-26
_. 2,'5 i
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
< Scanner: NKE·1075A Magnetron Exchange Procedure
o 0 0 0 0 C
======~~~_t\ _~:-'==---===
m m
Open portside cover.
~- - ~ - Magnetron
I'
Heading
<! '
• Remove the reads of magnetron on

terminal.
Terminal • Loosen 9 bolts A.
And remove 2 attached plates.
Caution) Lh
Be careful of the handling of a
magnetron.
• Exchange Magnetron.
Attach Magnetron, plates, reads.
Setting up scanner unit.
Bolt A
'II:~']
~, ~ Magnetron
Attached Plate
8-27
······································~52
< Scanner: NKE-1087
Magnetron Exchange Procedure
Open starboard cover of

scanner.
Loosen 4 screws A.
And remove
magnetron-cover.
Heading
Remove Magnetron-cover
• Remove Magnetron-leads at the

terminal.
• Remove 4 screws B.
Remove The Magnetron.
Caution) ~
Be careful of the handling of a
magnetron and screws.
•
Attach Magnetron, leads and
cover.
Setting up scanner unit.
Magnetron
Terminal
8-28
.-.~~~
• -:ft.lnsmitter Receiver: NTG·3037A Magnetron Exchange Procedure .

.
• Remove outer-cover.
• Loosen 6 screws A.
• Remove inner cover.
Inner cover
Terminal
I
000 000
F=" • Remove Magnetron leads
f~ ~ .lno from terminal.

• Remove 9 bolts B.
c
~ «1r!l
::JF
!UII
Remove Magnetron.
Attach Magnetron, leads
and cover.
el
Setting up TR control
unit.
~
~ft."'~~3
ii: 1:~IO
tL--
o
000 1:"1 , tar! II
000
~I..O - ~OJ - ~
Bolt: B
8-29
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• i~. 254
< Transmitter Receiver: NTG·3028 Magnetron Exchange Procedure
Remove outer cover.

Screw: B . Screw: C Loosen screw A.
And slide and remove
attach plate.
Loosen 4 screws B
about 4-5 turns.
The pin falls.
When pin is not fall, push
the pin by Philips.
Attach plate
f\:ew: c
r
I
I
Modulator
Screw: C
II
Remove 4 screws C.
Pulls out rotating Modulator

in the direction of an arrow
fora while.
r. • ~• • •"•f#
e 41f#,::·::,::":
....
.,:f#.:~"'4t:"..:".:..
. _.,,:~:::::::::::::::::::::":
tIJ " "...: •
•. "A.·~.~~' "
.
8-30
.'~~. ~~' .
Remove Magnetron cover.
Remove Magnetron leads
on the terminal.
Terminal
Loosen 4 screws D.
Screw: 0
Remove the Magnetron.
Exchange the Magnetron.

Attach the leads and cover.
Setting up TR control
unit.
8-31
···································~···256'
Replacement of the Liquid-Crystal Monitor· .
Attention I I
• The liquid-crystal monitor is easily damaged, even by a slight shock. When

handling this monitor for replacement, be extra careful so as not to hit a hard
object against the monitor. In addition, do not place the monitor on a hard
object.
1 JMA-9933-SA, JMA-9923-7XA19XA (Display unit: NCD-4263)
(1) Four screws of the front of a processing part are loosened.

(2) The cable connected from the liquid crystal (LCD) part is removed. (Three)
The band, which is fixing the cable, is removed.
A cable is drawn out upwards.
(3) Four bolts, which have stopped the liquid crystal display part to the case, are
removed.
(4) A display part is removed.
(5) Four screws of a liquid crystal top and six screws (rotation part) stopped from the
lower side are removed. (It becomes only the display part of liquid crystal.)
(6) A reverse procedure performs attachment of a new liquid crystal display monitor.
8-32
- --
- 251
.-- .
8.5 ADJUSTMENTS
This section describes the electrical adjustments of the equipment as the
adjustment procedures to be carried out by service persons at the time
of installation.
~ CAUTION
t<::'\ Do not carry out the adjustments of the equipment except authorized
\y service persons. Otherwise, an accident or trouble may result.
t<::'\ Do not carry out the adjustments during navigation. Otherwise, the radar
\y performance may be affected, resulting in an accident or trouble.
Tuning adjustments. bearing adjustments, and range adjustments can be performed from
the keyboard.
The following procedure must be used to enter the equipment into adjustment mode:
Procedures 1 Click !MENUI on the screen. Or press IOPTION~ key.

I I ADJUST I
1.TUNE
2 Click I CODE INPUT I. 0-127 I 1.5~1
12.BEARING
The CODE INPUT Menu will appear.
0.0-359.9
0
I ooo.o?
3.RANGE
3 Click [[] , then ~NTERI. 0-999 I
10~
4.ANTENNA HEIGH
The ADJUST Menu will appear. 13.0VER 25m ~ I
5./ ARPAIAIS I
EXIT 1 Click I EXIT I. 6.[ SECTOR BLANK I
The ADJUST Menu will be closed. 7.1 MBS I
2 Click [[~.
The CODE INPUT Menu will be closed. I
I
0.1 EXIT J
3 Click I EXIT I·
8-33
- .- 258
• •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• ,
Tuning Adjustment· . · · · · .. · · ..
1 If the AUTO TUNE mode is ON, change the mode to the Manual
Procedures
mode.
2 Set the range scale to 24 NM and adjust the [TUNE] control to

the center.
[ ADJUST I
3 Click IMENUI on the screen. I l.TUNE
0-127 I 1~
Or press IOPTION21 key. 12.BEARING I
0.0-359.9° I 000.01
3.RANGE
0-999 I 10~1 !
4ANTENNA HEIGH
4 Click ICODE INPU'Tj.
[3.0VER 25m ~J
The CODE INPUT Menu will appear. ARPA/AIS
5.1 I
(
SECTOR BLANK I
5 Click []] ,then IENTER] . MBS
7.1 I
The ADJUST Menu will appear.
6 Click the "1.TUNE"edit box.

,o·L EXIT
7 Using ~ and [y] ,adjust the bar-graph of the tuning

indicator on the upper left of the display so that it becomes
8
the longest, and press IENTER] to set it.
EXIT 1 Click 1EXIT I.

The ADJUST Menu will be closed.
2 Click I EXIT I.
The CODE INPUT Menu will be closed.
3 Click I EXIT I.
8-34
259
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
Bearing Adjustment· . · . · . · .... · .... · .. · . · . · · . · .... · ... · · . ·
Adjust the bearing so that bearing of the target measured with the ship's compass
corresponds to that of the target echo on the radar display.
Procedures
1 Press the uN UP/H UP/C UP" button on the upper left of the
screen, then change the bearing display to relative display
(H UP) .
2 Measure the bearing of an adequate target (for example, a ship

at anchor, a breakwater or a buoy) relative to own ship's
heading.· (For instance, assume that the bearing of the target
is 25°.)
I
I ADJUST ~
11.TUNE
3 Click IMENUI on the screen. Or press 0-127 I 1.51i11
12.BEARlNG
IOPTION~ key. 0.0-359.9° I ooo.o?
The MAIN Menu will appear. 3.RANGE
0-999 C=lOl!J]
4.ANTENNA HEIGH
4 Click ICODE INPUl1. 13.0VER 25m ~I
The CODE INPUT Menu will appear. 5. [ ARPA/A1S I

6.1 SECTOR BLANK I
5 Click []J ,then IENTER!. 17.1 MBS I
6 Click the "2.BEARING"edit box.

10.1 EXIT ~
~.BEARINGI will be selected.
7 The EBl for bearing adjustment will appear.

Rotate the [EBl] control and adjust EBl to the target selected
in Step 2 above.
Press [EBl] control to set it.
8 Rotate the [EBl] control and adjust the EBl for bearing
adjustment to the bearing of the target selected in Step 2
above.
Press [EBl] control to set it.
(Adjust the EBl bearing to 25° as the instance in Step 2 above)
9 Repeat the procedures from step 5 above if the bearing is not

completely coincident with the target's actual bearing.
8-35
260
....................................'i.
Range Adjustment· ··· ·.· ·· ·.· .

Adjust the range that the range of the target on the radar video is indicated correctly.
Procedures 1 Click IMENUI on the screen. Or press !OPTION21 key.
~
~;I
ADJUST
1.TUNE
2 Click ICODE INPUlj . 0-127 I 1.5~1
2.BEARING
0.0-359.9° I 000.0 I I
13.RANGE I
3 Click []] ,then IENTER). 0-999 I 10 ~I
4.ANTENNA HEIGH
The ADJUST Menu will appear. 13.0VER 25m ~ I
5.1 ARPAIAIS I
4 Click the "3.RANGE"edit box. 6. I SECTOR BLANK I
I3.RANGEI will be selected. 7.1 MBS I
5 Find a target on the radar display the

range of which is already known.
(For example. assume that the actual range of Io.[ EXIT---.--J
the target is O.33NM)
8
6 Using [!] and Q ,adjust the target echo's position to the
position of the target selected in step 4 above. Press IENTER!

to set it.
Move the target echo upward by ~nd downward by CJ .
2 Click I EXIT I.
3 Click I EXIT I.
8-36
~.~~\ .
Antenna Height Adjustment· .. · · · · .. · .. · ..
Set the height of the antenna above the sea level.
Do not change this setting inadvertently.
Procedures 1 Click IMENUI on the screen. Or press IOPTION~ key.

~
,I ADJUST
1.TUNE
2 Click ~ODE INPU]. 0-127 1 1.5l!lJ
The CODE INPUT Menu will appear. 2.BEARING
0.0-359.9· 1 000.0 I
3.RANGE
3 Click []] ,then IENTER). 0-999 I 10~
The ADJUST Menu will appear. I4.ANTENNA HEIGH
13.0VER 25m ~!
1.UNDER 15m
5.~5m-25m
4 Click the "4.ANTENNA HEIGHT"edit 6. C! I,
box. 7.1 MBS I

~.ANTENNA HEIGH] will be selected.
5 Measure the height from the sea

surface to the top of the antenna,
then select the corresponding I 0·1 EXIT I
antenna height from the pull-down
menu.
The selected antenna height value will be set.
EXIT 1 Click IEXI].

2 Click IEXI] .
3 Click IEXI].
8-37
262
.................................... ~_.
Vector Constant· . · . · .. · . · · · · . · . · .. · .
Attention I I
• Do not change the set value carelessly.

The vector constant shall be set to 4 normally. If the vector constant value is
higher, a target's vector will be better followed up when the target and own ship
change there course or speed, but the vector accuracy will be lower on the
contrary.
Procedures 1 Click IMENUI on the screen. Or press IOPTION~ key.

I ADJUST I
[i ARPAIAIS I
2 Click ICODE INPUlj.
11.VECT CONST ]
The CODE INPUT Menu will appear. 1-8 1 4~1
2.1 VIDEO LEVEL I
3.UMIT RING
3 Click []] ,then IENTER] . ~OFF DON
The ADJUST Menu will appear. 4.1 AIS I
4 Click !ARPA/AISI.
The ARPA/AIS Menu will appear.
5 Click the "1. VECT CONST"edit box.

11,VECT caNsT! will be selected.
O·L EXIT I' • .

6 Input the new value by pressing the 0
to 8 number buttons or by using the [!J or Q buttons, then
press IENTER] to input.
EXIT 1 Click IEXI] .

2 Click IEXll1.
3 Click IEXI] .
8-38
, .. .. 2b3
~.~ . . .
Using Sector Blank function· · · · • · · · · · · · · · • · · · · • · · · · · · · • · · · ·
~CAUTION
t<::\ That a specified blank area that is displayed by diagonally shaded

\ y potions disables indication of objects and tracking of ARPA
The Sector Blank function temporarily stops radio wave emission from an antenna, in a
specified direction.
This function is available even when the inter switch is connected. The settings specified on
the antenna are memorized upon the antenna also. When connecting to another controller
using the InterSwitch function on an antenna with sector blank specified values are passed
from the antenna to the display unit.
Existing data specified on the display unit is overwritten.
EM~n/ Start point
Diagonally shaded: Sector blank area.

Transmission is stopped in this area.
8-39
• ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• :64
Specifying sector blank area
Specify the settings under operating conditions of radio transmission. The settings can be
specified by values only at stand-by condition.
However, settings specified under transmitting conditions allow precise verification of
assumed directions.
procedures 1 Click I MENU I on the screen. Or press I OPTION2 I key.

I ADJUST I
2 Click I CODE INPUT I. I SECTOR BLANK I
1. SECT 1
~OFF DON
3 Click []] ,then I ENTER I.
2. SECT 2
The ADJUST Menu will appear. ~OFF DON
3. SECT 3
4 Click I SECTOR BLANK I. ~OFF DON
The SECTOR BLANK Menu will
appear. ~IMAKESECTl I
5. [M}:KE SECT 2 I
5 Click I MAKE SECT 1 I.
MAKE SECT 1 is selected and it 6. [MAKE SECT 1 I
enters a mode to specify starting angle
of sector stop area. A message "SET SET START POINT
START POINT BY EBL (CONTROL)" BY EBl (CONTROL)
appears at the bottom of menu. II 000.0 0
6
Specify a starting angle using the EBL
control. Red line indicates a specifying
angle.
Push EBl control.

I
0'1
I EXIT
III
•
•
Enters a mode to specify ending angle. A message "SET END POINT BY
EBL (CONTROL)" appears at the bottom of menu.
Specify an ending angle using the EBL control. An area enclosed with the
first line and the currently-setting line becomes a sector blank area.
7 Push EBl control.

This operation specifies a sector blank area.
This specified area is indicated as a diagonally shaded area.

The ADJUST Menu will reappear.
2 Click 1 EXIT I.
When specifying other areas, select I MAKE SECT 2 I or I MAKE SECT 3 I in procedures 5 above
8-40
<·2~i ••••••• • •••••••• ••••••• •••• • ••••• • •• •
.' ...... Turning on/off sector blank
Activating this function requires specifying a sector blank area in advance.
procedures 1 Click I MENU I on the screen. Or press I OPTION2 I key.

The MAl N Menu will appear.
2 Click I CODE INPUT I.

3 Click []J ,then I ENTER I·

4 Click I SECTOR BLANK I.

The SECTOR BLANK Menu will appear.
5 Click "SECT 1" to "ON".

Selection of SECT 1 changes from OFF to ON.
When turning on other areas, press numbers to change.
I ADJUST ~
EXIT 1 Click I EXIT I· I SECTOR BLANK ~
The ADJUST Menu will reappear. 1. SECT 1
~OFF DON
2 Click I EXIT I. 2. SECT 2

~OFF DON
3. SECT 3
~OFF DON
4.1 MAKE SECT 1 ~
5.1 MAKE SECT 2 I
6.1 MAKE SECT 1 I
Notice
10. 1 EXIT Jj
When you operate a performance monitor function, please use it after turning OFF
sector blank function. The pattern display of a performance monitor may hide by the
setting area of a sector blank.
8-41
······································~::266
Quantization Level· · · . · · ··· .
~ CAUTION
(9 Do not change the set quantization level carelessly. If the level deviates
from the proper value, the ARPA acquisition and tracking functions will
deteriorate.
Otherwise, this may cause accidents to occur.
The quantization level determines the minimum signal level of the input video to the ARPA
target detection circuit. In this test, the value of the quantization level can be set in a
range of 1 to 63.
If the value is set to a lower level, weak target echoes will be inputted to the ARPA target
detection circuit, but much radar noise will also be inputted to the circuit together, and
target acquisition and tracking may be disabled. Therefore, it is important to set a value
that is 4 or 5 higher than the detected noise level.
Procedures
1 Click IMENUI on the screen. Or press IOPTION~ key.
The MAIN Menu will appear. II ADJUST I
I ARPAlAIS I
2 Click ICODE INPul1. c=VIDEO LEVEL I
•
1.TD LEVEL
The CODE INPUT Menu will appear. 1-63 I 45~1
2.LOW LEVEL
1-63 I 35~1
3 Click []] ,then IENTER] .
40~(
13.HIGH LEVEL
The ADJUST Menu will appear. 1-63 C
4 Click IARPAlAI~ .
The ARPA/AIS Menu will appear.
5 Click !VIDEO LEVEQ .

The VIDEO LEVEL Menu will appear.
~.I EXIT
6 Click the "3.HIGH LEVEL"edit box.

I3.HIGH LEVEU will be selected.
8-42
,.-
tic .
7 To change the quantization level, enter a new value using any
of 0 to 9 or [!] and c::::::J ' and press IENTER! to set it.

2 Click I EXIT I.
3 Click I EXIT I·
Control will be returned to the MAIN Menu.
Do not change the quantization level LOW LEVEL.
8-43
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• . ...._l68
Adjustment of NSK Unit to Gyro Compass and Log· · .. · ... · .
The N5K Unit of the radar equipment is of solid-state type and designed to be compatible
with almost all types of gyro compass by switch operation (For the step motor type, 35 V
DC to 100 V DC, and for the synchrony-motor type, the primary excitation voltage is 50 V
AC to 115 V AC). Before power-on operation, the switches 51, 52, 56 and S7 on the
N5K Unit (CMJ-462A1B) shall be set to the type of gyro compass in use in accordance with
the procedures as described below. The gyro select switch on the NSK Unit is set to the
gyration ratio of 360X and to be compatible with the synchrony type before delivery from
factory. Check the type of the gyro compass used in own ship and make settings in the
procedures below. For further details, refer to Fig. 127 5etting Table of Gyro Compass
and Gyro Select Switches of Display Unit, Type NCD-4263.
CD Set the switches and jumper of the N5K Unit (CMJ-462A/B) before tuning on the radar
equipment.
• 55: 5et it to [OFF].

• 56, 7: Set this switch assembly according to the particular type of gyro.
S6, S7·· . rUPj .. ···· .. · Step signal
rDOWNj . . . . . 5ynchrony signal
• S1-1 to 4: 5etthis switch assembly according to the particular type of gyro.

51-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 5et this switch assembly according to the
particular type of gyro.
rUpJ .. .. . . . . . 5tep signal
rDOWNJ . . . . . 5ynchrony signal
51-2,3" . .. . .. .... .... Gyration ratio
Gyration ratio
36x
51-2
ON
51-3
ON
8
90x OFF ON
180 x ON OFF
360 x OFF OFF
51-4· . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Gyration direction

rONJ . . . . . . . . . Reverse (counterclockwise)
rOFFJ . . . . . . . . Normal (clockwise)
• 51-5-8: Set this switch assembly according to the particular type of log.
51-5" ,. Log type-1
rONJ . . . . . . . . . 5ynchrony signal
rOFF J . . . . . . . . Pulse signal
51-6···.. . Log type-2

rONJ . . . . . . . . . t-axis
rOFF J. . . . . . .. 2-axis
8-44
269.-
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
51-7,8-' . _.... _.... - - - Log ratio
Log ratio S1-7 S1-8
100P/30x ON ON
200P/90x OFF ON
400P/180x ON OFF
800P/360 x OFF OFF
@ Connect the gyro signal and the log signal cables to the Terminal Board Circuit.
@ Set 57 to [ON].
rAfter power-on operation, the switch 51-4 shall be set to [ON] if the radar video andl
l!he indicated value of COPURSE (own ship's true bearing) is reversed. J
Table 8.14 Gyro and Log Select Switches (51 Dip Switch)
51 Setting Table
S1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
STEP TYPE ON
SYNC TYPE OFF
GYRO
SIG. 36x ON ON
/ 90x OFF ON
GYRO RATIO
180x ON OFF
SIGNAL
360 x ON OFF
SET
REV (Reverse) ON
DIRECTION
NORM (Normal) OFF
SYNC ON
TYPE1
PULSE OFF
LOGSIG. 1 AXIS ON
/ TYPE2
2 AXIS OFF
LOG
100P/30 x ON ON
SIGNAL
SET PULSE 200P/90x OFF ON
/NM 400P/180x ON OFF
800P/360x OFF OFF
52 Setting Table
1 2 3 4
GYRO LOG
LOGALM N/A
SIMULATOR SIMULATOR
S2
5 6 7 8
GYROALM
N/A N/A N/A
ON=5S,OFF=O.5S
The setting of an input voltage ( When the model is a B version)

It removes NSK circuit when the gyrocompass is equal to or less than 24V DC, being a
stepping motor type and it changes the setting of a jumper pin.
In the NSK circuit and when removing, the breaker of the display unit confirm "OFF" and
the S5 switch of the NSK circuit confirm that it is "OFF".
It removes NSK circuit and it sets the jumper pin of TP90-92 to 1-2( The normally setting
is 2-3 ).
8-45
I'
t
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• ~~Z20
Main Bang Suppression Adjustment· · '.o ••••••
The adjustment is intended for suppressing the main bang that is an echo signal from the
microwave circuit such as waveguide appearing as a circular echo at the radar video
center. It is the optimum level in which the main bang suppression is adjusted so that the
main bang remains weak on the video.
Attention I i
• Do not change the adjusted level carelessly. If the adjustment is improper, the
target signals on the short ranges may be cleared.
Procedures 1 Set the radar range scale to the minimum 0.125 NM, set
PROCESS, TGT ENH and FUNCTION to OFF, and set the
system to the Transmit mode.
I ADJUST I
2 Adjust the operation controls as
I MBS I
follows:
o~
Il.MBS LEVEL
[GAIN] control: Maximum 0-255 I
[SEA] control: Center (MANUAL)
2.MBSAREA
[RAIN] control: Minimum (MANUAL) 0-255 L o~j
3 Click !MENUI on the screen.
Or press \OPTION~ key.
4
Click I CODE INPUT I.

,II
leo I EXIT I
5 Click []J ,then IENTERj .
6 Click IMB~ .
The MBS Menu will appear.
7 Click the "1.MBS LEVEL" edit box.

!1.MBS LEVEq will be selected.
8-46
.-.- 'l,1 'i,
-- .~
8 Enter any value to adjust the suppression range using 0 to 9

.
or [!] and D ' and press IENTER! to set it up.
9 Click "2.MBS AREA" edit box in the state of step 5.
I2.MBS AREPj will be selected. I I
i
ADJUST I
10 Enter any value to adjust the
I MBS I
loMBS LEVEL
suppression level using 0 to 9 or G 0-255 I-~~o~~~I
~.MBS AREA ]
and 0, and press IENTERI to set it 0-255 I o~1
up.

The ADJUST Menu will reappear.
2 Click I EXIT I.
3 Click I EXIT I. 0.1 EXIT I

4 Click I EXIT I.
8-47
--- ..
······································t72
8.6 SETTING
True Bearing Setting· ·· ·.·· · .
Adjust the bearing that the bearing angle of the radar is the same as that of the gyro.
Procedures
1 Click IMENUI on the screen.
I SUBl MENU I
I SETTINGl I
11.SET GYRO
Or press IOPTION2! key. 0.0-359.9" I --- q
The MAIN Menu will appear. 2.SELECT SPEED

11.MAN~U-A-L ------;=~=i
3. I SET MANUAL SPEED I
2 Click I SUB1 MENU 1, then 4. I SELECT NAV=:=]
5. I SET/DRIFT I
ISETTING11·
6. I TIME/DAY J
7.PRF
11.HIGH ~I
a.RANGE SELECT
3 Click in the "GYRO SETTING" edit
o 96nm [!] 120nm
box. 9. I SETTING2 I
The GYRO SETTING edit box will be
selected. 0.1 EXIT
4 Enter any value using 0 to 9 or [!] and Q to adjust the 8

radar bearing to the gyro bearing, and press IENTER! to set it
up.

The SUB 1 Menu will reappear.
2 Click I EXIT I.
The SUB1 Menu will be closed.
3 Click 1EXIT I.
The MAlN Menu will be closed.
8-48
~,3
.- •......................................
Ship Speed Setting· · ·· .
The ship's speed and various other related values, and manual speed can be set.
I SUBl MENU I
Procedures 1 Click IMENUI on the screen. I SETTING1 I
h.SET GYRO (
Or press IOPTION~ key. 0.0-359.9° I 0.0 ~
2.SELECT SPEED
The MAIN Menu will appear. 'l.MANUAL
3. SET 2.1~S
2 Click ISUB1 MENUI, then ISETTING11. 4. 3.2AXIS W
5.! 4.2AXIS
. G_ ,
The SETTING1 Menu will appear.
6. I TIME/DAY I
7.PRF
3 Click the "2.SELECT SPEED" edit box. 11.HIGH ~I
8.RANGE SELECT
The SPEED edit box will be selected.
00 98nm D120nm
4-1 Manual Speed Setting

9. c= SEmNG2 J
0.1 EXIT I
(1) Click IMANUAq .
11.MANUAU will be set.
SUBl MENU ~
(2) Click !SET MANUAL SPEED! after step 2
SEmNGl I
above is completed. I SET MANUAL SPEED I
The SET MANUAL SPEED Menu will appear. 1.MANUAL SPEED
--~
o-eO.Okts I 30 ~I
(3) Click the "1.MANUAL SPEED" edit box.
(4) Press any of 0 to 9 or I + I and I - I

and press IENTER!.
The speed (max. 100.0 kts) will be set.
0.1 EXIT I
Note: The manually entered speed is effective only when IMANUAq
is set in !SELECT SPEEDI.
8-49
.
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• ~.~74
4-2 LOG Setti ng
(1) Click 11AXIsi for 1-axis log.

12.1AXlsl will be set.
4-3 Selection of Data against Water for 2-axis Log (NMEA Signal)
(1) Click ~AXIS WI.

13.2AXIS WI will be set.
4-3 Selection of Data against Ground for 2-axis Log (NMEA Signal)
(1) Click~AXIS GI.

@.2AXIS GI will be set.
Attention I I
• The speed data cannot be selected when the sentence VBW of NMEA0183
is not entered.

The SUB1 Menu will reappear.
2 Click I EXIT I.
The SUB1 Menu will be closed.
3 Click I EXIT I.
8-50
~ji ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
Navigation Equipment Setting· · . · · .. · · · . · . · ·.·.
The data from the navigation equipment such as GPS will be selected.
Procedures 1 Click /MENUI on the screen.

I SUSl MENU I
Or press IOPTION2I key. I SETTING1 I
The MAIN Menu will appear. I SELECT NAV ]
'l.LlL (GPS) ---,
2 Click lSuB1 MENUI, then ISETTING11.

The SETTING1 Menu will appear.
3 Click I SELECT NAV I.

The SELECT NAV Menu will appear.
4 Click the "1.L1L (GPS)"edit box.

The "1.LlL (GPS)" edit box will be selected.
- When using no navigation

0.1 EXIT I
equipment -
5-1 Select and set "NONE" by clicking.
- When using navigation equipment 1 -

5-2 Select and set "NAV1" by clicking.
- When using navigation equipment 2-

5-3 Select and set "NAV2" by clicking.

The PORT Menu will be closed.
2 Click I EXIT I.
The SETTING Menu will be closed.
3 Click I EXIT I·
8-51
276<
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
Current Correction (SET/DRIFT) Setting' .
The current set and drift will be set.
Attention I I
• Setting with this function is valid only when IMANUAq or 11 AXISj is selected for
ship's speed setting (SPEED).
Procedures 1 Click IMENUI on the screen. i i SUBl MENU I

I SETTINGl I
Or press IOPTION~ key.
I SET/DRIFT I
The MAIN Menu will appear. i 1.CORRECTION
~OFF DON
2.SET
2 Click ISU81 MENUI, then ISTTING11. 0.0-359.9° I 0.0 ~I
The STIING1 Menu will appear. 3.DRIFT
0.Q-15.0kts I 0.0 ~I
3 Click ISET/DRIFlj .
The SET/DRIFT Menu will appear.
4 Click "1.CORRECTION" to "ON" .

"ON" in "1.CORRECTION" will be set to I 0.1 EXIT II
operate the current correction mode.
If the current correction mode is not operated, press "1.CORRECTION"to set
8
it to "OFF".
5 Set "1.CORRECTION" to "ON" and click the "2.SET" edit

box.
The numeric input dialogue box will be opened.
6 Enter any angle of the current set using 0 to 9 or 0 and Q ,

and press IENTER! to set it up.
The current set will be set.
7 Set "1.CORRECTION" to "ON" and click the "3.DRIFT" edit

box.
The numeric input dialogue box will be opened
8-52
". :-~ :11 •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
8 Enter any angle of the current set using 0 to 9 or [B or Q ,
and press IENTER! to set it up.
The current drift will be set.

The PORT Menu will be closed.
2 Click I EXIT I.
The SETIING Menu will be closed.
3 Click I EXIT I.
8-53
...................................• ~ •• - 278
Time/Day Display Setting· · · ·· ·.
In displaying the time, it is necessary to set the LOCAL TIME, LOCAL DATAand GMT +/-.
Procedures
1 Click IMENUI on the screen.
I I SUB1 MENU ~
~ SETTING1 I
Or press IOPTION2! key.
I TIME/DAY I
'l.UTC/LOCAL
1.0FF
2 Click ISUB1 MENUI, then ISTIING11. 2.CPA RIN
2.UTC
•
The STTING1 Menu will appear. 3.LOCAL 3.LOCAL
--
11999/01/27 I
4.GMT +/-
3 Click [IMEJDAYj . +/- 12:00 II o'oo~11
• !~!
I
The TIME/DAY Menu will appear. 5.SYNCHRONIZATION

o SYNCHRONIZE GPSTIME
4 Click "1.UTULOCAL" edit box.

The UTULOCAL pull-down menu will appear.
o·L EXIT I
- If the time of day is not to be displayed -
5-1 Left-click on "OFF" to select no time display.
- If UTC (Universal Coordinated Time) is to be displayed-

5-2 Left-click on "UTC" to select UTC display.
- If LOCAL (Location Time) is to be displayed - 8

5-3 Left-click on "UTC" to select local time display.
1) Left-click in the "2.LOCAL TIME" edit C SUB1 MENU I
box. I
The numeric input dialogue box will be I SEmNG1
opened. I TIME/DAY I
2) Enter any local time using 0 to 9 and 1.UTC/LOC,.,.A---=L-==-_---=
press IENTER] to set it up. llQEF ~
The LOCAL TIME will be set. 2.CPA RING"'---- _
.. " 1-=00=:0,-,,--0_ _
3) Left-click in the 3.LOCAL DATE edit 3.LOCAL DATE
box. 1'7
19::-;:9=::-
9/-=0--:-
1/-= 7 -I'
2=-
The numeric input dialogue box will be 4.GMT +/-
opened. +/- 12:00 L o:oo~]
4) Enter any local date sing 0 to 9 and
press IENTER! to set it up.
The LOCAL DATE will be set.
5) Left-click in the "4.GMT + /-" edit box.
The numeric input dialogue box will be
opened. I 0.1 EXIT
8-54
~,-- 19
.} .
6) Enter the time difference between the local time and the UTe
using 0 and D ,and press IENTER! to set it up.
The "GMT + 1-" will be set.

The TIME/DATE Menu will be closed.
2 Click I EXIT I.
The SETIING Menu will be closed.
3 Click I EXIT I.
Attention I ,
• lime correction is not available when the "ZOA" sentence of NMEA0183 is

not received.
8-55
. 280
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • '.-fi
Adjustment of Performance Monitor (NJU-63/64)· ... · . · · · ....
Procedures 1 Set the radar to Master Radar when the InterSwitch is

installed.
2 Press ~RM0 to display VRM1 and set the range of VRM1 to
10-18* NM.
* Set the range to 12 to 18 NM when a waveguide is installed between the
scanner unit and the transmitter-receiver unit. (X band radar)
* Set the range to 12 to 18 NM when the transceiver unit is incorporated in
the scanner unit or in case of operating the S band radar.
3 Open the ADJUST Menu as directed in ---,

Section 8.5, Adjustments.
.i ADJUST I
l.TUNE
0-63 I 32~1
4 Left-click on I PM PRESET I. 2.BEARlNG
0.0-359.9° I 000.0 I
The PM PRESET Menu will appear. The radar 3.RANGE

will automatically be set to RM, OFF CNTER 0-999 I 510~
4.ANTENNA HEIGHT
OFF, IR OFF, PROCESS OFF, TGT ENH OFF, 13.0VER 25m ~I
FUNCTION OFF and 24 NM range.
I ARPA I
5'1 ISW I
5 Affix the INFORMATION LABEL as
6.\ MBS ]
supplied with the Performance Monitor
to a suitable position of the board side
of the Display Unit. ~:PM PRESET I
0-127
~ 8
__
6 Write down the value of the "PM"

indicator in the TEST Menu and the
date of checking in the INFORMATION
0.1 EXIT II
LABEL.
8-56
. ...
~
~~ ..•..................................
-\ .
HL
Adjust the PM pattern
using the ten-key or [+]
and [-] so that its outer
edge is within 10 to 18 NM.
(See step 2)
PM Pattern

The PM PRESET Menu will be closed and the display will return to the
status existing before the tests were conducted.
Note: • All target acquisitions by ARPA functions will be

cancelled.
The target acquisition cancelled when PM is ON will not
be recovered.
• The radar image is suppressed to make the PM image
easier to see.
Therefore, the ADJUST MENU should be always opened
after PM check is completed.
8-57
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• ~~2
Adjustment of Inter switch .
[Checking after Installation]
Turn off the ship's mains (switch board) for the radar equipment.
(1) Check that the InterSwitch is installed properly after completion of the installation.
In particular, check if the cable is connected correctly and if the shield meshwork of the
cable is grounded properly.
(2) Check that the internal settings in each Display Unit are made adequately.
[Checking the InterSwitch Operation]

Turn on the ship's mains (switch board) for the radar equipment.
(1) Checking InterSwitch Patterns.
6 InterSwitch patterns are available for 2-units of radar system, and 12 InterSwitch
patterns are available for 3-units of radar system.
For the checking procedures, refer to the Instruction Manual for InterSwitch Kit as
attached hereto.
(2) Checking and adjusting Radar Video
The radar system with the built-in InterSwitch kit shall be adjusted in the following three
parameters:
• Range adjustment (0 NM adjustment)
• Bearing adjustment
• Rough tuning adjustment
These types of adjustment shall be made for each InterSwitch pattern as follows:
2-units system· .. · .. ·1 No.1 I and I No.2 I
·1
3-units system ...... NO.1 I ,INo.2 I,I I I
NO.3 and NO.12 I.
For the method of adjustment, refer to the respective adjustment procedures.
Note: Each adjustment should be performed swiftly after the InterSwitch is equipped.
These adjustments should be performed on the patterns specified according to the
8
radar quantity of the system.
If the patterns are switched without adjustments and the radar is used, accurate
information cannot be obtained from the radar.
\2-units Systeml
I
a. Pattern No.1 I
CD Adjustment between the Display Unit (right) and the MTR (right). (Adjust by operating
the panel of the Display Unit (right))
® Adjustment between the Display Unit (left) and the MTR (left). (Adjust by operating the
panel of the Display Unit (left))
I
b. Pattern No.2 I
CD Adjustment between the Display Unit (right) and the MTR (left). (Adjust by operating the
panel of the Display Unit (right))
® Adjustment between the Display Unit (left) and the MTR (right). (Adjust by operating the
panel of the Display Unit (left))
l3-units Systeml
I
a. Pattern No.1 I
8-58
" - --
.~
-
~~
CD Adjustment between the Display Unit (center) and the MTR (center). (Adjust by
.
operating the panel of the Display Unit (center»
® Adjustment between the Display Unit (left) and the MTR (left). (Adjust by operating the
panel of the Display Unit (left»
® Adjustment between the Display Unit (right) and the MTR (right). (Adjust by operating
the panel of the Display Unit (right»
b. Pattern [ No.2 I
CD Adjustment between the Display Unit (center) and the MTR (left). (Adjust by operating
the panel of the Display Unit (center»
® Adjustment between the Display Unit (left) and the MTR (center). (Adjust by operating
the panel of the Display Unit (left»
® Adjustment between the Display Unit (right) and the MTR (right). (Unnecessary
adjustment)
I
c. Pattern No.3 I
CD Adjustment between the Display Unit (center) and the MTR (right). (Adjust by operating
the panel of the Display Unit (center»
® Adjustment between the Display Unit (left) and the MTR (left). (Unnecessary
adjustment)
® Adjustment between the Display Unit (right) and the MTR (center). (Adjust by operating
I
d. Pattern No.12 I
CD Adjustment between the Display Unit (center) and the MTR (center). (Unnecessary
adjustment)
® Adjustment between the Display Unit (left) and the MTR (right). (Adjust by operating
the panel of the display Unit (left»
® Adjustment between the Display Unit (right) and the MTR (left). (Adjust by operating
8-59
284
SECTION 9
AFTER-SALES SERVICE
Illllllillllll[11111
When you Request for Repair 9-1

Recommended Maintenance 9-1
Radar Failure Check List 9-2
t~i •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
.. ...
When you Request for Repair .
If you suppose the product may be out of order, read the description in Section8
carefully and check the suspected point again.
If it is still out of order, you are recommended to stop operation of the equipment and
consult with the dealer from whom you purchased the product, or our branch office in
your country or district, the sales department in our main office in Tokyo.
• I Repair within the Warranty Period I

If any failure occurs in the product during its normal operation in accordance with
the instruction manual, the dealer or JRC will repair free of change. In case that
any failure is caused due to misuse, faulty operation, negligence or force major
such as natural disaster and fine, the product will be repaired with charges.
• I Repair after the Warranty Period I

It any defective function of the product is recoverable by repair, the repair of it will
be made at your own charge upon your request.
• I Necessary Information for Repair I

*' Product name, model, manufacturing date and serial number
*' Trouble conditions (as detailed as possible. Refer to "Radar Failure Check
List" in page 9-2
*' Name of company/organization address and telephone number
Recommended Maintenance .
The performance of the product may deteriorate due to the secular change of the
parts used in it, though such deterioration depends upon the conditions of
operation.
So checkup and maintenance is recommendable for the product in addition to your
daily care.
For maintenance, consult with the near-by dealer or our sales department.
Such maintenance will be made with changes.
For further details of after-sale service, contact the JRC Offices in the list at the end of this
manual.
9-1
······································~~6
.... , ,
Radar Failure Check List
When placing an order for repair of the product, it is requested that you could confirm the check items
and fill the results and sent the sheet to our contact.
If there is any unclear items, contact the ship on which the product is installed, and give the correct
information on the product.
Ship name: Phone: Fax: _

Radar general model name: JMA- Serial No. : _
(Write the full model name correctly)
(1) Check the following items in the order of the number, and circle the applicable answer between
YES or NO. If the item cannot be determined as YES or NO, explain in detail in the item (18),
others.
(2) If any of the items (1) to (5) if marked as NO, check the fuse of the product (refer to Section 8.2
and 8.3).
(3) Check the items (4) to (17) while the transmission (TX) in ON.
*Function mentioned in the items (14), (15) and (17) may be optional, answer is not necessary.
No. Check Item Result

(1 ) Power can be turn on. (The lamp on the operation panel is lit) YES NO
(2) A few minutes after powering-on, it will become standby status. YES NO
(3) When powering-on (or TX ON), the LCD displays something (LCD is lit). YES NO
The scanner rotates at the transmission (TX) ON.
(4) YES NO
(Check the following items while transmission is ON)
(5) Current is supplied to the magnetron. (Refer to the instruction manual) YES .NO
(6) Tuning is enabled. (Check with the range of 6 NM or more) YES NO
(7) Fixed marker is displayed. YES NO
(8) VRM is displayed. YES NO
While noise is displayed while set at SEA and RAIN minimum,
(9) YES NO
GAIN maximum, IR-OFF and range 48 NM.
II
(10) Target reflection echo is displayed. YES NO
(11 ) Sensitivity of reflection echo is normal. YES NO
(12) EBL is displayed. YES NO
(13) Cursor mark moves. YES NO
* (14) GYRO course can be set and normally displayed. YES NO
-
* (15) LOG speed can be normally displayed. YES NO
(16) ARPA works normally. YES NO

* (17) If equipped with an InterSwitch, when switching from the straight mode (II) to YES NO
(x), the failures (items marked NO) in the above (1) to (16), are switched over to
the other unit.
(18) Others (Error message. etc.)
9-2
, ... 281
SECTION 10
DISPOSAL
1111 111
IIIIII 1 111111
10.1 DISPOSAL OF THE UNIT 10-1

10.2 DISPOSAL OF USED BATTERY 10·1
10.3 DISPOSAL OF USED MAGNETRON 10·1
10.4 DISPOSAL OF TR-TUBE 10·2
2,88
- ,.. •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
1O. 1 DISPOSAL OF THE UNIT
When disposing of this unit, be sure to follow the local laws and regulations foe the place of
disposal.
10. 2 DISPOSAL OF USED BATTERY I
~WARNING
o When disposing of used lithium batteries, be sure to

insulate the batteries by taping the®and 8terminals.
Otherwise, heat generation, explosion or a fire may occur.
In this unit, lithium batteries are used for the fol/owing parts:
Indication control board (CMC-1218) : 8T1 (Maxell:CR2032)
• Do not store used lithium batteries but dispose of them as non-combustible

waste.
• When disposing of used lithium batteries, be sure to insulate the batteries by
taping the + and - terminals.
For disposal of batteries, be sure to follow the local laws and regulation.
For detail, consult with the dealer you purchased the product our business
office, or local government.
10.3 DISPOSAL OF
USED MAGNETRON
Magnetron is used in the Scanner (NKE-1 079/1 089) and the Transmitter-receiver unit
(NTG-3037A/3028) of the unit.
• When the magnetron is replaced with a new one, return the used magnetron
to our dealer or business office.
For detail, consult with our dealer or business office.
10-1
................................. ~~ ....
289
1o. 4 DISPOSAL OF TR-TUBE

In the case that either mark shown in Fig.10.1 is on the expired TR-tube, Radioisotopes are
in the TR-tube
• Disposal of TR-tube with these marks must be done in accordance with the
laws and regulations of the pertaining country.
• Radiation from TR-tube has no effect on the human body.
• Don'ttake apart TR-tube.
6.& 6.&
• • Fig.10.1
II
10-2
- - ..
290
SECTION 11
SPECIFICATIONS
11 1
11
11111111 1 111111
11.1 JMA-9933-SA TYPE RADAR ...................................... 11-1

11.2 JMA-9932-SA TYPE RADAR ...................................... 11-2
11.3 JMA·9923·7XA19XA TYPE RADAR ............................ 11-3
11.4 JMA-9922-6XA19XA TYPE RADAR ............................ 11-4
11.5 SCANNER (NKE-1079) .............................................. 11-5
11.6 SCANNER (NKE·1075A) ........................................... 11-6
11.7 SCANNER (NKE·1089-7/9) ....................................... 11-7
11.8 SCANNER (NKE-1087-6/9) ....................................... 11-8
11.9 TRANSMITTER·RECEIVER UNIT (NTG-3037A) ....... 11-9
11.10 TRANSMITTER-RECEIVER UNIT (NTG-3028) ....... 11-10
11.11 DISPLAY UNIT (NCD-4263) ...................................... 11-11
11.12 ARPA ........................................................................ 11-13
11.13 PERFORMANCE MONITOR (NJU-63) .................... 11-14
11.14 PERFORMANCE MONITOR (NJU-64) .................... 11-14
.---,.?~ i
.- .
SPECIFICATIONS
11.1 J MA-9933-SA TYPE RADAR .
• General Specification
(1) Type of Emission ; PON
(2) Display ; Color Raster Scan
(3) Screen : 23.1-inch Color LCD
(Effective Diameter, more than 340mm)
(4) Range scale : 0.125,0.25,0.5,0.75,1.5,3,6,12,24,48
and 96 (or 120) NM
(5) Range Resolution : Less than 30m
(6) Minimum Detective Range : Less than 40m
(7) Bearing Accuracy : Less than 1°
(8) Bearing Indication : North-up / Head-up / Course-up
(9) Ambient Condition : Temperature
Scanner - 25°C to + 55°C
(Storage Temperature- 25°C to + 70°C)
Other Units expect Scanner-25°C to +55°C
Relative Humidity 93% at +40°C
(10) Vibration : 2 to 1302Hz amplitude ±1mm±10%
13.2 to 100Hz,max.accelaration 7m/s2 constant
(11) Power Supply Input : Scanner AC220/230V,50/60Hz,3q>
AC100/110/220/230V,50/60Hz, 1q>
(AC220/230V 1 ¢ . • • MED only)
(12) Power Consumption : Approx.800VA
(13) Power Supply Input
Voltage Fluctuation ; Input Voltage ±10%
(at the maximum cable length)
(14) Pre-heating Time : Within 4 min
(15) From Standby
up to Operation : Within 15 sec
• Scanner (NKE-1079) See 11.5
• Transmitter-receiver (NT~-3037A) See 11.9
• Display (NCD-4263) See 11.11
• Performance Monitor (NJU-63) See 11.13
•
(1)
Option
Scanner with Deicing Heater : NKE-1079-D (only heater collar)
(2) Radar InterSwitch : NQE-3141-2 (MAX 2UNIT)
: NQE-3141-4(MAX4UNIT)
(3) Display Unit (DesktopType) : NCD-4263T
11-1
-
292
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
•
(1)
Distance between Units
Scanner to Transmitter-receiver
Maximum Distance
: 30m
(2) Display to Transmitter-receiver : 35m
•
(1)
Compass Safety Distance Standard
Scanner : 104m
(2) Transmitter-receiver : 2.8m
(3) Display : 3.1m
11.2 J MA-9932-SA TYPE RADAR .
•
(1)
General Specification
Type of Emission : PON
(2) Display : Color Raster Scan
(4) Range scale : 0.125,0.25,0.5,0.75,1.5,3,6,12,24,48
and 96 (or 120) NM
(6) Minimum Detective Range : Less than 40m
0
(7) Bearing Accuracy : Less than 1
(8) Bearing Indication : North-up 1 Head-up 1 Course-up
Scanner -25°e to +55°e
(Storage Temperature -25°e to + 70
0e)
Other Units expect Scanner-15°e to +55°e

oe
Relative Humidity 93% at +40
(10) Vibration : 2 to 13.2Hz amplitude ±1mm±10%
13.2 to 100Hz,max.accelaration 7m/s2
constant
(11) Power Supply Input : Scanner AC220/230V,50/60Hz,3q>
AC100/11 0/220/230V,50/60Hz, 1q>
Voltage Fluctuation : Input Voltage ±10%
(15) From Standby
• Scanner (NKE-1075A) See 11.6
11-2
'.-- -" ~~ ~
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
•
(1)
Option
Scanner with Deicing Heater : NKE-1075A-D (only heater collar)
: NQE-3141-4 (MAX4UNIT)
(3) Display Unit (Desktop Type) : NCD-4263T
•
(1)
Scanner- Display
Maximum Distance
: 65m
•
(1)
Scanner : 5.1m
(2) Display : 3.1m
11.3 J MA-9923-7XA19XA TYPE RADAR .
•
(1)
(4) Range Scale : 0.125,0.25,0.5,0.75,1.5,3,6,12,24,48
and 96 (or 120) NM
(6) Minimum
Detective Range : Less than 40m
(7) Bearing Accuracy : Less than 1°
(8) Bearing Indication : North-up 1 Head-up 1 Course-up
Scanner - 25°e to + 55°e
(Storage Temperature -25°e to + 700 e )
Other Units expect Scanner-15°e to + 55°e
oe
(10) . Vibration : 2 to 1302Hz amplitude ±1mm±10%
constant
(11) Power Supply Input : Scanner AC220/230V,50/60Hz,3<p
AC1 00/11 0/220/230V,50/60Hz, 1<p

Voltage Fluctuation : Input Voltage±10%
(15) From Standby
11-3
.................................... \ 294 ~~.
• Scanner (NKE-1089-7/9) See 11.6
• Transmitter-receiver (NTG-3028) See 11.10
•
(1 )
Option
Scanner with Deicing Heater : NKE-1089-7D/9D (only heater collar)
: NQE-3141-4 (MAX 4UNIT)
•
(1 )
Scanner to Transmitter-receiver
Maximum Distance
: 30m
(2) Display to Transmitter-receiver : 3Sm
•
(1 )
Scanner : 1.0Sm
(2) Transmitter-receiver : 2.8m
(3) Display : 3.1m
11.4 JMA-9922-6XA19XA TYPE RADAR .
•
(1)
(4) Range Scale : 0.12S,O.2S,O.S,O.7S,1.S,3,6,12,24,48
and 96 (or 120) NM
(S) Range Resolution : Less than 30m
(6) Minimum
Detective Range : Less than 40m
(7) Bearing Accuracy : Less than 10
(8) .Bearing Indication : North-up / Head-up / Course-up
Scanner -zs-c to +ssoe
0e)
(Storage Temperature -2Soe to + 70 •
Other Units expect Scanner-1Soe to +ssoe
oe
(10) Vibration : 2 to 13.2Hz amplitude ±1mm±10%
constant
(11) Power Supply Input : Scanner AC220/230V,SO/60Hz,3q>
AC100/110/220/230V, SO/60Hz, 1q>
11-4
2S5
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
Voltage Fluctuation : Input Voltage±1 0%
(15) From Standby
• Scanner (NKE-1087-6/9) See 11.6
•
(1)
Option
Scanner with Deicing Heater : NKE-1087-6D/9D (only heater collar)
: NQE-3141-4 (MAX 4UNIT)
•
(1)
Scanner Display
Maximum Distance
: 65m
• Compass Safety Distance Standard

(1) Scanner : 204m
(2) Display : 3.1m
11.5 SCANNER (NKE-1079) •• • ••• •• •• ••• • • • • • ••• •
(1) Dimensions : Height 837 xSwing Circle 4000 (mm)

(2) Mass : Approx. 142kg
(3) Polarization : Horizontal Polarization
(4) Directional Characteristic : Horizontal Beam Width 1.9°(-3dB width)
0(-3dB
Vertical Beam Width 30 width)
Side lobe Level Below -26dB (Within ±100)
Below -30dB (Outside ±10°)
(5) Revolution : Approx. 26rpm (60Hz)
Approx. 21 rpm (50Hz)
(6) Drive Motor : AC220/230V , 50/60Hz, 3q>

AC1 00/11 0/220/230V ,50/60Hz, 1q>
(AC220V, 1 cP ••• MED only)
(7) Wind Velocity : Relative Wind Velocity 51.5m/s (100 knots)
11-5
296
....................................• ~~
11.6 SCANNER (NKE-1 075A) · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ·
(1) Dimensions : Height 837 x Swing Circle 4000 (mm)

(4) Directional Characteristic : Horizontal Beam Width 1.9°(-3dB width)
Vertical Beam Width 30 0 ( - 3 d B width)
Side lobe Level Below -26dB (Within ±10°)
Below -30dB (Outside ±10°)
(5) Revolution : Approx. 26 rpm (60Hz)
Approx. 21 rpm (50Hz)
(6) Drive Motor : AC220/230V, 50/60Hz,3<p

AC 100/11 0/220/230V , 50/60Hz, 1<p
(7) Wind Velocity : Relative Wind Velocity 51.5m/s (100knots)
(8) Transmitting Frequency : 3050±10MHz
(9) Peak Power : 30kW
(10) Transmitting Tube : Magnetron [M1302]
(11) Pulse Width 1
Repetition Frequency :. 0.071Js/1900Hz <O.125,0.25,0.5NM)
0.071Js/1900Hz -,---- <O.75NM) By change over
0.151Js/1900Hz -.J I
I~p switch
0.1 IJs/1900Hz
0.2 IJs/1900Hz l (1.5NM) ~hange over
0.3 IJs/1900Hz T ~switch
0.2 IJs/1900Hz
0.3 IJs/1900Hz l (3NM) ~change over
0.6 IJs/1100Hz T ~switch
0.6 IJs/1100Hz -,---- (6, 12NM) ~change over
1.2 IJs/570Hz -.J ~switch
1.2 IJs/570Hz (24,48,96,120NM)
(12) Modulation : Solid States Modulator Circuit

(13) Duplexer : Circulator + TRHPL
(14) Front End Module : Built-in
(15) Intermediate Frequency
Amplifier : Intermediate Frequency: 60MHz
Band Width: 20/6/3MHz
Gain : More than 90dB
Amplifying Characteristics: Logarithmic Amplifier
(16) Overall Noise Figure : 7.5dB (Average)
(17) Tuning : Manual/Auto
•
11-6
..
-~--_.
11.7
~
"91
~
SCANNER (NKE-1089-7/9) .
.
(1) Dimensions ; 7ft Height 536 xSwing Circle 2270 (mm)
9ft Height 536 xSwing Circle 2825 (mm)
(2) Mass : 7ft Approx. 51kg
9ft Approx. 60kg
(4) Directional Characteristic : Horizontal Beam Width 7ft 10(-3dB width)
9ft 0.8°(-3dB width)
Vertical Beam Width 20 0(-3dB width)
Side lobe Level Below -26dB (within ±100)
Below -30dB (Outside±100)
Approx. 21rpm (50Hz)
(6) Drive Motor : 7ft AC 220/230V, 50/60Hz, 3q>

AC100/110/220/230V, 50/60Hz, 1q>
9ft AC220/230V, 50/60Hz, 3q>
AC100/110/220/230V, 60Hz, 1q>
(7) Wind Velocity : Velocity 51.5m/s (100knots)
11-7
..................................
11.8 SCANNER (NKE-1087-6/9)
~~~ ..
298
.
(1) Dimensions : 6ft Height 536 x Swing Circle 191O(mm}

9ft Height 536 x Swing Circle 2825(mm}
(2) Mass : 6ft Approx. 55kg
9ft Approx. 68kg
(4) Directional Characteristic : Horizontal Beam Width 6ft 1.2°(-3dB width}
9ft 0.8°(-3dB width}
Vertical Beam Width 20 0 ( - 3 d B width)
Side lobe Level Below -26dB (within ±10°)
Below -30dB (Outsldee tu")
Approx. 21rpm (50Hz)
(6) Drive Motor : 6ft AC220/230V, 50/60Hz, 3q>

AC 100/11 0/220/230V, 50/60Hz, 1q>
9ft AC220/230V, 50/60Hz, 3q>
AC 100/11 0/220/230V, 50/60Hz, 1q>
(7) Wind Velocity : Velocity 51.5m/s (1OOknots)
(10) Transmitting Tube : Magnetron [M1568B(J}]
(11) Pulse Width 1
Repetition Frequency : 0.07J.js/1900Hz (O.125,O.25,0.5NM)
0.07J.js/1900Hz (O.75NM) By change over
0.15J.js/1900Hz J IllSP Iswitch
0.1 J.js/1900Hz
0.2 J.js/1900Hz l (1.5NM) By change over
0.3 J.js/1900Hz T l.ropIswitch
0.2 J.js/1900Hz
0.3 J.js/1900Hz l (3NM) By change over
0.6 J.js/11 OOHz T r~ISWitCh
0.6 J.js/1100Hz --,------ (6,12NM) ~ange over
1.2 J.js/570Hz -.J ~switch
1.2 J.js/570Hz (24,48,96,120NM)

(13) Duplexer : Circulator + Diode Limiter .
III
Amplifying Characteristics : Logarithmic Amplifier
11-8
.o,
I'J ex. .
•p • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
11.9 TRANSMITTER-RECEIVER UNIT (NTG-3037A)

(1) Dimensions : Height 615 x Width 615 x Depth 365 (mm)
(2) Structure : Wall Mount Drip Proof
(4) Transmitting Frequency : 3050±10MHz .
(6) Transmitting Tube : Magnetron [M1302]
(7) Pulse Width 1
Repetition Frequency : 0.071.1s/1900Hz (0.125,0.25.0.5NM)
0.071.1s/1900Hz --r (0.75NM) ~hange over
0.151.1s/1900Hz ~ ~switch
0.1 I.Is/1900Hz
0.2 I.Is/1900Hz L (1.5NM) By change over
0.3 I.Is/1900Hz y I~p I switch
0.2 I.Is/1900Hz
0.31.1s/1900Hz l (3NM) IBY ch1ange over
0.6 I.Is/11 OOHz T ~p switch
0.6 I.Is/11 OOHz --r (6,12NM) jY Chjnge over
1.2 I.Is/570Hz ~ ~p switch
1.2 I.Is/570Hz (24,48,96,120NM)

11-9
.:f1jij 0
... .... ... ~
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
11.10 TRANSMITTER-RECEIVER UNIT (NTG-3028)

(1 ) Dimensions : Height 461 x Width 460 x Depth 227 (mm)
(2) Structure : Wall Mount Drip Proof
(6) Transmitting Tube : Magnetron [M 1568B(J)]
(7) Pulse Width /
Repetition Frequency : 0.07IJs/1900Hz (Q.125,0.25,0.5NM)
0.07IJs/1900Hz "T" <0.75NM) By change over
0.15IJs/1900Hz .....J l..ropIswitch
0.1 IJs/1900Hz
0.2 IJs/1900Hz ~1.5NM) By change over
0.3 IJs/1900Hz T l..ropIswitch
0.2 IJs/1900Hz
0.3 IJs/1900Hz l '3NM) IBy c,ange over
0.6 IJs/11 OOHz J' ..rop switch
0.6 IJs/1100Hz --ri6,12NM) By change over
1.2 IJs/570Hz --.J . ~j switch
1.2 IJs/570Hz (24,48.96,1 )
(8) Modulation : Solid States Modulation circuit

(11 ) Intermediate Frequency
Band Width : 20/6/3MHz
Gain: More than 90dB
II
11-10
·---#--
.
...
301
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
11.11 DISPLAY UNIT (NCD-4263) .
(1) Dimension : Height 1100 x Width 700 x Depth 850 (mm)

(2) Structure : Self-Standing Drip Proof
(4) Display : 23.1-inch Color LCD
(5) Range Scale : 0.125,0.25,0.5,0.75,1.5,3,6,12,24,48,
and 96 (or 120) NM
(6) Range Marker : 0.025,0.05,0.1,0.25,0.5,1 ,2,4,8,and 16(or 20) NM
(7) Range Accuracy : Less than 1% of the maximum distance of the
range scale in use or 30m whichever is larger
(8) Variable Rage Markers : 2(VRM1/ VRM2)
(9) VRM Scale : 0.00 - 96.0(or 120.0) NM, Numerical indication in
4 digits
(1O) Bearing Marker : 3600in 1°steps
(11) Off Center : Within 66% of the radius of any range except
96 NM and 120NM
(12) Trackball Cursor : Built-in (Target range, Relative / True bearing
presentation)
(13) Electronic Bearing Lines : 2 (EBL1 / EBL2) (Center /Independent)
(14) EBL Bearing Indication : 0.0°- 359.9°, Numerical indication in 4 digits
(15) Tuning Indication : Bar-graph
(16) Marking Function : Electronic mark(Max. 20 points
(17) Heading Line Indication : Electronic
(18) True Motion Unit : Built-in (0.25,0.5,0.75,1.5,3,6,12,24 and 48 NM)
(19) SEA : Manual/ Auto
(20) RAIN : Manual/ Auto
(21) Display Mode : North-up / head-up / Course-up
(22) Trails Indication : 0.5 min / 1 min / 3 min / 6 min / OFF
(23) Video Process : Built-in
(24) Interference Rejection : Built-in (ON/OFF)
(25) Guard Zone : Ring
(26) Navigation Lines : Built-in (256 points x 10 types)
(only with navigation equipment is connected)
(27) Self-diagnostic-Function : Built-in
(28) Own Ship's Track Indicate: Built-in
(only with navigation equipment is connected)
(29) Parallel Line Cursor : Built-in
11-11
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 302
(30) Interface : Sub display
Loran-C } IEC61162-1(NMEA0183}
GPS
Radar buoy
LOG
GYRO
Radar InterSwitch (option)
External Alarm output
(Reference) NMEA0183 Interface
CD Receivable sentence 'BWC , GGA
, GLL 'RMA
, RMB '. RMC
, VBW , ZDA
'VTG
® Priority
(1) Latitude/Longitude : GGA> RMC > RMA> GLL
(2) Waypoint :RMB>BWC
Note : The speed measuring accuracy of speed sensor shall conform to IMO
Resolution A.824(19).
III
11-12
.-- "b~~
-- .~ .
11.12 ARPA • • • • •• • ••• • •••• • • • • •• ••••• • • • ••• •• •• •
(1) Acquisition
• Acquisition Mode : Auto/Manual Acquisition(Targets are acquired
within guard zone in the automatic acquisition
mode)
• Manual Cancellation of
Unwanted Target : Each One Target or All Target at once
(2) Tracking
• Number of Targets : 50 Targets (Auto Tracking)
• Acquisition and
Tracking Range : 32 NM
(3) Presentation
• Display Modes : TM (True Motion) / RM (Relative Motion)
• Bearing Modes : North-up / Head-up / Course-up
• Vector Modes : True/Relative Display
Vector Length : Adjustable from 1 to 60 min
• Past Position Display : True / Relative Display
Number of Dots : 6 points
Display Time 30sec, 1 min, 2 min, and 4 min
• Time to Display Vector : Within 1 min
• Time to Stabilize Vector: Within 3 min
(4) Alarm
• Guard Zone :2
• Setting Ranges : Guard Zone 1 (0.5 - 32 NM),
Guard Zone 2 (0.5 - 32 NM)
• Alarm Indication : 'V mark on LCD with Visible / Audible alarm
(5) Safe Limits (CPAlTCPA)
• Setting Condition : CPA LIMIT (0.1 - 9.9 NM)
TCPA LIMIT (1 - 99 min)
• Alarm Condition
Safe • CPA> CPA LIMIT

Target · o
> TCPA
· TCPA> TCPA LIMIT
Danger · CPA~CPA LIMIT,
Target O~TCPA <TCPA LIMIT
• Alarm Display
Status LCD Symbol Alarm Buzzer

Safe Ship 0 OFF OFF
Danger Ship c: CPA/TCPA ON
• Lost Target ~ mark on LCD

Visible / Audible Alarms
11-13
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• ~04
(6) Data Indication
• Target Data : Simultaneous and Continuous Display for
2 targets
True Bearing, Range, True Course,
True Speed, CPA, TCPA, BCR and BCT
• Own Ship's Data : Course and Speed
(7) Trial Maneuver Manual Setting
• Trial Course : 0 0 _ 360 0
• Trial Speed : 0 - 100 knots
(8) Accuracy of Display : Complied with IMO Technical Requirements
(9) System Failure Alarm : Visible I Audible Alarms
(10) Speed Input : ManuallAuto(log)
11.13 PERFORMANCE MONITOR (NJU-63) .

Dimensions : Height 56 x Width 150 x Depth 249 (mm)
Mass : Approx. 1.5kg
Operation Frequency : 3050±30MHz
11.14 PERFORMANCE MONITOR (NJU-64) .

Dimensions : Height 56 x Width 150 x Depth 215 (mm)
Mass : Approx. 1.5kg
Operation Frequency : 9410±30MHz
II
11-14
,)(
-c
z
W
D.
D.
«
3-0 G
. - ..
APPENDIX
Radar System Composition .
Table A-1 S band Svstem Comoosif - --
-
Equipment JMA·9933·SA JMA·9932·SA

Type of Scanner NKE-1079 (*1) NKE-1075A (*1)
Type of Performance Monitor NJU-63 NJU-63
Type of Transmitter-receiver NTG-3037A ------
Unit
Type of Modulator Unit NMA-1253 NMA-534
Type of Receiver Unit NRG-88 NRG-222
Type of DisplayUnit NC0-4263 (*2)
*1 NKE-1079-1 (100/110V AC 50/60 Hz 1 ¢)

NKE-1079-2 (220/230V AC 50/60 Hz 1 ¢) (MEO Only)
NKE-1079-2F (220/230V AC 50/60 Hz 3 ¢ )
NKE-1079-10 (100/110V AC 50/60 Hz 1 ¢) (Option with deicing heater collar)
NKE-1079-2D (220/230V AC 50/60 Hz 1 ¢) (Option with deicing heater collar)
(MEO Only)
NKE-1079-20F (220/230V AC 50/60 Hz 3¢) (Option with deicing heater collar)
NKE-1075A-1/2(100/110/220/230V AC 50/60 Hz 1 ¢)
NKE-1075A-2F (220/230V AC 50/60 Hz 3 ¢)
NKE-1075A-1D/20 (110/110/220/230V AC 50/60 Hz 1 ¢)
(Option with deicing heater collar)
NKE-1075A-20F (220/230V AC 50/60 Hz 3 ¢ ) (Option with deicing heater collar)
*2 NCD-4263 : Self-standing type

NCO-4263T : Desktop type (NWZ-158T: Monitor Unit, NOC-1279T: Control Unit,
NCE-7721: Keyboard Unit) (Option)
Note: The ARPA unit have the approbation by the Ministry of Transport
Automatic equipment for Prevention of collision JAS·9800.
A-1
307
Table A-2 X band SYstem Comoosif

Equipment JMA-9923-7XA JMA-9923-9XA JMA-9922-6XA JMA-9922-9XA
Type of Scanner NKE-1089-7 NKE-1089-9 NKE-1087-6 NKE-1087-9
(*1 ) (*2) (*3) (*4)
Type of Performance NJU-64
Monitor
Type of Modulator Unit NMA-1252 NMA-449
Type of Receiver Unit NRG-98 NRG-154
Type of Display Unit NCD-4263 (*S)
*1 NKE-1089-71/72 (7ft 100/110/220/230V AC SO/60Hz 1 ¢)

NKE-1089-72F (7ft 220/230V AC SO/60Hz 3¢)
NKE-1089-71 D/72D (7ft 100/110/220/230V AC SO/60Hz 1 ¢)
NKE-1089-72DF (7ft 220/230V AC SO/60Hz 3¢)
*2 NKE-1089-91/92 (9ft 100/110/220/230V AC SO/60Hz 1 ¢)

NKE-1089-92F (9ft 220/230V AC SO/60Hz 3¢)
NKE-1089-910/920 (9ft 100/110/220/230V AC SO/60 Hz 1 ¢)
NKE-1089-92DF (9ft 220/230V AC SO/60Hz 3 ¢ )
*3 NKE-1087-61/62 (6ft 100/110/220/230V AC SO/60Hz 1 ¢)

NKE-1087-62F (6ft 220/230V AC SO/60Hz 3¢)
NKE-1087-61D/62D (6ft 100/110/220/230V AC SO/60 Hz 1 ¢)
NKE-1087-62DF (6ft 220/230V AC SO/60Hz 3¢)
*4 NKE-1087-91/92 (9ft 100/110/220/230V AC SO/60Hz 1 ¢)

NKE-1087-92F (9ft 220/230V AC SO/60Hz 3¢)
NKE-1087-910/920 (9ft 100/110/220/230V AC SO/60Hz 1 ¢ )
NKE-1087 -92DF (9ft 220/230V AC SO/60Hz 3 ¢ )
*S NCD-4263 : Self-standing type

NCD-4263T : Desktop type (NWZ-1S8T: Monitor Unit, NDC-1279T: Control Unit,
NCE-7721: Keyboard Unit)(Option)
Note: The ARPA unit have the approbation by the Ministry of Transport
Automatic equipment for Prevention of collision JAS-9800.
A-2
•
~·tJ~
• _' _6'
Radar System Circuit Block .

- - ,
Type of Scanner NKE-1079-1 NKE-1079-2 NKE-1079-2F
(100/110V AC,1 ¢) (220/230V AC, 1 ¢ ) (220/230V AC,3 ¢ )
(*1)
Inner Antenna CaC-764 CaC-764 CaC-764
Driving Part CBP-129 CBP-146 CBP-128
(*1) MED Only
("0" is attached with a heater control part option to a form name Heater Cont: CCK-751)
-- - - - - - - , ,- - ." I
Type of Scanner NKE-1075A-1 NKE-1075A-2 NKE-1075A-2F

(100/11 OV AC, 1 ¢ ) (220/230V AC,1 ¢ ) (220/230V AC,3 ¢ )
Inner Antenna CaC-1098 CaC-1098 CaC-1098
IF AMP circuit CAE-344-4 CAE-344-4 CAE-344-4
Inner Receiver Unit CMA-554 CMA-554 CMA-554
Receiver Unit NRG-222
RF AMP circuit CAF-424 CAF-424 CAF-424
LO OSC circuit CGH-205 CGH-205 CGH-205
Bias circuit CBD-1274 CBD-1274 CBD-1274
Limiter circuit CNL-23 CNL-23 CNL-23
Modulator Unit NMA-534
Modulator circuit CPA-209 CPA-209 CPA-209
Inner Modulator circuit CNM-239 CNM-239 CNM-239
Filter circuit CFR-161 CFR-161 CFR-161
T/R control circuit CMC-1205 CMC-1205 CMC-1205
Power circuit CBD-1682 CBD-1682 CBD-1682
Relay circuit CSC-632 CSC-632 CSC-632
("0" is attached with a heater control part option to a form name Heater Cont : CCK-751)
A-3
30'9
Table A-5 3-unit Type Scanner (X band)
NKE-1089-71/91 NKE-1089-72/92 NKE-1089-72F/92F

Type of
Scanner (100/110VAC,1 ¢) (220/230VAC,1 ¢ ) (220/230VAC,3 ¢ )
Inner Antenna CQC-1108 CQC-1108 CQC-1108
("Oil is attached with a heater control part option to a form name Heater Cont : CCK-919)
.
NKE-1 087-61/91 NKE-1087-61/91 NKE-1087-62F/92F
Type of Scanner
(100/11OVAC,1 ¢) (220/230VAC,1 ¢ ) (220/230VAC,3 ¢ )
Inner Antenna CQC-1097 CQC-1097 CQC-1097
IF AMP circuit CAE-344 CAE-344 CAE-344
Inner Receiver Unit CMA-588 CMA-588 CMA-588
Modulator circuit CPA-209-1 CPA-209-1 CPA-209-1
Inner Modulator Unit CNM-234 CNM-234 CNM-234
Filter circuit CFR-161 CFR-161 CFR-161
T/R control circuit CMC-1205 CMC-1205 CMC-1205
Power circuit CBD-1682 CBD-.1682 CBD-1682
Relay circuit CSC-632 CSC-632 CSC-632
("0" is attached with a heater control part option to a form name Heater Cont : CCK-919)
A-4
I
- -
~t1)
Table A-7 3-unit Type Transmitter-receiver Unit Composition (S band)
Type of Transmitter-receiver Unit NTG-3037A
° Modulator circuit CPA-209
° Filter circuit CFR-161
° Inner Modulator Unit CNM-236
° IF AMP circuit CAE-344-1
° RF AMP circuit CAF-424
° LO ose circuit CGH-205
° Bias circuit CBD-1274
° Limiter circuit CNL-23
° Inner receiver unit CMA-554
° Power circuit CBD-1682
° T/R control circuit CMC-1205
° Relay circuit CSC-632
° Inner transmitter-receiver unit CQC-1093
Table A-8 3-unit Type Transmitter-receiver Unit Composition (X band)

Type of Transmitter-receiver Unit NTG-3028
° Modulator CPA-209-1
° Filter circuit CFR-161
° Inner modulator unit CNM-235
olFAMP CAE-344
° Inner receiver unit CMA-588
· Power circuit CBD-1682
· T/R control circuit CMC-1205
· Relay circuit CSC-632
· Inner transmitter-receiver unit CQC-1092
A-5
31.1
Table A-9 NCD-4263 Type Display Unit Circuit Compositions
Display Unit ) NCD-4263 JRC Code Remarks
1 Inner display unit CWB-1256
2 NSKILOG IfF unit
CMJ-462A1B
NSKILOG IfF circuit
3 Rack unit
Terminal board circuit CQD-1949
Display control circuit CMC-1218
Radar process circuit CDC-1209
Mother board CQC-1094
4 Inner keyboard unit CWB-1211-PSOfRST
Panel circuit 1 CCK-900
Connection cable CFQ-6908-RSOfRST
5 Monitor unit 7WSRDOOO2
Case part CWB-1255
Operation unit CCK-906
6 Inner power supply unit
Power supply circuit CBD-1661
7 AIS IfF circuit CMH-1876
(NQA-4172)
8 InterSwitch circuit CCL-291
(NQE-3141) (Option)
A-6
~\t·
.. .
Table A-1 0 NDC-1279 Type Control Unit Circuit Compositions
Control Unit NDC-1279 JRC Code Remarks

1 Inner display unit CWB-1256
2 NSKILOG IIF unit CMJ-462A1B
NSKILOG IIF circuit
3 Rack unit
Terminal board circuit CQD-1949
Display control circuit CMC-1218
Radar process circuit CDC-1209
Mother board CQC-1094
4 Inner power supply circuit
Power supply circuit CBD-1661
5 AIS IIF circuit CMH-1-876
(NQA-4172)
6 InterSwitch circuit CCL-291
(NQE-3141) (Option)
Table A-11 NCE-7721 Type Keyboard Unit Circuit Compositions

Keyboard Unit NCE-7721 JRC Code Remarks
1 Inner keyboard unit CWB-1211-RSO/RST
Connection cable CFQ-6908-RSO/RST (Option)
TableA-12 NWZ-158 Type Monitor Unit Circuit Compositions

Monitor Unit NWZ-158 JRC Code Remarks
1 Monitor unit 7WSRDOOO2
Case part CWB-1255T
Operation unit CCK-906
A-7
3'13'
INTERSWITCH
(NQE-3141)
OPERATION MANUAL
1. GENERAL A·9
1.1 OUTLINE A-9
1.2 INTERSWITCH CONSTRUCTION A-9
2. OPERATIONS A-10
2.1 OPERATION FLOW A-10
2.2 SUB1 MENU A-11
2.3 ISW (INTERSWITCH) MENU A-12
2.3 CHANGING INTERSWITCH PATTERNS A-14
3. REFERENCES A·18
A-8
•
. ~~ .
1. GENERAL
1.1 Outline-············································
The NQE-3141 InterSwitch allows interconnections to be changed freely between

bridge-installed multiple radar display units and multiple scanner units different in
characteristics.
The NQE-3141 can change the interconnections between multiple radar display units and
multiple transmitter-receiver/scanner units (in the remainder of this manual, referred to as
MTRs) in the JMA-9900 Series radar system.
It is possible to change the interconnections between up to eight combinations of units: (two
units in the case of a built-in type) x (four units in the case of a separate type).
1.2 InterSwitch Construction· . · . · .. · . · .. · . · · . · .. ·

The InterSwitch Kit is incorporated in the display unit. (Option)
The number of combined display units and MTRs according to the InterSwitch kit is
different between the 2-units system and the 3-units system.
The distinction between the 2-units system and the 3-units system is determined by the
internal settings.
The pattern switchover operations can be exercised simply and quickly according to the
menus displayed on the display unit. The InterSwitch patterns as shown below are
displayed at the upper left of the radar display. (The position filled on the mark indicates
the position of the display unit currently operated.)
Radar systenlof Interswitch patterns

2-radarindicators
.. (Combinations of six pattem) [MTR
bb
L R]
Unit arrangement(towards the ship's heading) Display unit L R

MTR{L) MTR{R) I--------~
=r::r::: II =r::::c:: I I
I
b bX
I NO.1 No.2
I
01 101 ::~ :l
I
No.3 No.4
!~ l;
Display unit (L) Display unt (R) IL NO.5 NO.6_
. Radar system of •••• Interswitch patterns [MTR L C R]

3-radar indicators • (Combinations of twelve p a t t e m S ) = r J bb~
=)
Display unitL C R
Unit arrangement (towardsthe ship's headhing) ..._ _ _ _ _ _ _ ~ ... ~
M:~) i I MT,R;:) I I I : ZZZ ~z 1 Z:l ~z 1

No.1 No.2 I NO.7 NO.8 I
I I
b~ b:~! Z~ ~~:
o o o No.3 NO.4 I No.9 No.10 I
, • I
:%b Zb:! ~b ~:
L No.5 NO.6 JL
I No.11 No.12 JI
Display unit (L) Display unit (C) Display unit (R)
A-9
...........................................3.15
2. OPERATIONS
When switching over the InterSwitch patterns, first set the system to the STBY mode and
precede the switch operations on the operation panel of the Display Unit as shown in the
operation flow below.
2.1 Operation Flow· · · · .. · .. · .. · .. · · · .

The following flowchart shows the operation flow from menu opening to menu closing.
(Open of software button) (Open of the Sub1 Menu)
<D Click the

<D Click !MENUI , then lSuB1 MENUI
~
on the upper left of the screen.
(This software button is differing in
selecting pattern. This picture is
r ~
(The ISW Menu will appear) ]
<D Click~.
2UNIT, No.4.)
The radar will be placed

(Changing InterSwitch patterns]
in the standby mode. The
changed pattern diagram
CD Click the pattern selection menu number.
in the center of the
Clickm· display as well as the
(i) Click IEXI] . change menu at the right
of the display will be
~ displayed.
(Closing the InterSwitch menu]
CD Click IEXI] .
~
(The Sub1 Menu will be closed)
<D Click IMENUI.
A-10
- _...
'16
. l• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
2.2 Software button ISub1 Menu· · . · · .. · · .

Refer to: (A) [Sub1 Menu display· .. Selection of an ISW Menu]
IOpen of software button I

Click the I~I on the upper left of the screen.
Open the ISW Menu.

This software button is differing in selecting pattern. This picture is 2UNIT, No.4.
IOpen of the Sub1 Menu I

CD Click IMenuj.
~ Click lSuB1 MENUI.

Sub1 Menu
[ SUS1MENU - I
1.1 SETTlNQ1 I
2.1 LEVEL I
3. [ NAV/MAP INFO I
4.1 TRACK I
5.1 ARPA I
6.1 PIN I
7./ ISW I
8. I EBl MANEUVER I
9. I SUB2 MENU I
~~11
[he Sub1 Menu will be closedl
@ Click IMenul. Or click ~ .
A-11
• •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 317
2.3 ISW (InterSwitch) Menu· .
Refer to: (B) [ISW MENU 1... 2-units (No.1 to No.6)]

(C) [ISW MENU 2· .. 3-units (No.1 to No.6)]
(0) [ISW MENU 3' .. 3-units (No.7 to No.12)]
The Interswitch Menu can be selected only when the radar system is set to on the standby
mode.
Although the Interswitch Menu can be opened during transmission, the radar system will
stop transmission and enter the standby state automatically.
[he Sub1 Menu will appearl
(The ISW Menu will appearl
~ Click~.
ISW Menu Jon display right)
--------------------------------------, I
(2-unit system) I -Set with the equipped (2-unitl 3-unit)- : (3-unit system)
•
I
INTER lIWITCH INTER SWITCH
I~,!I ~ I~:f1~!
~r:l- I~r!:3: 1..3 No.4
~ ll:::: ~ ~'~o~'~PREVlOUSINEXT~
No.5
Pattern No. Unit No. of radar system

The number surrounded by
a frame is the number to
be selected.
A-12
~ -~1\ •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
ISW Menu (Pattern Diagram)(on display center)
The pattern diagrams for the 2-units sysem is different from the pattern diagrams for the
3-units system.
• 6 pattern diagrams are displayed gor 2-units system.:
• 12 pattern diagrams (on two pages with 6 patterns per page) are displayed for 3-units
system.
In the pattern diagram.

• The pattern diagram dark filled represents the current pattern.
• The display unit currently in operation is highlighted in the reverse black/white view.
• A display unit or MTR marked with" x " is not connected or has a failure.
• The pattern diagram with the mark" x" cannot be selected as described above.
!The ISW Menu will be c10sedl
CZl Click IEXI] .
!The Sub1 Menu will be c10sedl
@ Click IEXI] .
..... The MTR not-connected

or at fault.
(x mark draw)
No.1
t
The MTR currently operated.
(filled in reverse video)
A-13
......................................... -
319
2.3 Changing InterSwitch Patterns· .. · .
tttie Sub1 Menu will appead
[he ISW Menu will appead
!Select an ISW patternl
CD Click 0 or D to select Pattern No.
ISW Menu (on display right)

1F
--------------- -----------------------, I
I
(2-unit system) I (3-unit system)
I
INTER SWITCH
1F
I<TER &WITCH •
I':E 5<: No.1 No.2
!!! 5E3: No.1 No.2
2 No.3
~ No.4 IUNlT
IX ~! . No.3 No.4 ....,.
~~3:~.,_,
~
r!:I~ D.I EXIT
I
I
1.1 lET
.. I EXIT
!
I
No.5 No.8 No.5 No.8
Click G or D ' and the pattern diagram will be enclosed by a square line,
which signifies "selecting" .
3-unit system is click !PEVIOUS/NEXT I,selectid No.7 to No.12
~ Click \SET I.
dSET lis indicated to selecting pattern.)
A-14
·~ -;- ;~~o
.- .
Message Area (on display lower right)
"ISW END" is blinking and an alarm buzzer sounds.

The selected pattern deagram is blinking for about 5 seconds, and if it is
established, the pattern is selected.
Note that if the seitchover fails. the selected pattern will not appear. The
blinking is stopped after about 5 second and the previous pattern diagram
will reappear. In this case."ISW TIME OUT"wili appear on the message area
on the lower right of the display and an alarm sound is given.
In this state. re-selectthe pattern diagram and seitch over the units. If the
re-selection fails. contact JRC service depot.
Pre-heat Time Countdown (on display center or the upper part)
When the seitchover operation is completed, the timer at the display center
or the upper part will start the countdown. At this time, the radar operation
state at the upper right of the display indicates "PREHEAT".
If the count "0:00" is indicated, the indication at the upper right on the
radar display is changed from "PREHEAT" to "STANDBY".
[he ISW Menu will be closed!
[he Sub1 Menu will be closeij
A-15
321
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
+I~~
TRUEr=JlliJ"
~ '"
320
>'
"".
.,:-,."
\..... ..
.".,.
. ...... /,.
""," 031>
"I."
./,'....
' -:''
I
REL~" ~
HOG
4.5141nm SPEED
IN 35 31.875'1 COG
I EI39"4j.773' I ~~
§j
~-
~J!J ktlI
9.1 "
.~ "ktlI
310 ,~,,, ',I,,,; 050 ~ DR! :0 kta
,,'
)-" '<,'~ lWfiEB..J 1m I
1 HL OFF 1 OWN
2003/03/1814:381
I N 3$" 35.0000'1
300....../ --..... "'" [CPA] MAN I EI39 40.0000' I
, "" ~ I ARPA STAB GND I
". VECTOR lIJ c:::=:!J
min
200-"': ':...... 010 UMIT
c::::=:3!l nm [=::@ min
PAST POSN III 1 min
280-: :-- ceo I GUARDZONE rn[!]
I SUBI MENU I
210--: :-090 1.1 5CmNGl I

2.' LEVEL I
3.1 NAV/MAP INFO I
260'-:: 4.1 TRACK I
'" 5.1 ARPA I
8.\ PIN I
250/#-:. ::::.... 110 7.1 ISW I
8.1 EBL MANEUVER I
~,),.. ,
9. I SUB2 MENU I
~ r,
I®IRI= - ""'/"" O.C EXIT ~

1 r, KfC.'bl XViiiex
GAJN=....J -,
~c:::::::J .r-;
~~.
TRACK 3,",n " , '/ '.
" 'r-;
TRAILS I0.5min 1IT] ,~
PROC ~ ENH [QffJ
(A) [Sub1 Menu display" " "Selection of an ISW Menu]
INTER SWITCH I OS STAt! GND I

HOG I 2f5'8j"
~
COG
§iT~
27. "
ktlI
~
9.2 ktlI
SET .0 "
DRI . ktlI
1m I 2003/03/18 14:381
OWN I N 35" 35.0000'[
MAN 1 E139" 40.0000'I
I ARPA STAB GND I
VECTOR I!J
[=:IJ min
UMIT
No.2 r=rn rvn [=::@ min
PAST POSN 1!J 1 min
GUARDZONE rn
[!]
8 8
I SUBI MENU I
1. [ - SEmNGl 1
2.1 LEVEL
3.' NAV/MAPINFO
4.1 TRACK
5.\ ARPA
No.3 No.4 2UNIT
8.1 PIN
7.1 ISW
8.1 EBL MANEUVER
1.
9.1
8 ~
SUB2 MENU
2.1 SET 1
0.\ EXIT I
No.5 No.6
(B) [ISW MENU 1" " "2-units (No.1 to No.6)]

The current connection pattern: NO.1
The current connection pattern to be selected: No.4
A-16
•
~ ... ~
~~~
INTER SWITCH
.
HOG ~.
~
COO
§jc.:..=!!!!.l
.
ktIl
ktIl
~
SET •
Ii:iJ I 2003/03/18 lUll

:ktIl
OWN I N as· as.OOOO'1

MAN I E13t· 4O.000ll'1
I ARPA STAB
VECTOR I!l
l!!i min
I
UNIT
No.2 c::n:Jnm ~ min
PAST POSNcr:r-- 1 min
GUARD ZONE OJ
I SUBI MENU I
1. - SttnNOl
2. LEVEL
3. NAV/MAP INFO
4. TRACK
5. ARPA
No.3 No.4 e. PIN

7. ISW
8. EBl MANEUVER
1.1 PREVIOUS/~
II. I I
8
SUB2 MENU
2.[StT - I
0.1 EXIT I o. C - -EXIT ::J
h,66. 10 i...en i
~""'II!.t§ [
No.5 No.6
(C) [ISW MENU 2· . ·3-units (No.1 to No.6)]

The current connection pattern: NO.1
The current connection pattern to be selected: NO.4
INTER SWITCH I OS STAB_ GND I

HOG ~.
r'l
SPEED c::::::1]]] kto
COG .1 •
~
.2 kto
SET 3.0·
co;u .0 kto
lID I 2003/0371114:311
:: 1:,1.
I ARPA STAB ~
VECTOR
UMIT
l!l "*' I
No.7 No.8 c:::::::IIJ nm c:::=:::i]] min
PAST POSN l!l 1 min
GUARD ZONE III ill
~I~
I SOBI MENU I
1.1 SETTING1
2. LEVEL
3.: NAV/MAP INFO
4. TRACK
No.9 3UNIT
::/ A:A i
I ,
7.1 ISW I
1./ PREVIOUS/NEXT I
8.
II.
F EillMANEUVER
SUB2 MENU
2.1 SET I
0.1 EXIT I 10.1 EXIT I
KiEHl &v 'UM I
No.11 No.12
(D) [ISW MENU 3· . ·3-units (No.7 to No.12)]

The current connection pattern to be selected: NO.10
A-17
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 323
3. REFERENCES
IPreheating Time after Pattern Selectionl
After switching over the InterSwitch patterns, it is necessary to wait for the time as
mentioned below because the pre-heat time is different from the previous
interconnection between the MTR and the display unit. This measure is taken for
protecting the electronic tube emitting radar pulses.
(a) Not changed to the new interconnection condition: No preheat
time
(b) Changed to the new interconnection condition.
However, the MTR was used before change: 30
seconds
(c) Changed to the new interconnection condition.
However, the MTR was used before change: 3
minutes
INotes on Pattem Selectionl
Immediately after switching over the patterns, the try to select another pattern may fail.
This means that even If the pattern switchover is completed, it takes some time to
prepare for the next InterSwitch operation. In this case, "ISW BUSY" will be indicated in
the message area on the display lower right, and the InterSwitch operation is not
available.
\Alarm Sound Controll
The InterSwitch alarm continues to sound for about 5 seconds. In setting the alarm sound
level, open the Sub1 Menu, press [2] switch to select the "S.BUZZER" in LEVEL Menu.
When stopping the alarm sound immediately after it sounds, press [ALARM ACK] switch.
Even when the alarm sound stops, a certain message will remain in the message area.
INotes on Master/Slave Connectionl
The Master/Slave connection is a configuration in which the Display Unit connected to the
Scanner Unit is the Master Unit, while the Display Unit connected to the Master Unit is a
Slave Unit. Of the InterSwitch patterns, the following pattern numbers includes the
Master/Slave connection:
a) 2-unit System: No.3, No.4, No.5 and NO.6
b) 3-unit System: No.4, No.5, No.6, No.7, No.8, No.9, No.10 and No.11
If the Master Display Unit is not in the transmission state, it is impossible to set the Slave
Display Unit to the transmission state, If the Master Display Unit is changed from the
transmission to the standby mode, the Slave Display Unit will also be set to the standby •
mode forcibly. In this status, "MTR ST-BY" will be indicated in the message area and the
•
alarm will beep.
··
A-18
~~~
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
The Slave Display Unit will not change the radar video even if the tuning control is adjusted
because the Master Display Unit controls the tuning. The tuning indicator at the upper left of
the display will show "SLAVE".
The change of the range scale on the Slave Display Unit depends upon the range scale on
the Master Display Unit. In general, the Slave Display Unit cannot change the range scale
into a higher one than that on the Master Display Unit. However, the Slave Display Unit "1ay
select a higher range scale if the pulse length/repetition frequency is the same as on the
Master Display.
!Scanner Safety SWitchl
If the Scanner Units are changed over in the condition that the safety switch of one Scanner
Unit is set to "OFF" while the other is set to "ON". "SSW OFF" will be indicated on both the
display.
A-19
·.....................................• ,
~
- 325
@ Setting the DIP switches of the interswitch circuit (CCL-304)
Set DIP switches SW11, SW12, and SW13 as follows:
C=-J
c - - -~
I I
mm
SWll __
SW13 SW12
c= -:J
I I
Interswitch circuit board c- - ~
CCL-304
I I
r= - - - J
(1) Setting SW11 (Expansion mode setting and master/slave setting)
1 2 3 4
,~
ON
OFF
LJ Expansion mode setting
4 Description Select OFF to connect up to
four units.
ON Expansion mode
OFF Normal mode
Master/slave setting
In expansion mode, select
3 Description
ON for the ISW circuit board
ON Slave at the slave side.
OFF Master
Not used
1,2 Description Select OFF.
ON Not used
OFF Not used
A-20
•
._.- 31. ~
~ ....•...................................
(2) Setting SW12 (Radar connection setting)
ON 12345678
OFF~ ~ ~~ Radar connection setting

1 ON No. 1 display unit connection
OFF NO.1 display unit non-connection
2 ON No.1 scanner unit connection
OFF No.1 scanner unit non-connection
3 ON NO.2 display unit connection
OFF NO.2 display unit non-connection
OFF NO.2 scanner unit non-connection
5 ON NO.3 display unit connection
OFF No.3 display unit non-connection
7 ON No.4 display unit connection
OFF No.4 display unit non-connection
8 ON NO.4 scanner unit connection
(3) SW13 (Not used)
ONg
1 2 3 4
OFF
. ------1 1, 2, 3, 4 I Not used I
Note: Set the DIPswitches of the ISW circuit in accordance with the INSTALLATION
MANUAL, and ensure safety when and before setting the DIPswitches.
A-21
'1:'-
• C\Z
~
• •
•
••
••
••
•• -en«
••
....J
L- «
••
eo ::::>
"'0
eo z
•• ~ «
~
••
en
Q)
z
•••
·C
Q)
en
o-
••
o
o ~
~
••
0')
0') w
a..
•• <C
~
o
•• J
••
••
•••
••
, ,
-- ~ co
~-~: .
Introduction
This product provides the AIS information display function, which is available on the JMA-9900
Radar series .
• Read this operation manual carefully before use .

• This manual describes operations of the AIS display function only.
Please refer to JMA-9900 series operation manual for operation of other radar functions.
Please keep this operation manual for reference .
• There are two types of AIS interfaces for JMA-9900 Series Radar as follows.
JMA-9900 TYPE AIS IIF Type

Self-standing type NQA-4172*,7ZCRD0967
Desktop type NQA-4172*, NQA-4172-6
* NQA-4172 : Base Kit (Common unit for both types of JMA-9900 radar.)
Note
This AIS kit was checked the operation only by the connection with JRC AIS (JHS-182) .
The capacity and limitations of the system and operational limitations
1. Vectors of ARPA target are displayed by dashed lines instead of solid lines to keep
consistency with those of AIS targets.
2. Maximum 50 AIS targets are displayed in this system. Three kinds of AIS target filter are
provide to prioritize on displaying AIS targets effectively. See 1·10 in this manual.
3. Note that following operational restrictions in this system before using.
1) An AIS function cannot turn ON
• When "MANUAL" was selected as a speed input source.
• When SET and DRIFT was set in "LOG" speed mode
2) "LOG" speed mode cannot be chosen as a speed source .
• When an AIS function was ON and SET and DRIFT were set.
3) "MANUAL" speed mode cannot be selected.
• When an AIS function was ON.
4) SET/DRIFT (Current correction) function cannot turn ON.
• When an AIS function was ON and speed was set as "LOG".
A-23
329
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
Table of Contents
Introduction A-23
1. AIS Information Display Function

1-1. AIS Software Buttons A-26
1-2. Initial Setting
• GPS Antenna installation position Setting A-27
.Collision Decision Criteria Setting A-28
1-3. AIS Function ON/OFF A-29
1-4. AIS Target Activation
.Manual TargetActivation A-30
.Automatic Target Activation A-31
1-5. AIS Target Deactivation A-32
1-6. AIS Symbol Display ON/OFF A-33
1-7. ARPA Symbol Display ON/OFF A-34
1-8. AIS Target Data Display
.Types of Data Display A-35
.Target Data Display A-35
.Target Data Display Cancel A-36
.Target Data Display with simple/detail mode A-36
1-9. Definitions of AIS Target Symbols A-37
1-10. AIS Filter Setting
.Meaning of AIS Filter A-38
.AIS Filter Type Selection A-38
.AIS Filter Setting A-40
.AIS Filter Area Display A-41
1-11. AIS and ARPA Target Association Condition A-42
1-12. AIS Lost Target A-43
1-13. Conditions of AIS Symbol Display
.Maximum AIS Target Number and Display Priority A-44
.AIS Target Vector Display A-44
1-14.Alarm Display A-45
1-15.0perational Restrictions A-46
2. Basic Operation with Track BaiL A-47
3. Installation of AIS Information Display Kit

3-1. Composition of AIS Information Display Kit
3-2. AIS I/F Connection
A-24
A-48
A-48
I
w
~
w w • 'e;:;
.fa. W •
~ en •
~
.., .... •
::3 C
0 ~
::3 DJ
DJ ;:t
•••
::3 CD
.., •
a.
0 5" •
:::T tn •
t'D
n lit •
~ iii'
....
-•
ci' •
::s •
•••
»
I
••
I\J
0'1 •
•••
•
••
•
••
• •
» » •
J.. .J:.,
<0 <0 •
•••
••
•
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• •.• • ;31
1° AIS Information Display Function
1-1 AIS Software Buttons
When AIS I/F is connected, the AIS software button as shown below is displayed on a radar
screen. By operating these buttons, ON/OFF of an AIS function, activation or deactivation of an AIS
symbol, and the display ON/OFF of ARPA-AIS symbol can be performed.
~='"'lrA"i1'i'n10
~~~ 34CI 350 000
,\,.,\'1"'11.,1,. I.010 CURSOR( IM·SItIIl=J:M) 1IOSSTAB GND ~
c=:::JJITl0
§i0
L
~....-=---==-1 , . , \ •• ~ - ' ... , "

-~,.,. "". TRUE HOG ~°
I.JL ..... 1 "'~ './"'" '30 ~,." SPEED c:::::::!!!!Jkta
"\,y "'-I., RELc:mIJ° ~
"", "/, '" IN 35 31.815'1 COG 279.
"'\/ / ",~. I E139°43.773'1 ~ 9. okta
,,~ " / -, -, ~ DSET 9..0 ktI
I~
/ 050
,'".... / "-:' R [YJ I 20037037 18 14~

••' ••••• / ", I HL OFF I OWN I N 35· 35.0000' I
.: -'
"',,:-: ~~ /
,/ "'.~./'" Gi:J IRING
MAN
ARPA STAB
1 E139" 40.0000'1
GND:::J
'''-}.) I / // //
.....-:::-::::=:::::::::::-- /
"',.~/'~
x-::----\ \--------.;,~••_\ 01' c:::=::!J]
;jE~OR l!l 'I
nm
c=:!J min
c::JID m~
,/ : PAST POSH III 1 mon
\ // -
'" "':~I\ '\~.\ • • • \ \\y·...',//: \~\ 'j"-, I;=- ~~SE 7 ~.:.u

: -'
~7+
••••
.----- ./
,
; ~
\.. .... .-,J~ '00 ~g~A
",
-,
_
J.i
:-
090
":-ls~1rr=i1 :SE
/";W CPA
'B::
CPA
BCT
GET
ID
RANGE
I .4 nm
-2 81. ~:
NO
m,n
1;=J
3. nm
29.2:.u
1.0 ~
-: ~ /: DEPTH 19 TCPA 98 .8 '"'"
", .. 100m BCR nO!'
'"/''' ' ........ 03' IDAYI I BCT m,n
~'!'iiGlllN;''''&J~='''1 /"" ./ IpANELI~ I D1SPLAYINFO I
Wlc=:::J "/"" /"'40 ~ NAV
Mitj~
TRACKI3min I
I, », ,;.
21' "'I" ,,,,'
""",'
10'
'!!:'" T031.0n~!~p~IH~~~;:::;,;~;;=;:;:;~
EBL2~°1Q] ~UIJ~~
KY'
TRAlLS~!!J
PROC ~ ENH CQ!:[]
';;'1""'"'' ,
,,,I ".,,,,, ;;.;"'"
, """,',<"
I,,,
0'1*"
• VRM2~nm
1.70lnm r:-;l
~
Example of Display with AIS I/F
CDAIS FUNCTION ON/OFF BUTTON

~AIS ACTIVATE '
~
-=
@AIS DEACTIVATE BUnON
.. @AIS SYMBOL DISPLAY ON/OFF BUTTON
@ARPA SYMBOL DISPLAY ON/OFF BUnON
AIS Software buttons
A-26
3?''l.
-••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
1-2 Initial Setting
.GPS Antenna installation position Setting

The distance of the GSP antenna from the position of the radar scanner should be set.
Operation
1. Left-click !MENUI on the screen.
I ADJUST I
procedure
MAIN menu opens.
I ARPA/AIS I
I AIS I
1.GSP ANT. LOCATION
2. Left-click !CODE INPulf.
a:1 + 100~
CODE INPUT menu opens.
b:1 + 100~
a
to +500[m])
3. Left-click I 0 I ~ ·1 END I.
ADJUST menu opens.
1101 "~'I ~I ';)b

4. Left-click ~RPA/ AISI.
ARPA/AIS menu opens.
5. Left-click ~ .
~I EXIT I
AIS menu opens.
6. The GPS antenna rough direction from the radar scanner is chosen with the GPS
button "~".
7. Left-click the ~ button in the.!:. box of "1.GPS ANT. LOCATION".

The distance of the GPS antenna from the radar scanner in bow-stern
direction should be entered. (The direction of the bow side is plus and the
direction of the stern side is minus.)
8. Left-click the ~ button in the b: box of "1.GPSANT. LOCATION".

The distance of the GPS antenna from the radar scanner in port-starboard
direction should be entered. (The direction of starboard side is plus and the
direction of the port side is minus.
Note1
Unless it performs this setup correctly, the position of an AIS symbol may not
coincide with the radar echo position of the target.
Note2
When this setup is performed, offset is added to the data received from GPS, and the
compensated latitude and longitude are displayed as own ship position. It would be
the radar scanner installation position.
A-27
······································~33
.Collision Decision Criteria Setting (CPAlTCPA) • ' - -
The collision decision criteria CPAlTCPA of ARPA target are used for AIS target as well.
Operation I SUBl MENU I

procedur 1. Left-click IMENUIon the screen. I ARPA I
MAIN menu opens. 1. CPA LIMIT
O.1-99nm ~
2. TCPA LIMIT
2. Left-click ISUB1 MENUI -> IARPA/A/si.
ARPA menu opens.
1-99min c::I.2J]
3. CPA RING
3. Set CPA LIMIT (Closest Point of Approach)

~OFF DON
4. I TRIAL I
(1) Left-click the "1.CPA LIMIT" edit box. 5. GATE
I 2. NARROW El
ICPAL1MI] will be selected. 6. I AIS SETTING I
The numeric input dialogue box is
opened.
O. I EXIT I
(2) Input the new value by pressing the 0 to 9 number keys or by using the [I] or G
keys, then press I END I to input.
4. Set TCPA LIMIT (Time to CPA)
(1) Left-click the "2.TCPA LIMIT" edit box.
tTCPAL1MI] will be selected.

(2) Input the new value by pressing the 0 to 9 number keys or by using the [I] or G
keys, then press "END" to input.
For further details, please refer to Chapter 5 of a JMA-9900 series Instruction Manual.
A-28
•
.s->:
~
')~
~~ .
1-3. AIS Function ON/OFF
.ON/OFF of AIS function is set up. There are two methods to switch ON/OFF of AIS function.
Operation
procedur
(Method-1 : With the AIS software button on screen.)

Put the arrow cursor on the 1§21 button at the lower left a screen and click the left
button of the track ball. Every time the left section button is pressed, AIS function on/off
changes alternatively as follows.
a. When the symbol is displayed in the bright color ----AIS function is ON.
b. When the symbol is displayed in the dark color ------AIS function is OFF.
(Method-2 : With the menu operation.)

I SUBt MENU I
1. Left-click /MENUI on the screen.
Main menu opens.
I ARPA I
1. CPA LIMIT
O.t-99nm ~
2. Left-click ISUB1 MENUI. 2. TCPA LIMIT
SUB1 menu opens. t-99min ~
3. CPA RING
3. Left-click IARPA/AIS!. ~OFF DON
4. I TRIAL I
5. GATE
4. Left-clicklAlS SETTINg. I 2. NARROW EI
AIS SETTING menu opens.
6. I AIS SETTING I
5. Left-click "ON" or "OFF" of "1.AIS FUNCTION".
"1.AIS FUNCTION" is changed to on or off. o. I EXIT I
Note:
When AIS function is OFF, no AIS symbol is displayed and all AIS functions are completely
turned off. Even if there were a dangerous target, AIS function would not be turned on
automatically.
A-29
' .
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• ~~335
1-4 AIS Target*1 Activation
• Manual Target Activation

An AIS target is activated by either of the mehod-1 or the method-2 as follows, and then the
vector and the heading of the target are displayed.
Operation
(Method-1 : With the software button on the screen)
procedur
1. Put the arrow cursor on the I ACT I button at the lower left of the screen
and clicks the left button of the track ball.
Cursor mode "AIS ACT" is displayed at the upper right side on the screen.
2. Put the cross cursor "+" on the target to be activated and press the track ball
section left button .
The selected AIS target is activated.
(Method-2 : With the menu operation)
1. Left-click IMENUI on the screen.

Main menu opens.
2. Left-click ISUB1 MENUj.

SUB 1 menu opens.
3. Left-click /AIS/ARPAj.
4. Left-click /AIS SETTINQ.

5. Left-click "ON" of "2.AIS ACTIVATE".

Cursor mode "AIS ACT' is displayed at the upper right side on the screen.
6. Put the cross cursor "+" on the target to be activated and press the track ball section left
button.
The selected AIS target is activated.
*1 Refer to "1.9 Definitions of AIS Target Symbols" about the activated target.
A-30
- -- ,-
.- , ~~
• Automatic Target Activation

.
The AIS target in a guard zone is activated automatically and the vector and the heading of the
target are displayed. The guard zone for AIS target activation is the same zone used in ARPA. For
further details of guard zone setting, please see "Set Guard Zones" at Chapter 3.4 of the
instruction manual of JMA-9900 series radar. Dangerous AIS targets are also activated
automatically.
Note:
• When the manual 'ACTIVATION' operation is performed at the position where no AIS sleeping
symbol is displayed, an AIS target is searched at the near area pointed by the cursor "+". The
following "search mark" is displayed.
~SEARCH
Search Mark
An activated target symbol is displayed when an AIS target is found near the "search mark".
Then the "search mark" is removed. On the other hand, no AIS target found in approx. 4
minutes, the "search mark" disappears.
• When no vector of the activated target is displayed, please refer to "1-13 Conditions of AIS
Symbol Display."
• No activated symbol may be displayed if the priority of the search target is lower than existing
activated AIS targets displayed on the screen. Refer to "1-13 Conditions of AIS Symbol
Display",
A-31
• ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
1-5 AIS Target Deactivation 33t
When an AIS target is deactivated, the vector and the heading are deleted as a sleeping*2 target.
Operation
1. Put the arrow cursor on the !DAC"Tj button and click the track ball section left
procedur
button.
Cursor mode "AIS DEACT" is displayed at the upper right side on the screen.
2. Put the cross cursor "+" on the target to be deactivated and press the track ball
The selected AIS target is deactivated.
1. Left-click lMEND\ on the screen.

Main menu opens.
2. Left-click ISUB1 MENUI.

SUB1 menu opens.
3. Left-click IARPA/AIS!.
4. Left-click IAIS SETTINQ.

AIS SETIING menu opens.
5. Left-click "ON" of "3.AIS DEACTIVATE".

Cursor mode "AIS DEACT" is displayed at the upper right side on the
screen.
6. Put the cross cursor "+" on the target to be deactivated and press the track ball section
left button. The selected AIS target is deactivated.
Note
This operation is only available for an activated target.
*2 Refer to "1.9 Definitions ofAlS Target Symbols" about the sleeping target.
A-32
•
. - .'
. ~~
n ~
-1.6 A'S SYMBOL DISPLAY ONIOFF .

AIS symbol display is changed to on or off by the procedure method-1 or method-2 as follows.
Operation
procedur

Put the arrow cursor on the 1<1' I button and click the track ball section left button. Each
time the left button is pushed, A'S symbol display is changed to on or off.
When the button is displayed in the bright color ---- A'S Symbol display is on.
When the button is displayed in the dark color ---- AIS Symbol display is off.
1. Left-click !MENUI on the screen.

Main menu opens.
2. Left-click lSuB1 MENUI.

SUB1 menu opens.
3. Left-click /ARPAIAIS/.
4. Left-clicklAlS SETIINg.
5. Left-click "ON" or "OFF" of "4.AIS SYMBOL DISPLAY",

AIS symbol display is changed to on or off.
Note
The ARPA symbol display can only turned OFF when the AIS function is ON.
Turning the AIS function OFF will automatically return ARPA symbols display back ON.
A-33
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
-
~~39
... ~
1-7. ARPA Symbol Display ON/OFF
ARPA symbol display is changed to on or off by the procedure either of the method-1 or method-2
as follows.
Operation
procedur

Put the arrow cursor on the 10"1 button and click the track ball section left button. Every
time the left button is pushed, ARPA symbol display is changed to on or off.
When the button is displayed in the bright color ----- ARPA Symbol display is on.
When the button is displayed in the dark color ----- ARPA Symbol display is off.
1. Left-click IM@ on the screen.

Main menu opens.

SUB 1 menu opens.
3. Left-click IARPAIAISI.
ARPNAIS menu opens.
4. Left-click \AIS SETTINg.

5. Left-click "ON" or "OFF" of "4.AIS SYMBOL DISPLAY".

ARPA symbol display is changed to on or off.
A-34
.-
...
~.
.\~,
-
A l\
.
1-8. AIS Target Data Display
• Types of Data Display

The detailed or simple numerical data of an AIS target are available. The display items in each
detailed and simple mode are shown as follows.
Display /tems Detailed Mode Simple Mode

N A M E (Ship's Name) Max 20 characters Max 20 characters
CALL SIGN Max 7 characters Max"7 characters
MMSI Max 9 characters Max 9 characters
COG Unit 0.1 degrees Unit 0.1 degrees
SOG Unit 0.1 knots Unit 0.1 knots
CPA Unit 0.1 nm Unit 0.1 nm
TCPA· Unit 0.1 min Unit 0.1 min
BRG Unit 0.1 degrees
RANGE Unit 0.01 nm
HDG Unit 0.1 degrees No display
0
ROT Unit 0.1 /min
L / L (latllon) Unit 0.001 seconds
One target data in the detailed mode or two target data in the simple mode are displayed at the
numerical data area on the screen.
• Target Data Display
Operation
procedur
1. Press rTGTI
~
Cursor mode changes and "TGT DATA" are displayed on the upper right of the
screen.
2. Put the cross cursor "+" on the target to be data displayed and press the track ball
The numerical information of the selected AIS target is displayed at the right side of
the screen, and ~ ~ is displayed on the AIS target symbol.
A-35
341
..................................... ,~-
Note:
r .,
When the numerical data is displayed without L .J mark on the radar screen, the target
might exist out of the radar display range.
• Target Data Display Cancel
Operation
procedur
1. Press ~
~
Cursor mode changes and "TGT DATA" are displayed on the upper right of the
screen.
2. Put the cross cursor "+" on the target to be turn off the numerical data display and
press the track ball section left button.
The numerical information of the selected AIS target data is removed from the
numerical data area at the right-hand side of the screen and the symbol
r.,.J
L diisappears,
• Target Data Display in simple/detail mode
Operation
1. Put the cursor on the buttons iii or II at the upper right of AIS target
procedur
numerical data area, and press the trackball section left button.
2. Every time the button is pushed, the mode of numerical data changes to simple
or detail as follows ..
AIS ID
NAME
IIIIIIii 4r
ELIZABETH2
~
Button
-,
CALL SIGN 1234567 AIS ID
NAME
IIIJJIIIl
MMSI 123456789
COG 179.0 o ELIZABETH2
SaG
CPA
TCPA
3.3 kts
nm
min When
< ~
button is
CALL SIGN
MMSI
COG
1234567
123456789
179.0 °
SOG 3.3 kts
pushed, display CPA nm
BRG 057.0 o
RANG[ 2.63 nm
mode is changed TCPA min
HOG 180.0 o
ROT 1.2 ?min Example of Simple mode
POSN N 35°02.175'
E136°51. 113'
Example of Detail mode A-36

,A~
342
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
1-9. Definitions of AIS Target Symbols
The AIS symbol is as follows.

Symbol I AIS Target Definitions & Meaning
A target symbol indicating the presence and orientation of a vessel
equipped with AIS in a certain location. No additional information is
Sleeping
<f presented until activated thus avoiding information overload.
Target
The most acute apex of the triangle is aligned with the heading of the target,
or with its COG
, A symbol representing the automatic or manual activation of a sleeping
<I target for the display of additional graphically presented information

including:
-
-
a vector (speed and course over ground or water);
the heading; and
Activated - ROT or direction of turn indication (if available) to display actually
Target initiated course changes.
The COG/SOG vector is displayed as dashed line.
The heading is displayed as solid line of fixed length.
A flag on the heading indicates a turned its direction in order to detect a
target maneuver.
When no data is coming, the vector r heading and flag are not displayed.
A symbol representing the manual or automatic selection of any AIS target
r ..., for the display of detailed information in a separate data display area. In this
Selected area, received target data as well as the calculated CPA and TCPA values
L --'
Target will be shown.
Squares indicated by its comers are drawn around the target symbol. This
mark is displayed on the around of a numerical display target.
,
A symbol representing an AIS target (activated or not) which data
</ Dangerous
Target
contravene pre-set CPA and TCPA limits.
CPMCPA alarm
acknowledged.
sound occurs and a symbol is flashed until
A symbol representing the last valid predicted position of an AIS target
d Lost Target
before the reception of its data was lost.
It will become a lost target when fixed time reception of the data of a
dangerous target cannot be carried out. When it becomes a lost target, a
symbol will be displayed on the position predicted by data received at the
end, such as a course and speed.
A-37
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• ,.~343
1-10. AIS Filter Setting
.• Meaning of AIS Filter

When an AIS filter is set up, AIS targets in the filtering area can be displayed preferentially. A
default filter is set up within a circle with a radius of 20nm from own ship and other type of filter is
selectable by the procedure in this section. When 50 or more AIS targets exist within the limits of
the filter, AIS symbols are displayed according to the display priority indicated in 1-13 "Max target
number and Display priority".
• AIS Filter Type Selection
There are three kinds of AIS filters as follows. One of them can be selected.
1) RANGE • • • A filter is set up in the shape of a circle which makes a radius set-up
distance.
2) SECTOR· • • A filter is set up in the shape of a sector including the own ship
heading direction.
3) ZONE • • • A zone area surrounded by two directions and two ranges from own
ship.
Operation
procedur

Main menu opens.

SUB1 menu opens.
3. Left-click IARPA/AISj.
4. Left-click IAIS SETTINg.

5. Left-click IAIS FILTERj.

AIS FILTER menu opens.
A-38
I
-.",
.. - 6. Left-click the selection section (combo box) of "1.FILTER TYPE".
.
IFILTER TYPE! is chosen and the following pull down menu is displayed.
SUBl MENU
AIS/ARPA
AIS SETTING
AIS FILTER
. FILTER TYPE
1. RANGE
2. SECTOR
4. I MAK
3. ZONE
3. FILTER Jl::;1-'
~OFF DON
O. I EXIT I
7. Select the FILTER TYPE from the pull-down menu, select 1 through 3 with the
trackball, then left-click.
Note:
If an ARPA guard zone is set, the filter area for AIS target will be modified automatically to
cover the guard zone.
A-39
• ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• , ••345
, . ~
• AIS Filter Setting
Note:
An AIS filter setting procedure changes according to the filter type chosen.
Select a filter type should be set before setting up a filter area.
Operation
1. Set up the type of a filter, according to the preceding clause.
procedur
After selecting a filter type, then perform the following procedure to set a filter
area.
2. Left-click IMAKE FILTER!.

It goes into filter setting mode.
[When a filter type is "RANGE"]

3. Adjust a setting marker to filter setting distance with a VRM knob and left-click.
[When a filter type is "SECTOR")

3. Adjust a setting marker to a filter start angle with an EBL knob and left-click.
4. Adjust a setting marker to a filter end angle with an EBL knob and left-click.
[When a filter type is "ZONE")

3. Rotate EBL and VRM control knobs to adjust the cross point of EBL and VRM to
the starting point of a filter zone. Then left click.
4. Rotate EBL and VRM control knobs to adjust the cross point of EBL and VRM to
the end point of a filter zone. Then left click.
A-40
...
•
. -~~
AIS Filter Area Display
.
Operation
procedur
Main menu opens.

SUB1 menu opens.
3. Left-click IARPA/Alsl.
4. Left-click /AIS SElTINg.

AIS SElTlNG menu opens.
5. Left-clicklAlS FILTER!.
AIS FILTER menu opens.
6. Left-click "ON" or "OFF" of "3.FILTER DISP".

The filter area display changes to on or off.
When it is set to ON, filter setting area is displayed as a green
dashed line on the radar screen.
A-41
·.................................• ...
1-11. AIS and ARPA Target Association Condition
~
347
• When the distance between an AIS target and an ARPA target is less than the "identical
distance" ofa preset value, these targets might be the same. In this case, only AIS symbol is
displayed and ARPA symbol may be suppressed. The method of setting the "identical distance"
to activate this association is as follows.
Operation
1. Left-click IMENUIon the screen.
procedur
Main menu opens.

SUB1 menu opens.
3. Left-click IARPA/AIS!.
4. Left-click IAIS SETIINg.

5. Left-click the "7.1DENTICAL DISTANCE" edit box.
tTCPA L1MI] will be selected.

6. Input the new value by pressing the 0 to 9 number keys or by using the ~ or
EJ keys, then press I END I to input.
Note:
1. ARPA symbol, which was suppressed by this association, can be re-displayed by switching
OFF the AIS display. See "1-6 AIS Symbol Display".
2. Both AIS and ARPA symbol are displayed when the "IDENTICAL DISTANCE" is set to zero.
(Association OFF mode.) When turning power on the radar display, the "IDENTICAL
DISTANCE" is set to zero.
A-42
- .- ~
••- -~l •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

1-12. AIS Lost Target
When a dangerous AIS target is lost, the lost target alarm will be activated and the dangerous
target symbol will change to a lost symbol. And the present target position is predicted by the
final received data from the target and the lost symbol position will be updated for approx. 1
minute. The lost symbol would be deleted when "ALARM ACK" key is pressed or no data has
been received for approx. 1 minute after activating a lost target alarm.
LOST TARGET interval depends on the Class A or Class B and the category of ship. Please see
the following the lost target interval for Class A and Class B ship.
[SaLAS ships) (Class A)

Category of Ship Lost target Interval
Ship at anchor or moored and moving at less than 3 knots 18 min
Ship at anchor or moored and moving at more than 3 knots 60 sec
Ship 0 to 14 knots 60 sec
Ship 0 - 14 knots and changing course 60 sec
Ship 14 - 23 knots 36 sec
Ship 14 - 23 knots and changing course 36 sec
Ship> 23 knots 12 sec
Ship> 23 knots and changing course 12 sec
[Non SaLAS ships) (Class B)

Category of Ship Lost target Interval
Ship < 2 knots 18 min
Ship> 23 knots 30 sec
NOTE:
When non-dangerous target is lost, the target symbol will be fixed at the last reported position and
deleted automatically after waiting for the data input from the target for above lost target interval.
A-43
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
1-13. Conditions of AIS Symbol Display 349
• Maximum Target Number and Display Priority
Up to 50 AIS target symbols can be displayed in JMA-9900 series radar. When more than 50 AIS
targets exist, 50 targets to be displayed are selected by the following priority order.
1. Dangerous target. (Both CPA and TCPA of a target are less than the preset CPA and
TCPA safe limit.)
2. Selected Target for numerical data display.
3. The target specified in target search mode. (See 1-4 Note for search mode)
4. The target in an AIS filter. (The closer target from own ship in the filter has higher priority
than further ones.)
5. Targets outside of a filter and they do not conform with the above 1 to 4 conditions. A
nearer target from own ship has higher priority than further ones.
Note:
When the 50 AIS targets symbol are displayed and 5151 target enters, "AIS MAX TARGET"
message appears at the lower right part of the screen and alarm sounds with "Pi! Pi! ".
• AIS Target Vector Display

- The vector of an AIS symbol is displayed in either ground-stabilized or sea-stabilized by a setup
of the own speed equipment.
The vector used now is displayed on "OS STAB" at the upper right of a screen.
When displayed as "OS STAB GND"--- AIS Vector presentation is Ground-stabilized

When displayed as "OS STAB SEA" --- AIS Vector presentation is Sea-stabilized
When the vector of an AIS symbol is displayed by sea-stabilized, the sea-stabilized vector of
AIS target is calculated from the COG/SOG of AIS target and the own ship COG/SOG &
CSE/STW information.
Note:
The vector of AIS target is not displayed in following cases.
Case 1: COG I SOG data is not transmitted from GPS/DGPS.
Case 2: The selected speed equipment is not working normally.
I
I
I
A-44
•
I
!
-:--~'SQ
~ .
1-14. Alarm Display
• There are the following alarms in AIS system.
Alarm Message Meaning

CPA/TCPA Dangerous Target is occurred
LOST Lost Target is occurred
The number of displayed AIS symbols was exceeded the
AIS MAX TARGET maximum target number 50. (The 51st data was
received.)
AIS (DATA) AIS is not connected correctly. Or AIS is turned off.
The AIS interface is not connected to radar correctly.
AIS 1/ F (DATA)
Otherwise the interface is faulty.
It is the alarm information received from AIS,
AIS ALARM *** Local Alarm Number of an ALR sentence is displayed by
3 figure number "***".. See the AIS Alarm list below.
AIS Alarm List on RADAR display
AIS Alarm NO.

Meaning of AIS Alarm 4
001 Tx malfunction
002 Antenna VSWR exceeds limit
003 Rx channel 1 malfunction
006 General failure
008 MKD connection lost
025 external EPFS lost
026 no sensor position in use
029 no valid SaG information
030 no valid COG information
032 Heading lost / invalid
035 no valid ROT information
Note:
An alarm message is displayed at lower right part of the radar screen.
A-45
..................................... ~.
351
....... Alarm message display position
1-15. Operational restrictions
AIS function is not available when the manual speed input or SET/DRIFT data is used and following
operational restrictions exist
1) An AIS function cannot turn ON

• When "MANUAL" was selected as a speed input source.
• When SET and DRIFT was set in "LOG" speed mode
2) "LOG" speed mode cannot be chosen as a speed source.
• When an AIS function was ON and SET and DRIFT were set.
3) "MANUAL" speed mode cannot be selected ..

• When an AIS function was ON.
4) DRIFT/SET (Current correction) function cannot turn ON.

• When an AIS function was ON and speed was set as "LOG".
A-46
•
- 9.52
. • • 1·•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
2 . Basic Operation with Track Ball
The operation method of the trackball of each menu in this manual. is described in "3.4 Basic
Operations" of the JMA-9900 Instruction Manual.
A-47
······································~3
3. Installation of AIS Information Display Kit
--
Note:
Following connection and setup are not required if the AIS interface was built in the factory before
shipping.
3-1. Composition of AIS Information Display Kit

The AIS kit for JMA-9900 consists of .
-AIS ifF TYPE W : AIS IIF PCB, Base attachment
-7ZCRD0967 : Power and Communication cable
3-2. AIS ifF Connection

(1) Attach the AIS IIF in the indicator. Refer to AIS UNIT INSTALLATION MANUAL.
(2) Connect the communication cable as shown in the following figure.
JMA-9900 Terminal
Board
TB 4601 Covering is skinned and

-'= -'= ....--- itconnects with a
, terminal board.
COMCO
COMRX
I ..1\ Red
AIS ifF Board
COMTX
COMTR
COMSG
COMOSR ...........
COMRTS
COMRI
J16 P16
D~
Power and
Communication cable
7ZCRD0967
(3) Power cable connection

Connect P16 of attached cable to J16 of the terminal board.
Connect P1 of attached cable to J1 of AIS IIF board.
When ISW is equipped, exchange the existing power cable with the 7ZCRD0967 power cable
in this kit.
A-48
-- :-~s ~
.- .
3-3. Set up after Installation
Set up a link pin, as shown in the following figure.
:. ON
.
o
S 100 I' ~~~~~~~
;I
V : It:'=;-; o 12345678
S101 I' ~~~~BB

o 12345678
•E
S102 I'~BB~
0/2345678
)
)
~, L...,j ~ -u
let ,- 0
(J IJIC17PCBS9002A CMH-1876 AI S_I/P'
Note.
It differs from II JMA-9800"
3-4. Turn on & Check

Turn on ship's main power. And turn on radar power.
AIS ifF is operating normally if the button for AIS (refer to 1-1.AIS button) is displayed on the
screen lower left.
, The connection or the setup may not be performed correctly if the AIS button is not displayed.
Please turn off the radar and check connection and a setup.
Note:
Refer to the installation manual in the case of connection.
A-49
NKE-1079/1089 SCANNER UNIT NCD-4263 DISPLAY UNIT
I SLOT ANTENNA l [ NSKI/F
I CMJ-462A
DRIVE
,-----. MOTOR
_____1 ROTARY
JOINT
m ' ENCODEF1f--
B102
----,
B101 A, B, Z
SAFElYlf - - - - - - - - _
SWITCH
SIOI
'=1======= 1=
_, NTG-3037A/3028 Transmi~tt·!R!!!e~c~e!l!iv~etJ;r============
1=
MOTHER BOARD
"
«S.
MAG
T
~ n ~ DUTRHPL f----
~
A303 f-----
PIN
ATT
CQC-1094
~ PULSE
o TUNE CONTROL ERMINAL BO RD
TRANS
~
CQD-1949
t
f
a
PWiTCHINP
CIRCUIT
PC210
t'
9.
'uE -.
:
,!,
PC220 :
,,:
TX TRIG
)J i CHAGE !
!
II)
i CIRCUIT
,
!
I t ,j
USB
--, ,I ,:
RIG
~ : : AVR
i i
,
! MH
'PC1001
I
!
INTERFACE CIRCUIT
PC1101 . • INTERSWITCH
C- NQE-3141-2/-4
s:: :: ENERAT R iI I n""..LAl')\.1
C
R
l,> 0
f
, I
G
L j N
~
B
~z 3CIJ T HS
UJ
»
AC220/230V,60Hz 3<1>
!0/230V,60Hz 1 
V,60Hz 1 
"12V""V: VS
C-
s::: I
» +48V.
~ J~20/230V.60HZ
+5V, KEYBOARD UNIT NCE-7721
P+12V
I CCK~' II
+3.3V
3<11
~ .CI001110/220I2JOV,"'"' 1 ~ MAIN
I ~CONTROL SIRdUIT
±12V
CCK900 I
SWITCH
DC24V AC220/230V,60Hz 3<1>
AC100/110/2201230V,60Hz 1 <II
IMOUSE I[ C C K - 9 0 1 I
+48V,+5V.+3.3V. ,
±12V ~11NCH LCD 1.10
AC220/230V,60Hz 3 CIJ NWZ-158
MONITOR RELAY
f-- AC100/110/220/230V,60Hz 1CIJ
NCD-42C13 DISPLAY UNIT
NKE-l075AJNKE-l087 SCANNER UNIT, .-----~
NSKI/F
I
' - -_SLOT ANTENNA
_-r-r-r-r- 1 CMJ-462A
DRIVE _~
~ MOTOR
Bl0l
ROTARY
JOINT
_______ ENCODEF
Bl02 r--------~ .. '
SAFETY
SWITCH r----------,
S101
n-
MOTHER BOARD
, f-.
CQC-l094
DUTRHPL f-- PIN
MAG ATT
- A303 f-- 1It<NI<E1087
PULAS
I I
TRANS TUNE CONTROL MIC I T RMINAL BOA 0
""Il"I A301 CQD-1949
t
W1TCHIN~
CIRCUIT ,:f-------~-pc-3iil1
+1 1,
PC210
~---'l:~ I)
,__l_t , TX TRIG
i
!
IF AMP
I
i,
1
PC220 :
'
!
:,:,
VIDEO
.. !,
:,
i CHARE : ! AMP I
i
':
CIRCUIT!
,I
t "
,-------L_t----.L_l_---.L
L -l--- J ,,,
____'I!~_ ____'I!~ USB
i ' I~ AVR INTERFACE CIRCUIT 1OIII~f----BP, BZ, VD, TRlG---1
J MH ! PC1001
PCll0l
TRIG/VD • INTERSWITCH
i ENERATpR! NQE-3141
C
i
I , ,
I'IIH - : - - - - - - - - - - - + - - - - - - - - - - - D C + 4 8 V - - - - o R
,
L._ ~
,
l N G
T B
HS
Pt-12V,t-24V
AC220/230V,60Hz 3 <Il VS
I AC100/11 0/2201230V 60Hz 1 Cl>
\
L
t-48V,
t-5V, KEYBORD UNIT NCE-7141
Pt-12V
I CO·-OO2 II CC'~OO I
AC220/230V,60Hz 3<1> t-3.3V
AC100/ll0/220/230V,60Hz 1<1> ±12V
MAIN
SWITCH
~_ _ _ _ _DC24V AC220/230V,60Hz 3<1>
IMOUSEI~I
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _--.1 AC100/ll0/220/230V.60Hz 1<Il
_
CCK-901 I
t-48V,t-5V.t-3.3V,
±12V
L-_~ 23.1 LCD MONTOR
AC2201230V,60Hz 3<1> NWZ-158
1--- AC100/ll0/220/230V,60Hz 1<1>
MONTOR RELAY
ANT
ISW .,./OUT EXT RADAR

lB4101 PM UNIT
VD' SCANNER NKE-l07Q
T84201
,,
T84401
Vi):
I .- NJU-63
, I
I YDIH, ROYD (OPTION)
-,RIG'"
\lOINIE ROV"" HEATER POM:R O.l/lkV-DPYCYS-15 T8104
TRIG-
3 EllV 3 ACIOOVI¢ ---- -
3
•
5
TRlCINI
rRlCIN IE
BPlN'
•5
ETlY :IE
SVD I
BP:
ep:
oz·
"'dr (
:.
I
t
""'" 'E
.ZIN ,
,
I SVD IE
ETlY 1
.,- :.-
MTR· l'
I
I
10
BZlN IE
"'lRiN 1+
MTRlNl
8
8
10
ETIY1E
Ex\tlA I
EX~A IE
MTR-
"MrRf
'0 i-UtJ;lI;.
"U r
,
"
(NC)
~I~
-,.
EX¢B 1
"
WAIN IE
" EX.B IE
'48V
"13 pWRJN IE "
13 EX¢Z 1
+48VQ
ExliZ IE J
"
""
PWROUTI
PWROuT IE r t :: SYD'
CBo-1884
_.. ....... "' .. w ...
~n
Inl~
SYDZE
.~~
." \'Dour I 18
qq' ~" eTIv2
----, T8104
"
~~
VDQUl IE
L 18 ETlY ZE
~
18 TB303 1
- ... ..""
TRiGOUTI cRY
oc.>
«;f
." TRJQOUT 1£
BPOU1I
BPOUT IE
EX,pA2
EX.... 2E
EX¢B2
V ,
3 ~-.
I"-CORES COMPLEX CABL£
H - 2895110056 (JRC SUPPLY) RI,U
~A
"" r,r-=r
(He) TBI02 PMS Rl;O
VEL
NOA-4172AlSlIF Bloor1 (xltlB 2£ """iJT
"
3 __~~5OVfTYCH - ;;,--1
. Bloor IE
0'.
.. 23 EX!/lZ 2 T.30Z
P
m....
~
23
:i" MTROUT 1+
" EX¢Z 2£
ill~
.'" .. ~
,'
~
!!!.. zs
I§~
MTROUT1- ITlY v MU'
MTORUT IE ITlYE 3 MV'
CD
o " EX!,6A1N
~~ '
~
Iill,.
~ '"
EX4lBIN
0-
o
.,"" EX¢ZEN
EX¢/NGNO
~n
"il;
s::s ~'"
III
,...o
0'
::s
o , T84501 L •
iii' NAVITX" AU~/COM
~ 3
··.·.VHX-
NAVIRX+
, 1
T84601
ARPMLM· -f;r T8204
3 • NAVIRX- ARPMLM- PT1

PTE
~ ,,
5 NAV""
NAV2TX- •
3 SYSALM ..
SYSAL.M - LVR
PMS
iiP NAV2RX+ 5 PWRALM+
,•
.
E
g- I
9
NAV2RX-
l.OGRX+
PWRALM-
ARPAACK .. T~
."
~~~~:!D~:t..l~==
8P -/8Z- TXE
LOGRX• 8 ARPMCK-
__.~, I '
m.oc
• ~
~
~
" SYSACK •
" ALMTX+
10 SVSACK-
.....ll.B!l..
~
'C
III ",.13 ALMTX-
AlMRX• 11 F'WRACK'
Wl<T
MTR-
c.... ALMRX- 12 PWRA()(-
~
,~.
_.
':".PATX ..
_. __'ATX- I ,.
13 EXEVT.
EXEVT-
CDMCD
co
co
"
18
",,,,APATX+
JARPATX-
"
19 COMAX
="r-
c.>
c.> 19 NSKTX..
NSKTX- "
19
COM1X
COMDTR
T8203
"I:.
T8202
~
I
21
"
NET-S
TET-<: .
19 CDMOO
COMDSR
--:i2'V
C2
~
~
VO
~
~
'" "" COMRTS

U'
-.
LOG CO.... ¢'
III
::;; TB 1 ¢A 1 V,
'"::s ,1 SF... +
SFA-
E
Wi
fir 3 SFS+ RED
¢.
'48V
EB3 rtf
0- • SFS- GYRO Rill
+48VG
r·~~
S" 5 PULS 1+ T84101
IJll
~
,
8 PULS 1-
PULS 2+ , 1 1/RI
2151
O.•/lkv'TPYCH TRANSMITTER-RECIVER
'C 8 PULS2- a 3/02 MAIN POWER UNIT
»
III 9
10
SYNC 1+
SYNC I-
• • 5
103
5/R2
A02201 230V 3 ¢
NTG-3037A
o 11 SYNC2+ 9 (Ne)
12 SYNC2-
""
~ GYRO'" ~ ••• 25OV-MPYCYS-l
j#
I
CA
"" c:.n
~
c.> -.:l .
-s,
DISPLAY UNIT NCD-4263
AHf
184101
, PM UNIT
ISW IN/OUT
"'."" ......,
EXT_
w+
,, SCANNER NKE-l079 NJU-63
veil , ""w
w-
,"",+ 3 W'~ (OPT1(»O I
WIN lIE
TllIGIN ,
..... ,
T~'E
""VDE
E1lY3
rnv 3E
........
,"",-
•, ~
•,
HEATEfl POWER
AC100Yl r/J
O......'kV-DP'ICY$-15 ~
(
"'TI
sw,
OZ- •r
qq" 8PlN IE
8ZIN'
SW'E
ET1V , OZ- ••
lITR+
BZtlIE ETlV IE
lITR- ID
t:ffi}
MTRlNI ... EX¢oA 1
'0 MTRlN1- '0 EX41AIE lOT'"' 11
INC) 12
EX.pBl
NTRIN lIE
" ~
" """'" ,.
EXIjlB tE
+48V ra 2
"
13 EXr/JZJ
+4IVG
"
OW
" """'" IE
PWROUT , EXq,Z te
"
IS PWROUT'E
_L. ,."
15 SVD2
SVO 2E ceo-,...
"
17
VOOOT'
VOOUT IE
,. env
envz
~-,..;;+-~,-j
IJ
TRlGOUT I 2E
18
"'''''
.
GAV
6m
18 TRiGOUT lIE It EX.AI
SPOUT 1
~~':;;:':;:;':;...l
V •
14-eORES COIiFL£X CIlIl£
H - 2185110051(JRC SUPPLY)
.t>,
" SPOUT lIE
1-''';;4''''';'''''':''':''-1 " INC) 3
VEL RED
:
NQA-4172 AISVF 8Z0UT I
2SOV-,iTTICH- ;;,- -, \-''':::-+~=~-1 uT830Z, _
•••• I. I 24
BZaUl IE
MTROUT H· - -"
I
--';h:~ : =~ I-;:~;;:;;;':-'-l
AIS
~
--
MTROlIT 1-
~~,i
MTORUl IE
I I
I
L.
4 TD3+
5TD3-1
6 GND3 I
-
H-269~1100J6 RADARSIGHAl ~VS;I'jFTT
To ECDIS v , I
D:::ttI
W 3 :
,
..
"' "
.
:,
I
,
~
NAVITX+
'--- :
5
NAV11X -
NAV1R)(+
NAV1RX-
NAV2TX
'- ==: ~
3 SVSAUot-
"""'"
CBD-11I1
,• Nr\V2TX- 4 SYSAI,M-
NAV2RX'" • PWRAUI'
••
NAV2R)(- • PWIlALM-
LOGRX... 1 AAPMQ( ..
a "APAACK- BP -IBZ-
'0 LOGRX-
BZ'
11 AlMTX' • SYSACK"
ALMTX- 10 SYSAQ(-
"" .......X· 11
IZ
Pt'VRACK +
PWR,ACK-
t"
ALMRX-
s ARPATX'" 13 EXEVT"
ARPATX- 14 EXEVT-
17" JARPATX... 15
18
COMa>
COJR(
JARPATX-
"
19 NSKTX ... 11 COMTX ",,.3 TB.'I.02.
',".
NSf(TX 18 COMOTR UO"""""'"
o~
~
Vl:1
NET-S 19 COMSQ
20 COMDSR cz VO
22
ZI COMRfS ¢ZE
3
......!!.....
u, ,,"",
~, ¢Z
¢A V,
+
SFA'
SFA-
...!!..!.......
SFS+ .on
i-L--/
--~
SFS- BLU
+4OVG
PULS1...
PUlS 1-
PULS a-
TRANSMITTER-RECIVER
PUlS 2-
S'INC ,.
UNIT
SYNC 1-
SYNC2-0-
ACZZ0I23OV ' . (ME[) only) NTG-3037A
AC1001111JY ' .
12 SYNC 2-
___• 'SOV""YOYS-'
..';1-

ISWIN/OUT
T84201
EXTAAOAR
T84401
PM UNIT
, SCANNER NKE-l079 NJU-63
e
\'DIN 1
WIN IE
,
1 RBVO
RBVr£ ANT
184101
(opnOHl
~
TB1Gt
a TRIGIN1 a ETIY 3 HEAfER POWER 0.8/1kV-oPYCYS-I,~
• TRiGIN IE • enr 3E vo-

,
l AcrOOV1\&
,
( ~
..,.,~
•
,
8
BPlN1
SPIN IE
,,
5 svo r
SVO 1E
env 1
VD-
TRIG +
TRlC- .,
3 ORO
WHT
+12V V
vy ~
LVA
I ~~E
BZO<'
BP-
8 aZlN IE 8 ET1Y 1E 5
. -;--=-L-!-
• MTRrN'+ • EX~A 1 SP-
~z
I ~
'D MTRJN I- 'D EX¢A IE B'-
,t ~
"
"
MTRlN IE
PWRI\Il+
11
"
EXrjJB,
EXI/lBIE
EX!;6Z I
B' -
MTR-
MTR-
•
'D
.
I'-t- ,."
PWRIN1E
"
14 PWROUT 1 EX4tZ 1E MTRE
(NC)
11
"" PWROUTIE
\'Dour, "" SVD2
SVD2E -<BV "
13
RED
BLU" "J..
REo.~-·
17
-'6VG
"T'I
" voorr IE
'L"
Em, 14
"°dr
: : :::: : .
~ TRIGOUT1 ETIY 2E
"" TRIGOUT IE 19 • EXtl'A2 -~
~
oc.n III SPOOl 1 20 EX¢A 2E TI :
I~, .•. ' PTE
21 EX!/>B 2 T0304 14-CORES COMPLEX CABLE
c;l "22 BPOUT 1E , "

H-289SI10056 (JRC SUPPLY)
....IlIJL =:1 LVR R~n
NQA.... '72AlSlIF Bloor 1 Do. 22
EXI/lB2E
RP.l
till1 (It--- VEL
T8102
3
s "",-
...J!.5OVrTYCH- ';;,- -,
r~:
Z3 aZOUT IE
n= EX¢Z2
EX¢Z 2£ ~f
~O
"""ii'I
V1
~
zs Wi
~
1m
!!!.. 'Co 3 CNOO I 21 MTORUT IE 28 ImE ~~ MUl
~~o
~
EX4!AIN
CD
g... : • TOO> I
I
"
28 Ex4l8\N
<::~
MV'
MWI
5 T03-
L.. _ _ _ _ _
1'''" 031_
.
28 EXti'ZEN ~~
!~
0- EX41lNGND
o .~~_ H-269511000ll RADAR $lGNAI..
POWER
s
:::l
To ECDIS
CBD-IMI
tll
g.
s:
:::l
o
iii"
I
18""
NAV1TX+
'1 ALM/COM
.r
~
3
~
'---
2
3
4
NAVITX-
NAV1R)(+
NAVIRX-
~. ;t:
3
Te4001
ARPAALM+
ARPMLM-
SYSAL.M+
.'r,;; T8201
18204
PTl
~
5 NAvrn VD - PTE
g, ,
8 NAV2TX- 4
5
SYSALM-
PWRALM'"
YD· LVR
NAV2RX+ o, - TRIG + P....
6P
g-
ECHO SOUNDER 8 NAViRX= , PWIW..M
TRlG- E
.... •
'D
~
LOGRX-
1
8
ARPMCK+
ARPAACK
BP-
BP=iiiZ-
T~
DLOG 11 TXf
~ 9 SYSACk+
.<i
'C "" ALMTX-
AUIIRX +
10
11
SY5ACK-
PWRACK+
tll 14 ~ 12 PWRACK
c.... ~ 13 EXEVT+
, "---
~
14 EXEVT-
ARPATX:
15 COMCO
""'::::::Hi
JARPATX+
co ~ 16 COMRX
co CONINING DISPL1il < '" ""'NSKTX': 17 COMTX
(,)
(,) ~ NSi(ii: 18 COMDTR T6203 TB202
I~I ~~
19 COMsa
I UO
tn 3) COMD5R
» LOG
21 CQMRTS
t WO I
VD
V""
~ .!..~
tll , TB4801 U1
III
,.-
,z
SFA+
SFA-
.k 0.6l1kV-TPYCY-il t::fr:j
~ lOG •5
SFS+
SFs:
fiij[S""i'+
GyRO
TB4701
ffij£"t ~POWER
AC220/2301/ 3\&
~
PULSE •
,, PULS 1-
~
,.....L---L! ~1
(~ TRANSMITTER-RECIVER
"» I9 I
'PULS'i='
UNIT
o SYNC 1+
N '"
\I
SYNC 1-
SYNC 2+ NTG-3037A
N
i2 SYNC'Z='
~ _ 'J50V.....PYCYS- f
N
~ =-;),.
(,)
-e-
w
en
CQ
DISPLAY UNIT NCD-4263T
ISWII/OUT EXT.......
T1M401
PM UNIT
'""""
YO", , II"'"
N<T
SCANNER NKE-l079 NJU-63
WIN IE 2 RIlVDE (OPTION>
TfIQIM , , rnv, TlMI01
HEATER POYER Qlflk~CYS-I.5 "11,.
YO+
~---A-lrm-
---+
TRlQI\IIE • ET1Y 3E AC100VI r/J
SP'" • Mll YO- ( .,,, '[.-.....!!"
BPIN IE I
7
SVD IE
ETlYI
V LVIl
IlZlNI
BZ»IIE 8 ET1Y IE 1lI'+
MTRlN 1+ 9 EK¢A 1 1lI'-
10 MfflIN 1- 10 EX4\A IE
"TI II MT~N 1E 11 EK¢B 1
~
12 ~I+ 12 EX4\B IE
13 PWRSN IE 13 EX¢ZI
o 14 PWROUTI 1" E1:¢Z IE
C> 15 SVD2
lS FWROUT IE
-l 18 VDQtJT I 16 SVD 2E
CD
11 17 ET1Y2
VDOUT IE
--~
3s 18
19
TRIOOUT I
TRlGQUT IE
18
19
ETIY 2E
EXf,bA2
!!!.. 20 BPOUT I 20 EX4\A 2E
,.004 ... , ....
am'
NQA-4172 AISVF 21 21 EX41B 2 14-GOF*:S COW'l.£X CABLE
to BPooT IE
LVIl
o 50vfTnCH- ';;1-- 1 22 8Z0UT 1 22 EX4182E H-289511111158 (JRC SUPPLY)
YEL
OFn
D> RD3+ I zs EX.ZZ , 2 _ PUS
E
a. AlS
__ea 1+ 1 ZJ B20UT IE eU< I
I
--~ll\I=.
~: ;::, : --;:;;;;-
24 MTROUT 1+ 24 EX9Z 2E 2 ,
oo Z5 MfROUT 1- zs IllY ~
~
• T03+I m MTORUT IE '" ITIYO
---
:3 fl EX9M1
:3 I 5 I
lll3-
CD 28 ex...
~ GN~ I
~
6 a EX.ZEN
s:3 H-21595110006 RADAR SIGNAL
31 EX¢I«NJ
o
s: To ECDIS ~ 250V-TTYCS-4
- t~
ARPADATA
oq
ill ,
3 ALARM MONITO RING
SYSTEM
---- ,.v~pvev,_,
s,
Sl r~ , lB4501
NAVITX+ ALM/CCN
c.. DC>'S
aea_ SOV-TTYC&-I , 2 NAVITX -
NAVIR)(+ I
T&OlOl
ARPMUI'"
D>
.'
I~ " • NAV1RX- 2
3
ARPMLN-
SYSALM+ ~
raan
.
5 NAV2TX
___~,~v_T~e,_, •, NAV2TX -
NAV2RX ..
4
•
SYSAlM-
PWlW.M+
't.. 1
~
: :
ECHO SOUt-!OER
DLOG
I"dr
ea..:.,""'''_TTV.... c:..\
'----= •
,.•
NAV2RX-
LOGRX·
LOGRX -
•7
I
PWlW.M
ARPAACK+
ARPMQ(-
':t
'l..~
~:--
• E1P-1B2 -
r,_o.~
11 ALMTX+ SYSAct(+
BZ+
AJ..IKTx- 10 SY$Aa< -
" 11 PWIlACI<+
MTR+
"" ALMRX +
ALMRX - 11
13
PWIlACI<-
EXEVT+ ~
MTR-
"
16
ARPATX ..
ARPATX-
.." EXEVT-
COMeO
CONINJNGDISP .A:t.
"
18
JARPATX+
JARPATX- 1• CO"""
COVTX
19 NSKTX·
1".
r.,,_~
lD COMllTR 1B203"
,,~, ~
NSKTX-
21 NET-S
TET-<: "
lD
COtISC
COMDSR
~
~
.M"
\'2'::- ' uo
"
, ~:=:I
SFA+
21
22
COMRTS
COM16 ~
~
.
2 SFA- w_= O,6/1kV-TP'l'CY-6
~A
E
a see- NAJNPOMR
~ ~
LOG
is
, • 5
SFS-
PULS 1+
AC2201230V 1 r/J [MEn~)
AC1001 I10Y 1 r/J
.......
"'" ~
PULSE 2 ~
,• PULS 1-
PULS~ - TRANSMITTER-RECIVER
•• PtJLS,-
- [-=.,
10
SYNC 1'"
SYNC I-
UNIT
II SYNct+ NTG-3037A
11 SYNC 2.~
OYRO
--dr
o
<
-e-
SCANNER
PM UNIT
ISWIN/OUT E<TRAOAR T"~~ I E-l075A NJU-63
TB4201 TB4401
t WIN 1 I RBVD VO" 1 1 TBl01
2 VO"IE Z RSVDE T":~+ ~ I-- 2 r:"l. t BP" 18104

3 TRlCINl 3 ETIV3 TAlG- • I-- 't. Z BP- -A 1 P11
4
5
TRiGIN IE
SPIN!
4
5
EnY3f
SVDl
BP"
BP-
5
6~
3
~o4
3 BZ"
sz-
, §lU
L....i ,
3
PTE
LV.
r-~
e SPIN II: 0 SVD IE Co..!... 2....l:t...- 5 TRIG" REO 4
7 BZJNt 1 Em! :~+ 7 L..T . . . "l:.. 6 TRIG
PMS
8 Slit IE 8 fTlY IE MrR- 8 G ~ 7 MTR"

".!.Ii.
WHT·-
5 E
I~
6 TXI
9 MTRlNl+ 9 EX¢Al MTR: HI WHY 8 MTR-
7 TXE
10 MTRlN 1- 10 EXq.A 1£ MIRE 11 U 9 MTRE
II MTRlN Ie 11 El(¢B 1 (He) 12 '¥" 10 VO" :
12 PWRIHl+ 12 EX¢B1E +48V 13 ~ L- II VO-
.:~
13 PWRIN IE 13 EX¢Z 1 +.48VG 14 ~ ! pi I
~: =Tl~ -A-~: E~~~;E ~~ .'"
~ ~I i!~
."
~
'6
11
18
Waul I
vDO\.JTIE
TRI00UT I
I
r ~i:. 17
18
18
SVO2E
EnY2
ETlY2E TB303
I~
~ l--V.2.-
... aVG
Ul .I
,
J6
pn
1
o...... ~I r~ t.. ....I!l.!.I. 't... :

PTE
19
2Il
TRIGOUTIE
SPOUT I .........
19
2D
EX\tlA2
EX ¢A 2E V 2 ,.-CORES coWPLEx CABLE
WI
1 i"- RfO
•
LV.
r: !.Q~~2!.~~ ~ l\.
PMS
1 '- - -
21 SPOUT IE 21 EX¢B 2 (NC) 3 •••- H-2695110056 : 2 , ....IlJJI.
--l 5 E
~ •} •~ ~
/D
3
250V;TTYc'S-4 TBI I
I
22 Bloor I I n • ., L-
I~
22 EX¢B if
EX~Z 2 m
["'!-;:. (.me SUPPLY)
ll1T .. "
' J!l:iT---
-c..
8 TXI
I
·~ Jl~ EX~Z2E ~ ~
.-_ - .. I ROO.. 23 BZOUT IE 23 TBJQ2 T TXE
AIS
r
s
!!!. 1l17t ~:J
2 ROO-
GND3
I
I
24
25
MTROl1TI+
MTROUT1-
L 24
2S fTIY
U
v
I
2 WMII-'1
08/1kV-DPYCYS-I.S
HEATEAPOlNER ··idr
._--
" ~ •
OJ
I
I
4
5
1'03+
T03-
I
I
28 MTORUT IE 26
V
ITJYe
EX¢AlN
W
...-....
3WiMi11...
"U.." AC100vl ¢
(OPTION)
v
~
g.,
Q.
L. 6- GND3 I :
:J)
::::~:
EX¢INGND TB301 /'
x·:=
-;:-:--,
o
s ......:::. H-ZI95110008 RADARSIONAL ~1 GRN I !
::J To ECDIS
".. f-!*
•••• 250V-TTYCS.... v 2.
!l
l
/D AfPNJATA W 3
g.~ AlARM MONiTORtKl

SYSTEM
=-f,j,. n •• , 18"'" j
o
iii"
~
3
OOPS
1r;;,..
~_:.-.
~ ..O:i\"_...
-
Tv....,.
~
'----.
1
2
3
NAV1TX+
NAVITX-
NAVIR,X+ 1
2
ALM/COM
l'B4801
ARf'MLM.
~
U
v I
lT-;),.
NAV1R)(- "'---- ARPMLM- W
5 NAV2TX 3 SYSALM • POWER
:;
~ •• ';:'5IIV_TTVr:~ fI NAV2TX- .. SYSALM- CBO-1661
~_ _ I _'-. 7 NAV2RX + 5 PWRALM +
6P !ECHOsousoe ~ 8 NAV2RX- fI PWRALM-
g-
=' eeoc .._J:;'~_TTV('~l I rr: 1~ ~~~:: ~ :::::
I
~
"CJ
·~ =~: l~ ~~~~:
13 ALMRX+ 11 PWRACK+
:
/D
14 AlMRX _ 12 PWRAo< -
c....
s:
» '---~: =~~~: ::~~~
I ~ 17 JARPATX+ 15 COMeD
CD
CD CONINlNG DISP;.'":li.... -••":""i\U_ ... Tv... '" '-- 18 JARPATX- 18 COMRX
I
-~ ~:. :N;~S: :: ~;::
<.>
N
I
(J)
» 22 TEl -e Z) COMDSR
21 COMRTS
~
en LOG 22 COMRI
/D 184801
::i; I SFA+
2 SFA-
~ 3 SFS+
III
::J
LOG ..._:=. P~~ ~+ ~~~~
ffi3 ---
Q. 08/IkV-DPVCYS-15 I ;
s P<JLSE
:!'1 '---..!- 1
...
OIl
I7T
6 PULS 1- 1 I/RI MAIN POWER
I
1 PULS 2+ 2. USI O.ll/lllV-Tl'YCY-6
'< 8 PULS 2- 3 3/52 v ['"!... AC2201'l:1lJ'tl 3 ¢
"CJ
/D 9 SYNC 1+ .. 153 T1T
» 10 SYNC 1- 5 5/R2 W
o 11
12
SYNC 2+
SYNC 2-
6 (He)
N
N __ 25OV-MPYCYS-1
o ~
-&
GYRO
<,
N
<.> a>
~ t-Lo
<.>
-e.
SCANNER
PM UNIT
ISWINIOUT
ANT NKF-ln7!\A
EXTfWlAR
ltl440l
l&UOI NJU-63
~
"''''1
,I VOIN I
V1llH IE 2
I . .VO
"vDE
VD·
VD- ,
I
oP· TIl,,,
." miG· 3 .P-
ETJY 3
~
3 11I0lN I 3
••
mIG-
• oz· PT1
•~
• TRKDN IE ETJY 3E
lIP· 5 az- PTl'
••
BPIN, SVD 1
~ BPIN If
• SYO IE
lIP
oz· 7l"""\
TRIG + L\IIl
8 TAlG- PMS
·.•
BZIN I 7 ETIY ,
-I 7 oz- 8 E
•• ~
MTR+
3'" •
.... 'E ETIY IE
M7R· M7R- TKI
MTRIN 1+
MTRlN 1- 10
EX\6A I
EX4lA 1£
Mm- 10
• MTA< , TXE
i 11 _'E
PWRIN 1+
11
ra
EX¢S 1
ExtJB IE
MTA<
(NC)
11 1--1
"13~
10
11
vo-
VD-
I
W~ ----'
lXI
g "
13 _IE 13 eXr,621
...."
..avG
rt= .."
14 .
I~
14 PWROU71 14 EXot!2IE
a. "
~TIE SVD2
SVD2E J8
o " VDO\J7 I
,,,
I~ 17 ETJY ,
o
5 "" VDool1£
'r:.
"" ETJY 2f I
PT1
~
11I113 1
TRlGOUT 1
.," TRiGOlIT IE ex4lA! :.. aru 't.. PTE

L\IIl
'"oo!:!".
:::l
NQA-4112 AIS VF
250VfTiYc8=4- ;1- - f
I
"
21
22
SPOUT1
SPOUT IE
BZooT I
8Z0UT IE
~".
~ .."
II EX.A 2E
EX.SZ
EX"S2£:
EX.Z2
V
(l«:)
111112
2
3
IKORES COMPL.£X CABLE
__ H-H9511005t!
(JRC SUPPLY) F- "

lI.
"
BLK
W'HT•••
•,
6
PMS
E
TKI
...
AIS . ._ ••-- 1+ 1 RD3+
c
... -~,
U ._ 7 TXE
1I;},
·"~I"~ ~ ~~~
EXtlZ2f
: "
MTROUT1+
iir mv
I
~ I
MTROUT 1-
MTORIH IE I11Yf
V
D:::1I1
2 •.,
-f,1.
..
4 TOO.
3 I 5 TOJ- I
l1 EXtI""
~ L 8 ON~ I
EXt/»SIN
EX.ZEN
_·p.. . . 't
II EXtllHGHD
I ._
. ...,==-,
H-2695110006 RADARSIGNAl.
I
I
..!
To ECDIS 250V-TTYCs-4
.' I
....
A""ADA'A I
-I ALARN MQNITORtiG
~
I
SYSTEM 'I'V~OV"V~ I I
'"c.. Tll4501
ALM/COM
3: I NAVITX+
TB48DI
~
2 NAVlTX-
3 NAVIRX + I AAPAALM.
<l)
<l)
c.>
•
5
NAV1RX-
NAY2lX
2
3
AfIIMLM-
SY$ALM+
•
·
N NAV2TX- .. SYSALM-
I
en 1 NAV2RX+ • -..u.
)0 8 NAV2RX,- .............
•
10
lOGRX+
LOGRX -
7
8
AlFMCM.+
APPM -
11 ALMTX· • SVSAQ(+
10 SVSAClK~
ALMTX -
"
13 ALMRX+ 11
12
PWRACK..
PWRACK-
ALMRX-
" ARPATX + 13 EX£VT+
"
18 ARPATX - 1.
15
EXEVT-
COMeO
" JARPATX+
JAHPATX- II COMRX
.,"" NSKTX+ 11 COMTX

NSKTX- 18 COUDlR
21 NeT-S " CQMSQ
22 TET-C ., GGMGSR
21 COMRTS
LOG .. COMR
I
I SFA·
2 SFA-
3 SFS·
•
5
SFS-
PUtS 1+
GYRO
T84101
8
8
7
PUlS 1-
PULS ..
PIlLS ..
l/RI
2/S1
3/&2
~ ,ffF 06/"Y-TP\'CH
AC220/23OY 141
•
10
SYNC t+
SYNC I-
IS3
51'"
AClOO/I1W 141
II SYNC 2+ (NC)
SYNC2-
"

SCANNER
PM UNIT
"',.,,,
ISWIN/OUT EXT RADAR
NKE-l075A NJU-63
I
""'0RBYD
1
YD'"
.
ANT T810t
2 RBV[)f
2
:I
VO" IE
TR)GiN , :)
..
eTIv3
ETIY3E
T84101
YD. 2
BP-
ap-
"',
.. TRIGIN IE I PTl
VD- 3 az-
5
II
SPINI
BPt!lE
5
6
SVD 1
SVD 1£ TRiG. • az- ,, 2
3
pn
7 8Z1NI 7
8
EllY I
ETIY IE
-R1G-
BP:" ,
s TRIa·
TRlC- I
RED
BLI1 •
LV"
PMS
.
8 BlIN IE
9 MTRJN1+ 9 EXt/)AI BP-
BZ;
7
S
MTR.
MTR-
I
-- 5
S
E
T~
,,,
10 MTRlN I- 10 EX41A IE 7 TIlE
II MTRlN IE 11 EX\ilB t az- MTRE
12 PWRiN 1+ 12 EX¢Ble MTR- I. vp -

u VD-
~i~
13 EX¢Z 1 .lTR-
13 ~lE
14 PWROUT I \4 EXI1'Z 1£ IT""
<NCr ,
~
15 PWROUT IE 15 SVD2
I~
16 SVD ZE ;m"
I' WOOl 1
..,
1iQ"
17
18
19
VDOUT IE
TRJOOUT 1
TRICOUT IE
~"
19
7 EllY 2
ETIY 2£
EX¢AZ
~4BVG
,I
,
JI
PT1
2 PTE
:.. NQA-4172AISlIF 1... 20 E:<¢A 2£
o
CD 250VfTTYcH- ';,- - I
2D
21
SPOUT I
SPOUT 1E ~
't; _
'11 r- EX¢Bl Ta""
..~ R ,
3 LVA
PMS
22 ezoct \ ... I~ l
.~
mE
5 E
-I AIS , 2 .... WHT-_.
~ ~
Z3
24
8Z0tlT IE
MTROUT 1+
23
24
,.
EX\ilZ 2
EX¢12£
rrrr
3 3 $T S
7
T~
HE
~ MTOOUT 1-
s 28 MTORUT IE 26 IllVE HEATER paWl;;" --~
<,
S
!!!.. 21 EX(jJAlN
~
AC100vt41
OJ 28 E'<¢BIN
o 29 EX¢ZEN
D>
-e :KI EXtJINCiND
0- POWER
C80-1881
~ To ECOIS
~C~Af)ATA
"a
CD I\LARM MONITORN3
SYSTEM tm I .'/',V-lIPYQ'!'S-U
g
o
iii"
•
"'4501
NAVIn:.
NAVIT)C-
'1
~
ALM/COM
TB4601
~ ,
..-------
--
NAYiRX:
~
1
2
ARPMl.M+
ARPMLM-
D>
3 I ~ I ;,~~_ :)
..
S'r'SALM+
SYSALM-
S. ~ ,
8
PWRAUII-
PWRALM-
NAV2iiX
SJ
0-
LOCRX+
,
8
ARPAACK·
ARPMCK-
OLOO LOGRX-
D>
."' 'ALMTX':'
'Ai:Mfj(:
9
10
SYSACK+
SYSACK-
~
11 I PWRACK+
CD
ALMRX+
ALMRX- 12
13
I P'MVICK-
HEVT.
~
c,
'ARPATX= 14 EXEVT-
~ ~
15 COMeO
~
~ \61 COMRX
CD ~ 17 COMTX
CD
c.:o "-- N5KTi"=" 181 COMDm
~~
19 COMSQ
211
"i'
rJ)
1 lO I COMOSR
21 I CQMRTS
> LOG 22 I COMRJ
~
"'480'
----sFA+ == 08/1kV-TPYCV.....
~
en SfA-
;<:" SFs+ MAIN POWER
s
v
SfS-
F\iLSi+
GYRO
TB4701
AC220/230V 3';
fiUi:S"1="
~ PULS 2+
l/RI
-g PULS Z-
2/51
3iSi
~ I: I :~:~:: 153
5iR2
SYNCZ+ (NC)
~
<,
SYNC2=
~
c.:o
'6-

~
0')
SCANNER
PM UNIT
ISW,./OUT EXT RAOAR
,.."", NKE-1075A NJU-63
""""
WIN I 1 RBVO 18101
ANT
,
~ ,2
WIN 1E 2 RBVDE
lB4101
~
Bp.
.,.
TAIGIN I 3 ETlY3 11'04
BP-
,
TRIG1N IE
BPIN I
•
5
ETIY3E
SVDI
VD.
VD-
2!- 4 B'-
( .", 'L 2
sn
PTE c»
-.,...
BPiN 1E 6 SVO1E s
BlIN , 7 ETIYI S TRIG' ¥ RED
•
LVR
W-
ORG~ 8 TRlG-
i'
-=..
PMS
••
BZIN IE 8 ETIY IE
E
9 EXtbA I
B,.
T MTR' Y
r,
• MTRlHI+ Tlel
Mm-
10 MTRlN I- 10 EX¢lA IE
.... 8
'A 10•
lii""RE 7 TXE
n MTRlH 1E 11 Ex:Ij)B I B'-
12 PWRIN 1+ 12 EXta IE Mm· '[
'0.
•
4i~
13 EXIUl MTR 11 '0-
13 PWRJN IE
14 PwROUT I 14 EX~Z IE MTRE
15 SV02 (NO)
1$ PWROUT IE
18 VDOtIT I I' SVD 2E ...v J:j
17
18
WOOT IE
lRl'GOOT I
11
,.
ETIY:2
EnY1£
..avG
'R::
I ,
J8
pn
TRiGOUT IE .. EX.A2 •
-... •••
19 2 PTE
3) SPOOl, 2Q EXltA2E l... AI" ... J L""
Na~""'172 AISIIF 21 SPOOT IE 21 ex.a:2 rs304 14-CQflES COMPLEXCABL£ I- PIIS
I H-269SI10056 (JRC SUPPLY) l.. .;;;-
, ,'
~
22 EXtbB 2E
25OVfTTYCs:..- ; ; , - - il2 BZOOT1
,1;--
::,~u~ --
E
AlS ---- 1+ 1 Roo+I 23 SIOUT IE 23 EX.Z2 2 2
.... TXI
" ;!l l l"- 2 ROO-I 1M "TROUT 1+ .. EX_ZIE L. I TXE
I
.. mv .L'••
11171
I
3 GN03
4 Too-l
I Z5
m ..
MTROUT 1-
ORUT IE II IT1YE
HEATER POWER ~
•
I 5 TIl'- I IJ EX.AIII
u~
ACIQHI. 1m
L ti ~D3 J
II
a
EX_B..
H-269511000fl RADAR SIGNAL

:I)
EX.ZEN
EX.INGND lli
POWER
C8D-1881
To ECDlS
ALARMMONITORNl
SYSTEM
.8"'" M v _
"'~=i:..---t-_---Il!L.l~~~::U._-----,.
,
,
2
J
184501
NAVITX+
HAVITX-
""VIRX+
,
,.. ,...
ALM/'COM
-""",.
4
5
HAVlfO(-
NAV21'X
, -"""'-
2
SYSALM+
8 NAV2TX- 4 SYSALM-
1
8
NAV2RX+
NAV2RX-
•
8
PWRAl.V'
PWRAl.V-
,.• lOORX +
LOGRX-
1
8
_MO('
AffPMCK-
11 ALMTX+ • S'YfirACK+
"
13
ALMlX-
.....RX.
ie
11 _CO<.
SYSACK-
_CO<-
14 ALMRX- 12
15
"
17
ARPATX+
ARPATX -
JARPATx+
.•
13
15
EXEVT·
EXEVT-
CO"""
CO_
18
19
JARPATX-
NSKTX+
"
17 COMTX
2lI
21
NSKTX -
NET-s "
19
COMDlR
COMSC
22 TET-C 2lI COMO'"
21 COURTS
~?G 22 CO'"
, 480'
ce/uv-ttvcv-e
~
SfA·
LOC ._-
J
•
•
SFA-
SFS +
SFS-
POLS 1+
GYRO
TB4111'
V
W
,J;'" .........-
ACUO/23DY I.
ACIOQIlttPI I.
r.
PULSE
'\......!... 8 PULS 1-
.--L-'1""i"iiiit
1 PutS 2+ '--1-- 2 "1Ts,
8 PULS 2-
,.
8
11
SYNC 1+
SYNC 1-
SYNC 2+
t-s- ~ r-7a-
-::::.:L:,.;. ~
SVNC2- ~c.!!!!?L
"
o
GYRO
-":1r
<
-e-
ISWINIOUT Ex:T RADAR
PM UNIT
,
,."", ,..""RBYO ANT
TB4101
I SCANNER NKE-1089 NJU-64
, 'lOIN 1
WIN IE
,
I
RBVoe
YO.
VD-
T8104
,
·•
3 eTIV3
~, .. ~
3 TRiCIN 1
TRJaJNIE EllY 3E
TRlG'Io
TRfG-
". ~1.!!L
~
(
5 SVO I
5 BPIN I
:" LVR
:;:=rr
VI
1
_'E
BZlN 1
•
1
SVD 1E
EllY 1
BP-
BP-
R
W,
+1tV
:ty
••
B2-
••
WHT~
BZINIE
MTRIH t-
ETIY 1£
EX¢A 1
BZ-
1
~ r, ~
10 MTRlN 1- 10 EX.A IE
,
3
~ !
~
11 MTRIN IE 11 EX¢B 1
~ ,~
PWRIH 1+ 12 EXtjlB 1£
±
12
.. ..
13 EX¢Z, 2
O.8/~~XTE--" ='T,J,!
13 PWRIH IE
pWROUT 1 EX¢Z 1£ BLU
15 PWRQUT IE 15 SVD2 (OPTION) ::_ I ..ll, I;::
,~._~=.
m_,_"
-n waul 1 ~ni: "
~~
SVO 2E
~
" voout IE
-L :: envz R POWER J.:
I "'Ul I ,----
" .'
~.' IIr
EllY 2E
-,·_.'
rRiGOUT1
.."" .
__ ••• ""- l':AY
19 EX¢A2 u
TRfGOUT IE
I ' -.-
~ ~;ii ~
1B 303 1
-i r:- __ ___
NQA-4172AISVF 21
SPOUT I
SPOUT IE WH1._. 21
EX4lA 2£
EX¢B2 V ,
n _,,,
.;.
"
/' r-t-tr-r-t L. Alii
III -L.. 22 PMS

I EX41B2:E
35'
_... ,j
.....£50VTTTYCH TBI 22 BZOUT1 (He) 3
/\IS - :. ... I Roo+ I 23 BZOUTIE ~ ,.
23 EX4lZ 2
r~' IH
EX\IlZ2E TBJ02
~ I
..
25 IllY I
~ '
3 GND3 :z5 MTROUT t-
I I IllYE ~g
lD
.
4 1"03+ 21 MTORUTIE V ,
g 1 5 TD3-1
21 EX¢~
EX.BIN
W 3
i~
a. 1· GND31
29 EX¢ZEN -- ~!
oo
".. '4"1
311 EX¢INGNO
:::l
-_.- -,-
L. H-,•• 51,OOO6 RADAR SIGNAL
HL!
~x _ I
*I
:::l
III T. E""IS OIl ill -
~iNy-TTYCS""
~ ARPADATA
0' Al...'RMMONITORl«}
T
:::l SYSTEM ... ~i:; I 06/1kV PVCY&-1.5
:, r
o
iii'
s r- I ,I
T84501
NAV1TX+ ALM/COM
TB4601
,,
I
T8204
~ l~
NAV1TX-
.-p:j=j'""'
3 3 NAV1RX+
,
I ARPAAL.M+
ARPAALM -
r.gy
Vir I~:
NAV1RX- vo-
~ NAV2TX
NAV2TX-
,
3 SYSAL.M+
SYSALM- POWER
SJ ~1 NAV2RX+ 5 PWRALM- CBD-18SI
tI::h
•
Q.
~
.~.
~.
NAV2RX-
LooRX+ 1
••
PWRALM-
ARPMCK+
r-m-
~
~ ~:
r
• ___ 10 ARPAACK-
lOORX-
~ 11 ALMTX- SYSACK+
"C
III
12
13
ALMTX -
ALMRX+
10
11
SYSACK-
PWRACK- ~ 1=
c... PWRACK -
3: "15 ALMRX-
"
13 eXEVT+
~
ARPATX+
> ARPATX-
"
EXEVT-
l8 "
11 JARPATX+ 15 COMOD
COMRX
!'>
to>
CONViINQ DI5PL1ll -:!::2!iOV-TTYCS:1
- ".. JARPATX
;.~t<.TX+
"
11 COM'" 1B'"
....I t"]" \..
~
'" NSKTX -
" COMDTR
COMSG
vro
--u-,
<, 21 NET-5
" YO
<0 22 TET-e
'" COMDSR
~
~
21 COMRTS
LOG 22 COMRI
,.4801 Vi
lil Wi
III , I SFA+
~
SFA-
~
, 3 5FS+
C
BLU
~
:::l ,
I
S
SFS-
PULS 1+
GYRO
TB4701
Q.
5' m • 1
PULS I-
PULS 2+ , I l/Rl
2151
TRANSMITTER-RECIVER
•• , ,
(Jq PULS 2- 3 3/52 UNIT
~III ~=~
SYNC 1+
10
"
SYNC 1-
SYNC 2+
•
5
153
5/R2
(NC)
v M~~ £-
T ~~(~3¢
NTG-3028
>
o " SYNC 2- W
"'~V-MPYCYJ- .,
!'>
-ft},. ~
~
!'>
to>
0'}
VI'
~
to>
'S- DISPLAY UNIT NCD-4263
PM UNIT
ISW IN/our
TB4201
EXT RADAR
",..., ANT SCANNER NKE-l089 NJU-64
, VO."
, "'VO
TlMIOf
vo-
-,
2 VDIN IE 2 ...VIlE
3 TRlGlNl 3 ET1V 3 vo-
v., ~
TI
qQ' ,• TRlGtlIE •s ET1V :IE
SVOI
TAIG-
"'
...!::..!....-
7
• BPIIIE
Oll"
•7
SVD'E
ET1V , n~
f-:;;v
•
••
·" co
BZWIE ET1V 'E
MTfUN'" EX¢A 1 OZE
10 EX\t!A IE 3
10 MTRlN 1-
~
"
12 -,-
MTRlN1E
12
EX</.lB 1
EX4lB 1E II
.A
E
.." """'E
" EXcj>Z 1
EX¢Z IE ." ~
2
...2!....-
rr:. """
PWAOUTI
SVD2 '4 BW
" PWROUT 'E
VDOOT I SVD2E
"
17 VDCRrr IE I~
.....
17 ETlY 2 (OPT1<JH)
18 TRfOOOT I
".. ETlY 2E
EX\tlA2
OlllkV-DPYCYS-15
HEATE~ POYlIER
~
TRIGOUTIE
"
OJ BPOOT I I~_-
OJ EX!bA2E AC1OUV1.
NQA--4172AlSlIF 21 SPOUT IE 21 EXltl8 Z f1.Jllll.
v roH::OfES COIIIPlEX CABlE
250VfTrYCs:.- ;;,--1
I
22 BZOUl I .0. 22
23
EX.S 2E
EX'Zl
~
,c-- H-28951100$6 (JRC SUPPLY)
f±m'
AlS -_.. 1+ 1 R03+ 23 BZOuT IE
: ,. T03ll2
I!dr
~, l"~: :~;
24 MTROUT 1+ 24 EX.Z2E
zs MTROUT I 25 l11Y
I
• TO,. I
'TO>-I
MTQRUT IE
." ITlYE
EX.'"
V
W
2
•
.,"a
EX• •
~ 6 GND31
. .j2EN
EX.1IGtIJ
H-2895110006 RADAR SIGNAL
To feOIS ~ 25OV-TTYCH
_NJATA
ALARMMONITORING
SYSTEM ce/nv-oevcvs-t
be
TB4501
I NAVlTX ... ALM/COM
2
a
NAV1TX-
NAV1RX+
, TO""
AAPAALM+
=r.t' TO""
I~~
•, ,
2 ARPMLM-
~~
NAV1RX- I L...~
NAV2TX SYSALM+
7
• NAV2TX-
NAV2R)(+
,• ST..... -
PWRAlM- 3
TRlQ-
BP+
e NAV2R}(- • PWRAlM- UP -/BZ-
,.• LOGRX+
L.OGRX
7
•
ARPAAQ<+
ARPMCK-
"12 ALMTX+
AlMTX-
,.• 5YSACK·
SYSACI(-
n ALMRX+
12 """""'-
" """""'-
" AlMRX -
ARF'ATX·
" EXEVT-
" "
EXEVT-
"
17
ARPATX-
JARPATX.. 15 CO"""
co_
CONINlNGDISP~
AV-~~F:!IllOl;:i..."",_"':14t~gfd
lO NSKTX+
I. JARPATX-
"
17 CONTX
_T8203
+12V ORO --_. T8102
OJ NSKTX- 18 ue
COIoISQ co
21 NET-5
" COMIl5A • ZE
v•
22 TET-<:
"
21 COM.... • Z
oA
w•
u, ~
';~, " CO'" VI
, SfA-
E
00
WI ~
,
2 SfA-
SFS+
,• SFS-
PULS 1+
GYRO
m4101
•
7
PULS 1-
PUlS 2+
.r--!--- "T 'Iiiii""
~~~
TRANSMITTER-RECIVER
•,.• PULS2-
S'INC ,+ ~t± 3/S2
~.!.. /ss
UNIT
SYNC1-
r-"-~~ MAJNPO~
NTG-3028
11 SYNC2+
12 SYNCZ-
...!...~ AC220V/23QV 1t/J
AC100VI I 101/ 14J

PM UNIT
'SW",;OUT .XTRADAR SCANNER NKE-l089
TE420' TE"" ANT NJU-64
I WIN 1 1 RaW
~
184101
I--A-l-..
~ " (lL~
2 WIN IE 2 RENDE VO + I
~
:I TRiGINl 3 ETJY] VD- 2 YJ'I,....!!!..!.2L.
G...z...
4 ~ " ~n ~
<4 TRlalN IE <4 ET1Y3f TRIG + 3 Ul I B'"
:5
6
1
SPIN I
BP,.tE
8ZIN 1
5
8
7
SVOl
SVOIE
ETJV1
TRI(i-
sp...
BP _
5 ~
6.-J
OR
WIfT
V l ; '
Wl
+12\1
r
Y.
BLK ~
....
E
8
9
BZlN1E
WTRlN1+
B
9
E1lY1E
EX!bA I
BZ+
ez
7 ~
8 3
~
~
r
j
.L..~
~
10 MTRlN 1- 10 EXIII'" IE MTR+ 9 1 4JZ :
-l*!1l' ~:
~ Ull':~
11 MTRIN IE 11 EX¢B 1 MTR- to
12
13
PWRiN1+
PWRltIIE
12
13
EXtbB IE
Ex41Z 1
MTRE
(NO)
11
12
J " 2
L....P.!..- ...J
~V '11~
r I:::;' (
"T1 14 PWROtJT I 14 EX;Z IE 13 RfD
~ :: ~:: liE RFn.~:: SS::E +48VG 14 BLU (OPTION) '---"-"---"-"-1~~~

.., 11
18
VDOUT IE
TRiGOUT I
.-. 11
18
ETIY2
ETlV2£
O.6/lkV-DPYCYS-l,5
HEATER POWER ••••
Itt
,....II!.2L. GRY : •• : ~
18104 I
I
-I
CD : T:OO::;,'. : ::::~ TB,.. L... AC'OOV'¢ --~ "' - '-+- BLU ~~"""' D' J
3 ~~-••.~ 001' 7;-----'" ~ ~
s
~ _._.
r.------
NQA-4172AISVF
2SOVjTT'1'CH
... I
I TBI
Roo+ I
21
22
23
SPOUT IE
mOUl t
BZ0UT1E
ri .---
21
22
23
EX¢B2
EX¢B 2E
EX¢Z2
2
!
2
3
TIT --"--
-
_
RED
4
r-
PMS
E
TXl'
~
"'0'-1
LK
.WLlT
1
r;
!~
···.!'l !l:'J.:.
= r---:m--
Al5
lD I -
~
2 R03- 24 MTROUT 1+ 24 EX¢12E
1
g d1t
I=~n ~
3 GND3 I 25 MTROUT 1- 25 rrrr : 0
a- I
I • T03+ I
I
26 MTORUT1E 26 mve u 4~ ~
~ ~
5 T03- 27 EX¢AJN V
oo I
....
6
_
GND3 I 2&
29
EXrPBIN
EX41ZEN
I w r- 14-GORES COMPLEX CABLE
H
2
::tI In
--=.:........:
~ ~
L....--.....I
30 EX¢INGND POWER -2895110058 (JRC SUPPLY)
""a.
CD :::_
_._.. 250V-TTYCS-4 H-269511000& RADAR SIGNAL CBO-1M1 .:S ~ ! I..--....., J
To ECOIS
o
I~
o"
:>
=
ARPADATA
'"""'~~~~, :b'------------------------....
~.
ALARM MONITORl\l'
SYSTEM
=rJr
-.r.' m.ll1 1 : _., .
-;-~:r-~----:=~---+----.
3
g, OGPS -
....:'l5QV-TTYC5-t
"'
__
3
4
1
2
HAVill(·
NAVITX-
NAV,RJ(-
NAVIRX
~'
--, 2
AlM/COM
TB4801
ARPAALM'
ARPAALM-
......
~ _...
.rrr
1
'---'---tt"L- YO'
-L..._VO-
_Te201 ~
....g....::r-
~
..... r.gy
r*" ~~ F~L~""R=~~~
10"
iiP
Q. _
5
8
NAV21X
NAV2TX-
3
4
SYSALM+
SYSALM- 3 ~_TRIG- ~
....III "1t
T~ ~·;BZ- ~
__ 7 NAV2RX+ 5 PWRALM+ BP+ E
ECHOSQUH[EII "'------. NAV'RJ(- • PWRALM- 4 4
~ ...r~-, I ~ 9 lOGRX+ 1 ARPMCK+ ~ L-

BZ
~
~
+
al :=':.. . . . .,-.. TV... "'-l I L--.. 10 LoaRX _ 8 ARPAACK- MTR... f---:.:::--
I-:.-'\.
~
~ ~
OLOG
11 AIJHX' • SVSA"'" MTR- MPS
c, TIT 12 ALMTX- 10 SYSACK-
:ii: 13 ALMRX + 11 PWRACK'"
..,~
14 ALMRX 12 PWAACK-
N
~:: =:;~:
" - - - - - 11 JARPATX +
::
15
~::~:
COMeO
....
I
CONINlNGDlSP
..A'J.. :'1o;tl\/_TTV,.e:- \.....- 18
19
JARPATX _
NSKTX+
16
17
COMRX
COMTX ~ T8203ORG YI:I T8202
;0 20 NSKTX_ 18 COMDTR """"(i""""" ~ U0
-;iE
r '.
~
2.\ NET S 19 COMSCl VO
TEl" -e
ffi3 __ tr ~ ~
22 20 COMDSR t/>z 3.../ WO
u,
c: ~~v~'==J=~~1
" COMRTS
~-_. ~
-r'B:1 22 COMRI O.6/1kV-TPYCY-il E
,...CD
A
<n , SFA' ¢B U-./ W'

2. SF" _ ~ l1T IrI.AJN POYlER RED +48V
M-
o 3 SFS'" ACZ2OV/230V 34> ~i +48VG
"C
nA'l~"-.nn",,,v"'_1 p~~:~+ :4~~
~CD
LOC ::__ : L-.-
r
PULSE PULS'- ""'""i!ii1 TRANSMITTER-REClVER
(~t--;-~
»
o •
7 PULS2+
PUL"- v::::>:=I-T* UNIT
~7~
N ,.
9 SYNC 1+
SYNC ,_ ~7~ NTG-3028
~
<,
11
12
SYNC2+
SYNC 2-
~~
L.;...l.....:.:..:::.
C4
N.., GYRO
__ 250V-MPYCYS-l
0')
~
.., =pr ~
-e-
DISPLAY UNIT NCD-
4263T
PM UNIT
exT_
ISWlN/OUT
TB420' TIl44D'
SCANNER NKE-1089 NJU-64
...W ANr
WIN'
TlMI01
,,, ~>
WIN IE
-,
"'VIlE
TRlGlHl , ET1Y' YD- ...
~
TBl03
(
"
qii"
TRJOIN IE
BPIN,
•
S
eTIY3e
5'101
YD-
TIIQ-
..g.!.....
V1
V
All. -~
lVll
BPIN Ie 8 SVD IE TIlIQ-
• EjA "'"
~
~ BZIl' 7 Em 1 lIP- 5 nAG
--I BllM IE 8 EllV'1E IIP-

• A4 WHT
C2
11l
33"
9
10
MTRlNI.
VTRlN I-
9
10
EX¢A 1
EX41AIE
82-
82- ,
7
3
~ze
~z
II
12
VTRlN IE
PNRIN 1+
11
12
EX,pB 1
EX,pB 1E
UlR-
lllR-
•
,o~
I
~.
E
!!!.. 13 PWRJN 1E 13 fX¢Z 1 lITlE 11 2
OJ I" EX¢Z IE (NO) 12
~
14 PWROUT I
=,
III
a
15
U5
PWROOT 1£
"oOOT 1
IS
16
SVD 2
SVD 2E
_4BV
..."" ,." ~
O
o
17
18
VOOUT IE
TRJOOUT I .....
J7
18
E11't'2
ETIV'2E TB.104
(OPTION)
o.O/IkV'-DPYCYS-l.5
X"
, ,'
::l 19 TRiGOlIT IE 19 fXlPA2
--If--;~~---.,.....--{=1J'''''
o0f,lr
::l ex." HEATER POWER
HIE
2D BPOUT I
w~. 20 2E , 2 ACl00Y1. OW
11l HQA-4172 AIS VF 21 EXll82
g. 21 BPOUT IE RFn
0"
::l
~50VfTTYCS-4- ;1- -I 22
23
24
IllOUT'
BlOUT If
MTROUT 1+
D'. ':"
T .. 24 EX_Z 2E :t.
.
o 2~ MTROUT 1- .. ITIY al,
=0
iii" m MTORUT 1E ,. mve PR
~ 27 EX4rAIN U BLK
3
28
29
EXIIl_
EXIIlZEN
...-.
CBD-IIIII ~i
14~ORES COMPLEX CABLE
~~
~ 30 EXIIlI\IQND H-209511005e (JRC SlPPLY)
6P ~~I;;
a. To EColS :::-1 250'1- TTYCS-4
'f
01
'rooo-o~.
."
~
ALARM MONITORINC
SYSTEM
1.-,i,.
§i=;-
.....
ARPADATA
+-__ ..lOl!..'a"w...,'-~Il!P':x.·-~v·-:!"L ~
"0d,- ,1
t.. 1
"C
11l TB4501
NAVITX• ---
_or,},-"
L
;s:: v -r r- _, """';+-""""","'--l
NAVITX-
,
»I
co
co
r1- "-1--;4:~
~
NAVIR}(+
NAVIRX-
NAV2TX
NAV2TX-
l,,:
3
•
SY$AlM+
SYSAUI-
•
" 't... ~
YO
""
eN
....I
---- 'S'.. ,-........ -1
NAV2RX+
NAV2RX-
•
•
-.ul-
-.ul-
TRlC-
BP:-"
8P -/8Z-
7 ARPMa<.
"- LOGRX+ 82-
co LOGRX-
B AJlIJMrJ(.-
~
~ ALMTX+
ALMTX-
9
10
SYSACK+
SYSACK- ~
II ~CK+ ~
ALMRX+
AL.MRX- 12 PWRACK-
ARPATX+ 13 EXEVT+
ARPATX - 14 EXEVT-
JARPATX+ IS COMa)
JARPATX 16 COMRX
17 COMTX TB202
NSKTX+
NSKTX- 18 COMOTR v" UO
NeT-S .. COMSG VO
TeT-e :BJ COMIlSR WO
2l COMRTS vo,
U'
" CO... 0.6/1kY-TPYCY~ V,
Sf.-
SFA-
W,
MAlN POWER
SFS+
sse- GYRO ACZ'lfNIUlN ' .
T84701 BATTeRY AClOOV/lIQY I .
PlA.S 1+
TB
PULS 1- TRANSMITTER-RECIVER
PULS2+
Pul':>-
SYNC1.
EB UNIT
SYNC 1- NTG-3028
SYNC2·
SYNC 2-

SCANNER
ISW IN/OllT EXT RADAR
ANT
PM UNIT
184201
,
184401
NKE-l087
, ,
T84101
NJU-64
, YO.,'
VOIN 1E
RBYO
RBVDE YD' ,~
3 TRlGlN 1 3
4
ETIY 3
ETIY3E
YO-
TRlG+ ~~~ T810_
TB'04
,,
4 TRlGlN1£
TRIG- 4
5
•
BPINI
BPINIE
,
5 SYO,
SVD IE BP'
,
5 ~
0
¥.
1
2
BP'
BP - ,(
PTl
PTE
,
7 ellM 1
,
7 ETIY 1 BP-
7
~
• 3 B' • (
RI"
REO
3
•
LVR
i~
BZIN IE ETJYIE B" PMS
~
4 BZ- BLK
• • BZ-
:~
EX¢A I 5 E
"TI
I!'i'
10
11
MoTRlN 1+
MTRlN 1-
MTRlN IE
'0
11
12
EX¢A IE
EX¢B I
EX4lB IE
MfR+
MTR-
MTRE
10
11
~
WHT
't.. ,
1
5 TRIG +
TRIG-
MTR+ r,
w.;r:--
L: no
TXE
-
PWRIN1+
"
13 PW~lE 13 EX¢Z 1 (Ne)
"13~ 't..'
MfR- I
l~
MIRE
1 n
U1
" PWROUT\
PWROUTIE (1:"
15
EX¢Z 1£
SVD2
'49V
+4BVG 14~ (OPTION)
oB/lkV-()P)'CY5-I.S ~
YO,
vo- -liitL§
yp:
""
11
;l WOOl I 14 SV02E .-. ~
35' n VDaUl IE ~'7 ETIY2
HEATERPOWER
AClOOV'''' ···dr "'== I---!!- .'~
'l J'
,." ~
-' ·-,.
14 ETIY2E
TRfGOUT1
1.
!!!. . TRIGOUTIE EX¢A2
TB303
I----'=-
lI.:
I
2
PTl
PTE
~E ~
BPOUT 1 EX¢A 2£ BLI1't.
~
III r.: _NQA-4172 AISVF EX¢B2 3 LVR
o 21 SPOUT IE
V 2 "-<:oRES COMPLEX CABI RFn 4 PMS
_ 5Dv,TTYc;...- ';;1- -I 22 BZOUT I EX¢B 2£
t-. --,;;-;;-
~23
01 --... H-2695110056 ..
a. AJS ... 1+ 1 RD3+ I 23 azour IE EX¢Z2 (NC) 3
,c'" JRC SUPPLY)

--j"dr'
I~
~
\. WHT--- ,s E
or: TXI
r~'
24 EX¢Z 2E 18102
o ~ 3 GND3 I 25 MTROUT 1- 25 mv TB303
,._, RED ~
~ 1 TXE
3 I 4 11>3+ I 211 MTORUT 1E

" mVE " ,...,.",.,
., ~
~
--!..- a
CD I 5 T03- I 27 EX41AlN
r--v ~"' L..-.
~ I
---- ".," EX¢BIN W 3_1 vo,
",
~
'GNOOI
EX¢ZEN V,
"--
0'
:J
o
_
_..
1+-2&95110008 RADAR SIGNAL
EX¢INGND
TB30' .j=F-',. L.-!!..!...-
~i
To ECOIS
iii' 250Y-TTYCS...-
ARPADATA v
~ t:~
2 GRN :
0
ALARM MONITORH::;
., W 3 :
'I·v~.v
.:,,,
1
SYSTEM
~ ."d,-
r.~,,-._., ,,
184501
NAvlTX +
6ll ALM/COM
~
NAVITX - TB460'
Q.
OOPS 3 HAV1RX ..- ~ I ARPAALM+
01
x.;
F
2 ARPAALM-
:" 4 NAV1RX -
3 SYSALM+
,
s HAV2iX
i
c....
ECHO saUNCEI
_':""''''.'7"TV''''''_T
!;# ~,
1
NAV2TX -
NAV2RX+
NAV2RX-
4
,
5
SYSALM-
PWRALM+
PWRALM-
POWER
CBO-1661
I.c:= ~
LOGRX+
,
1 ARPMCK+
~I or.oc .•="AV.T~"'.' LOGRX- ARPAACK-
r
9 SYSACK+
11 AlMTX+
CD AU<TX- I. 5YSACK -
CD
N
N
"
13 ALMRX+
ALMRX-
11
12
PWRACK+
PWRACK-
I ~:: ARPATX+ 13 EXEVT+
~ 16 ARPATX- •• EXEvT-
.."
'=== ..
.
CD .JARPATX... CaMeD
~
17 JARPATX-
CO_
.
~
CONININGDISPI
.
19 NSKTX+
,
1) COMTX
COM01R
..
NSKTX-
r
19 caMSO
NET-S
::;:; "
22 TET-C COMOSR
~
21 COMRTS
~~1
22 COMRI
·
:J
Q. SFA·
5' 2 SFAp
IJQ
3 SF'S+
, ,•
~ LOG ...... O.6/1kV-npYCYS-I.5
SFS- GYRO
ffi=3 ,c._-
'C 1 5 PUlS 1+ T84701
CD PULSE ._~
r~_",.,
~
PULS 1-
»
o 1 PULS 2+
2 2/S1
2/51 = O':"V-TP'fCH
POLS 2-
3iS2 ~
N SYNC1+ /53
~ SYNC 1- MAINPOWER
10
~
~
SYNC 2+ (NC) AC22OV/23OV 31/>
SYNC2-
N "
~
(0)
w
s. 0')
CD

SCANNER
PM UNIT
ISWIN/OUT EXT RADAR
ANT NKE-1087 NJU-64
T8"101
re"2Q1 TB4401 ~'
vom I
VDIN lE
TRlGlN 1
ROva
ReVDE
ETIV 3
TBl01
1
TB104
PTI
• .~
0 ...~
BP.
TRiGIN IE
BPIN I
Em3E
SVDl
1
2 BP- ( 2 PTE
..-2
~
3 LVR
IlPIH 1£ SVD lE
't.
3
••
BZ.
82- If'
RE1l
~~ • PMS c;
--... •,•
BZIl' ETlY, E
2
ETIVIE TRIG + r
BllH 'E
MTRrN1.. EX(lA I n~'t. ,• TRlG-
r TXI
TXE
HI
"
12
MTRIN 1-
IIfTRIH IE
PWRJN 1+
10
11
12
EX/pA lE
EX.B I
EXI6B IE
. ,.•
I
Mm·
MTR-
MTRE ·!~
1
..
~~
13 EXrpZ I VD·
13 PWRIN IE
(~ 11 VD-
--c=~
14 PWROUT I EX/fll fE CllllkV-()P(CYS-15 ___ a
15
16
PWROtITIE
VDOUT I "
16
SV02
sva 2E
HEATER POWER
ACIOUVI~
---dr , JI
·• -=.... •
17 VDOUT lE El1Y 2 lJTl1-
PTJ
ETlY2E r---='-"-
~
18 TRJGOUT I
f---;- l... .", 2 PTE
19
:m
TRiGOUT IE
BPCMJT ,
EM'A!
EX16 A 2E V 2..ll1ii '<-CORES COMPLEX CABI i MeN'·
I.: 3
....
LVR
NOA-4172 AISI/F
;1- -1
21 BPCMJT IE
rsrm ..
g'-
H-2695110058 a_aa
-f,J;' I ::~V-, ',,'" ~

• E
2SOVfTTYCS....-
"'-I:::~ ~ i §!
2'1
23
8100T I
BZCMJT IE
,
7113112
(JRC SUPPLY)
- :.-. ~
re,..
I~
..........!...-
I- ,
I
•
TXI
TXE
EBB ~"
24 MTROUT I"
A'S 25 IIfTROtITI- I11Y V 2
ITIYE ~, l-.
....
l!Il MTORUT lE W ,
EX.... u
I 'TD3- I
~_~ ~ND3 1 t---.:!----
'---
30
To ECDIS ~- H-269SI10008
RADAR SIGNAl..
250V-TT'tCS--4
ARPADATA
ALARM MONITORING
SYSTEM
• 1~\/--nDv/"_"<:-1
, T84501
NAV1TX .. ALM/COM
2 NAVITX- TB48O'
a NAV1RX+
•5
NAVIRX-
NAVID
....MUol-
,• NAV2TX-
NAV2RX ..
• NAV2RX- PWRAUoI-
I.• LOGRX"
LOGRX-
....Ma<.
NfPMC1/(.-
11
12
ALMTX·
ALMTX- I. SYSACK·
SYSA,Q(-
..
13
15
ALMRX+
ALMRX-
Al'lPATX ..
12
13
PWRAOK-
EX£VT·
14 EXEVT-
,."
Al'lPATX -
17 JARPATX+ 15 COMCO
JARPATX - 11
.," NSKTX+ 11
16
COIITX
COMD1R
..
NSKTX-
NET S 19 COMSQ
"
22 lET-<:
21
COMDSR
COMRrS
LOG 22
, ~~,
SFA"
,2 SFA-
SFS+
O.8/IW-TPY'CY-f
•
5
SFS-
PULS I.
eVRO
1'8..101
•
T
PULS I-
PULSZ-
1/'"
2/51
• PULS2-
'/52
~2fN/Z3lJV I~
.• SYNC 1+
SYNC 1-
SYNC 2->
1S3
./At
(NC)
AClOOV'/llOV 1~
12 SYNC 2--
o
<

ISWIN/OUT EXTRADAR
TB4201 TB4401
,
,1 VOIN1
, RBVD
ANT
, VDtllE
TRJQINI 3
RBVDE
ETlY a TB4\01 SCANNER
PM UNIT
•
•• ,
TR!GIN IE ETIY 3E VD· 1
BPIN 1 5 SVD I VD- NKE-1087 NJU-64
•
1
BPtllE
BllN'
,• 5VD IE
ETlY I
TRIG +
TRJG-
3
•
•
,.,
0 BZINIE 0 ETIYIE BP. TEI04
MlRJN I'" • EXt!JAI BP- 0
T8101
pn
II
MTRJH1-
MlAlN IE
10
11
EX$A IE
EX!/>B1
82-
BZ- ,,
7 BP·
BP-
(
I
BLII If.: ; PTE
LVR
12 PWRIN 11- 12 EX~B IE MTR+ BZ: REO :
.,., ez: ~
PMS
ljii'
..
13
15
PWRlNIE
PWROUT 1
PWROUT1£ rt ::
13 EX¢Z 1
EX$Z IE
SVD'
MfR-
MTRE
(NC)
io
11 TRIG+
'TRiG=' r WHT-··
"L,
•
• m
TXE
E
.... "
17
VDOUll
vDOUT IE ~"
~.~: 17
SVD2E
E1JY'
·48V
+48VG ..
"
13
RED
BLU
i:tTR7 I
I
-i
...
"
TRiGOUT\ ~ "
.
E1JY2E
EX41A2
ir±
r"' -'·-,.
CD TRiaOUT IE 19
r l,11.....-
3S' SPOUT I
won•••
EX¢A 2f
_..2===:::;~_-1
ru 11!~I-I--------11
NQ"....172 AISVF
-I
21 SPOUT IE 21 EXI/JB2
EX,p,82E
TE304
, ._-~
TlI105
v J.
~
2SOVfTTYCs:,.- ;;.- 22 BlOOr I 10.. 22
,,
fill] Qi-- ,,
I
AI, - :.. lK + I ~ ~:
EX¢Z2
Utii
OJ
g
1
3
R03+
GND3 I
23
25
ezour IE
MTROVT 1- 25
EX,pZ 2£
ITlY
a 3
, l..
ll..;
A
en
PTE
3 LVR
-e I I 21 mYE
c.
I
4
5
T03+
Too-I
21 MTORUT 1E
27 EX¢A1N
-U-
14-GORES COMPL£X CPilLE
H-21195110056(JRC SUPPLY)
MCNT+
MCNT'= ~ BLl< •• PMS
E
~
:>
I 0 GN03 1
28
29
EX4JBIN
EX¢ZEN v _•.~ I'---JlUL-I TB102
M +24V 1
M"':24VGl
.... - WHT--
,,• TXl
~ ~ --,- I- TXE
:::l
CD __ - - - - :'''5110000 RADARSIGNAL
30 EX¢INGND ...E- -48V
+48VG
POWER
o
!:!", ---
-_.
CSO-IMI
so ToECD 25OV-TlYCs-4
ARPADATA
U'
iii'
ALARMMONITO
sYSTEM
IG
~
I!7r
---- 0, , no_ -I'
VI
WI
~
3
S.
Idr ,
1
T84501
NAVIT)(+
NAV1TX-
"""\
_.
'== ~
_ _TTV,",C'_
DCP ARPMLM+
~:
N"VIRX ...
F
ARPAALM-
&J •
NAV1RX.-
a SVSALM+
.I.•
NAV2TX
c.
III _=." ,_,~r.~
0 NAV2TX- •• 5Y5ALM-
."'
r;},- 7 NAV2RX+ PWRALM +
ECHO SOUNDEI'R '---- • PWRALM-
~
NAV2R)(-
CD
__:;,WoV_TTVroc:.l - LOGRX +
LOGRX
,•
t ARPAACK +
ARPAACK-
c....
DLOG
11 AlMTX+
I. SYSACK+
SYSACK-
u,r
12 ALMTX -
~
11 PWRACK +
,.
13 ALMRX+
ALMRX- 12 PWRACK-
CD
CD
15
"
ARPATX+
.
13 EXEVT+
EXEVT-
""""I '--
17
"
ARPATX-
JARPATX +
JARPATX-
,.
15 COMeO
coeex
'" '--
:
CONININa DIS 17 COM'lX
"-
CD --;# '----
NSKTX +
NSKTX-
"" COMDTR
~
~
21
22
NET-5
TET-<: .. COMSO
COMDSR
COMRTS
CD
(/l
LOG
!B4801
"
22 CO...
;J<"
~
SFA+
'S'fA':
SFS +
§33,c::: 0.8/1kV-TP't'CV-t
MAIN POWER
AC220V/23OV 3t/J
SFS- GYRO
~ PULSi+ TB470\
"0
CD 'PUli"i=' ----vR1
)- 'PUlS'2= 2/S1
o PULS2-
SYNC 1+
iiS2
"""" ~ SYNC 1-
/53
5/02
~
<,
11
12
~
SYNC 2-
<NCr
""
C..:l
~
C..:l
'S-
~
~
~
ISW IN/OUT EXTRA.~
1B42Dl
, "440' ANT
, TB4101 SCANNER
,I VDIN I RaW
PM UNIT CJ.'
VDIN 1E RBVDE W,
,
I~ t-!--. NKE-l087 _..1
·•,
3 TRlGlN I 3 ETIY3 I-
VD-
NJU-64
TRlCIN IE
•s ETIY:IE TRlG+ 3
r..::J
S BPIN I
BPlrllE •,
SW I
SVD IE
TRlG-
01'·
•s I-
TB'04
ETIY, TBI01
IIZINI BP-
,~
0
, ,
•• """., ,r
8 ETIY IE 3 I PTI
"""",.
SZ)N IE
I.
0 EX.Al
BZ·
BZ- 8 , Bp.
op. AIU
3
PTE
LVA
10 EX'A IE
"'R' 0 --'- 3 BZ'
I' RED
•
,• r-
11 ....... IE 11 EX.SI ","- ro PMS
BZ- AU<
EX.S IE U" 2 S E
" PWRIN 1+
" "'RE 11 TRlQ+ r
•
.... ,
0 ••
r,,
13 _'E 13 EX.Z 1 (NO) 'XI
8 TRlQ-
"13~ n~
..
14 EX¢JZ 1E TICE
"
IS
PWROU'\
IS SYD,
"'V
WHTII
7 MTR.
PWROUT IE
(.>n••
l :_ SVD 2f
+48\1G
... ,.•
0 MTR-
:~
VDOUT I 18 MTRE
"
17 VDOUT 1E 17 ETIY,
,.304 I
~l:'ll~
VD'
18 TRiGOUT 1
..
18 ETIY2E
,,
(0I'7Q0
.
~
11 VD-
r
EX_A2 o 8/1kV-oPYCYS-U ~
"
OJ
TRIGOUT IE
SPOUT I 1'""'-. _ OJ EX_A 2E HEATEAPO
AC101P11l~ ~~
21 SPOUT IE 21 EX B'
3 3
~ ,, J8
ru-_~J]-; 1 r---!!!!!--
NQA-4112. AIS VF EX.S 2E 1 PTI
50VrTYcS-4- ;1- - I "
Zl
BZ0U7 I
BZooT tE
I A'L "
Zl EX4lZ2 r----;------ :.. .,,, ,• p7E
r~:=:
L:..." LVR
EXtbZ 2E
~ I.:
". .
A1S MTROUT 1+ 14-GOREs COMPl£lt CABLE
0 PMS
~
I.
3+ 3 GND3 I
2S MTRQUT 1-
MToRUT IE
2S ITIY
ITIYE
EX.~
t::B"""""" H-2895110051{JRC Sl.FPlY)
..f,t,-' ,.102 ~ ~ WtfT-· •

,
0
E
TXI
~
tr
:=:
T03·1 POWER ~
II RED TICE
I 5 T03- I EX.... CSD-'MI
---.0;;-
l. 29 ..........L- I
~ -- - aND3 1
H-2695110ll06 RADAR SIOHAL

3D
EX.""
EX.INQII)
v •• I---
U
T<JECDIS :::.1 250V-TTYC5-4

V
ARPADATA I---
j!}r
_,
ALARM MOHITORNI
SYSTEM O.6/IW-oPYCYS-I.5
I;}
DCPS
pr
=,sov·TTYO.<-1
••••250V- T"""""":_I
~
,
3
•
S
I
•,
"450'
NAV1TX+
NAVITX
NAVIRX +
NAVtRX-
NAV2lX
NAV2TX-
1- 3
ALM/COM
, _MlJ'.'
I
_MlJ'..
SYSt\LM+
• ...........
SY...... -
NAV2R)(+ S
ECHO SOUNDER
r~ '---= 8 NAV2RX- •, -..u<.

DlOG
·---250V-TTYCS-1
r-- ,.• LOGRX+
LOGRX- ••
AWJMC«+
AlPMQ<-
t_
Il ALMTX ... SYSAC*.+
10 SYSACk-
"
13
ALMTX-
ALMRX+ 11 1'. ...,,"'.
PWRACK-
h-
14
15
ALMRX-
ARPATX+ "
13 EXEVT.
18 ARPATX- 14 EXEVT
CONININGDISPLA'<-
""" ." 18
JARPAT)( +
JARPATX-
NSKTX+
..
15
17
COMa>
ao_
coanx
..~ '-- OJ NSKTX- IB COM"'"
21 NET-S It aOMSQ
OJ 00MllSR
" TET-e
LOG
21 CCMRTS
1
,.4801
SFA+
" COIR
2 SFA-
3 SFS+
4 SFS- GYRO
5 PUlS 1+ T84701
6 PULS 1-
IIR1
7 PULS 2+-
2151
8 PULS 2-
3/52
9 SYNC 1+
/53
10 SYNC 1-
11
12
SYNC 2+
SYNC 2-
'''''
(NOI
DlSPLAY UNIT NCD-4263T

_._. _"~ -,,.,. ""-- .,.............. VVr""'1''Ia...,' ''1.,,-- I V I oWl
~
<- POWER UNIT (CBD-1661)
s:: UTB701 UO
:po NF 701
PB7
VO
U1fTB102
VTB7Ql
CO
CO U TB701f, _\ r~ WTB70: WO V1fTB102 S1
W V TB701~: r: =~ L
If ~
W TB701~: r: =~ f- U J701 SFA SWITCHI
~
~v 1/ I D IV":
....
....
"
0 ~
PB&. PS(POWER On/Off) J3
1<
.... L~ N:; I tj•
'---
CONTROL PWRALM TRANSMITTER-RECEIVER UNIT (NTG-3037A)
-'S- CIRCUIT PSMON
J3"
J.(
IV
IV
0
~ P+12V -? ~
1< J2 U1fTB202
W ~
~
'- +£4V
+24V
IVlf I t1<!UL
'S- ~
~Vlf I t1LUL
+3.3V On/Off l-
S
250V CNT +5V On/Off UN
a::t")
-'"9
~15\
I I
PB1 P+12V UOITB202
Uu
>-cn S
Q.N
1-++12\
DC250V P+12V J2 VOfTB202 :5W u ::J~
cn~
570r WO/TB20 a:: a:: 0
WID f--. +5V
~o-
3:U
1llD. 0
Q.
PB2 +48V
200 -0 +48V J2
>-t
"T1 INSUPUTVOLTAGE
<0'
+48V
SELECTION
....
.... PB3 +5V
It:lLU;j
'----
co DC24V TB701 +5V Jl
>-t
"U
3'
D!
J2
-< PB4 +3.3V
~~
"U
"'0(1)
(1) ....
-0
~~I
+ C")
.. +
~
+3.3V Jl
J2
AC100/110V
AC220/230V U
MONTOR
<-en
S::c
»"'0
-"2.
CO,<
~
U
I-
S
U
Z
iii
(J)
W
>-t PB5 ±12V
±12\ J1.
J2..
V ] NWZ-158
COlD
w_ a:: U
Wo 0
u~ a::1-(J)
(no ..IN
»7' o~
Q.sl:l
..Ju~
UNI NeE-7721
9. a:: «a::u
D!
!z z-o CCK-901
~ 0 S2Uu
(J)
D! U
3 a:: ,-------------1
::J
~
t;; .....
~[ ;[ ~[
ti "1~[ ~,t
i[ ~[ IlTiIi ~
Q. « >
sa. U 0 LO ("'j
>t;; > t;; ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ (J)~~~ INTER5WITCH CIRCUIT:
~
4'
+ I
+1 N (J) -'
~
+
'f("'j 'f c:;? a. ~ t a.,d:.~~
> 1 NQE-3141 I
~ eN1 +5V I I J4001 I T6410' II J4048 ,~
~
I I ~ ~ J4001 (OPTION)
_
r : •
NSKILOG IF CIRCUIT
! P~~V ~
+,. IV
MOTHER BOARD CQC-1094 CMJ-462A -+:12V >; TERMINAL BOARD CQD-1949 __________ ~J'
-
-.1
CA:)
DISPLAY UNIT (NCD-4263) SCANNER (NKE-1075A)
B101
c...
s:
POWER UNIT lCBD-1661)
UTB701 UO
. \
NFB70 PB7 M
..........
~ VTB7u1 VO UOITB102S1
!~I
co -t-
~~
co U TB701
(.,)
V TB701 ~ L WTB7Qj WO I VOITB102 I SFA WITCHI
'";r:-en
I
W TB701 r: '--- - U J701 WO/TB102 .~
........
0 ~
PBl1. PS(POWER On/OIl) J3
I~ L~ N::il .~
-s, '-
CONTROL PWRALM Ja -~
- CIRCUIT I PSMON J(
YO
rw<-
'"
'" I~
~
P+12V 1Ji I-
5 0
,~ UN
IX:M
~ +24V J2
-CO
(.,)
-e- ~
~ +24V U u U1
+3.3V On/Off
~~
w V1
250V CNT
I +5V On/Off IX: W1
I -
":70C
200 4)
DC250V
PB1 P+12V
PB2 +48V
P+12V
+48V
J2
J2
j-n15\
POWER SUPLAY 1-++12\
CBD-1682
~
INSUPUTVOLTAGE
+48V
SELECTION
TB102
1-+ +5V
PB3 +5V
DC24V TB701 +5V J1
~
J2
PB4 +3.3V
- +3.3V J1
~~J
LO •
r- AC100/110V
+M AC220/230V
U + J2 U MONTOR
:iE
o
l-
5
o
Z
iii
(/J
w
o
4 PB5 ±12V
±12\ J1.
J2.
V ] NWZ-158
a::
-co 0
u..- a::l-
[l._N
Ol
...IN
:::l0 KEBOARD UNI NCE-7721
0"-
a:: ...J
u "-
<a::t>
I-
Z z-o CCK-901
~uu
0
o (/J
a::
:::l
< > ~ >
r: - - - - - - - - - - - - - ,
1nl
> M ::;
~f 1f
[l.
I I
; ~[ ~[if
~ t~[
0 ...... N
U
~
LO
+ M
+1 > CI) I!! ii; CI) ...... ~~ I INTERSWITCH CIRCUIT I
+ LO
+ ~ If
> fI 1 ll. 8 "<t ll.~ ~ ~ : NQE-3141 I
CN1 +5\/ (OPTION) :
J4001 II J4048
____________ J
I J4001 I I..... I ,
~ ~~
I I T84,01
~P:~1l~
NSKILOG IF CIRCUIT .ev
MOTHER BOARD CQC-1094 CMJ-462A + 7V TERMINAL BOARD CQD-1949
t-'
-._. - .. _..... _- . -- __• n ..... _ . . . . . . "'_ • ___
~
<-
s: <-s: POWER UNIT (CBD-1661)
=J>» I UTB701 UO
to (0 NFB70 PB7 U1fTB102
r~~
to to VTB7Q1 VO
~
I\) U TB701r, -, WO S1
CAl WTB7Qj V1fTB102
I
(0
I
...... V TB701~~ ~~ L~
~ ......
~ W TB701~=
,- :~
'J
L-- - U J701 ""1 ITB102 SFASWtTCHI
II
~ 0
0 T~
~
PB,,- PS(POWER On/Off) J3
§ L~
......
o
I:
0
s]
CONTROL PWRALM J:t TRANSMITTER-RECEIVER UNIT (NTG-30218)
1<
CAl
$.
-S
I\)
1m P+12V
CIRCUIT PSMON
+24V
J.(
J2 U1fTB202
~
I\)
0
:$
I\)
- +:l4V IVH'CLUL
"VIIICLU~
I-
CAl +3.3V On/Off
I:
0
1
250V CNT +5VOn/Off
5
UN
D::C"l
-<0
U' >- f-.-± 15\
'S-
- PB1 P+12V UO/TB202 >-u
~~
~N f++12\
S70~r
:::><0
~ DC250V P+12V J2 VOITB202 w (/)~
0 D::
s WO/TB20 D::Q
wen f++5V
~u
.NQ~
I\)
CAl 0
0 Q.
1< PB2 +48V
200~ +48V J2
CAl
'S- INSUPUTVOLTAG f--
E +48V
SELECTION II:l:lU;j
PB3 +5V L--
"'T1 DC24V TB701 +5V J1
<is'
...... ~
I\)
...... J2
~ PB4 +3.3V
-1-<
'<-0
3'
III -
U ~~j f--
+3.3V J1
J2
AC100/110V
AC220/230V U
MONTOR
"0 0
(1) ~
<-(1)
S:.,
=J>en
i3
t:
:::>
U
z
Cii
(/)
w
4 PB5 ±12V
±12 Jt
J2.
V ] NWZ-158
(OC D:: U
(0"0 0
1\)"2- u~ [t:g:
Cf'< ...IN KEBOARD UNIT NCE-7721
o~ ...J::::>~
~~ «~c..l
D::
I- z-o CCK-901
m
Z !2uu
(O~ 0 (/)
~~
U
D::
> > .....
~
:::> -c
~ ~[ '2~[ ~[ ~[ ~[~[ ~"1 a..~~ c:f:I~
~~ r~~~;S:T~:~~~~;:
co Q. ('I)
a U 0
~
III
+ M
+ +1 > en
3 'f 1'2 'f +1 '1 <:;:' ri Q. x ~
(J)
: NQE-3141, I
9- +5V ~ I J4016 I J4001 I I J4001 II T64101 II J4048 '_ (OPTION) I
~
::0 I CN1 I : :
NSKILOG IF CIRCUIT +"."v ~ P+12~1
III
g.
;'"
MOTHER BOARD CQC-1094 CMJ-462A ±1?V
8
>; TERMINAL BOARD CQD-1949 r; -- ~~ ________ ~J
,
"
--
DISPLAY UNIT (NCD-4263) SCANNER (NKE-1087)
c...
~ , B101\
),>
co
co
N
POWER UNIT (CBD-1661l
NFB70 PB7
UTB701 UO
\'
.~
.
N , VTB7Q1 VO lJOfTB102 S1
0) U TB701r, -, rJ WTB7Q.1 WO IVOfTB102 ! SFA WITCHI I
~ T6701~: :~
V L
~ - WOfTB102
~
-"
a
W T6701~., U J701
a
:§ T"J PS(POWER On/Off)
..
PRR .13
-"
lJ
~
a
I~ - CONTROL PWRALM Ja r--~
"S-
. CIRCUIT PSMON J{ l- ~
N
r~ P+12V :5
UN
Wo
N .12
+24V -0::'"
a
:::; J ~ +24V U'
co
N ro-- >-U
:5~
w U1
a
<
I
+3.3V On/Off w V1
-" 250V CNT
I +5VOn/Off 0;:: W1
"S-
o
N
N
a
I I
DC250V
PB1 P+12V
.12
-
:::; S70r
P+12V
N
w
a
,< 1QQ ~o- -+±15\
w PB2 +48V POWER SUPLAY -++12\
.12
"S- 200 -0
INSUPUTVOLTAG
.- +48V CBD-1682
E +48V
,-++5V
SELECTION TB102
"
10· DC24V T6701
-t
PB3 +5V
+5V J1
J2
PB4 +3.3V
~Fl .- +3.3V .11
r--- AC100/11OV
-
AC220/23OV
U + '"
+ J2 U MONTOR
~
o
~
5
o
0::
i3~
z
en
rn
w
o
0
PB5 ±12V
±12\ .11.
.12.
V
0 NWZ-158
-IN 8:t:gj KEBOARD UNI NCE-7721

o~ -I::>~
0:: <(,),
~
z
0
_
zO::(,)
ClU Cl
rn
(,) 1lJ,
CCK-901
o 0::
::l
~
> ~ > , - - - - - - - - - - - --I
1n1
a. > ::;
If ti~f 1:~f if :t~f

M
.....
o
> > ~f
N
> ~~
LO
~ + M+ +1 en '" en ..... INTERSWITCH CIRCUIT
~ ~ ~ ~ ~ a. ~ ~
QO
oo:t a...t c.;:a~ : NQE-3141 I
MOTHER BOARD
I
CaC-1094
CNl I NSKlLOG IF CIRCUIT
CMJ-462A ~
+&.1
+~.;jV
±1?V
~
ll~
J4001 I
TERMINAL BOARD CQD-1949
I .14001 I T84101 II .14048
'~ Pc~~L~:T~~~ __ J
.377
S 10 1
5 __ 6 B 10 1
TB102
AC100/110V, 1
TO TB5002
t/J{ U 1 U2 BLU (T)
( .,
ON UO/vO V 1 V 2 WHT TJ o
RED (T) W1 W2
GRN (T
VEL (T) BLU (T
B L U (T) / M U 1 MU2 ( )
. . WHT T
CS IICR
250/.£ 35/.£ CBP-129
I i I I.-.J
RED
2 _' 3
TB103
RED
+ 1 2 V RED B 1 02
C2 WHT
BLK C 10 1
+ C102
rpZE 1000/.£
YEL T2200P
¢JZ 16 V rh50V
BLU
¢JA SHIELD
-
E
rpB
I "T WH T ,-,
TB104
PTJ
PTE
LVR
PMS
PERFORMANCE
E MONITOR UNIT
TXI
TXE
CABLE
ONLY COLOR: 250-HV-1 2/0. 18
COLOR (T) : 250-HV-50/0. 18
COC-764
Fig.123 Internal Connection Diagram of Scanner Unit, Type NKE-l079

- -- '\1<0
u
S 1 0 1
5 _ 6 B 10 1
TB102
U 1 U2 8 _I 9
Vl V2
Wl W2
MUl MU2
MV1 MV2
MWl MW2 CS
250/1
II CR
35/1 CBP-129
III I1 1
WHT (Tl 'i I '~.1I11 ..J
TB103 2......a. 3
+12V
C2 + B102
C10 1 C102
~ZE 1000/1 220 0 P
f/JZ
f/JA
E
SHIELD
16V
I 50 V •
~B '-
DE ICING (I
( I U
HEATER', .
V
AC100V \,.1 'I ..__.,
1'41:"''' HEATER
CCK-751
TB104
PTI
PTE
LVR
PMS
PERFORMANCE
E MONITOR UNIT
TXI
TXE
CABLE
ONLY COLOR:250-HV-12/0. 18
COLOR (T) : 250-HV-50/0. 18
CQC-764
Fig.124 Internal Connection Diagram of Scanner Unit. Type NKE-1079-D

,- -lt~mEFrtJFllT"RJm=222 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - --I
JtLNTENNA r------------------i
WI
: -~NERR~WERUNJT~~~4--------------------1 :
~
I I I : :
I
I IF AMP CIRCUIT CAE-344-4
I
I ~
I PI P2
@: :
I
I
I
J3001
IL-7P
-N~.(,nOJ-.I
J3002
IL-IOP
_NW"U1~-.lQ)(Q""
MIC
I TRHPL.
-
I
I
CDO® I
I i:o OJ i:o ~ ~ < <:: ~" G1 ~ ~ '-1 'I ~ '+ ;: I ~ .>!U J2 AlOl I
I ~Rl!!!O%~~ ~"'~~~~~~~ I I
I cnm - m I
I II I I MODULATOR UNIT NMA-534 :
I
II L_ I, A303
I r----------------------------~
I I FILTERCIRCUIT MODULATOR CIRCUIT
CHT-71 I -<
."
----~I
I I
I
CFR-161
,...I----~
CPA-209
__ "'"
Z
m
r:
;) II
ji'
:... II
II
- N w .. c.nm ....
~~~~~i§15~
= _N~""UlO)-.lCDQ?
~fA""'a~:!.~:: in
0-
....
....
6~~'+"
N ~ ..
1.SHORT
Jl
I.SHORT
J2
I.SHORT
J2104
IL-5P
H 1-1-1-1- - - - ,
N
<11
"§o II -o~~z ~ f«~nt,...~-\£
Jl110 e 0 ~ ~
J1191
2 MAGI
3.Xl
2.MAGI
3.xl
2.MAGI
3.XI
t
if b!5. Jl109
IL-G-IIP IL-4P
(1l
3
2!.
LU
T I
RED---ri
IL-G-8P
~L
4.X2
5.TI
6.TIE
4X2
5.TI
6.TIE
4X2
HI
6.TIE
;= L
.!. ~
No.2
No.1
PULSE
TRANS t
o ~=
-u -
7.+15V !O 13
s SHIELDi! ~
7.+15V 7.+15V
~
8.E 8.E D.E w
::I
('0
g.
L ~I 9NC 9.-15V 9.-15V J2101 2 ~ IXI
I.TIY 10.NC 10.NC 10.NC 350210-2 f § 2.X2
so 2.TrYE ~
3.BP 'P ~
I1.NC
12.NC
I1.TISTOP
12.NC
11.TISTOP
12.NC"
~ ~
Z
i: N
l
iii' 4.BPE ~
~ 5.BZ CD
WL 1.HMCNT - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - . :- - ----I
1':: ---------------------1
3
~
6.BZE
'"
..,"0:>- 2.+15V
~E I
lVD
C/l
g 2VDE ~ JlOO2 _ N W
Ej
L 1.+15V I.+15V
::I 3.MTR+1. N 350210-2 ~ ~ ~ I
::I T/R CONTROL CIRCUIT 2.+12V 2+12V
I
.,
('0
C
4.MTR- 'tI
CMC-1205 CD
"'L
1'::
3£
4.E
3.+8V
4.E ill L Jl001 1.M+ I I.HMCIj!LAY CIRCUIT I
2.+15V CSC-632 I
~
'tI_
::I
..,~§
5.-15V 350428-1 2.M- 3£ :
?-" "0>
..,
"'0
6.10V
5.-15V
6.10V ------------------
iz -fd 7.1OVE
8.+5V
7.lOVE
8.+5V
POWER SUPPLY
! r CZIO
A
m
i lMCT t1------tj 1.MCT
CIRCUIT
CBD-1682
I
I
;~
I
2.. CD 2.MBK Fi-----A 2.MBK ~ S: I
o..., O>L
'ti- 3.TlSTDP~ 3.HSP ~ ~ I
~
1_
<11 ~~ 4E
.., 4HTER -n I
»
~
i 5.MPS
6.MIER
5 TISTDP
6.C2 J4 J5 J3
I
I
~
~
350209-1 3502011-1 B02P-NV I
J1112 J1114 Jl105 7.E I
J8 Jll06 J1113 N -
N _
8.MPS
--
;.. N I
IL-8P IL-G-5P IL-G-9p IL-G-3P IL-G-3P IL-G-2P i;: ~ ~i:
~ :t;~~~t::~~i
.... l'.)
:U"o:U"+in
W ,Jo. (II
i i ::t
Co) ..
iT! o
(II '" :"'!»~
.+ + en Z -- ~
'+ in '"
~
- N
'+ tn 'n
W
_ N
'+ 0
9MIER > >
IT"rnl
I
I
nt < ~
rJ-
:j~~~ ~~o ~ ! ~ ~ ~~ ~;!O >
~
~
»
p :!1~ ~ < CD
,-<
~
<
Z
'm '! l'.)
r------------------ -1-------
I
~ i!il '"
:!1 '"~ I YEL.T I ......
-d::T o I
I
"'I'"
0m "....
RN T
IIIVY'
~~~ S101 .
~ ~ ~
III
~I~I~ ~ ~
en WHT
e. I ::
,
BI04 ICI!!!
-fl~~~~1..!.2----------1
I!!!ICI!!! I I RED
'ZI"
CA::
DISPLAY UNIT PM
Bl03
INNAR ANTENNA caC-l098
TB102
,
123
.
DISPLAY UNIT
4UTHU II
/ ..,:
e;.;. ..
CHT-71
,
I, Jl J2
"
l!ii' 'I
II
-"'-lI~.U1~...,Q)
b:Jtoto:....,~«·+
CJ) (J)
~N-O~~Z<
CJ) Z n' C C UI
-
~g~§
N ~ ..
l.SHORT L } - - - - [ ] 1.SHORT 1.SHORT
J2104
IL-5P
HI---+----.
2.MAGI 2.MAGI 2.MAGI
'"
'"
YEL
BLK
I
I Jll09
J1191 3.X1 3Xl 3.Xl
1l-4P
Q- - ~7
~ I IL-G-8P 4.X2 4.X2 4.X2 N02 2 PULSE
BLU
5T1 ~ ~ 5.TI ~..... 5.TI No.1 6-r- 1 TRANS I
3 WHT
~c... &.TIE
1'1' 'I'
1-'..... 8.TlE
.J Y
..... &.TIE
~~
;;; 0 3 5 ,
RED
~=
!!!..
o SHIELD' 7.+ISV 7.+15V 7.+1SV "0 '" I I ~ I
~ r----t.
i 1: 4,",!
N -
§ L... II "0
8.E 8£ 8E ... I
~O~ ~;: ~;~V 3;;2~~2 ~ ~ ~.~~
~
,
CD
~ ,
I l.T1Y
2.TIYE F _
~
N
i!5
...._
~
c= INNERMODULATOR CIRCUT
~r
o
I
I
3BP 4> = lINC
12NC
__,
l1.TISTOP
12NC
ll.TISTOP
12NC 17~
,.r1l
CNM-239
,
I
iii' I
, 4.8PE ~
5.BZ
~~~~NTER '-==================--_1-=====================4'"-=__
~ I
, 6BZE 1
3 3E
s,
en
,,
I 1VD
2.VDE ~ c... JlOO2 ~
I
,,
0---0
3'·HMC~LAY
1.+1SV 1.+1SV
o
III 3.MTR+J.. N
T/R CONTROL CIRCUIT 2.+12V o---n 2.+12V 35021 0-2 ~ t5 I .--- CIRCUIT
:3
:3
..,
CD
C
:3
j+"
I
4.MTR- "0
CMC-1205 1Il<..
"0-
1_
4.E
~8 5.-1SV
...
3£
u----{)4£
3.+8V
( ] - - - - { ] 5.-ISV
ID
.,,<..
'1'-
~§
Jl001 l.M+
350426-1 2.M-
I r---
'---
2.+15V
3£
C5C-832
8.1OV D - - - U 6.IOV
7.lOVE [J----{"] 7.IOVE
~
.., 6.+5V D - - - . r J 6.+5V
] CZ10
CD POWER SUPPLY
Z CIRCUIT
CBo-1682
"
m
I
....o ---- -- - --- 'BWI-- --,

~
J4 J5 J3
I-
I
I DRMNG I
,
350209-1 350209-1 B02P-NV M
J8 JI106 Jll12 Jl113 Jll14 Jll05 I PART ,
IL-8P IL-G-5P IL-G-9P IL-G-3P IL-G-3P IL-G-2P ,
I CBP-126 I
,--,--ccic~7s~-------~
I ~
I
...r- "...
~ ~ I, I (OPTION) 1
I '"' I I
VO'T
. I I I ". ,
IDI
5101 GIllll- ~I :' " I
'Ji
c < ::E I I I
WHT '"'I
\0 6 \
,I
I,
I ,
I
RED
"11
1
~ 4 I
/ / V: ,
I I
TB102
+<IV
+<IV
-<IVG
"1Ml
Ul
Ul
VI
VI
WI
WI
1
1 ,, 11TH
11TH
\
BI03 DISPLAY UNT

INNAR ANTENNA COO-1098
Jt LANTENNA
-------------------
:
WI
I
~
PI P2
3 ! m-:
1
I
(J)O® I
I J~] J2
,
?5:J
AIOI I
I
I MODULATOR UNIT NMA-534 :
~.~
fr
A303 I r----------------------------~
I I FILTER CIRCUIT MODULATOR CIRCUIT
." CHT-71 I o
qq' : CFR-161 CPA-209 ~
I
I "z r-
....
N SE I ~
om~=
_...,w.U'om .... coc.o JI J2 -J21U4
I
-Nw4loo"'cn-.lQ;l
~~~i!!=i§i§Ji
Oi1:!: ~ g a a ri ~ g ~
- N
?1;t;::'c
co < ~
Go,) ..
I.SHORT ISHORT 1.SHORT IL-5P I I I I

w""-o~~z< ~17
~
I' m-t-l < < 2.MAGI 2.MAGI 2.MAGI 4 6
~
m
J 1110 ~ J1191
Jll09 3.Xl 3.XI 3Xl ro.
3 ~
~
_. u I IL-G-8P IL-G-lIP IL-4P
4)(2 4X2 4X2 No.2 ~;-- 2 PULSE ,17 I
5TI "" 5TI ~ ~ 5TI _ L No.1 I . J ; - - 1 TRANS I
o ··::.J:I
s
F L
ci'= HIE P' L... HIE ~ L.. HIE ~!::l 3 5 I
--
':5Q
.
:;,
1§h14 "'- 7.+15V 7.+15V
"'0
7.+15V ,,'" I '~ 4?-
,
o
ct.
o:;,
o
iii'
L ....I
I.TIY
2.TIYE F
3.BP ~ ~
" 8.E
9.NC
to.NC
1I.. Ne
8E
9-15V
10.NC
11.TlSTOP
t:::
8.E
9.-15V
10.NC
1I.TISTOP!l:
J2101
3':0~o-:
~; ,
z !l:
W
2 ~ 1.Xt
28 2.X2
t"
~
b
r----f
INNER MODULATOR CIRCUT

--J-
i
1.
-=-
> :
I
I
I
:
~
12 NC _ _ _ 12.NC 12Ne CNM-239
4.BPE "
3
S1,
5Bl
6.BlE
,,- ~~~~NT gR"---------------=------=--_-_-_-_-_-_-_
~L
l_
en_
-_- _-_- -_-=--_-_-=--_-_-_-_-_-_- -_-=--_-_-=-:--__ I
rn ..,"00
o
III 1,V0 3.E l::
~ I I ' III :
:;,
2.VDE ~OL Jloo2 l.UIl1l I
ii.., 3.MTR+j.. N
1.+15V 1.+15V 350210-2 i ~ i I
T/R CONTROL CIRCUIT 2.+12V 2.+12V :::I: (") Z I
c:;,
F
4.MTR- "
CMC-1205 illL
,,-
3.E
4.E
3.+8V
4.E ~ = J1OO1 I.M+ I I.HMC~LAY CIRCUIT I
2.+15V CSC-632 ,
I
~Ed::
1_ 3.E
~8 5-15V 5-t5V ~ § 350428-1 2.M-
~ -n 6.10V 6.tDV -n r------- --- ----
I
'Z" i:
en
7.1OVE
B.+5V
7.lOVE
8.+5V r CZIO
~~
::><: POWER SUPPLY
m
I CIRCUIT
~g I.MCT rJ------r1t.MCT
~
CBO-1682
....o ;1; 2.MBK 2MBK ~ '" §=:
~ ',,-
"
"'L
3.TISTOP~ 3.HSP en
~ --
~§ 4.HTER ~
N
~
N
~
-n
4.E
5.MPS
6.MIER
5.TISTOP
6.C2 J4 J5
350209-1 350209-1
J3
B02P-NV
!lf~ ------- --M- BiO~~I:-!
c.> 7E
JS Jll06 J1112 J1113 J1114 J1105 lD " PART I
~ IL-8P IL-G-5P lL-G-9P IL-G-3P IL-G-3P IL-G-2P 8MPS N
5;~
- I\,)
5;~
-
): ~
E ~ :e CBP-146 I
'
» -Nw4looUl(b-.l(D _ '" w
- '" 9.MIER :!i r- -------.~
jj~i~
_NW"Ulcn-.lCOIC
Z :r: ::t in o "+ "+ en :z
- '" .."
w
"tI'tIj-'tJi'n~~:Z '+ in '+ in -n
p ::j",~~ ~~C) _ <N Go,) ;;l<en :!i~'";;!" - > ;;; ?Z "+ "
;;;'" IT"'I"n1 '-CCK-75I--- 1
~~c; <", '"
< Z
'm < 'm < I (OPTION) I
I
--
;;l " ,-<
":!1 "~
------~ I ,
'hl
'C
~
FllI~
:r YELT
III 0
r1
0 .... I I
GRN.T
1Il
e. I II )( )()O{){){)OI _
WHT
~
lD
~
!J*1I I
\1.
~
BI04 \ ~ ~
RED '-<I
+ !
~I CO
FAN
DISPLAY UNIT PM TBI02 •.. v +48VG

-;;av ':48VCi
ut
iii
vt
Vi
w.
w; lffi<
U1lf
U
U
V
V
t-h
'PI<
BI03 OISPLAY UNIT
INNAR ANTENNA CQC-l 098
~~~
~ ,
S 1 0 1
AG100/l10V T B 1 0 2 4 ...... S
1 4>{ U 1 B L U (T
AG200/220V B LK (T
1 4> v1
TO TB5002 W1 GRN (T) I 7-;)...... 8
ON OO/VO BlU(n
BLU (T)
MUl
BlK (T)
MVl
MW 1 IGRN (T
BlK (T) I _ _ _
2 3 *DR I VE MOTOR
TB103
NKE-l059-71/91 (100/110V, 141.601) CBP-122
+12 V NKE-l 059-72/92 (200/220V. 1 41 •601)CBP-123
C2
8102
r/JZE o10 1 + 0102
r/JZ
r/JA
1000~
lev l"50V2200p
SHIELD
E
,-,
r/JB '-
TB10S NECKHEATER
DE ICING { RED(l) T~ lj> 1
TB104 u. ......... A AA
HEATER ( 1 <,vOW)1
PTI V
AC100V
PTE
LVR
PMS C CK-7 S 0 HEATER CONITROL
E
TXI
PERFORMANCE
TXE MONITOR UNIT
CABLE
ONLY COLOR:2S0V-HV-12/0. 18
COLOR (T) : 2S0V-HV-SO/0. 18
CQC-788
Fig.128 Internal Connection Diagram of Scanner Unit, Type NKE-l 089-719 (l-phase)
3-83
TB102
AC200/220V , i BLU (T)
U1
34> BLK (T) 7 8
TO T8500 Vl
ON UO/VOIWO GRN{T
Wl
BLU (T)
MU 1 CBP-132
_J
I
MV 1
MWl
T B 1 03 RED 2 .: 3
RED
+12V RED B 1 02
C2 WHT
rpZE BLK C 101 Cl02
1000~
+ 2200
rpz YEL 16V ~50V p
rpA BLU
~ELD
E
rpB WHT ,-,
TB105 T H 1 0 1 NECK HEATER

DE ICING{ RED(T)
u -,......-
T B 1 04 HEATER ( 1 V~
0 OW)
V
PTI AC100V
PTE
LV R
C C K- 7 5 0 HEATER CON ITROl
PMS
E
TXI
PERFORMANCE
TXE MONITOR UNIT
CABLE
ONLY COLOR:250V-HV-12/0. 18
COLOR (T) : 250V-HV-50/0. 18
CQC-788
Fig.129 Internal Connection Diagram of Scanner Unit. Type NKE-l089-7/9 (3-phase)

RECEIVER UNIT NRG-154
r--~~~;~~~~rrc~~;~--------------------------~
I I
I I
I I
I IF AMP CIRCUITCAE-344 I-- I
I
f J3001 J3002 MlC
~
I 1l-7P Il-llP S-RX24 I
I ;S;~~~~~ ~~~:O''''''''''''CDq)- II
I l(J~OlZ-'OO §~~jjiL>!!.i!ir;: I--
-C)~~Z -<nlr~-~
T
I i!; :
L I
LcD <b-I cDJ . . ------------..!
I
CHT-71
I
rD <p..,(h
Il
I SE I
I I
"
~
I
I VEL
I
t.> I BlK I
0 I BlU I
SO I
WHT
r+ I
.,
<D
I RED
::l
~ I SHIELD
I I
0 L..
0
::l l.T1Y
::l
<D HIVE F
0
r+
s::l 3BP 9S
4.BPE ~
0
0;'
5BZ
'"
..,e- -- -- -
6.BZE 1'=
.,
lJQ
Dl
Ol_
...
:I:CD
-l
3 l.VD
...,
0 2VDE ~L
~
1.+15V l.+ISV
3.MTR+1. I't,)
CIl T/R CONTROL CIRCUIT 2.+12V 2.+12V
I
0 4.MTR- "
Dl
::l
::l
.,
<D
CMC-1205 3£
4£
3.+8V
4.E '""1'-
"'e- Jl001 I.M+ -al.HMCN.L
_ RELAY CIRCUIT
,.,.
c: C REDT
~§
5.-ISV 5.-ISV 350428-1 2.M- r-- 2.+15V CSC-832
C 8.1OV s.iov - 3.E T8105
::l
it: 7.lOVE HOVE ,--..,
--/t:lEDTI
.< ~~~~!=:I
8.+5V 8.+5V
..,<D POWER SUPPLY
CIRCUIT
I.MCT lMCT C8D-1682 lK
Z 2.MBK 2.MBK ~ L ~ ~ HT. I
~II II
ille-
:
;0:;
m' ,,- ~ 5i
'-~~~
1_
3TISTOP 3HSP '-"-"
I
~i 4.E 4.HTER i II: CZIO
- - I
0 -n
co
.... 5.MPS 5T1STOP
~~~~
, 6.MIER
IL 6.C2 J4 J5 J3 I
1
'"
t 7.E 350209-1 35020!l-1 B02P-NV I
<,
co
~
Jll06
Il-G-5P
-NlW.,.,U1
JI112
1l-G-9P
:-p..)W.U'lCJ) ..... D:lCD
J1113
1l-G-3P
_ N'"
Jll14
- '" .., - o'"

Il-G-3P
Jll05
Il-G-2P 8.MPS '" -
5; i;: I
I
I
..,
I
~~!im
<
~~'=!mh++"'~
,,§?~ ~~~~
'+ tn Ti
-~ >
,Z
"+ iT!
:!
~
.!
'"
'+
~
9.MIER
11 'rr"tl 1----------_1 :
6rrcl
:T
III
Ol - nl ~
- -
~
'i«
m
" "is
~ ill
~
'"~-< ...~ I I
~ 0
:!! - I M I
~.T ~ I DRMNG PART I
11
WIlT WIlT ~ : CBP-122/123:
~ I~ ~ ~ ~ ~ 1~-.....::~_Qg----......J!!!:!:!:----------4--I-~
RED RED
~ ~
SIOI
----------------
DISPLAYUNIT 8201
PM INNARANTENNA COC-1097
~202
~-"-"
...... ...... T8102
.
U
U
v
v
W
W
,
•
DISPLAYUNIT
RECEIVER UNIT NRG-l54
r------------------- i ,
r------------------------------------------,
I INNERRECEIVERUNITCMA-58S-l I
l;umm l [
I
I
I
I e m-:
~ ~Lfil--J
: IF AMP CIRCUITCAE-344 :
~I~~~~
I
: J3001 J3002 MIC , DL
I Il-7P Il-1OP S-RX24 I' NJS6930
I -l'.)w.<.rIO..... _N(,,).c.nd'l~CD(D_
:
I ~~~~~~~ ~~~~a~~~~~ I
I WN-Oillii(Z ,,; m .... i;jr<-< I
I ,
- , J MODULA TOR UNIT NMA-499
r----------------------------'
: FILTERCIRCUIT MODULATOR CIRCUIT
o
I~
CHT-71
, CFR-161 CPA-209-1
I I '"
z
.."
qq.
SE -NWAUlQ)
[naJi:D'~~< <: '+
~ ., - l " , ) w . c n m ..... O > C D - -
~ b b ~ ~ ~ "\ ~ '+ ~ :-'
~tnKl~~~~_~mil
_ NCo)"
~~~i:>
J2104
Il-5P H
~ ~
-' 0 0 ' "
tn tn CIl
o < ~
W
.. ~
W N -
tnmz
% Z <
Jl110 ~ J1191
Jl109
~ Il-G-llP Il-4P o-+---J 2
r
(1)
W
WHT--'
Il-G-SP
F'L
:J ""' ""'
lJ''C
- -
'crY
No.2
TRANS
3 REiJI
-+ 9= 3 5
~
8 J=*f-I ~
IElD ;::;:::
o "
3 J2l01 ~L
~82X2
~ 1.Xl
N
__ I ]
l.TIV 35021 D-2
(1) I L
ao 2.TlYE ~
3.BP '? = ~ ~ ~
:::l
4.BPE !ll ~ ~
o
s: 5.Bl OJ
WL
~ f8I8J
-
1'= • t:*
~
6.BlE
tn-
:1:00
3 'T1
!.YO
a, 2.VDE ~ Jl002
lDIQ)
_ N W
R~
1.+15V 1.+15V
W 3MTR+t ~ 2.+12V 2.+12V
35021D-2 !l::Z!l:
z
T/R CONTROL CIRCUIT v :::I: 0
m I
0>
:::l 4,MTR- " 3,E
~
:::l CMC-1205 ~L 4.E _:;8V
~L
.,
(1)
I.BP 1'= 5.-15V ,,- Jl001 l.M+ lHMC'Ii"'ELAV CIRCUIT

C
:::l 2,BPE
~8
'T1
5.-15V
~§ 350428-1 2M- 2,+15V
3E
CSC-832
TBI05
6,IOV 6.IOY 'T1
ji: 3,Bl
ii: 7.10VE 7.10VE
-<' 4,BlE
~~
8.+5V 8.+5V
"0 5.TIV POWER SUPPLY
(1)
6TIVE CIRCUIT
Z ~9 I.MCT CBD-1682
;l';
m
7.MTR+
2MBK 'P =:
OJ
g
I 8MTR- b
9,MTRE
,,-
ill
~i
1_
L
B=R 3HSP
4HTER
s§
'T1
L....l-
CliO
.....
I
ro.vo 'T1
R..IL 5TISTOP
l1VDE 8.C2 J4 J5 J3
0>
<, 350209-1 350209-1 B02P-NV
<0 7£
J8 Jll06 Jl112 Jl113 Jl114 N _
--
N _ N -
W 8.MPS
I -Nw.UlGl
Il-8P
..... m
IL-G-5P
f',) (oJ ".. Ul _Nw.UlGl
Il-G-9P
..... mlQ
Il-G-3P
- N W
Il-G-3P
- N W - N 9.MIER
:...
)100
i-,)
)100
:...
)100
i-,)
> i: i;:
"0
~~t<!2mg~ili ~~~~m I ~ ~ m h '+ + W ~ '+ m -n '+ in -n '+ h
~n
:T
- m ::c m < nl~~ ~~~:;;! ~
»
z -N z» ~ N Ir - - - - - -----~I
I§ I~ I!
0> (I) - N W
~ 0 OJ 'm < 'm
C€I
CIl
e. nl "
-- ,-<
~ '"
:!1 ~ I
I M
0 RED.T DRIVING PART
I. ITTT'\T'Il ITTT'\T'Il rrrrn

~ WHT
,
I
CBP-172
DISPLAY UNIT
~ 81~1~ I' RED
ffi RED
t= SIOI
W
TBI02
w
PM L ,
INNAR ANTENNA CQC-I097
•
DISPLAY UNIT
c...:»
CO
Ul
,
Jt
------------------~I
r------------------------------------------------~ LCANNER I
I ...J_
RECEIVER UNIT NRG-88 INNER RECENER UNIT CMA-554 I
~
A203 I
I I
I
~~
I
I "
1.~!
IF AMPCIRCUIT CAE-344-1 ~
J30ll1 J3002 MIC MIC

l-J L- TRHPL
,.------J
MAG •
.... I'.)
~~~i!~i5~
IL-7P
'"' .. c.n CD ....,J -1'.)(,,) ..
IL-IOP
U'lCD.....JCX!(Q_
!i: " " :.., :.., i!' i! '+ P

I I r--- ~
A201 I
1\7
"'-C>~ip: ~cn~~~r~_~rn r---
I
I INNER MODULATOR UNIT NMA-1253 I
I I
yt> J <l>J _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ JI r----------------------------~
---- b--- <h< h-
-f-
-~ f- - t FILTER CIRCUIT
I
MODULATOR CIRCUIT
CPA-209 Cl j;'j
CFFH61
"
Z r-
.... ...,
i:Di:Dto~i::
to,) .. (J'I
~ '"
<
.... ...,(,,) .. U1CD
!i: " " :., :., i!' i! '+ P

..... CDCD- .... ...., (,,) .. JI J2 J2104
~g~~
'+ I.SHORT 'SHORT I.SHORT IL-5P HI
~~!!?~~ ~~ ~"'Kl~~r~_~m
"T1 Jl110 J1191
2.MAGI 2.MAGI 2.MAGI
6 ~17
I!ii. Jl109 3.Xl 3.XI 3.Xl
~
IL-G-8P IL-G-l1P B..-.4P 'd"
w
N
4.X2
HI
':'L 6.TIE
~
P" L..
~
4.X2.
5.T1
6.TIE
- -
LJ L..
4.X2
5.T1
6.TIE ~~
No.2
No.1,",
1-2
1
PULSE
TRANS ~17
3 5 I
~§ 7.+15V ili~
5"
..... 7.+15V
.. ~ :
H~
1.+15V
CD ." 8.E 8.E 8.E
3 ~ L c: : I
J2101 r:::
!!!..
ITIY
S.Ne S.-l5V S.-15V
350210-2
-::c zC>'" ..,z !§
C> ' " 1.XI
I
11
oo 10.Ne 10.Ne 10.Ne 2X2 t::: I
2.TlYE F INNER MODULATOR UNIT
:::l
tl.Ne tl.T1STOP IlTiSTOP !i: !i: CNM-236 I
:::l 3.BP 6,-
c.... 12.Ne 12.Ne 12.Ne I
CD 11,..-n]
o 4.BPE ~ I
.....
s: 5.BZ II>
WL I.HMCNT r
.1;:
------------------ -- f--------------------~--~---I
1'=
o
:::l
~.
6.BZE
lVO
"'-
::co>
."
2.+15V
3.E
r:::
t:
1
2.VOE
F
9L 1.+15V 1.+15V
J10ll2 u~ U v W
3 3.MTR+.,.. ~ 350210-2 i:: zC> i::
~ 2.+15V
T/R CONTROLCIRCUIT 2.+12V 2.+12V ::c z
a,
I
4.MTRC ." '"""-- MC"Il"ELAY
3.E 3.+8V l.H CIRCUIT
CMC-1205 f----
~
iL 4.E 4.E iL CSC-632
1'= 5.-15V J10ll1 1M+
~
I.BP 1'- 350428--1 2.M-
'-- 3.E
:::l ~El 5.-'5V !i!§
3 2.BPE
3.BZ
."
6.IOV SIOV ."
U V W
~. 3: 7.1OVE 7.1OVE
4BZE
iii .... '" 8.+5V 6.+5V
~ 5.TlY POWER SUPPLY

"CD CIRCUIT I
6.TlYE !
,=
"- ClIO
(') "'0
::,- 1MCT .MeT CBO-1682
~
CD
.:- 7.MTR+
r II> 2.MBK 2.MBK
1
8.MTR- Cl "'L 3.TISTOP
.,
CD
3HSP ~ ~
~
9.MTRE 1'=
C ~~ 4.E 4.HTER ."
:::l 10VO ."
5.MPS 5.TISTOP TB202
?-" U VO W Ul VI WI
l1.VOE 6.MIER 6.C2 J4 J5 J3
DISPLAY UNIT SUCANNAR UNIT
~
350209-1 350209-1 B02P-NV
- s'" -
J13 7E
;; -
J8 Jll08 Jll12 J1113 Jll14 Jl105
IL-6P '" '"
CD IL-BP IL-G-5P IL-G-9P
- '" .., - "'.., -
IL-G--JP 1L--G--3P IL-G-2P 8.MPS
;;~ ~
-- ~
~
co l.</>Z S.MlER
'+ '"
~ Ul ~
jiii~
Z ... I'.) (,,) ~ p,,)W"Ula~ClOCD
~ ,~ - "
--I 'o'o~'oin~g'z ~::tmh'+'+(nz '+ tn 'n '+ h'1 =-r. 0 2.</>ZE rT"'iTTI
o
w
, ;:l~, ~ _ 0
- '" < Cl~
~ !ij
~~~~C>
,< m ~ ,~
;;;'"
< 3.</> A
+ +
I);
8..... ~ -
0
ill "~ "~ 4.</>B
5.+12V
~ <
Cl
» I( )( S.E
chJ IchJ I I
I I J.J.--l,
INNER TRANSMmER-RECENER
<l>1111<l>1 UNIT CQC-l093
<1)-, <1)-, -r<l> It"b....
D1~~ly I~~I~I~I~I~I~I~I~I~I
TB204
SCANNER
UNIT
~ ~ !< ~ m g ~I
- ;0 (I) m
I
TB203
1} l1~1~111~111~11
SCANNER ~N~N>em~t5
UNIT
RECEIVER UNIT NRG-il8
r--------------------------------------------I
INNER RECEIVER UNIT CMA-588 1 ~NNER
~------------------
I i
I
1
1
1
IF AMP CIRCUIT CAE-344 ~
":\ m-:
~
~~
~I
.... ...,
i:DOJi:D:.....~«
J3001
IL-7P
Co) • U'I g) ..."
J3002
IL-l0P
-l'.)(")"..Ulm...,,CIllIID_
~ b " ~ ~ ~', :.; "+ ~
MIC
S-RX24
PIN
NJS6926 r+ OL
NJS6930
lr 1
MAG
~ I I
~~~~%~~ ~(J)~~~~~~~m 1 1
V>m
rn7 1 MODULATOR UNIT NMA-1252 1
I I
lEJlJ[ .,.,
_________________ JI r----------------------------~
1 FILTERCIRCUIT
1
r CFR-161 I
MODULATORCIRCUIT
1""1----CPA-209-1_
o
" I~
r. ~·t
J1
-N(,,) .. U1m .... CD _ '" w J2104
".. U'I Q) ..."
co ~ Q :: '" w ...
:.; :.;
~~~~~~~~ ~pb ~",
~ ~ i ?l~t." IL-5P
~~~~ - <
ov>v> tn
co < ~
"TI
(,,)N-O~ZZ<
V>m
;I; m
Jl110
e J1191
ciQ' Jll09
:... IL-G-8P IL-G-llP IL-4P No.2 ot----i 2 PULSE 6
'"
'"
:J-. -.
" " - -
. [Y'[ Nol~l TRANS
~c... l-J''L ~~
r
11l
~:::
'" - ~ij
3 5
3 "tl
!lL J2101
oo 1.TIY 350210-2
:J 2.TlYE F
3: Z :i:
';'s
.... ' .... r
:J 3.BP :l:OZ
11l
~ 4.BPE ~
g' 5BI CD
wc...
"tl- I
6.BIE I_
o V>-
:1:'"
iii' -n
~ I I
l.YD _
3 2.vOE bc.... 1+15V n~---{] 1.+15V

J1D02
lUElJ
_ '" w fu fv Iw I
3.MTR+.J., 350210-2 ~ Z ~
~
s, O-----I:l 2+12V
l 'M+
N
T/R CONTROL CIRCUIT 2.+12V :I: 0 Z
I
4.MTR- "tl RELAY
..
~
:J 1.BP
CMC-1205 ~c...
" t l - 4E
Hi
3.E
5.-15V
4.E
O - - - D 5.-15V
"tl_
3.+8V
<Dc...
CD
cJ,8
JIOOl 1.M+
350428-1 2.M-
~MC
3.M-
CIRCUIT
CSC-632
'"
3 2.BPE ."
6.IOV O - - - - [ ] 6.IOV
:1:'"
-n U II w
if 3.BI
4BIE V>
~ 7.10VE
8.+5V
D---D710VE
O---OB.+5V
~ 5.TlY iii
>",
"'-
... POWER SUPPLY
CIRCUIT
r
o(1l 6.TIYE
~9 I.MCT B- I.MCT CBD-166~
r
CliO
r
r., 7.MTR+
8.MTR- o
I CD
<Dc...
1'=
2.MBK
3T1STOP
n---+---a 2.MBK
3HSP ~
~
1'-
c...
§
C 9.MTRE
:J ~~ 4.E 4HTER -n
..
10.VD -n < <
j+" 5.MPS 5.TISTOP c C> c
I1.VDE 6.MIER 6.C2 J4 J5 J3 ~ :E <,
~ Jt3 7.E 35020!H 350209-1 B02P-NV ~ ~

<
C>
+
~ il!
"C
11l
J8 Jll06 J1112 Jl113 J1114 Jl105
IL-6P 6.MPS
N.... ..., _
~ :""" s oc :5 G\
-
- '"nI IL-8P IL-G-5P IL-G-9P IL-G-3P IL-G-3P IL-G-2P :... Nl :... N
s~
--
» » » »
Z
-t 'v'lJ
Co)"O\(SI-..Jm
j-'lJm'-4~Z
....
~~~~m
NCo). U'I
-
J:: '"
Co:l . . U'I
'+ i:n z
2
;;t < ~.... in .... ~< a; ;;! 0
J::
co ~ <D '" -
~
'" w
~
....
+ m:"
NCo:!""
+ 0
N 1.<pI
2 <pIE
9.MIER
rnnl
TB202
c < c <
G>
I
:j ;;~ ~~o .... N W < ,,~ o
- ....
< CD <
tn
'm ~ '! ~ N 3.<pA
+1
~ ~ :E ~
~... I':E-
-
,< '" '"
~
C>
m :!!
ill "
:!! "~ 4.<PB <D <
t
... <D
~ G\ S e'
. o < o c
5.+12V
6.E DISPLAY UNIT $UCANNAA UNIT
~ d}J n W
(J}1 I I I (jr, n~ QO
-.1
TB203
TB204 +
TB201
'"
< INNER TRANSMITTER-RECEIVER UNIT
CQC-l092
SCANNERUNIT SCANNER UNIT
DISPLAY UNIT
NWZ-158
23 I-INCH LCD DISPLAY UNIT
CODE No. 7ZSRDOO02 NCE-7721 RSOIRST PANEL UNIT
.,
/
-,
CCK-906
UXJCONTROL
UNIT
CUC-1218 DISPLAY CONTROL UNIT

I~
i't PGRT [
1T~IT'"
--
P. . . . CIACtITI
\
,. ,
_
.II
II' JIOS JI'~I:
II.......... ..n""UIE I c,P'
10 BASE- T lOP [ ~ 'cP
11 i l 11 11 JI03
1 - E15P
TO EXIT USB 1/2 12P [ ~ --~E ........-
. . . H-lC. . . .l.
p~ -c:I'
I H-l'ZCIllOll' WI MONITOR J203 I. b:
TO~[
_- --
W5 H-7ZCRDI009
Q"
W2 KB-CHDI52K JI02
TEARMlNAL
BOARD !MIT 2P _[
J201
W6 H-7ZCRDI010 ":[ wal1H-~
De_ I
...
_- JIG1
W5 KB-CHDI54FK INT
W3 H-7ZCRD1014« JIOI MONITOR J202 ~ :::1"''':[ ] I
9P
W6 H-7ZCRD0977
TO RADAR PROCESSOR UNIT
CANVF 3P [
":[ ... -op':~11

64P 64P lP
W4 VM0301-VM0303B2M
I I I I
W7 VM0301-VN0303B4M
Jl07 JI06 NCE-7721-RST
OPTION
NQE-3141-2 ISW UNIT
NQA-4172 AIS VF UNIT
JIO' JI02
OPTION TB914
C''!:
CH2 7ZCRD0967
0
-; I CMH-1932 BRIDGE CMJ-462A NSK VF
PI [
2P
» 64P 64P NET UNIT UNIT
TO DISPLAY CONTROL UNIT TB913
z -; 15P
P500 [
3P
!l CDC-1209 RADAR PROCESSOR UNIT
TO MOTHER BOARD TB912
,:
TO MOTHER BOARD CHI
c=[
3:1 TO MOTHER BOARD UNIT !MIT
lJiP
UNIT
I~~~I
:0 J15
"TI
!!ii' en
III
...
I
64P
Jl03
I I
64P
Jl04
I I
Jl
64P
I I
Jl
64P
I
PWR C 2P I
TB911
TB905
-
0: 26P
TO RADAR
PROCESSOR
UNIT
TO TX. 'R)( UNIT [ -
TB4101
TB4201
s I~
III ~ TO ISW t.1/0UT [ c--
(.:> ':!! ~
~
('iY2Y7) s J~ TO
PO~R [
OPTION J16
5" .1 J4
TO AIS I/F
r+ 26P ISW
(II o -<
III
3 z :0z ren
:0 CBD-1661 POWER SUPPLY J7 J8 J5 J6
IJL I I I I I I -co- - TO EXIT RADAR I/O [ TB4401
JACOUT2
0
o '---
AC OUT 2
18P[
J2
r--- [' 64P 64P II 64P 64P PORT c--
:J TO CDC-I209 OPTION TO CMJ-462A JI J6
:::J J3
CD
o
<t,
-r; TO CMH-1932
BRIDGE NET UNIT
NSKVF UNIT SOF 7ZCRD0741*
SOP
TB4501
+ ,...... J9 TO DATA I/O PORT [ r---
0
:J - ~ ~ 3P CANVF
0 -U OUT >-< BATT IN
~ TB4601
iii' W302 >-<
l!!lDI J2
TO EXIT ALARM VO [ r---
W303 v OUT >-< J2
SOP TO
PORT
3P
3 AC OUT I 50P
CQC-1094 MOTHIER BOARD UNIT CQC-l094
.....
0
W301 WOUT >-< 7ZCROO741.
TOGVRO [
TB4701
r---
0 i'-' ~4
2pr TB4801
iii' '- ~ TO LOG [ r---
'C ~5
~ 2P= JI
'< AC IN J3 J3 BP [ r---
~rED
C UIN SOP
50P BIOI
:J 7ZCRD0741.
;:;: ~
WIN
WHT ~1 TO POWER
J8
FAN , , [ ~
FAN
--l ,...... BLU 20{ J4D 20P
SUPPLY 3P
~ -'-
B~"'-'
J9
(II J7 FAN 2 , [
FAN
r-
Z 3P
o JIO 8P SUPPLY J12
Bl02
0 TO PANEL 30P [
I 4351A07335 ALTER
~
N OUT PUT INPUT
en CQD-'D94 TERMINAL BOARD UNIT
-~
(.:>
---
~ I--
f-- AC POWER IN
'--- V
~ ~
V r--
'-'
7WSRD002
23.11NCH LCD DISPLAY UNIT
V\
"'TI
...
qq'
(.,) CCK-906
CJ"I
LCD CONTROL UNIT
~ 7PDRD0177A
3
l» (7PCRD1690B)
~~
oo
::J
::J
(I)
~
o'
[Q]
::J
oQj'
oq
n n n n I
Jl
8P
i
I
ii1
3
o
~
r 7ZCRD0969*
o
o
3:
o
::J
;:::t:
.,o
KB-CHD152K
. CMC-1218
Jl02
s,
9
en
D-Sub9pin
.. CMC-1218
Jl0l
~
l»
'<
C
::J
j+
-I
VM0301-VM0303B2
. CBD-1661
AC DUl2
'<
'C
(I)
Z
o
o I'
I ~
~
N 00
0')
(.,) CQ
AC10 O/230V
1¢/1¢,3¢
• HI VOLTAGE SAVE CIRCUIT
HI VOLTAGE SELCT INTERSWITCH =1A

BLEAKER ~,. UNE FILTER P+12V 3.5A--__
CIRCUIT KEBOAD UNIT=2.5A
L
+
I f- +48V±3V 3. 5 A - - - . SCANNER
X BAND_.2.5A, S BAND_3.0A
VOLTAGE SELCT
CIRCUIT
t
"'Tl
cjti.
MO NITOR
AC1 OO/230V
1¢
~
MONITOR
POWER - - +5.0V
f
r----
MAX15A
(1 OA) -
RADAR SIGNAL PROCCESSIN = MAX 9.3A
CPU CONTROL CIRCUT = MAX 5.4A .
(.,) SeANNER
0') MO TOR t
tlJ POWER I
- ---. MAX lOA

g AC1 OO/230V +3.3V f-- (
SA) -
1 ¢/ 1¢,3¢ RADAR SIGNAL PROCCESSIN = MAX 4.7 A
o" SCANNER
MOTOR POWER NSK UNIT = MAX 1.0A
iii· POWER CON TROL
(Jq
til CIRCUIT t
3
Q.,
o
I ---. +12V 2A-----l.... 1.37A
en
'0
~ t
C
::3
?-.
~ -
,
-12V lA-----l.... O.7A
'0
CD
Z
o
o
I
.Jlo, '-- --.Jr-----FAN ALM POWER CONTROL----------.
N
0')
(.,)
391
Sl~5E I/Sl SETTING TABLE
Sl 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
STEP TYPE ON
~"\"'l'CJ SYNC TYPE OFF
ig~ 36x ON ON
/ 90x OFF ON
RATIO
GYRO 180x ON OFF
SIGNAL 360x OFF OFF
SET REV (~'ii) ON
DIRECTION
NORM (iE'iD OFF
SYNC ON
TYPE 1
CJ?" PULSE OFF
m~ TYPE 2
1 AXIS ON
/ 2 AXIS OFF
LOG 100P/30 x ON ON
SIGNAL 200P/90x OFF ON
PULSE/NM
SET 400P/180 x ON OFF
800P/360 x OFF OFF
S2~5E~/S2 SETTING TABLE
1 2 3 4
GYRO LOG
LOG ALM N/A
SIMULATOR SIMULATOR
S2
5 6 7 8
GYRO ALM
N/A N/A N/A
ON - 5 S. OFF - 0.5 S
Fig.137 List of NSK and LOG Select Switches of

Display Unit, Type NCD-4263
--
~g'l.
..
Setting the speed log switches
1. This radar uses the six types of standard speed log signals listed below
Pulse type:800 pulse /NM, 400 pulses/NM, 200 pulses/NM, or 100pulses/NM
Synchro type :360xlNM, 180XlNM, 90XlNM, or 30XlNM
Set Gyro/Log selection Switch S1 using the S1 setting table.
2. Connect the speed log signal line to, for the pulse type [PULSE] side, or for
the synchro type, the [SYNCRO] side, of terminal block TB4801(Terminal
Board Circuit).
3. S1:Gyro/Log Selection Switch 4. Light-emitting diode CD116(1-axis) and

Set the switch in accordance with CD117(2-axis) are provided to check
the S1 setting table. pulse-type log input signals.
This LED lights if the log signal level is
~
+2V or more(or under a non-connected
iii [
9"'lliIIIIJ
('lIC'l
.. I/) co too llD
, ....•.
:
status of the log signal line ),or it dose
not light if the log signal level +2V or less.
~ ON :
OFF: 1
O} to be lipct:ilied
5102 SETTlNG TABLE

,
."--
~+ 0
'-r~
r I 1 t ....,
I
7
--'-
~ ~-,
S!
D
~
0
-
UI
0 IiiW D
~ 3IlOl 1 I
<> 0
DRC1ION Narmol(NOIll
I
PUl.SE
IT:
..
I
:J
z
1VPE
1 _0
iii
g
- ZAXlll
lOOP
I
0 0
~1l1Gll
I 0
.... PIJlSEINM - 0 I
13fOX I 1
Fig.138 Setting Table of Speed LOG Select Switches of Display Unit, Type NCD-4263
I~ ~
Gyro select swiches (S102. Jl02-Jl06 located on the CMJ-43l)
Gyro compasses Repeater motors S5 setting J102-Jl06
Manufactuer (For refernce only) Excitation voltate 1 2 3 4 5 I 6 I 7 I 8 setting
J! ES 2/11. Synchro motor
~ GLT-100-103/105/106K/l07/1104. INMS 115VAC -; .../
Co) OFF ON ON -y SYNC
CD NJZ-501 (R50l) (TS63N7E13) 60Hz
(36X) Speed log selection
rn
ES llA. GM l1111A121/110/120, Synchro motor
~ MS-2ooo/3000 TSAN60Ell 110VAC
:i"
III PR-222R/226/237/237-L (90X) 60Hz OFF ON OFF SYNC
;t /1*8*/2022/2023/22**.
0- I-'\'-;I';I ? TG-200
iD TOKIMEC GLT 201/202 203. Step motor
~ (JAPAN) MK-14/14T. GA-2001G
~ A~IJ-
MKE-1I14T, Orawing#103590810
a Sperry
MOO-1I2/T,
PR-500/2502/2503/2507/2507L
600 excitation
080X)
70 VOC ON OFF ON STEP
o
o (USA) /3507/4507/5507,
3 SR-130/140,
'l::II
III TG-l00/5000
01
01 ES-16 Step motor
III 35 VDC
::J SR-120/220 GA-2001G
Q.
CMZ-700D Drawing#103590820
C)
ES-140/160 150 excitation ON OFF ON STEP
~ (lBOX)
o PR-26**/6*6*/6*7*. 24 VDC
rn SR-140/160
CD
TG-6000 OFF~
iD
n
r+
rn
C-1A12/3/E,
HOKUSHIN PLATH-55/C,
Synchro motor
YM-14 60VAC
OFF OFF OFF
-, SYNC
!1.
r+
PLATH HKRK-C3 TS-19 60Hz Note: Must be set to ON
n (360X) if the radar picture
::T
CD
01
fliiiJ• • C1JR, C-1JUNIOR, Synchro motor and the [COURSE]
a
ii'
'l::II
YOKOGAWA
(JAPAN)
CMZ-2ooA/3oo.
0-1,
IPS, IPS-2-H2/2B/2B-H2C/5,
PY76-N2
(360X)
100 VAC OFF OFF OFF
indication turn Reverse.
SYNC
KM008, KR-053 50/60Hz
i PLATH NAVIGAT-l.
c
::J
PTll-H2/21121-H2
;+- 1351, Step motor
7-~--:J7?:'" MK-1-7110/20. MKL-l. BZ-2191
~CD
ARMA BROWN
(France)
NOO-4, NB-23-88.
SERlE, sce-iooo
(lBOX) 50 VDC ON OFF ON STEP
Z 111U-JUI, IJlI-Jl, ::>yncnro motor

o 7 :"':'-';1':; ANSCHUTZ-1-6/12/14/Z, NB23-91 50 VAC
9 ANSCHUTZ GM-BH, K8051. (360X)
OFF OFF OFF SYNC
•
N
0)
(Germany) NB23-126, Z0658U
50Hz
Co) 77 .t-:n NAVIGAT 763 331E, Synchro motor

C.PLATH PLATH NAVIGAT-B1m YM14A 50VAC OFF OFF OFF SYNC
(Germany) (360X) 60Hz
* : Numeric number c,-o
c,g
~
-~., ~~\
D1SPLAY1 DISPLAY2
NCD-4263 NCD-4263
TB4201
TB4201
ISWIN/OUT ISWIN/OUT
A."'" 1 'I.Il 1\ VDIN 1

VDlN1 1 ~
-.Ll
1\
\ '
, I
L 2 VDIN 1E
VDlN 1E 2 : I\ BLU 1I II __._. ~-=----+_--::::::=~_I
3 TRiGIN 1
TRlGlN 1 3 I
I
1 I I
1 I
-L 4 TRlGlN 1E
TRiGIN 1E 4 I : YEL I I _._. 5 BPIN 1
BPIN 1 5 ~:1 I
1
:
I
: -r
L-
6 BPIN 1E
BPIN 1E 6 1 I GRN 1 I _ 7 BZIN 1
BZIN 1 7 p-'.- 1 -.1I
1 I
1
I
1I
I
L~"':""-+---:::::::::-;~-~
8 BZIN 1E
I--~=:-:-:---I-;;-i--++ -+'---=~-=~--i--Y--m~-=--+---;-~;;;;-~----,
BZlN 1E 8 1 1 BLU-BLU I 1 __' " 9 MTRlN 1+
MTRIN 1+ 9
n--=-;""
(j BLU WHT
I; I --W 10 MTRlN 1- I
MTRlN 1- 10 I -"r I L 11 1 MTRlN 1E : :

MTRlN 1E 11 f---l :: ORG 1 1 12 PWRIN 1+
-l 1 I
PWRIN 1+ 12 I 1 BLK 1 13 PWRIN 1E
1 I
PWRIN 1E 13 I PNK I I 14 PWROUT 1
1 L I
PWROUT 1 14 I: BRN 1 I 15 PWROUT 1E
PWROUT1E 15 --.Cl I ; 2 I ! --.Cl 16 VDOUT1
VDOUT 1 16 I Vii : ! L 17 VDOUT 1E
VDOUT 1E 17 f-----J : : RED I _ 18 TRiGOUT 1
TRiGOUT 1 18
•
.... I
1
" L -
-r 19 TRiGOUT 1E
TRiGOUT 1E 19 1I
I
I1 PUR I _ 1--_-+_---::===::-_,
20 BPOUT 1
BPOUT 1 20 J ; : : L 21 BPOUT 1E
BPOUT 1E 21 : I WHT I _ 22 BZOUT 1
BZOUT 1 22 . -I I ; : ; L 23 BZOUT 1E
~--=-::-:-=-~--1---:2;;4~
BZOUT 1E 23 r---J
....;- -.1\ I YEL-YEL II I.:::n.
I :
24 MTROUT 1+
MTROUT 1+ I i I I YEL-WHT '\ i 25 MTROUT 1-
MTROUT 1- 25
1-----=--=-=--i---::;6:1f-J
2
~~ --\I /I \:
\ "'L 26 MTORUT 1E
MTORUT 1E ..1 H-2695111153 1r=L
j:; (JRC SUPPLY) I 77T
Fig.140 Tenninal Board Connection Diagram of 2-unit Interswitche system. Type NQE-3141-2
DlSPLAYl D1SPLAY3
NCD-4263 NCD-4263
TS4201 TS4201
1 1'\ lH~dtllb
lOLl VDlN 1 1 VDlN 1 l:l:: 1 VDlN 1 1 VDlN 1

If..-
2 VDlN 1E 2 VDlN 1E BLU 2 VDlN 1E 2 VDlN 1E
BLU ----
T_ 4
3 TRlGlN 1
TRlGlN 1E
3
4
TRIGIN 1
TRIGIN lE
V
YEL
=t 3
4
TRIGIN 1
TRIGIN 1E
3
}-/
TRIGIN 1
TRIGIN 1E
YEL ---- 5 SPIN 1 5
H
SPIN 1 V =t 5 BPIN 1
-L.... 6
GRN -_. 7
SPIN lE
SZIN 1 7
SPIN lE
SZIN 1
GRN
::c:
5
6
SPIN 1
BPIN lE ;-1
7
BPIN lE
BZIN 1
BLU-BLU.=.
Too 8
9
SZIN 1E
MTRlN 1+
H
9
SZIN 1E
MTRlN 1+
V
BLU-BLU____
1/ BLU-WHT 11
7
8
9
BZIN 1
SZIN 1E
MTRlN 1+
H
9
SZIN lE
MTRlN 1+
.,., / BLU-WHT Jl 10 MTRIN 1 10 MTRIN 1- V -t::: 10 MTRIN 1- 10 MTRlN 1-
~ V T, 11 MTRIN lE 11 MTRIN 1E ORG 11 MTRlN 1E 11 MTRIN lE
~ ORG 12 PWRIN 1+ 12 PWRIN 1+ V BLK 12 PWRIN 1+ - 12 PWRIN 1+
-l
V BLK 13 PWRIN lE 13 PWRIN lE V PNK L 13 PWRIN lE 13 PWRIN lE
"3 V PNK 14 PWROUT 1 14 PWROUT 1 V BRN 14 PWROUT 1 14 PWROUT 1
5' BRN 15 PWROUT 1E 15 PWROUT lE V 2 15 A PWROUT lE 15 PWROUT lE
s,
CD
V 2..Ii 16 VDOUT 1 16 VDOUT 1 V "1T"" 16 VDOUT 1 16 VDOUT 1
sa- "L 17 VDOUT 1E 17 VDOUT1E RED L. 17 VDOUT lE 17 VDOUT1E
RED ----
18 TRIGOUT 1 18 TRIGOUT 1 'L 18 TRIGOUT 1
o
o Too 19
PUR --- 20
TRIGOUT 1E
SPOUT 1
19 TRIGOUT 1E
1/
PUR
18
19
-:c
TRIGOUT 1
TRIGOUT 1E *-1 TRIGOUT 1E
''"" -L.... 21
20 SPOUT 1 1/ L 20 SPOUT 1 20 BPOUT 1
"s:~ SPOUT 1E 21 SPOUT lE WHT 21 SPOUT 1E 21 SPOUT lE
'o" V
WHT ==- 22
-L.... 23
SZOUT 1
SZOUT1E
22 SZOUT 1 1/ 22 ::L SZOUT 1 22 SZOUT 1
23 SZOUT lE YEL-YEL ~ 23 BZOUT 1E 23 BZOUT lE
s
lJQ
YEL-YEL =-24 MTROUT 1+ 24 MTROUT 1+ V YEL-WHT 24 IT MTROUT 1+ 24 MTROUT 1+
ill V. YEL WHT 11.
25 MTROUT 1 25 MTROUT 1- V ::;u- 25 MTROUT 1- 25 MTROUT 1-
3
S, --r..
26 MTORUT 1E 26 MTORUT 1E L- 26 MTORUT 1E 26 MTORUT lE
l'
c
'"
;:;: ~dk§~ - ~
1,1 "n.'. __
~ NQE-3141-4
~~:
~i~f·:..:
CCL-304
---41 II;:::
bF':"'~ .. _ _............." " . -
_-..
::r
~ CH-l CH-2 CH-3 CH-4
"
UI
~
If ~~1 2~~ TB913 TB914 ::c .........!-A-~915 2 T~916 TB917 TB918
::c ('t..1- ~I- ::c
.1 .'t....1r1 I
T RED_=H I BlU -......: ( 't... I
~ l--==t I~ I-
f\.:)
r==t
BLU
~ T~
N N
r
0> 0>
~
"C
co
~ r==t
YEL.. ~
'-C
co
-
U1
~ YE~.. r PUR:--:
CO
-
~
"Z ~ r GRN:_~ ~ ......
~
GRN a,.....; 1 '
~"""""n ~ "'..:[
U1 WHT ......
cm U1
c.>
U1
c.>
c.> MLU-B YEL-Y1'~'_ r-n,
I
~ rr 2 :::
~ BLU-W~ YEL-W~ 2
~
......... BLU-WHTr
~ I \[
. '1:. Ll ::0
~
~
J.
o
(Jl ~
ORO o
(Jl (Jl
c:
~ 0 (Jl
c: c: BU< c:
::g ~
PHI<
\l
\l ::g
r
~ \l
\l w
r
,/ tr-='- I _::;;BRN,,- rTI""

~ ~
.::5 - C.Q
~
U1
V
('
"
.
J2 P902 H-7ZCRD0972 P903 J903

1 r- 1
-15V -15V
H-7ZC~OO971 C80-1675 2 2
Jl GND GND
c-----r- I
VIN<
3 3
GND GND
2 2 4 4 CCL-304
YIN- +15V +15V
- ... GND
5 5
GND
6 6
5V 5V
~
...
CH-l CH-2
I I I I CH-3 CH-4
CQD-1973 CQD-1973 I I I I
;--1 ,r-l, ;--1 r-l, .-- .--
~ ~
-I i I -I i
I
-I -I
iI,::I
m,
I -II
' [II I
i,wi
~,
I -I I
I [II , [II
co
[II
, ,I~I I ~I, ~
.....
I , I
01
I, I LJ I I
I LJ
I I
I I'
I I
- - J3
I
- - J3 L....- L....-
~---< ~---<
- -
::I: ::I:
.....I .....I
N N
o
;c
o
;c
r I ... gr ... g
co co
.....
0
.....
0
» »
s:---~ rs:--- . .
CBA-357 CN2 P902 P903 J903
H-7ZC~D0920
CB901 I I
P901 CNI -15V -15V
H-7ZCRDO~19 2 2
UNE LOAD 1 aND aND
AC(L)
r-
3 3
3 aND aND
1- ~
AC(N) 4 4
5 +15V +ISV
Fa 5 5
HO~
C902 C903 D
'" aND
6 6
aND
3 4 T 5V
'"
5V
]~
LF90 I
E
H-7ZC,.RD0921 P904 J904
I~
1
,Ir
I
AC(L)
2
FG 0
3
1 2 AC(N) CCL-304
TB90 1 4
V 5
0
U V TRTP+
TE901 6
l00V-240V 0
7
TRTP-
8
0
9
E
CD901 10
~~u
POWLED
'" I
CH-l
I i
CH-2
I I
CH-3
I I
CH-4
I
r----------------
B901
TB 911 TB 912 TB 913 TB 914
.----- .-----
TB 915 TB 916
.----- .-----
TB 917 TB 918
.----- .-----
l.vDIN 1 VDOUT
I
.:\( ~s P905 J905 2.l/OINE 2 VDOUn:.
3.TRG~ 3 lROOUT
I 1
FANV
• mOINE 4 TRQOl.lTE
s er-our
I 2
FANE
5,BPIN
I,BPINE eapOUTE
I
V ....
3 7.BZIN 1 BZOUT
FA.NPLS 8,BZlNE 8 BlOUTE
I 9MTR .....
10MT~
9MTROUT+
10MTROUT-
IL ________________
11 MTRN.
12,PWR~
11 MTRooTE
'--- '--- '---
13,RWRN.
14.PWROUT
15.PWROUTE
P909 J909 '-- '--- '---
R901 1
2 L--- t.-> t.-> l--- ,
I
I
w
o Cl:)
m
I
TO TO TO TO
W ~
DISPLAY 1 DlSPLAY2 DlSPLAY3 DlSPLAY4
:I:: NCD-4263 NCD-4263 NCD-4263 NCD-4263
.,. I
TB4201 TB4201 TB4201 TB4201
398
END-USER LICENSE AGREEMENT
FOR JMA-9900 SERISE RADAR SOFTWARE
IMPORTANT-READ CAREFULLY: ThisEnd-User License Agreement ("EULA") isa legal agreement between
you (either an individual or single entity) andJapan Radio Co., Ltd. ("JRC") forthe JRC Radarequipment that
indudesMicrosoft software products.
• You haveacquired a device ("DEVICE") that indudessoftware licensed by JRC from Microsoft. Licensing
Inc. or its affiliates ("MS"). Those installed software products of MS origin, as well as associated media,
printed materials, and "online" or electronic documentation ("SOFTWARE") are protected by intemational
intellectual property laws and treaties. The SOFTWARE is licensed, notsold. All rights reserved.
• If you do not agree to this EULA, do not use the DEVICE or copy the SOFTWARE instead, promptly
contact JRC for instructions on retum of the unused device(s) for a refund. Any use of the SOFTWARE
induding but not limited to use on the DEVICE, will constitute your agreement to this EULA(or ratification
of any previous consent).
• Grant of SOFTWARE license. This EULA grantsyouthe following license:
You may use the SOFTWARE only on the DEVICE.
Not Fault Tolerant. The SOFTWARE is notfaulttolerant. JRC hasindependently determined howto
use the SOFTWARE in the DEVICE, and MS has relied upon JRC to conduct sufficient testing to
determine thatSOFTWARE is suit ablefor suchuse.
No warranties for the SOFTWARE the SOFTWARE is provided "ASIS" and with all faults. Theentire
risk as to satisfactory quality, performance, accuracy, and effort (induding lack of negligence) is with
you. Alsothereis no warranty against interference with yourenjoyment ofthe SOFTWARE or against
infringement. If you have received any warranties regarding the DEVICE or the SOFTWARE, those
warranties do not originate from, arenot binding on, MS.
Note on Java Support. The SOFTWARE may contain support for programs written in Java. Java
technology is not fault tolerant and is not designed, manufactured, or intended for use or resale as
online control equipment in hazardous environments requiring fail-safe performance, such as in the
operation of nudear facilities, aircraft navigation or communication systems, air traffic control, direct
lifesupport machines, or weapons systems, inwhich thefailure ofJava technology could lead directly
to death, personal injury, or severe physical or environmental damage. Sun Microsystems, Inc, has
contractually obligated MS to make this disdaimer.
No Liability for Certain Damages. Except as prohibited by law, MS shall have no liability for any
indirect, special, consequential or incidental damages arising from or in connection with the use or
performance of the SOFTWARE. This limitation shall applyeven if any remedy fails of its essential
purpose. In no event shall MS be liable for any amount in excess of U.S. two hundred fifty dollars
(U.S.$250.00).
• Limitations on Reveres Engineering, Recompilation, and Disassembly. You may not reverse engineer
recompile, or disassemble the SOFTWARE, except and only to the extent that such activity is
expressly permitted by applicable law not withstanding this limitation.
SOFTWARE Transfer Allowed ButWith Restrictions. You may permanently transfer rights under this
EULAonly as partof permanent sale or transfer of the Device, and onlyif the recipient agrees to this
EULA. If the SOFTWARE is an upgrade, any transfer must also indude all prior versions of the
SOFTWAER
• Export Restrictions. You acknowledge that SOFTWARE is of US-origin. You agreeto comply with all
applicable international and national laws that applyto the SOFTWARE, induding the U.S. Export
Administration Regulations, as well as end-user, end-use and country destination restrictions issued
by U.S. and other governments. For additional information on exporting the SOFTWARE, see
http://www.microsoft.comlexporting/.

Me-18 Marine Radar Equipment

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Me-18 Marine Radar Equipment

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

..

! Cautions for high volta9i]

(3) Call a physician or ambulance immediately or ask someone to call a doctor.

(5) a .Examine the victim's pulse ~

'* When pulse is beating but breathing has stopped

Method of mouth-to-mouth respiration by raising head

® (2) Cover his mouth as widely as

*When both pulse and breathing have stopped

• Before operating the equipment, be sure to read this instruction manual

This indication is shown where any person is possibility to be in

Examples of Pictorial Indication

The 0 make represents prohibition.

<Cautions to be Used during Operation>

(S) Since the scanner radiator rotates, do not approach it.

o Install the scanner at any place higher than any person.

o When approaching the scanner for maintenance or inspection, set

Scanner Unit Type NKE·1079 (12 Feet)

Transmitter-receiver Unit Type NTG·3037A

Scanner Unit Type NKE-1089-7 (7 Feet)

Scanner Unit Type NKE-1089-9 (9 Feet)

Transmitter-receiver Unit Type NTG-3028

Monitor Unit Type NWZ·158T (Desktop Type) (Option)

Control Unit Type NDC·1279T (Desktop Type) (Option)

Keyboard Unit Type NCE·7721T (Desktop Type) (Option)

Cautions to be Used during Operation vii

1. GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION

2. NAME AND FUNCTION OF CONTROL PANEL

• Display Variable Range Markers [VRM1NRM2] 3-59

4. MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING

• Setting Motion Display Mode [TM/RM] 5-7

• Gate Size 5-32

6. TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES ON DISPLAY

8.2 TROUBLESHOOTING 8-17

8.6 SEITING 8-48

Fig.101 Block Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9933-5A andJMA-9923-7XN9XA

Bering display mode as scanned clockwise.

BCR (Bow Cross Range): HL (Heading Line):

BCT (Bow Cross Time): H UP (Head-Up):

BRG (Bearing): top center of the radar display.

The closest point of approach from own ship, Inter Switch(ISW):

of he radar display. MMSI:

Distance covered solely due to current, tidal MARK:

EBL (Electronic Bearing Line): NM (Nautical Mile):

Arbitrary point is EBL at the center. N UP (North-Up)

Stabilization relative to the ground. the radar display.

GPS (Global Positioning System): OWN TRACK:

determined by the signals from GPS satellites

1.1 FUNCTION 1·1

[ I ] First Stage : Target Detection from Radar Information

[ n] Second Stage : Target Tracking

[m] Third Stage: Judgment of Existence of Ship in Danger of Collision

Key Arrangement for Higher Operability

Advanced Technology Based ARPA Functions Provided as Standard

Improved Day/Night Mode

• TRAILS (Other ship's track display)

Self-diagnostic Program Incorporated

Easy InterSwitch Operation (Option)

By additionally installing an InterSwitch PC board, up to 3-units of the JMA-9900 series

Radar Configuration and Ship's Mains

JMA-9933-SA NKE-1079 (*) NTG·3037A

4. The name plates for the radar components indicate as follows:

Scanner Unit: SCANNER UNIT

Fig.1.2 EXTRIOR DRAWING OF SCANNER UNIT, TYPE NKE-1075A

Fig.1.3 EXTRIOR DRAWING OF SCANNER UNIT, TYPE NKE-1089-7

CD 2000 3000m, &8